Operation Manuals 2 MP161

Operating Instructions
Facsimile Reference
1 Transmission
2 Send Settings
3 Reception
4 Changing/Confirming Communication Information
5 Fax via Computer
6 Appendix
Read this manual carefully before you use this machine and keep it handy for future reference. For safe and correct use, be sure to read the
Safety Information in "About This Machine" before using the machine.
Introduction
This manual contains detailed instructions and notes on the operation and use of this machine. For your
safety and benefit, read this manual carefully before using the machine. Keep this manual in a handy
place for quick reference.
Important
Contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice. In no event will the company be li-
able for direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages as a result of handling or oper-
ating the machine.
Notes:
Some illustrations in this manual might be slightly different from the machine.
Certain options might not be available in some countries. For details, please contact your local dealer.
Caution:
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual
might result in hazardous radiation exposure.
Two kinds of size notation are employed in this manual. With this machine refer to the inch version.
Manuals for This Machine
Refer to the manuals that are relevant to what you want to do with the machine.
Important
❒ Media differ according to manual.
❒ The printed and electronic versions of a manual have the same contents.
❒ Adobe Acrobat Reader/Adobe Reader must be installed in order to view the
manuals as PDF files.
❒ Depending on which country you are in, there may also be html manuals. To
view these manuals, a Web browser must be installed.
❖ About This Machine

Be sure to read the Safety Information in this manual before using the machine.
This manual provides an introduction to the functions of the machine. It also
explains the control panel, preparation procedures for using the machine,
how to enter text, and how to install the CD-ROMs provided.
❖ General Settings Guide

Explains User Tools settings, and Address Book procedures such as register-
ing fax numbers, e-mail addresses, and user codes. Also refer to this manual
for explanations on how to connect the machine.
❖ Troubleshooting
Provides a guide to solving common problems, and explains how to replace
paper, toner, and other consumables.
❖ Security Reference
This manual is for administrators of the machine. It explains security func-
tions that the administrators can use to protect data from being tampered
with, or prevent the machine from unauthorized use.
Also refer to this manual for the procedures for registering administrators, as
well as setting user and administrator authentication.
❖ Copy Reference
Explains Copier functions and operations. Also refer to this manual for expla-
nations on how to place originals.
❖ Facsimile Reference
Explains Facsimile functions and operations.
❖ Printer Reference
Explains Printer functions and operations.
❖ Scanner Reference
Explains Scanner functions and operations.
i
❖ Network Guide
Explains how to configure and operate the machine in a network environ-
ment, and use the software provided.
This manual covers all models, and includes descriptions of functions and
settings that might not be available on this machine. Images, illustrations, and
information about operating systems that are supported might also differ
slightly from those of this machine.
❖ Other manuals
• PostScript3 Supplement
• UNIX Supplement
• Manuals for DeskTopBinder Lite
• DeskTopBinder Lite Setup Guide
• DeskTopBinder Introduction Guide
• Auto Document Link Guide
Note
❒ Manuals provided are specific to machine types.
❒ For “UNIX Supplement”, please visit our Web site or consult an authorized
dealer.
❒ “PostScript3 Supplement” and “UNIX Supplement” include descriptions of
functions and settings that might not be available on this machine.
❒ The following software products are referred to using general names:
Product name General name
DeskTopBinder Lite and DeskTopBinder Professional *1 DeskTopBinder
*1
Optional
ii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Manuals for This Machine ......................................................................................i
NOTICE ...................................................................................................................1
Important Safety Instructions ...............................................................................4
Caution.......................................................................................................................4
How to Read This Manual .....................................................................................5
Symbols .....................................................................................................................5
Name of Major Item....................................................................................................5
Names of Major Functions .........................................................................................5
Reading the Display...............................................................................................6
Reading the Display Panel and Using Keys...............................................................7
Function List ..........................................................................................................9
1. Transmission
Transmission Modes ...........................................................................................13
Selecting Type of Transmission ...............................................................................14
Memory Transmission..............................................................................................15
Sending multiple originals using the exposure glass (Memory Transmission) ......18
Parallel Memory Transmission ..............................................................................19
Automatic Redial ...................................................................................................19
Dual Access...........................................................................................................20
Simultaneous Broadcast........................................................................................20
If memory runs out while storing an original ..........................................................21
ECM (Error Correction Mode)................................................................................21
Immediate Transmission ..........................................................................................21
Sending multiple originals using the exposure glass (Immediate Transmission) ...23
IP-Fax Functions ..................................................................................................24
Terminology .............................................................................................................26
Notes on Using IP-Fax .............................................................................................27
Functions Not Available for IP-Fax Transmission ....................................................27
Internet Fax Functions ........................................................................................28
Notes on Using Internet Fax ....................................................................................30
Functions Not Available for E-mail Transmission.....................................................31
Functions Not Available for E-mail Reception..........................................................31
E-mail Subject ..........................................................................................................31
T.37 Full Mode .........................................................................................................32
Placing Originals..................................................................................................33
Acceptable Original Sizes ........................................................................................35
Paper Size and Scanned Area.................................................................................35
Detecting Blank Sheet..............................................................................................36
Scan Settings .......................................................................................................38
Original Type............................................................................................................38
JBIG Transmission ................................................................................................39
Resolution ................................................................................................................39
Image Density (Contrast) .........................................................................................40
Mixing Scan Settings for a Multiple Page Original ...................................................41
Specifying a Destination .....................................................................................42
Sending Over a Fax Line .........................................................................................42
Entering a pause ...................................................................................................43
iii
Entering a tone ......................................................................................................43
Sending by IP-Fax....................................................................................................45
Regarding IP-Fax destinations ..............................................................................47
Sending to an E-mail Address..................................................................................48
Bypassing the SMTP server ..................................................................................51
Using the Quick Dial Keys........................................................................................53
Specifying a destination using the Quick Dial key .................................................53
Specifying a group of destinations using the Quick Dial key .................................54
Checking the Specified Destination .........................................................................56
Redial .......................................................................................................................57
Programming Destinations in the Address Book .............................................59
Programming Destinations from Check Destination Screen ....................................60
Programming Destinations from Redial Screen .......................................................61
Searching for a Destination in the Address Book ............................................62
Search by Name ......................................................................................................63
Search by Destination List .......................................................................................65
Search by Registration Number ...............................................................................66
Search by Fax Number ............................................................................................68
Search by E-mail Address........................................................................................70
Search by IP-Fax Destination ..................................................................................72
Search by LDAP Server ...........................................................................................74
On Hook Dial ........................................................................................................77
Manual Dial ...........................................................................................................79
Memory Storage Report ......................................................................................80
Canceling a Transmission ..................................................................................81
Before the Original Is Scanned ................................................................................81
While the Original Is Being Scanned........................................................................81
While the Original Is Being Transmitted...................................................................82
Before the Transmission Is Started..........................................................................83
2. Send Settings
Sending at a Specific Time (Send Later) ...........................................................85
Sender Settings....................................................................................................87
PIN Code Transmission ...........................................................................................90
E-mail Options......................................................................................................92
Entering the Subject.................................................................................................92
Requesting a Reception Notice................................................................................94
Fax Header Print ..................................................................................................96
Label Insertion .....................................................................................................98
Setting SUB Codes for Transmission .............................................................. 100
Setting a Password ................................................................................................102
Setting SEP Codes for Reception .................................................................... 103
Entering a Password ..............................................................................................105
SEP Code RX Reserve Report ..............................................................................105
SEP Code RX Result Report .................................................................................106
Two-Sided Transmission (Double-Sided Transmission) ............................... 107
3. Reception
Types of Reception............................................................................................ 109
iv Immediate Reception .............................................................................................109
Memory Reception .................................................................................................110
Substitute Reception ..............................................................................................111
Receiving documents unconditionally .................................................................111
Receiving documents according to parameter-specified settings .......................112
Reception Modes ............................................................................................... 113
Auto Switch ............................................................................................................113
Manual Reception ..................................................................................................113
Auto Reception.......................................................................................................114
Switching the Reception Mode...............................................................................114
Receiving Internet Fax Documents ..................................................................115
Auto E-mail Reception ...........................................................................................115
Manual E-mail Reception .......................................................................................116
Received Images ...................................................................................................116
Reception Functions ......................................................................................... 118
Forwarding Received Documents ..........................................................................118
SMTP Reception Using Internet Fax......................................................................119
Routing e-mail received via SMTP ......................................................................120
JBIG Reception ......................................................................................................121
Auto Fax Reception Power-Up...............................................................................122
Printing Options.................................................................................................123
Print Completion Beep ...........................................................................................123
Checkered Mark.....................................................................................................123
Center Mark ...........................................................................................................124
Reception Time ......................................................................................................124
Page Separation and Length Reduction ................................................................125
TSI Print (Transmitting Subscriber Identification Print) ..........................................125
If There Is No Paper of the Correct Size ................................................................126
Setting priority trays.............................................................................................126
Just size printing..................................................................................................127
4. Changing/Confirming Communication Information

Printing a List of Files in Memory (Print TX Standby File List) ..................... 129
Printing a File from Memory .............................................................................131
Checking the Transmission Result (TX File Status)....................................... 133
Confirming on Display ............................................................................................133
Confirming by Report .............................................................................................134
Confirming by E-mail..............................................................................................135
Confirming by Report and E-mail ...........................................................................135
Communication Result Report (Memory Transmission) ........................................136
Immediate TX Result Report (Immediate Transmission) .......................................137
Communication Failure Report ..............................................................................138
Checking the Reception Result (RX File Status) ............................................139
Confirming on Display ............................................................................................139
Confirming by Report .............................................................................................140
Journal.................................................................................................................140
Printing the Journal ........................................................................................... 141
Journal ...................................................................................................................142
Transmitting Journal by E-mail...............................................................................144
Journal by e-mail .................................................................................................144
Printing a File Received with Memory Lock .................................................... 145
v
5. Fax via Computer
Sending Fax Documents from Computers ......................................................147
Before Use .............................................................................................................148
Using the Software.................................................................................................148
LAN-Fax Driver....................................................................................................149
Address Book ......................................................................................................149
LAN-Fax Cover Sheet Editor ...............................................................................150
Auto Run program ...............................................................................................150
Installing Individual Applications ............................................................................151
Setting LAN-Fax Driver Properties.........................................................................152
Setting print properties ........................................................................................152
Making settings for option configuration ..............................................................153
Basic Transmission ................................................................................................154
Specifying a destination using a destination list ..................................................155
Specifying a destination using Address Book......................................................155
Specifying a destination by directly entering a fax number,
Internet Fax destination, or IP-Fax destination..................................................156
Specifying Options .................................................................................................157
To send a fax document at a specific time ..........................................................157
To print a sender stamp.......................................................................................158
To attach a cover sheet .......................................................................................158
To display preview...............................................................................................158
Saving as files .....................................................................................................158
Checking Transmission Using LAN-Fax Driver......................................................159
Confirming Transmission Results by E-mail ..........................................................160
LAN-Fax Result Report ..........................................................................................161
Printing and Saving ................................................................................................161
Editing Address Book.............................................................................................162
Programming new destinations ...........................................................................162
Editing programmed destinations ........................................................................163
Deleting programmed destinations......................................................................164
Using the Machine's Address Book Data in the Destination List of the LAN-Fax....164
Editing Fax Cover Sheets ......................................................................................165
Creating a cover sheet ........................................................................................165
Attaching a created cover sheet ..........................................................................166
Managing Facsimile Functions Using SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin ..................167
LAN-Fax Operation Messages...............................................................................167
Programming Destination Information from Web Browser ........................... 168
To Edit Machine Properties Already Programmed.................................................168
To Add New Receiver ............................................................................................169
6. Appendix
Programming Frequently Used Functions to User Function Keys ............... 171
Optional Equipment........................................................................................... 172
Handset..................................................................................................................172
Specifications..................................................................................................... 173
Specifications Required for the Internet Fax Destination Machines.......................175
Maximum Values................................................................................................176
INDEX....................................................................................................... 177
vi
NOTICE
❖ USA
❖ FCC Requirements
A This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and require-
ments adopted by the ACTA. On the cover of this equipment is a label
that contains, among other information, a product identifier in the for-
mat US:AAAEQ##TXXXXX. If requested, this number must be provid-
ed to the telephone company.
B This equipment uses the RJ11C USOC jack.
C A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring
and telephone network must comply with the applicable FCC Part 68
rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A compliant telephone
cord and modular plug is provided with this product. It is designed to
be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant. See in-
stallation instructions for detail.
D The REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be con-
nected to a telephone line. Excessive RENs on a telephone line may re-
sult in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most
but not all areas, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be cer-
tain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line, as deter-
mined by the total RENs, contact the local telephone company. The REN
for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format
US:AAAEQ##TXXXXX. The digits represented by ## are the REN with-
out a decimal point (e.g., 03 is a REN of 0.3).
E If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone
company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of
service may be required. But if advance notice is not practical, the tele-
phone company will notify the customer as soon as possible. Also, you
will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you be-
lieve it is necessary.
F The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment,
operations or procedures that could affect the operation of the equip-
ment. If this happens the telephone company will provide advance no-
tice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain
uninterrupted service.
G If trouble is experienced with this equipment, for repair or warranty in-
formation, please contact RICOH CORP. CUSTOMER SUPPORT DEPT.
at 1-800-FASTFIX. If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone
network, the telephone company may request that you disconnect the
equipment until the problem is resolved.
H In the event of operation problems (document jam, copy jam, commu-
nication error indication), refer to the solving problems section in this
manual.
1
I Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the
state public utility commission, public service commission or corpora-
tion commission for information.
J If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the
telephone line, ensure the installation of this equipment does not dis-
able your alarm equipment. If you have questions about what will dis-
able alarm equipment, consult your telephone company or a qualified
installer.
❖ WHEN PROGRAMMING EMERGENCY NUMBERS AND/OR MAKING TEST CALLS

TO EMERGENCY NUMBERS:
A Remain on the line and briefly explain to the dispatcher the reason for
the call before hanging up.
B Perform such activities in the off-peak hours, such as early morning
hours or late evenings.
❖ CANADA
This product meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications.
The Ringer Equivalence Number is an indication of the maximum number of
devices allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on
an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the re-
quirement that the sum of the RENs of all the devices does not exceed five.
❖ Note to users in the United States of America
❖ Note:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits
are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interfer-
ence in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can
radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance
with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communi-
cations. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in
a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference
to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the
equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interfer-
ence by one more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to
which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
❖ Caution:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible
for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
2
❖ Notice about the Telephone Consumer Protection Act (Valid in USA only)
The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any
person to use a computer or other electronic device, including FAX ma-
chines, to send any message unless such message clearly contains in a mar-
gin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the
transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identification of the busi-
ness or other entity, or other individual sending the message and the tele-
phone number of the sending machine or such business, other entity, or
individual. (The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or
any other number for which charges exceed local or long-distance trans-
mission charges.)
In order to program this information into your FAX machine, you should
complete the following steps: Follow the FAX HEADER programming
procedure in the Programming chapter of the operating instructions to en-
ter the business identification and telephone number of the terminal or
business. This information is transmitted with your document by the FAX
HEADER feature. In addition to the information, be sure to program the
date and time into your machine.
❖ Note to users in Canada
❖ Note:
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
❖ Remarque concernant les utilisateurs au Canada
❖ Avertissement:
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003
du Canada.
3
Important Safety Instructions
Caution
When using your telephone equipment, basic safety precautions should always
be followed to reduce the risk of fire, electric shock and injury to persons, includ-
ing the following:
• Do not use this product near water, for example, near a bath tub, wash bowl,
kitchen sink or laundry tub, in a wet basement or near a swimming pool.
• Avoid using a telephone during an electrical storm. There may be a remote
risk of electric shock from lightning.
• Do not use a telephone in the vicinity of a gas leak to report the leak.
• Use only the power cord and batteries indicated in this manual. Do not dis-
pose of batteries in a fire. They may explode. Check with local codes for pos-
sible special disposal instructions.
Save these instructions.
IMPORTANTES MESURES DE SÉCURITÉ

Certalnes mesures de sécurité doivent être prises pendant l’utilisation de matéri-
al téléphonique afin de réduire les risques d’incendle, de choc électrique et de
blessures. En voici quelquesunes:
• Ne pas utiliser l’appareil près de l’eau, p.ex., près d’une balgnoire, d’un lava-
bo, d’un évier de cuisine, d’un bac à laver, dans un sous-sol humide ou près
d’une piscine.
• Éviter d’utiliser le téléphone (sauf s’il s’agit d’un apparell sans fil) pendant un
orage électrique. Ceci peut présenter un risque de choc électrique causé par la
foudre.
• Ne pas utiliser l’appareil téléphonique pour signaler une fulte de gaz s’il est
situé près de la fuite.
• Utiliser seulement le cordon d’alimentation et le type de piles indiqués dans
ce manual. Ne pas jeter les piles dans le feu: elles peuvent exploser. Se con-
former aux ègrlements pertinents quant à l’élimination des piles.
Conserver ces instructions.
4
How to Read This Manual
Symbols
This manual uses the following symbols:
Indicates important safety notes.

Ignoring these notes could result in serious injury or death. Be sure to read these
notes. They can be found in the “Safety Information” section of About This Machine.

Ignoring these notes could result in moderate or minor injury, or damage to the
machine or to property. Be sure to read these notes. They can be found in the
“Safety Information” section of About This Machine.
Indicates points to pay attention to when using the machine, and explanations
of likely causes of paper misfeeds, damage to originals, or loss of data. Be sure
to read these explanations.
Indicates supplementary explanations of the machine's functions, and instruc-

tions on resolving user errors.
This symbol is located at the end of sections. It indicates where you can find fur-
ther relevant information.
[]
Indicates the names of keys that appear on the machine's display panel.
{}
Indicates the names of keys on the machine's control panel.
Name of Major Item

Major item of this machine is referred to as follows in this manual:
• Auto Document Feeder capable of scanning both sides of a sheet → ARDF
Names of Major Functions

This machine's major functions are referred to in this manual as follows:
• Internet Fax (by specifying an e-mail address) → Internet Fax
• Internet Fax (by specifying an IPv4 address) → IP-Fax
5
Reading the Display
This section explains how to use the keys on the control panel and screen items.
The display guides you through operations, shows messages, machine status,
and destinations registered in the destination lists.
If you press the {Facsimile} or {Clear Modes} key during operation, the standby
screen appears.
Press the {OK} key to complete the settings.
Press the {Escape} key to return to the previous screen.
Note
❒ This machine automatically returns to standby mode if you do not use the
machine for a certain period of time. You can select the period using the Fac-
simile Auto Reset Timer in System Settings.
❒ To return to the standby screen manually, do one of the following:
• If you have placed the original in the optional ARDF and have not pressed
the {Start} key, remove the original.
• If you have not placed an original, press the {Clear Modes} key.
• If you are in User Tools mode, press the {User Tools/Counter} key.
Reference
“System Settings”, General Settings Guide
“Fax Features”, General Settings Guide
“Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions”, Gener-
al Settings Guide
6
Reading the Display Panel and Using Keys
This section explains screen items and their corresponding keys.
ARX045S
1. Selection keys 2. {Escape} key

Correspond to items at the bottom line on Press to cancel an operation or return to
the display. the previous display.
Example: The standby display 3. {OK} key
• When the instruction “Press [ ]” Press this to set numeric values, make
appears in this manual, press the left settings, or select an entered item.
selection key.
• When the instruction “Press [Tone]” 4. Scroll keys
appears in this manual, press the mid- Press to move the cursor to each direction
dle selection key. one by one.
• When the instruction “Press [TX Mode]” When {U}, {T}, {V} or {W} appears in
appears in this manual, press the right this manual, press the scroll key of the
selection key. same direction.
7
ALT009S
1. Machine status and message 4. Switches the destination between

fax number, e-mail address and IP-
2. Destination entry Fax destination.
3. Selection keys
5. Selectable items
Note
❒ The display will differ depending on installed optional units.
❒ You can change Internet Fax setting under E-mail Settings in the Fax Features
menu.
❒ You can change IP-Fax settings under IP-Fax Settings in the Fax Features
menu.
Reference
p.13 “Transmission Modes”
p.53 “Specifying a destination using the Quick Dial key”
p.62 “Searching for a Destination in the Address Book”
al Settings Guide
8
Function List
This section explains various items that can be specified in the Fax Features
menu.
Click the {User Tools/Counter} key to display the Fax Features menu. For details
about the settings, see “Fax Features”, General Settings Guide.
❖ General Settings/Adjust
Function name Description
Adjust Sound Volume Adjust the sound volume during On Hook
Mode and Immediate Transmission.
Program Fax Information Register the sender details that appear on the
recipient's fax machine and faxed document.
On Hook Release Time Use this function to specify a time to cancel
On Hook mode after you transmit using On
Hook dialing.
Set User Function Key Frequently used functions programmed as
User Function keys are shown on the menu
immediately after the power is turned on.
❖ Reception Settings
Switch Reception Mode Specify the method for receiving fax messages.
RX Mode Auto Switch Time Specify the number of rings with the Auto
Switch Time. In Auto Select Mode, the ma-
chine rings a number of times to give you the
chance to pick up the handset before taking
the call automatically.
Authorized Reception Specify whether or not unwanted fax mes-
sages are to be screened out.
Checkered Mark Specify whether or not a checkered mark is
to be printed on the first page of received fax
documents.
Center Mark Specify whether or not a centre mark is to be
printed halfway down the left side and at the
top centre of each page received.
Print Reception Time Specify whether or not received date and
time are to be printed at the bottom of re-
ceived fax messages.
9
❖ E-mail Settings
Internet Fax Settings You can select to display or not.
When you want to send an Internet Fax, set
On to display the icon.
Maximum E-mail Size Use this setting to limit the size of sent e-
mail, so that destinations that refuse e-mail
over a certain size can still receive your e-
mail. When this function is set to on, you
cannot send e-mail that is larger than the
specified limit.
SMTP RX File Delivery This function is available on systems that al-
low routing of e-mail received via SMTP.
❖ IP-Fax Settings
Enable H.323 Specify whether or not H.323 is used for IP-
Fax transmission.
Enable SIP Specify whether or not SIP is used for IP-Fax
transmission.
H.323 Settings Set the IPv4 address or host name of gate
keeper, and alias telephone number.
SIP Settings Set the SIP server's IPv4 address and SIP user
name.
Gateway Settings Register, change, or delete the gateway used
for transmission to IP-Fax. Register to use the
gateway without using the gatekeeper/SIP
server.
10
❖ Administrator Tools
Print Journal Prints a Journal. Up to 50 of the latest results
of transmission/delivery results can be
checked on this machine.
Print TX Standby File List Use this function to print the transmission
standby file list.
Communication Page Count Checks the transmission and reception, and
totals on the display.
Memory Lock When you switch Memory Lock on, received
documents are stored in memory and not
printed automatically.
Forwarding Specify whether or not received fax messages
are to be forwarded to a programmed receiver.
Folder TX Result Report When a folder is included in the forwarding
destination or the forwarding destination by
special sender, the specified destination will
be notified of the results of forwarding.
Parameter Setting Parameter Setting allow you to customize
various settings to suit your needs. To
change function settings, set the Parameter
Switches.
Program Special Sender Program/Change/Delete Special Senders,
perform initial setup, and print the Special
Sender List. You can set functions for each
sender if Special Senders are preprogrammed.
Program Memory Lock ID Program a Memory Lock ID to be entered be-
fore printing documents when the Memory
Lock function is activated.
Select Dial/Push Phone Use this function to select a line type.
G3 Analog Line You need to make the following settings for
the G3 Analog Line before you connect the
machine to a standard G3 analog line.
RDS On/Off If your machine has a problem, a service rep-
resentative can perform various diagnostic
tasks over the telephone line from the service
station to try to find out what is wrong with
your machine.
Menu Protect Using Menu Protect, you can prevent unau-
thenticated users from changing the user
tools.
Reference
11
12
1. Transmission
This section explains basic transmission operations such as specifying a trans-

mission mode or a destination.
Transmission Modes
There are two types of transmission:
• Memory Transmission
• Immediate Transmission
Important
❒ It is recommended that you call the receivers and confirm with them when
sending important documents.
❖ Memory Transmission
Transmission starts automatically after the original is stored in memory. This
is convenient when you are in a hurry and want to take the document away
with you. You can also send the same original to several destinations.
❖ Immediate Transmission
Immediately dials the destination number, and while scanning the original,
sends it. It is very convenient when you want to send an original quickly or
when you want to check the destination you are sending to. When using this
type of transmission, the original is not stored in memory. You can only spec-
ify one address.
13
Transmission
You can change transmission mode by pressing the {Transmission Mode} key.
ASO023S
Check the indicator on the operation panel to see which mode is currently active.
If it is not lit, Immediate Transmission mode is set.
Reference
p.19 “Parallel Memory Transmission”
p.20 “Simultaneous Broadcast”
Selecting Type of Transmission

You can select the transmission type: standard fax, IP-Fax, or Internet Fax.
Switch between types of transmission by pressing the selection key displayed on
the standby screen.
Important
❒ To select IP-Fax destinations or Internet Fax destinations, the optional print-
er/scanner unit must be installed. The display differs depending on whether
or not the optional printer/scanner unit is installed.
❖ When sending over a fax line

Press [ ] to display in the destination display column.
❖ When sending to an e-mail address

Press [ ] to display in the destination display column.
14
Transmission Modes
❖ When sending by IP-Fax

When using a gatekeeper server, press [ ] to display in the destina-
tion display column.
When using a SIP server, press [ ] to display in the destination dis-

play column.
Note
❒ If either “Enable H.323” (when using a gatekeeper) or “Enable SIP” (when us-
ing a SIP server) is selected in the Fax Features menu, is displayed in
place of . Press [ ] to display in the destination display column.
Reference
p.24 “IP-Fax Functions”
p.28 “Internet Fax Functions”
Memory Transmission
Memory transmission mode has standard fax, Internet Fax and IP-Fax.
Important
❒ If there is a power failure (the main power switch is turned off) or the machine
is unplugged for about twelve hours, all the documents stored in memory are
deleted. As soon as the main power switch is turned on, the Power Failure Re-
port is printed to help you identify deleted files. Simply turning off the power
by pressing the Operation switch does not delete stored documents. See
“Troubleshooting When Using the Facsimile Function”, Troubleshooting.
❒ If memory is full (0% appears on the top right corner of the display), Memory
Transmission is disabled. Use Immediate Transmission instead.
15
Transmission
A Make sure that Memory Trans. indicator lights.
ASO023S
Normally Memory Transmission mode is selected.

If it is not lit, Immediate Transmission mode is selected. Press the {Transmis-
sion Mode} key.
B Place the original.

C Make the scan settings you require.
D Using the number keys or a Quick Dial key, specify a destination.
To specify a destination using a Quick Dial key, see “Using the Quick Dial
Keys”.
If you make a mistake, press the {Clear/Stop} key, and then enter the correct
number.
E When sending the same original to several destinations (broadcasting),

press [Add Dest] to specify the destinations.
You do not have to press [Add Dest] when adding a destination using the des-
tination list.
16
Transmission Modes
F Specify the next destination.
1
Pressing [ ] switches the type of transmission between fax number, e-
mail address, and IP-Fax destination.
A fax number, e-mail address and IP-Fax destination can be specified simultaneously.
G Press the {Start} key.

Note
❒ If the combined total number of programmed destinations exceeds the
maximum value, only Immediate Transmission is possible.
❒ For the maximum number of destinations you can specify per file, see
“Maximum Values”.
❒ For the maximum number of destinations you can specify for all files (in-
cluding files in memory), see “Maximum Values”.
❒ For the maximum number of documents you can store in memory for
Memory Transmission, see “Maximum Values”.
❒ For the maximum number of pages you can store in memory (using A4
Standard <ITU-T q1 Chart>), see “Maximum Values”.
Reference
p.38 “Original Type”
p.39 “Resolution”
p.40 “Image Density (Contrast)”
p.42 “Sending Over a Fax Line”
p.45 “Sending by IP-Fax”
p.48 “Sending to an E-mail Address”
p.54 “Specifying a group of destinations using the Quick Dial key”
p.57 “Redial”
p.176 “Maximum Values”
“Troubleshooting When Using the Facsimile Function”, Troubleshooting
17
Transmission
Sending multiple originals using the exposure glass (Memory Transmission)

Follow these steps to send multiple originals using the exposure glass.
1 A Make sure that Memory Trans. indicator lights.

B Place the first page of the original face down on the exposure glass.
C Specify a destination.
D Make the scan settings you require.

E Press the {Start} key.
The machine starts scanning.
F Place the next original on the exposure glass within 60 seconds after the ma-
chine has finished scanning the first original.
G Repeat steps D to F for all originals.

H Place the last original, and then press the {q} key.
The machine dials the destination and starts transmission.
18
Transmission Modes
Parallel Memory Transmission

This function dials while the original is being scanned.
Standard Memory Transmission stores the original in memory, then dials the
destination. However, Parallel Memory Transmission allows you to confirm the 1
connection status quickly. In addition, this function scans the original faster than
Immediate Transmission. This is useful when you are in a hurry and need to use
the original for another purpose.
Important
❒ Standard Memory Transmission is used instead of Parallel Memory Trans-
mission in the following cases:
• When the line is busy and could not be connected to
• With Send Later
• When you store an original for Memory Transmission while another com-
munication is in progress
• When two or more destinations are specified
• When an original is placed on the exposure glass, and then sent
Note
❒ You can turn this function on or off with the User Parameters (switch 07, bit 2)
in the Fax Features menu.
❒ Standard Memory Transmission may be used instead of Parallel Memory
Transmission if there is not enough free memory left.
❒ If you use this function, the Memory Storage Report will not be printed.
❒ If the {Clear/Stop} key is pressed, the original jams or memory runs out, Par-
allel Memory Transmission will stop. The Communication Result Report is
printed and files are deleted.
❒ When using Parallel Memory Transmission, only the page number is printed
on the header of the fax, the total number of originals is not automatically
printed.
Reference
Automatic Redial
If a fax document could not be sent because the line was busy or an error oc-
curred during transmission, redial is attempted at five-minute intervals up to
five times.
If redialing fails after four redials, the machine cancels the transmission and
prints a Communication Result Report or Communication Failure Report.
Note
❒ If there are a large number of files stored in memory, documents might not be
sent in the order they were scanned.
19
Transmission
Dual Access
The machine can scan other documents into memory even while sending a fax
document from memory, receiving a document into memory, or automatically
1 printing a report. Since the machine starts sending the second document imme-
diately after the current transmission ends, the line is used efficiently.
Note
❒ During Immediate Transmission or when in User Tools mode, the machine
cannot scan an original.
Simultaneous Broadcast
Use this function to send the same original to multiple destinations simultaneously.
To specify multiple destinations, specify the first destination, and then specify
the next destination by pressing [Add Dest].
If you dial several destinations for the same document (broadcasting), the docu-
ments are sent in the order in which they were dialed. If the fax document could
not be transmitted, the machine redials that destination after the last destination
specified for broadcasting. For example, if you specify four destinations, A
through D, for broadcasting, and if the lines to destinations A and C are busy,
the machine dials the destinations in the following order: A, B, C, D, A, and C.
To check the transmission progress, print the TX file list.
If you specify a second transmission while broadcasting to several destinations,
faxes are transmitted alternately to each remaining destination in the current
and second broadcast.
For example, if you specify a broadcast to destinations A and B, and then specify
a broadcast to destinations C and D while transmission to destination A is in
progress, the machine sends the faxes in the following order: A, C, B, and then D.
If the previous file and next file are both on standby, these are also sent in the
same order.
Note
❒ To avoid accidentally pressing the wrong Quick Dial key, you can set the ma-
chine so that each time a destination is added using a Quick Dial key, [Add
Dest] must be pressed. Make the setting in User Parameters (switch 17, bit 2)
Reference
p.129 “Printing a List of Files in Memory (Print TX Standby File List)”
20
Transmission Modes
If memory runs out while storing an original

If you run out of memory while storing an original (free space reaches 0%), the
“Memory is full. Scanning will be stopped and only scanned page(s)
will be stored.” message appears. Press [Exit] to transmit stored pages only. 1
Note
❒ When this happens, only the scanned pages are sent. If you want to delete the scanned
pages and cancel transmission in this case, contact your service representative.
ECM (Error Correction Mode)

If part of a transmission fails because of a line problem, the lost data is automat-
ically resent.
Important
❒ For this function to work, the other machine must have ECM.
❒ This function is not available with Internet Fax.
Immediate Transmission
Immediate Transmission is possible with standard fax transmission and IP-Fax
transmission.
Important
❒ Internet Fax is executed in only Memory Transmission that starts transmis-
sion automatically after storing documents in memory. If you specify Imme-
diate Transmission in Internet Fax, the “Try again after switching to
memory transmission.” message appears. When this happens, press [Exit],
and then switch to Memory Transmission.
❒ Group cannot be used for Immediate Transmission. You cannot send the
same document to multiple destinations (broadcasting). If you specify a
group, the “Try again after switching to memory transmission.”
message appears. When this happens, press [Exit], and then switch to Memo-
ry Transmission.
21
Transmission
A Make sure that Memory Trans. indicator is not lit.
ASO023S
If Memory Trans. indicator is lit, press the {Transmission Mode} key to select
Immediate Transmission mode.
B Place the original.

C Select the scan settings you require.
D Using the number keys or a Quick Dial key, specify a destination.
Keys”.
If you make a mistake, press the {Clear/Stop} key, and then enter the correct
number.

The machine dials a destination.
Note
❒ Documents are not stored in memory.
Reference
p.38 “Original Type”
p.54 “Specifying a group of destinations using the Quick Dial key”
p.57 “Redial”
22
Transmission Modes
Sending multiple originals using the exposure glass (Immediate Transmission)

Follow these steps to send multiple originals using the exposure glass.
A Make sure that Memory Trans. indicator is not lit. 1

B Place the first page face down on the exposure glass.
C Specify a destination.
D Make the scan settings you require.

F Place the next original on the exposure glass within 10 seconds after the ma-
chine has finished scanning the first original.
G Repeat steps D to F for all originals.

H Place the last original, and then press the {q} key.
23
Transmission
IP-Fax Functions
The IP-Fax function sends or receives documents between two facsimiles direct-
ly via a TCP/IP network.
1 This function has the following advantages and is suitable for communication
within the same LAN:
• Reducing communication costs
• Communicating between IP-Faxes at higher speed than by standard fax
IP-Fax uses SIP and H.323 as the network protocol.
Specify an IPv4 address or host name instead of a fax number for sending. When
using a gatekeeper, specify its alias telephone number. When using a SIP server,
you can send by specifying SIP user name. Specify addresses of the gatekeeper
or SIP server (proxy server, register server, redirect server) as appropriate in IP-
Fax Settings in the Fax Features menu.
You can also transmit to a G3 facsimile connected to the public switched tele-
phone network (PSTN) via a gateway (T.38-compliant).
You can receive IP-Faxes in the same manner as standard faxes.
24
IP-Fax Functions
ALT001S
Important
❒ To use IP-Fax functions, the optional printer/scanner unit must be installed.
❒ To use IP-Fax functions, this machine must be connected to a LAN and set up
correctly under IP-Fax Settings in Fax Features.
❒ Before using this function, configure the network in the System Settings
menu.
❒ The facsimile function of this machine cannot be used with IPv6.
Note
❒ IP-Fax supported by this machine is ITU-T Recommendation T.38 compliant.
25
Transmission
Reference
p.109 “Types of Reception”
“Connecting the Machine”, General Settings Guide
1 “Fax Features”, General Settings Guide
Terminology
The following are words you should know when using IP-Fax:
❖ H.323
A multimedia communication protocol that sends or receives files via one-to-
one communication over a LAN or the Internet.
❖ SIP
A communication control protocol for Internet telephone that utilizes VoIP
(which converts voice information to IP packets) and is equipped with func-
tions such as creating, modifying, and terminating sessions with one or more
participants.
❖ Gatekeeper (VoIP gatekeeper)

A gatekeeper manages devices connected to an IP network and converts alias
telephone numbers to IPv4 addresses and performs authentication functions.
In addition, a gatekeeper governs band (transmission rate assignment) and
access control.
❖ SIP server
A SIP server mediates connection requests between devices connected to an
IP network and is composed mainly of servers that have the following three
functions:
• Proxy server: Receives SIP requests and forwards them on behalf of the requestor.
• Register server: Receives information about a device's address within an IP
network and registers them in the database.
• Redirect server: Used to inquire the destination address.
❖ Gateway (VoIP gateway)

A gateway connecting a telephone network and IP network, it has functions
such as protocol conversion for connecting these different networks, and also
connects communication devices (telephones, facsimiles, etc.) to a LAN or
other network.
26
IP-Fax Functions
Notes on Using IP-Fax

The following are notes about using IP-Fax:
• You may not be able to send to a firewall-protected network.
1
• You cannot use telephones on a LAN.
• If a power outage lasts about twelve hours, or the machine is disconnected from
the power outlet for about twelve hours, documents stored in the fax machine's
memory are deleted. If any document is deleted, the Power Failure Report is
automatically printed out when the main power switch is turned on. Use this
report to check which documents were deleted. Simply turning off the power
Reference
Functions Not Available for IP-Fax Transmission

You can use the following functions with standard fax transmission, but not IP-
Fax transmission:
• On hook dial
• Manual dial
27
Transmission
Internet Fax Functions

This machine converts scanned document images to e-mail format and transmits
the data over the Internet.
1 The e-mail sent by this machine can be received by another Internet Fax machine.
Instead of dialing the telephone number of the destination you want to send to,
you enter the relevant e-mail address.
You can also print or forward received e-mail messages.
ALT002S
Important
❒ To use Internet Fax functions, the optional printer/scanner unit must be installed.
❒ To use Internet Fax functions, this machine must be connected to a LAN and
set up correctly under Internet Fax Settings in Fax Features.
❒ To send Internet Fax documents, in the Fax Features menu, under E-mail Set-
tings, set [Internet Fax Settings] to [On]. However, documents can still be for-
warded or delivered to Internet Fax destinations even if [Off] is selected.
❒ To receive Internet Fax documents, in the System Settings menu, under File
Transfer, set [Fax E-mail Account] to [Receive].
28
Note
❒ The Internet Fax function supported by this machine is compliant with ITU-T
Recommendation T.37.
❒ You can receive e-mail messages with an attached TIFF-F image from computers.
❒ Though Internet Fax documents are normally sent via an SMTP server, you
1
can also send Internet Fax documents directly to their destinations without
going through an SMTP server. To do this, program “Use SMTP Server” to a
User Function key in advance.
❒ When sending Internet Fax documents, you can specify “Attach Subject” and
“Return Receipt” in [TX Mode].
❒ You can limit the size of transmitted e-mail messages in “E-mail Settings” of
“Fax Features”.
❒ See “Received Images” for how e-mail is actually received by the computer.
❒ For details about how to confirm the transmission result, see “Checking the
Transmission Result (TX File Status)”.
❒ When you transmit an Internet Fax specifying a user code, and the e-mail ad-
dress is set as the routing destination of the specified user code, a Communi-
cation Result Report is sent after the transmission is completed. This makes it
possible to verify the result of a transmission.
❒ You cannot send e-mail to a destination as cc.
Reference
p.51 “Bypassing the SMTP server”
p.92 “Entering the Subject”
p.94 “Requesting a Reception Notice”
p.116 “Received Images”
p.133 “Checking the Transmission Result (TX File Status)”
29
Transmission
Notes on Using Internet Fax

The following are notes about using Internet Fax:
• When using the Internet Fax function, originals are sent at A4 size. Originals
1 larger than A4 are reduced to A4 size. If the receiver's machine is compliant
with the T.37 full mode, originals are sent at the size specified in the Address
Book.
• When using Internet Fax transmission, documents are sent at “Detail” resolu-
tion, even if you have specified “Fine”. To send a document at “Fine”, config-
ure the Full Mode when registering the destinations in the Address Book.
• If a transmission is not successful, this machine usually receives an e-mail er-
ror notification. However, e-mail error notifications may not be transmitted
for various reasons. It is recommended that you confirm receipt of important
document by calling the other party.
• The level of security for Internet communications is low. It is recommended
that you use the telephone network for confidential communications.
• Voice communication is not supported over a LAN.
• Internet Fax delivery might be delayed due to network congestion. Use Inter-
net Fax transmission that bypasses the SMTP server, a public telephone line
fax, or IP-Fax whenever communication time is a concern.
• If a power outage lasts about twelve hours, or the machine is disconnected from
the power outlet for about twelve hours, documents stored in the fax machine's
memory are deleted. If any document is deleted, the Power Failure Report is
automatically printed out when the main power switch is turned on. Use this
report to check which documents were deleted. Simply turning off the power
• You may not be able to send large files as e-mail, depending on e-mail envi-
ronment conditions.
• When available memory is low, you may not be able to send Internet Fax documents.
• Because the machine sends documents as e-mail messages with an attached
TIFF-F image, viewer applications are required in order to view documents
when they are received on a computer.
• With a large volume of document, it may take some time before transmission
starts. This is due to the time the machine requires to convert the data in memory.
Reference
p.32 “T.37 Full Mode”
p.35 “Paper Size and Scanned Area”
p.51 “Bypassing the SMTP server”
30
Functions Not Available for E-mail Transmission

The following functions are supported with standard fax transmission, but not
with Internet Faxing.
• Immediate Transmission
1
• Transmission by SUB Code
• On Hook Dial
• Manual Dial
• JBIG Transmission
• ECM (Error Correction Mode)
Functions Not Available for E-mail Reception

The following functions are supported with standard fax reception, but not with
Internet Faxing.
• Memory Lock Reception
• SEP Code reception
• Authorized Reception
E-mail Subject
If you send e-mail without specifying a subject, a subject is automatically insert-
ed. Subjects differ depending on Stamp Sender Name settings.
❖ When Stamp Sender Name is set to on:

From Sender Name(Fax Message NO.xxxx)
❖ When Stamp Sender Name is set to off:

• If Own Fax Number and Own Name are programmed:
From “Own Fax Number”(“Own Name”)(Fax Message NO.xxxx)
• If only Own Fax Number is programmed:
From “Own Fax Number”(Fax Message NO.xxxx)
• If only Own Name is programmed:
From “Own Name”(Fax Message NO.xxxx)
• If neither Own Fax Number nor Own Name are programmed:
Fax Message NO.xxxx
Note
❒ “xxxx” is the document number that appears in the Journal.
Reference
p.87 “Sender Settings”
31
Transmission
T.37 Full Mode

This machine is T.37 full mode compatible. T.37 full mode is an international
standard for Internet Fax transmission. (ITU-T Recommendation, RFC2532)
1 When an Internet Fax communication is made between T.37 full mode compat-
ible machines, the receiver side sends the return receipt (dispatched) in response
to the reception notice request attached to the sent e-mail. This return receipt in-
cludes the receiver's reception capability information (compression type, paper
size, and resolution). When the receiver is programmed in the Address Book as
the full mode destination, the sender side automatically registers the received in-
formation in the Address Book. This allows you to send a subsequent Internet
Fax document to that receiver based on this information.
❖ Returning a Return Receipt

When e-mail is received, if the sender requests reception notice, the receiver
sends a return receipt that includes the receiving machine's capability (com-
pression type, paper size, and resolution).
❖ Registering the Received Reception Confirmation Contents

When the sender receives the return receipt that includes the receiver's recep-
tion capability, the sender checks that the final recipient address sent is pro-
grammed in the Address Book. If it is programmed as a full mode destination,
the sender automatically registers the receiver's reception capability. The reg-
istered reception capability is updated each time the sender receives new re-
ception capability information. The sender can send documents to the
receiver based on this information.
If the receiver is programmed as the simple mode machine or not pro-
grammed in the Address Book, the receiver's reception capability cannot be
registered.
If you know the receiver's reception capability, you can set it manually.
❖ Requesting a Reception Notice

When the receiver's machine supports T.37 full mode and is programmed as
a full mode machine in the Address Book, the machine requests the reception
notice from the receiver. Then, the machine will receive the return receipt
(sent) that includes the receiver's reception capability.
Note
❒ Use Web Image Monitor to manually program a receiver's reception capabil-
ity information.
❒ If you use Internet Fax transmission, you can send documents to multiple
destinations at once. However, if you specify full mode destinations, since
each destination may have a different reception capability, transmission is
done one by one in the specified transmission order.
Reference
p.168 “Programming Destination Information from Web Browser”
32
Placing Originals
Placing Originals
Place the original either on the exposure glass or in the optional ARDF. For de-
tails about how to place originals, see the following:
• Placing originals on the exposure glass
1
“Placing Originals on the Exposure Glass”, Copy Reference
• Placing originals in the optional ARDF
“Placing Originals in the ARDF”, Copy Reference
“Non-compatible originals for the ARDF”, Copy Reference
Important
❒ Do not lift the ARDF while using it to scan originals.
❖ How to place A4, B5 JIS (Japanese Industrial Standard), A5, 51/2"×81/2", 81/2"×11",
and 81/2"×14" size originals
ASO005S
❖ How to place A5 and 51/2"×81/2" size originals
ASO004S
33
Transmission
Note
❒ To scan multiple originals using the ARDF, set originals in a stack.
❒ When sending a fax, the image output at the other end depends on the size
and orientation of paper used in the receiver's machine. If the receiver does
1 not use paper of the same size and orientation as that of the original, the fax
image may be reduced in size, trimmed at both edges, or divided across two
or more sheets. When sending an important original, ask the receiver about
the size and orientation of the paper in their machine.
❒ Documents longer than 1000 mm (39") must be sent by memory transmission
(immediate transmission may not be possible).
❒ If an original jams, press the {Clear/Stop} key, and then carefully remove the
original.
❒ Make sure that all ink, correcting fluid etc., has completely dried before plac-
ing your original. If it is still wet, the exposure glass will become marked and
those marks will appear on the received image.
❒ You can send the first page from the exposure glass then the remaining pages
from the ARDF. You cannot change from the ARDF to the exposure glass.
When transmitting from memory, see “Sending multiple originals using the
exposure glass (Memory Transmission)”. When sending immediately, see
“Sending multiple originals using the exposure glass (Immediate Transmission)”.
❒ When using the Internet Fax function, originals are sent at A4 size. Originals
larger than A4 are reduced to A4 size. If the receiver's machine is compliant
with the T.37 full mode, originals are sent at the size specified in the Address
Book.
❒ Information about this machine is printed at the destination. This information
is printed on the side of the paper that is to your left when placing the docu-
ments on the exposure glass or the ARDF.
❒ For acceptable types of originals, see “Acceptable Original Sizes” and “Paper
Size and Scanned Area”.
Reference
p.18 “Sending multiple originals using the exposure glass (Memory Trans-
mission)”
p.23 “Sending multiple originals using the exposure glass (Immediate Trans-
mission)”
p.35 “Acceptable Original Sizes”
p.35 “Paper Size and Scanned Area”
“Placing Originals”, Copy Reference
34
Placing Originals
Acceptable Original Sizes

Where original is set Acceptable original size Maximum Paper thickness
number of
sheets 1
Exposure glass Up to A4 (210 × 297 mm), 1 -
81/2" × 14" (216 × 356 mm)
ARDF, A5 to A4 L 50 sheets 52-105 g/m2
one-sided document (up to 1200 mm long) (80 g/m2, 20 lb) (14-28 lb)
81/2" × 51/2" to 81/2" × 14"L
ARDF, A5L to A4 L 50 sheets 64-105 g/m2
two-sided document (up to 356 mm long) (80 g/m 2, 20 lb)
(17-28 lb)
81/2" × 51/2"L to 81/2" × 14"L
Paper Size and Scanned Area

Important
❒ If you place an original larger than A4, 81/2" × 14" on the exposure glass, only
an A4, 81/2" × 14" area is scanned.
❖ Exposure Glass
ASO001S
❖ ARDF
ASO002S
35
Transmission
❖ Maximum scan area

The following shows the maximum scan area:
• Memory Transmission: 216 × 1200 mm, 81/2" × 47" (W × L) from the ARDF
• Immediate Transmission: 216 × 1200 mm, 81/2" × 47" (W × L) from the ARDF
1 • 210 × 297 mm, 81/2" × 14" (W × L) (from the exposure glass)
Note
❒ There may be a difference in the size of the image when it is printed at the destination.
❒ Even if an original is correctly placed on the exposure glass or in the ARDF, a
margin of 3 mm (0.1") around each edge of the original may not be sent.
❒ If the receiver uses paper of a smaller width than the original, the image is re-
duced to fit that paper.
❒ During Immediate Transmission, the length of the scanning range can be-
come narrower than 1200 mm (47"), depending on the resolution as well as
the settings on the destination machine.
Detecting Blank Sheet

Upon completion of the first page scanning, an alarm sounds if the page is nearly
blank.
Important
❒ The blank sheet-detecting function works only when an original is scanned
using the ARDF.
❒ The blank sheet-detecting function is ineffective for second and subsequent
pages.
This function notifies you if an original is placed wrong side down on the scan-
ner. When this happens, a message appears for a few seconds. The message dif-
fers depending on the number of pages to be scanned and transmission mode.
• When sending a document using Immediate Transmission or when all pages
have been scanned in Memory Transmission:
• When some pages are left unscanned in Parallel Memory Transmission or

Memory Transmission:
36
Placing Originals
Note
❒ Even if a near blank sheet is detected, it is transmitted as normal.
❒ You can turn this function on or off with the User Parameter (switch 11, bit 2)
❒ To cancel scanning if a blank sheet is detected, press the {Clear/Stop} key.
1
Reference
37
Transmission
Scan Settings
You may want to send many different types of fax documents. Some of these
may be difficult to reproduce at the receiver's end. However, the machine has
1 three settings that you can adjust to help you transmit the document with the
best possible image quality.
❖ Original Type:
Text, Photo
❖ Resolution:
Standard, Detail, Fine
❖ Image Density (Contrast):

Manual Image Density (five levels)
Original Type
To optimize image clarity, select the appropriate original type.
The following settings for original types are available:
❖ Text
Select Text to send high-contrast black-and-white image originals. Use this
setting when you only want to send clearer text, even if the original contains
text and photographs.
❖ Photo
Select Photo to send an original containing a halftone image, such as a photo-
graph or a color original.
A Press the {Original Type} key for the type you require.
ASO024S
Press the {Original Type} key to switch between Text and Photo.
Note
❒ If you select Photo, the transmission will take longer than when Text is selected.
❒ If you send a fax document with Photo and the background of the received
image is dirty, reduce the density setting and resend the fax.
38
Scan Settings
Reference
JBIG Transmission
1
If you use JBIG (Joint Bi-level Image experts Group) compression, you can send
originals scanned using Photo faster than with other compression methods.
Important
❒ This function is not available with the Internet Fax function.
❒ This function requires that the other party's fax machine has both the JBIG
function and ECM function.
Resolution
This section explains how to set the resolution of the original.
Images and text are scanned into the machine by converting them to a sequence
of dots. The density of the dots determines the quality of the image and how long
it takes to transmit. Therefore, images scanned at high resolution have high
quality but transmission takes longer. Conversely, low resolution scanning re-
sults in lower quality but the original is sent more quickly. Select the setting that
matches your needs based upon this trade off between speed and image clarity.
❖ Standard (8 × 3.85 lines/mm, 200 × 100 dpi)

Select for originals containing normal size characters.
❖ Detail (8 × 7.7 lines/mm, 200 × 200 dpi)

Select for originals containing small characters or when you require greater
clarity. This resolution is twice as fine as Standard.
❖ Fine (8 × 15.4 lines/mm, 200 × 400 dpi)

Select for originals with fine details or when you require the best possible im-
age clarity. This resolution is four times finer than Standard.
A Press the {Resolution} key to switch between resolutions.
ASO025S
The indicators above the key show the current selection.

When both indicators are unlit, Standard is selected.
39
Transmission
Note
❒ If the other party's machine does not support the resolution at which you
are sending, this machine automatically switches to a resolution that is
supported. You can check the resolution at which you actually sent by
1 printing the Journal.
❒ The machine supports reception at both Standard and Detail resolution.
❒ When using Internet Fax transmission, documents are sent at “Detail” res-
olution, even if you have specified “Fine”. To send a document at “Fine”,
configure the Full Mode when registering the destinations in the Address
Book.
Reference
p.141 “Printing the Journal”
Image Density (Contrast)

Adjust the image density for scanning originals.
Use the {Image Density} key to vary the image density within 5 levels.
A Press the {Lighter} or {Darker} key to change the density from five density
level.
ASO026S
Each key press moves the indicator one place.
40
Scan Settings
Mixing Scan Settings for a Multiple Page Original

When sending an original of several pages, you can select a different image den-
sity, resolution, and original type setting for each page.
It is recommended that originals be placed on the exposure glass when mixing
1
scan settings for a multiple page original.
❖ When placing originals on the exposure glass

A Check which pages you want to scan with different settings.
B Remove the previous page and place the next page that you checked on the
exposure glass.
C Select the image density, resolution, and original type.
You have about 60 seconds (10 seconds for Immediate Transmission) to se-
lect density, resolution, and original type. The time remaining is shown on
the display.
Adjust the settings for each page before you press the {Start} key.
❖ When placing originals in the optional ARDF

A Check which pages you want to scan with different settings.
B Select the image density, resolution, and scan type before the page you
want to change the settings for starts being scanned.
Depending on what time the scan settings are adjusted, the settings may
not be reflected in the resulting operation.
41
Transmission
Specifying a Destination
This section explains how to specify a destination.
1 Fax numbers, IP-Fax destinations, and e-mail addresses can be specified.
Note
❒ The display shows the percentage of free memory space for storing originals.
Since fax numbers, IP-Fax destinations and e-mail addresses are programmed
in separate memory, dialing fax numbers using the number keys does not
change the percentage on the display.
Sending Over a Fax Line

Enter numbers directly using the number keys on the right side of the control panel.
A Press [ ] to switch the destination to fax number.
B Enter the fax number using the number keys.
Keys”.
If you make a mistake, press the {Clear/Stop} key, and then enter again.
C Press the {Start} key.

The machine starts to scan the original and stores it in memory. When scan-
ning ends, the Communicating indicator lights and transmission starts.
Note
❒ You can insert pauses and tones in a fax number.
❒ For the maximum number of digits for a destination, see “Maximum Values”.
Reference
p.43 “Entering a pause”
p.43 “Entering a tone”
p.53 “Using the Quick Dial Keys”
42
Entering a pause
Press the {Pause/Redial} key when dialing or storing a number to insert a pause
of about two seconds.
1
ASO027S
Note
❒ If you press the {Pause/Redial} key at the first digit, the Redial screen appears.
❒ A pause is shown as a “-” on the display.
❒ You can also program numbers including pauses in the destination list.
Entering a tone
This function allows a machine connected to a pulse dialing line to send tonal
signals (for example if you want to use a special service on a tone dialing line).
When you press [Tone], the machine dials the number using tonal signals.
This section explains how to use the tone function with On Hook Dial as an example.
A Press the {On Hook Dial} key.
ASO028S
43
Transmission
B Enter the fax number using the number keys.
C Press [Tone].
D Enter the number you want to tone dial using the number keys.

The transmission starts.
If you want to cancel a transmission, press the {Clear/Stop} key, and then re-
move the originals.
After transmission, the standby display appears.
Note
❒ Certain services may be unavailable even when using the Tone function.
❒ A tone is shown as a “T” on the display and the next numbers are dialed
using tonal signals.
44
Sending by IP-Fax
This section explains how to specify a destination using IP-Fax transmission.
When using IP-Fax transmission, specify the IP-Fax destination (IPv4 address,
host name, or alias telephone number) in place of the fax number.
1
Important
❒ To use IP-Fax functions, the optional printer/scanner unit must be installed.
A Press [ ] to switch the destination to IP-Fax destination.

When using a gatekeeper server, select .
When using a SIP server, select .
B Press [Manual].
Keys”.
C Enter the IP-Fax destination, and then press the {OK} key.
If you enter an incorrect character, press the {Clear/Stop} key. Then, re-enter
the characters correctly.
To change the IP-Fax destination after pressing the {OK} key, press [EditDest],
re-enter an IP-Fax destination, and then press the {OK} key.
45
Transmission
D To add a destination, press [Add Dest].
E Specify the next destination.
To add another destination, repeat steps D and E.
F Press the {Start} key.

Note
❒ Depending on security settings, [Manual] may not appear, and you may be
unable to enter the IP-Fax destination.
❒ For a list of gateways (T.38-compliant), gatekeepers, or SIP servers that are
certified as operable with this machine, contact your local reseller or ser-
vice representative.
❒ Methods of entering a destination vary depending on the network settings
made by the administrator. Ask the machine administrator for details. For
details about entering the IP-Fax destination, see “Regarding IP-Fax destinations”.
❒ To avoid accidentally pressing the wrong Quick Dial key, you can set the
machine so that each time a destination is added using a Quick Dial key,
[Add Dest] must be pressed. Make the setting in User Parameters (switch 17, bit 2)
Reference
p.24 “IP-Fax Functions”
p.47 “Regarding IP-Fax destinations”
“Entering Text”, About This Machine
46
Regarding IP-Fax destinations

Depending on the network to which this machine is connected or this machine's
configuration, enter the IP-Fax destination as follows:
❖ When not using a gatekeeper/SIP server

1
• From IP-Fax to IP-Fax
Specify the IPv4 address or host name of the receiving machine.
Example: 192.168.1.10 (IPv4 address)
Example: IPFAX1 (host name)
• From IP-Fax to G3 fax
Specify the G3 fax telephone number of the receiving machine.
Example: 0312345678
❖ When using a gatekeeper server

Specify the alias telephone number of the receiving machine.
Example: 0311119999 (alias telephone number)
Example: 0312345678
❖ When using a SIP server

Specify the SIP user name of the receiving machine.
Example: ABC (SIP user name)
Example: 0312345678
Note
❒ To send to a G3 fax via a gateway connected to a public telephone line, you
must specify it's the receiver's machine telephone number. For example, if the
receiver's fax number is “0312345678”, specify “5678”. To send from an IP-Fax
to G3 fax without using gatekeeper or SIP server, you must register the gate-
way also.
❒ When you specify a destination with IP-Fax, depending on the receiver's net-
work configuration, you may need to specify the IPv4 address and port
number of the receiving machine. For example, if the receiver's IPv4 address
is “192.168.1.10” and the port number is “2100”, specify “192.168.1.10:2100”.
Ask the network administrator for details.
❒ When you specify a host name, depending on the receiver's network config-
uration, you may need to specify the host name and port number of the re-
ceiving machine. For example, if the receiver's host name is “IPFAX1”and the
port number is “2100”, specify “IPFAX1:2100”. Ask the network administra-
tor for details.
47
Transmission
❒ An alias telephone number is a number that is registered in the gatekeeper,

and is available only in the network to which the gatekeeper is connected.
❒ Pay attention to the number of telephone number digits set in the gateway/IPv4
address conversion table to avoid transmission error.
1
Sending to an E-mail Address
This section explains how to specify an e-mail address as a destination.
When using Internet Fax transmission, specify the e-mail address in place of the
fax number.
Important
❒ In the destination list, register senders, specify their e-mail addresses, and
register as [Sender Only] or [Dest. & Sender] in advance using “Address Book
Management” in “System Settings”.
❒ Internet Fax is executed in only Memory Transmission that starts transmis-
sion automatically after storing documents in memory. If you specify Imme-
diate Transmission in Internet Fax, the “Try again after switching to
memory transmission.” message appears. When this happens, press [Exit],
and then switch to Memory Transmission.
A Press [ ] to switch the destination to e-mail address.
B Press [Manual].
Keys”.
48
C Enter the e-mail address destination, and then press the {OK} key.
1
If you enter an incorrect character, press the {Clear/Stop} key. Then, re-enter
the characters correctly.
To change the e-mail address after pressing the {OK} key, press [EditDest], re-
enter an e-mail address, and then press the {OK} key.
D To add a destination, press [Add Dest].
E Specify the next destination.
To add another destination, repeat steps D and E.
F Specify the sender.

For details about specifying senders, see “Sender Settings”.
G Press the {Start} key.

49
Transmission
Note
❒ Depending on security settings, [Manual] may not appear, and you may be
unable to enter the e-mail address.
❒ For details about canceling a transmission, see “Canceling a Transmission”.
1 ❒ To avoid accidentally pressing the wrong Quick Dial key, you can set the
machine so that each time a destination is added using a Quick Dial key,
[Add Dest] must be pressed. Make the setting in User Parameters (switch 17, bit 2)
❒ If “Auto Specify Sender Name” is set to “On”, the sender is automatically
specified and you can omit the procedure for specifying a sender. If “On”
is selected, the specified e-mail address is printed at “From:”. If no e-mail
address is specified for the sender, or if the specified e-mail address is not
programmed in the destination list, Internet Fax documents cannot be
sent.
Reference
p.28 “Internet Fax Functions”
p.81 “Canceling a Transmission”
“Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions”, Gen-
eral Settings Guide
50
Bypassing the SMTP server

You can send Internet Fax documents directly to their destinations without go-
ing through the SMTP server.
Important
1
❒ This function must be registered to a User Function key in advance.
❒ To use this function, the following settings must be made. For details about
these settings, see “System Settings”, General Settings Guide and “Using a
Host Name Instead of an IPv4 Address”, Network Guide.
• In “System Settings”, “SMTP” in “E-mail Communication Port”, set the
port number to “25”.
• To specify the host name of the other party as the domain part of the e-mail
address, program the host name of the other party on the DNS server.
❒ If the other party's IPv4 address is not registered on the DNS server, specify
the IPv4 address at the domain part of the e-mail address.
❒ To use this function, the other party's fax machine must be:
• compatible with Internet Fax
• connected to the same LAN as this machine
• have its reception protocol set to SMTP
❒ SMTP authentication set on the other party's fax machine is disabled when In-
ternet Fax is transmitted using this function.
❒ If an Internet Fax is transmitted from the other party using this function, even
if reception is not successful, an Error Mail Notification is not sent to the sender.
❒ When an Internet Fax is transmitted using this function, even if transmission
is not successful, the error e-mail is not sent from the server.
❒ When using this function, you cannot send Internet Fax documents to the ad-
ministrator's e-mail address programmed on this machine.
You can send Internet Fax documents directly to their destinations without go-
ing through the SMTP server. Internet Faxes are normally transmitted via the
SMTP server. However, with this feature the domain part of the destination's e-
mail address is read as the SMTP server's address and transmissions bypass the
SMTP server. Since this reduces load on the server, you can send faxes without
having to take server to destination transfer time into account.
There are two ways of specifying a destination, as follows:
❖ Specify the other party's host name

Specify a destination's e-mail address by adding the other party's host name
to the domain part of the e-mail address. Specify the address to the right of @
as follows: “host name”, “. (dot)”, and “domain name”.
xxxx@host name of the other party.domain name
Example: The other party's e-mail address is “abc@defcompany.com” and the
host name is “HOST”; abc@HOST.defcompany.com
51
Transmission
❖ Specify the other party's IPv4 address

Specify a destination's e-mail address by changing the domain part of the e-
mail address to the other party's IPv4 address.
xxxx@[the other party's IPv4 address]
Example: The other party's e-mail address is “abc@defcompany.com” and the
1 IPv4 address is “192.168.1.10”; abc@[192.168.1.10]
Follow these steps to bypass the SMTP server.
A Press the User Function key registered to this function to turn off the indicator.
ASO029S
Note
❒ When you specify destinations directly using the number keys, you can
specify whether or not to use the SMTP server for each destination.
❒ When you select destinations in the destination list, the SMTP server set-
ting specified in the Address Book is enabled.
❒ To send Internet Fax documents from a computer, use the LAN-Fax Driver
to specify whether or not to bypass the SMTP server. When sending with
the [Use device address] check box selected, the SMTP server setting speci-
fied on this machine is enabled.
Reference
p.147 “Sending Fax Documents from Computers”
eral Settings Guide
“Special Operations under Windows”, Network Guide
52
Using the Quick Dial Keys

You can specify a destination simply by pressing the Quick Dial key to which the
destination's number is registered.
When a Quick Dial key is pressed, the destination it is registered to appears on
1
the screen.
Pressing [ ] switches the destination list between fax number, e-mail ad-
dress, and IP-Fax destination.
Important
❒ In the destination list, program an individual fax number, IP-Fax destination,
e-mail address and/or groups of destinations.
Specifying a destination using the Quick Dial key
A Press [ ] to switch the destination between fax number, e-mail ad-

B Press the Quick Dial key in which the destination's number is programmed.
ASO030S
The destination's name is shown on the display.
If you make a mistake, press the {Clear/Stop} key and try again.
To select more destinations, repeat steps A and B.

Note
❒ Destinations programmed can be checked using “Destination List” in “Ad-
ministrator Tools” in “System Settings”.
❒ You do not have to press [Add Dest] when adding a destination using the
Quick Dial keys.
53
Transmission
Reference
eral Settings Guide
1
Specifying a group of destinations using the Quick Dial key
If you program multiple destinations into a Group, you can send documents to
all destinations in that Group using just a few keystrokes. Destinations pro-
grammed in a group are indicated by .
Important
❒ In the destination list, program an individual fax number, IP-Fax destination,
e-mail address and/or groups of destinations.
❒ Group destination can be used only for Memory Transmission; it cannot be
used for Immediate Transmission. If you specify Immediate Transmission for
a Group destination, the “Try again after switching to memory trans-
mission. ” message appears. When this happens, press [Exit], and then
switch to Memory Transmission.
❒ The total number of destinations programmed in multiple groups should not
exceed the maximum number of destinations you can specify for one file. For
details, see “Maximum Values”.
A Press [ ] to switch the destination between fax number, e-mail ad-

B Press the Quick Dial key in which the Group is programmed.
If you make a mistake, press the {Clear/Stop} key and try again.
To select more groups, repeat steps A and B.
54
Note
❒ Destinations programmed in groups can be checked using “Group Desti-
nation List” in “Administrator Tools” in “System Settings”.
❒ If a destination where a fax number, e-mail address, or IP-Fax destination
is not programmed is included in the specified group, the confirmation 1
message appears. Press [Select] to specify destinations where the fax
number, the e-mail address, or IP-Fax destination is programmed. Press
[Cancel] to change the destination. You can select the priority order used to
specify an alternative destination if there is no destination of the specified
type. Make this setting with User Parameters (switch 32, bit 0) in the Fax
Features menu.
❒ To cancel any destination(s) among the group, display the desired destina-
tion using {U} or {T}, and then press the {Clear/Stop} key.
Reference
p.56 “Checking the Specified Destination”
eral Settings Guide
55
Transmission
Checking the Specified Destination

This section explains how to check the specified destinations.
If you specified a destination from the destination list, you can display names,
1 fax numbers, e-mail addresses, or IP-Fax destinations. If a group is specified as
the destination, you can display the fax numbers, e-mail addresses, or IP-Fax
destinations of the group.
A Make sure the destination name appears on the display.
B Press the {Check Destination} key.
ASO031S
C If you specified more than one destination, display them one by one using
{U} or {T}.
D Press the {OK} key when confirmation is complete.

The display returns to that of step A.
Note
❒ If you specified a group using the Quick Dial keys, , the group icon ap-
pears to the right of the destination name by pressing the {Check Destination} key.
❒ When you specify a destination using the number keys, [Program] appears
on the screen by pressing the {Check Destination} key. Press [Program] to
register a selected destination in the destination list.
Reference
p.60 “Programming Destinations from Check Destination Screen”
56
Redial
The machine stores the latest destinations specified for each transmission meth-
od. This function saves time when you are sending to the same destination re-
peatedly, as you do not have to enter the destination again. 1
Important
❒ The following kinds of destinations are not stored:
• Destinations specified using the destination list
• Destinations specified as a group destination
• Destinations dialed using the external telephone
• Destinations dialed by Redial (regarded as already stored in memory)
• Second and later destinations broadcasted to
• Destinations specified in the LAN-Fax Driver on the computer
❒ To redial a fax number, do not dial any numbers before you press the
{Pause/Redial} key. If you press the {Pause/Redial} key after entering numbers
using the number keys, a pause is entered instead.
A Place the original, and then select the scan settings you require.
B Press the {Pause/Redial} key.
ASO027S
C Select the destination you want to redial to using {U} or {T}, and then
press the {OK} key.
D Press the {Start} key.
57
Transmission
Note
❒ You can specify Internet Fax and IP-Fax destinations using the Redial func-
tion. Select this function before pressing [Manual].
❒ When you press [Program], you can register a selected recipient in the des-
1 tination list.
❒ For the maximum number of redials the machine can store, see “Maximum
Values”.
Reference
p.61 “Programming Destinations from Redial Screen”
58
Programming Destinations in the Address Book
Programming Destinations in the Address

Book
You can program fax numbers, e-mail addresses, IP-Fax destinations, and folder 1
destinations using Address Book Management in Administrator Tools in the
System Settings menu.
A Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.
ASO032S
B Select [System Settings] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
C Select [Administrator Tools] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
D Select [Address Book Management] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK}
key.
59
Transmission
E Select [Program/Change] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
1
For the procedure to follow, see “Registering Addresses and Users for Fac-
simile/Scanner Functions”, General Settings Guide.
Note
❒ You can also register programmed fax numbers, e-mail addresses, IP-Fax
destinations, and folder destinations in a Group.
❒ When the facsimile initial display is shown, after changing the contents of
the Address Book, the “Settings have been updated. The selected
dest./functions have been cancelled.” message appears. Press [Exit]
to bring up the facsimile's initial display.
❒ You can register in the Address Book using Web Image Monitor or Smart-
DeviceMonitor for Admin. For details about installation, see “Monitoring
and Configuring the Printer”, Network Guide, or, for information about
the Address Book, see the relevant Help.
Reference
eral Settings Guide
“Monitoring and Configuring the Printer”, Network Guide
Programming Destinations from Check Destination Screen

This section explains how to register a directly entered fax number, e-mail ad-
dress, or IP-Fax destination to the Address Book using the Check Destination
screen.
If [Program] appears on the screen, it is possible to register a destination dis-
played on the check destination screen to the Address Book.
A On the check destination screen, select the destination you want to register
to the Address Book.
B Press [Program].
For details about registering destinations, see “Registering Addresses and
Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions”, General Settings Guide.
60
Programming Destinations in the Address Book
C Make the settings, and then press the {OK} key.

The screen returns to that of step A.
Note
❒ Depending on security settings, [Program] may not appear, and you may be 1
unable to register the destination.
Reference
p.56 “Checking the Specified Destination”
eral Settings Guide
Programming Destinations from Redial Screen

This section explains how to register a directly entered fax number, e-mail ad-
dress, or IP-Fax destination to the Address Book using the Redial screen.
If [Program] appears on the screen, it is possible to register a destination dis-
played on the Redial screen to the Address Book.
A On the Redial screen, select the destination you want to register to the Ad-
dress Book.
B Press [Program].
For details about registering destinations, see “Registering Addresses and
Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions”, General Settings Guide.
C Make the settings, and then press the {OK} key.

The screen returns to that of step A.
Note
❒ Depending on security settings, [Program] may not appear, and you may be
unable to register the destination.
Reference
p.57 “Redial”
eral Settings Guide
61
Transmission
Searching for a Destination in the Address

Book
1 Use this function to search for a destination registered in the destination list or
on the LDAP server.
Important
❒ To search for a destination from an LDAP server, the LDAP server must be
registered in advance. For details about registering LDAP servers, see “Sys-
tem Settings”, General Settings Guide.
Note
❒ The search returns destinations whose first characters match the entered
characters.
❒ A warning message appears if the search returns more than the maximum
number of destinations you can search for at a time. Press [Exit] and change
the destination name to view fewer destinations.
Reference
62
Searching for a Destination in the Address Book
Search by Name
Follow these steps to search for a destination registered in the Address Book by
name.
1
Important
❒ If [LDAP Search] is set to [Off] in Administrator Tools, in the System Settings
menu, the display for selecting either [Search Address Book] or [Search LDAP]
does not appear.
A Press [ ] to switch the destination to fax number, e-mail address, or

IP-Fax destination.
B Press the {Search Destination} key.
ASO033S
C Select [Search Address Book] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
D Select [Search by Name] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
63
Transmission
E Enter the destination name you want to search for, and then press the {OK}
key.
Depending on the type of characters to enter, press the {Shift} key to switch
the mode.
If you enter the wrong destination name, before pressing the {OK} key, press
the {Clear/Stop} key, and then enter the destination name again.
F Confirm the characters you entered, and then press the {OK} key.
When the search is finished, the results appear.
G Select a destination using {U} or {T}, and then press {V} to specify it (put
a tick against it).
Multiple destinations can be selected.

Press {W} to deselect a destination.
H Press the {OK} key.

Note
❒ If no destination matches the specified text, the “Specified destination
is not programmed.” message appears. Press [Exit] to return to the dis-
play of step D.
❒ You cannot specify destinations twice. If you try, the “This destination
has already been programmed.” message appears. Press [Exit] to return
to the standby screen.
❒ Press [Add Dest] to specify other destinations.
Reference
64
Search by Destination List

Follow these steps to search for a destination registered in the Address Book us-
ing the destination list.
1
Important
does not appear.

IP-Fax destination.
ASO033S
D Select [Display List] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
Destinations appear in registration number order.
65
Transmission
E Select a destination using {U} or {T}, and then press {V} to specify it (put
a tick against it).

F Press the {OK} key.

Note
Search by Registration Number

Follow these steps to search for a destination by specifying a registration
number stored in the destination list.
Important
does not appear.

IP-Fax destination.
ASO033S
66
D Select [Search by Registration No.] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK}
key.
E Enter the three-digit registration number using the number keys, and then
press the {OK} key.
If you enter the wrong registration number, before pressing the {OK} key,
press the {Clear/Stop} key, and then enter the registration number again.
F Press {V} to select a destination, and press the {OK} key.
To deselect a destination, before pressing the {OK} key, press {W}.

Note
play of step D.
67
Transmission
Search by Fax Number

fax number.
1
Important
does not appear.
A Press [ ] to switch the destination to fax number.
ASO033S
D Select [Search Fax Destination] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
If [Search Fax Destination] does not appear, press the {Escape} key to return to
step A, and then switch the destination to fax number.
68
E Enter the number you want to search for, and then press the {OK} key.
1
If you enter the wrong number, before pressing the {OK} key, press the
{Clear/Stop} key, and then enter the number again.
F Confirm the numbers you entered, and then press the {OK} key.
a tick against it).


Note
play of step D.
69
Transmission
Search by E-mail Address

Follow these steps to search for a destination registered in the destination list by
e-mail address.
1
Important
does not appear.
A Press [ ] to switch the destination to e-mail address.
ASO033S
D Select [Search by E-mail Address] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK}
key.
If [Search by E-mail Address] does not appear, press the {Escape} key to return
to step A, and then switch the destination to e-mail address.
70
E Enter the e-mail address you want to search for, and then press the {OK}
key.
If you enter the wrong e-mail address, before pressing the {OK} key, press the
{Clear/Stop} key, and then enter the e-mail address again.
F Confirm the e-mail address you entered, and then press the {OK} key.
a tick against it).


Note
play of step D.
71
Transmission
Search by IP-Fax Destination

IP-Fax destination.
1
Important
does not appear.
A Press [ ] to switch the destination to IP-Fax destination.
ASO033S
D Select [Search Fax Destination] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
If [Search Fax Destination] does not appear, press the {Escape} key to return to
step A, and then switch the destination to IP-Fax destination.
72
E Press [IP].
1
The Search IP-Fax Destination screen appears.
F Enter the IP-Fax destination you want to search for, and then press the {OK}
key.
If you enter the wrong destination, before pressing the {OK} key, press the
{Clear/Stop} key, and then enter the destination again.
G Confirm the IP-Fax destination you entered, and then press the {OK} key.
H Select a destination using {U} or {T}, and then press {V} to specify it (put
a tick against it).

I Press the {OK} key.

Note
play of step D.
❒ Press [Add Dest] to specify other destinations. 73
Transmission
Search by LDAP Server

Follow these steps to search for a destination registered in the Address Book us-
ing the LDAP server.
1
Important
❒ This function is not available if [LDAP Search] is set to [Off] under Administra-
tor Tools, in the System Settings menu.
A Press the {Search Destination} key.
ASO033S
B Select [Search LDAP] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
C Select [Select Server] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
D If more than one server is programmed, select the server you want to search
using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
The screen returns to that of step C.
74
E Select [Advanced Search] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
F Select a search condition using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
Conditions (Name, E-mail Address, Fax Destination, Company Name, and

Department Name) are those programmed in the LDAP server.
G Enter a partial string, and then press the {OK} key.
Depending on the type of characters you need to enter, press the {Shift} key to switch between modes.
To search for an IP-Fax destination, press [IP] on the Fax Destination screen.
H Select the search criteria using the scroll keys, and then press the {OK} key.
The meanings of the search criteria are as follows:

• [Include]: Search for strings that include the specified character.
Example: When searching for “ABC”, enter “A”, “B”, or “C”.
• [Exclude]: Search for strings that do not include the specified character.
Example: When searching for “ABC”, enter “D”.
• [First Word]: Search for strings that start with the specified character.
Example: When searching for “ABC”, enter “A”.
• [Last Word]: Search for strings that end with the specified character.
Example: When searching for “ABC”, enter “C”.
• [Exact Match]: Search for strings that fully match the specified character.
Example: When searching for “ABC”, enter “ABC”.
• [Fuzzy Search]: Perform a fuzzy search (according to the searching method
supported by the LDAP server).
75
Transmission
I Press the {Escape} key.

The screen returns to that of step E.
J Press [Search].
1
When the search is finished, the search result appears.
K Select a destination using {U} or {T}, and then press {V} to specify it (put
a tick against it).
Press the {Check Destination} key to display details about the selected destination.
L Press the {OK} key.

Note
❒ Although one user can program multiple e-mail addresses, only one ad-
dress can be retrieved by the search. The address retrieved by the search
depends on the searching method supported by the LDAP server. Howev-
er, the address programmed first is normally retrieved.
❒ You can add one additional search condition for LDAP servers by specify-
ing the Search Options under Prog/Chnge/Del LDAP Server under Sys-
tem Settings. For details about setting Search Options, see “System
Settings”, General Settings Guide.
❒ The string you enter in the [Name] condition field in step F is read as the
first or last name, depending on the administrator's setting. For example,
to search for the name “John Smith”, ask the system administrator whether
you should enter “John” or “Smith”.
Reference
76
On Hook Dial
On Hook Dial
The On Hook Dial function allows you to dial while listening to the tone from
the internal speaker. You can send a fax checking the connection.
1
Important
❒ This function is not available for Internet Fax and IP-Fax.
B Press the {On Hook Dial} key.
ASO028S
You will hear a low tone from the internal speaker.

If you want to cancel this operation, press the {On Hook Dial} key again.
C Dial.
Keys”.
The machine immediately dials the destination.
If you make a mistake, press the {On Hook Dial} or {Clear Modes} key, and then
try again.
D When the line is connected and you hear a high-pitched tone, press the
{Start} key.
move the originals.
77
Transmission
Note
❒ This function is unavailable in some countries.
❒ Press {U} or {T} to adjust the volume of the on-hook sound in eight incre-
ments. At the maximum volume level, U changes to |. Similarly, at the
1 minimum level, T changes to {. The volume can also be preprogrammed
❒ If you have the optional handset or an external telephone on the fax ma-
chine, you can speak with the other party when you hear a voice. If you
hear a voice before pressing the {Start} key, pick up the optional handset
or the handset of the external telephone and tell the receiver you want to
send a fax document (ask them to switch to facsimile mode).
❒ For details about On Hook Release Time, see “Fax Features”, General Set-
tings Guide.
Reference
78
Manual Dial
Manual Dial
Pick up the optional handset or the handset of the external telephone and dial.
When the line is connected and you hear a high-pitched tone, press the {Start}
key to send your fax document. If, on the other hand, you hear a voice at the oth- 1
er end, continue conversation as normal.
Important
❒ The optional handset or an external telephone is required.
❒ This function is not available for Internet Fax and IP-Fax.
B Pick up the handset.
You will hear a dial tone.
C Dial.
Keys”.
The machine immediately dials the destination.
If you make a mistake, replace the handset, and then try again from step B.
D When the line is connected and you hear a high-pitched tone, press the
{Start} key to send your fax document.
If you hear a voice, tell the receiver that you want to send them a fax docu-
ment (ask them to switch to facsimile mode).
E Replace the handset.

move the originals.
Note
❒ When the operation switch is off, even if the main power switch is on, you
cannot operate this machine using only the optional handset or the hand-
set of the external telephone. You must first press the operation switch to
turn on the machine.
Reference
79
Transmission
Memory Storage Report

This report is printed after an original is stored in memory. It helps you review
the contents and the destinations of stored originals.
1
Important
❒ If you use Parallel Memory Transmission, the Memory Storage Report is not
printed.
Note
❒ You can turn this report on and off with the User Parameters (switch 03, bit 2)
❒ Even if the machine is set up not to print this report, it is still printed if an orig-
inal could not be stored.
❒ You can select whether to include part of the original image on the report with
the User Parameters (switch 04, bit 7) in the Fax Features menu.
❒ You can select whether to display a destination with the User Parameters
(switch 04, bit 4) in the Fax Features menu.
❒ You can select whether to display a sender name with the User Parameters
Reference
80
Canceling a Transmission
This section explains how to cancel a fax transmission.
Important 1
❒ Remember that the Communicating indicator turns off almost immediately
when an Internet Fax is being sent.
Before the Original Is Scanned

Use this procedure to cancel a transmission before pressing the {Start} key.
A Press the {Clear Modes} key.
ASO034S
Note
❒ When originals are placed into the ARDF, you can cancel transmission
simply by removing them.
While the Original Is Being Scanned

Use this procedure to cancel a transmission after pressing the {Start} key.
A Press the {Clear/Stop} key.
ASO035S
The machine stops scanning.

Note
❒ Scanning may be completed while you are performing the cancel operation.
81
Transmission
While the Original Is Being Transmitted

Follow these steps to cancel a transmission while the Communicating indicator
is lit.
1
A Press the {Clear/Stop} key.
ASO035S
B Select the file you want to cancel using {U} or {T}, and then press [Stop TX].
C Press [Delete].
To cancel stopping transmission, press [No].

The standby display appears.
Note
❒ If you cancel a document while it is being sent, the transmission is halted
as soon as you finish the cancellation procedure. However, some pages of
the document may already have been sent and received at the other end.
❒ If the transmission finishes while you are carrying out this procedure, it
will not be canceled.
❒ If multiple destinations were specified, only one destination number appears.
82
Before the Transmission Is Started

Use this procedure to cancel a transmission after the original is scanned.
This function is useful to cancel a transmission when you notice a mistake in des-
tination or with the originals after storing. To cancel Memory Transmission,
1
search for the file to be canceled among the files stored in memory, and then delete it.
You can cancel transmission of a file while the file is being sent, stored in mem-
ory, or fails to transmit. All the scanned data is deleted from memory.
Important
❒ This function is unavailable with Immediate Transmission.
A Press the {Job Information} key.
ASO036S
B Select [Stop Communication] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
C Select the file you want to cancel using {U} or {T}, and then press [Stop TX].
D Press [Delete].
To cancel another file, repeat from step B.

To cancel stopping transmission, press [No].
83
Transmission
E Press the {Escape} key.

Note
1 ❒ If you cancel a transmission while the file is being sent, some pages of your
file may have already been sent and is received at the other end.
❒ If the transmission finishes while you are carrying out this procedure,
transmission cannot be canceled.
❒ If multiple destinations were specified, only the number of the destina-
tions that have not received the document you sent is shown.
❒ If multiple destinations were specified, only one destination number appears.
84
2. Send Settings
This section explains the features of [TX Mode], which you can use to apply vari-
ous transmission functions.
Sending at a Specific Time (Send Later)

Using this function, you can instruct the machine to delay transmission of your
fax document until a specified later time. This allows you to take advantage of
off-peak telephone charges without having to be by the machine at the time.
Important
❒ If the machine is switched off for about twelve hours, all fax documents
stored in memory are lost. If documents are lost for this reason, a Power Fail-
ure Report is automatically printed when the operation switch is turned on.
Use this report to identify lost documents. For details, see “Troubleshooting
When Using the Facsimile Function”, Troubleshooting.
❒ This function is unavailable with Immediate Transmission. If you specify Im-
mediate Transmission for this function, the “Dest. and functions that
could not be specified on immediate transmission is already se-
lected.” message appears. When this happens, press [Exit], and then switch
to Memory Transmission.
B Press [TX Mode].
C Select [Send Later] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
85
Send Settings
D Select [Send at Specified Time] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
To cancel the setting, select [Off], and then press the {OK} key. The display re-
2 turns to that of step C.
E Enter the time using the number keys and press [AM/PM] to switch between
AM and PM. Then press the {OK} key.
When entering numbers smaller than 10, add a zero at the beginning.
If you make a mistake, press the {Clear/Stop} key before pressing the {OK}
key, and then try again.
To cancel Send Later, press the {Escape} key. The display returns to that of
step C.
F Press the {Escape} key.

To check the settings, press [TX Mode].
G Specify a destination, and then press the {Start} key.

Note
❒ You can specify a time within 24 hours of the current time.
❒ If the current time shown is not correct, change it.
Reference
86
Sender Settings
Sender Settings
Use this function to set sender information.
If the sender's e-mail address is registered in the destination list, the sender can
receive transmission results by e-mail.
Also, if you enable the Stamp Sender Name, the registered sender's name (user
name) appears on the receiver's sheet, lists, and report. 2
Important
❒ To receive transmission results by e-mail, the optional printer/scanner unit
must be installed.
❒ In the destination list, register senders, specify their e-mail addresses, and
register as [Sender Only] or [Dest. & Sender] in advance using “Address Book
Management” in “System Settings”.
❒ If user authentication is set, the user logged in is set as sender. The transmis-
sion result is sent to the logged-in user's e-mail address.
B Press [TX Mode].
C Select [Sender Settings] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
D Select a sender.
If a destination protection code is set, the entry screen appears. Enter the pro-
tection code for destination using the number keys, and then press the {OK}
key.
87
Send Settings
E Confirm the selected sender, and then press the {OK} key.
2 F To print the sender's name on the receiver's sheet, select [Stamp] using {U}
or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
If you enable this function, the sender's name (user name) appears on the re-
ceiver's sheet, lists, and report.
G To confirm transmission results by e-mail using Internet Fax, select [E-mail]

using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
If the sender's e-mail address is registered, you can specify whether or not to
send the transmission result by e-mail to the sender. If you enable this func-
tion, the transmission result is sent to the registered mail address.
The display returns to that of step C.
H Press the {Escape} key.

I Specify the destination, and then press the {Start} key.
88
Sender Settings
Note
❒ You can confirm transmission results by using both the E-mail TX Result
function, which sends the results by e-mail, and the Communication Re-
sult Report printed by the machine. You can set whether to use both of
these together in User Parameters (switch 10, bit 6) in the Fax Features
menu.
❒ You can program one of the User Function keys with operations for Sender
Settings. User Function keys allow you to omit steps B and C. 2
❒ You can use Communication Result Report, etc. to check usage status by
specified users. If user authentication is set, you can check usage by
logged-in users. If User Code is set to sender, you can count the number of
uses by each user.
❒ To cancel the Sender Settings, cancel the transmission. See “Canceling a
Transmission”.
Reference
eral Settings Guide
89
Send Settings
PIN Code Transmission

A PIN (Personal Identification Number) Code is a number used for identifying
the sender.
PIN Code Transmission uses the PABX (Private Automatic Branch eXchange)
system to prevent unauthorized users sending faxes and to manage charges ac-
cording to user.
2 A PIN Code is added to the end of the fax number, and this is identified by the
PABX. The PIN Code cannot be revealed or leaked over public telephone lines.
To utilize PIN Codes, your PABX must be equipped with the PIN Code function.
Depending on the PABX system you are using, you might have to enter a PIN
Code every time you want to send a fax.
If you want to use PIN Code Transmission, ask the PABX administrator the
PABX you are connected to supports the PIN Code function, and if it does, con-
tact your service representative for information about setting up.
Important
❒ Program the PIN Code TX function to a User Function key beforehand.
❒ This function is not available with IP-Fax and Internet Fax.
❒ When you specify a group destination, a PIN Code is added only to those fax
destinations included in the group.
B Specify the fax number of a destination.
C Press the User Function key ({F1} to {F3}) programmed with [PIN Code TX].
ASO029S
90
Sender Settings
D Enter the PIN Code, and then press the {OK} key.

2

Note
❒ For the maximum number of digits you can use in a PIN Code, see “Max-
imum Values”.
❒ You can enter numbers, p, q, and pauses.
❒ PIN Codes are not printed in lists and reports.
❒ You can set the machine so that a PIN Code must be entered after the fax
number before you can send a fax. For details, contact your service repre-
sentative.
Reference
91
Send Settings
E-mail Options
This section explains the settings required for using the Internet Fax function.
Important
2 Entering the Subject

Allows you to enter a subject for the e-mail document you want to send.
Important
B Press [TX Mode].
C Select [E-mail Options] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
D Select [Attach Subject] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
E Enter the subject line, and then press the {OK} key.
Depending on the type of characters to enter, press the {Shift} key to switch
the mode.
The screen returns to that of step D.
92
E-mail Options
F Press the {Escape} key twice.

The standby screen returns.
G Specify a destination.
H Specify the sender.
For details about specifying senders, see “Sender Settings”. 2
I Press the {Start} key.
Note
❒ If you send e-mail without setting a subject, a subject is automatically in-
serted. For details about how the subject is automatically inserted, see “E-
mail Subject” and “Received Images”.
❒ You cannot send a subject only as e-mail without an original.
❒ For the maximum number of characters for an e-mail subject, see “Maxi-
mum Values”.
Reference
p.31 “E-mail Subject”
p.116 “Received Images”
93
Send Settings
Requesting a Reception Notice

You can confirm sent documents were properly received using e-mail or the
Journal.
When Reception Notice is set under “E-mail Options”, the receiver sends back a
reception notice message. Once the reception notice message is received, “OK”
appears in the Result column of the Journal, allowing the originator to verify the
2 transmission was received.
Important
❒ The Reception Notice feature is only available if the receiver supports MDN
(Message Disposition Notification).
B Press [TX Mode].
C Select [E-mail Options] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
D Select [Return Receipt] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
E Select [On] or [Off] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
The screen returns to that of step D.
F Press the {Escape} key twice.

94 To check the settings, press [TX Mode].
E-mail Options
G Specify a destination.
H Specify the sender.
For details about specifying senders, see “Sender Settings”.

Note
❒ If the fax is not received normally, “Error” appears in the Result column. 2
❒ Only the last 50 communications appear in the Journal. If you do not re-
ceive a reception notice message before the last 50 communications are fin-
ished, “OK” might not be printed in the Journal's Result column. This may
happen even if the mail is received normally at the other end.
❒ If you specify mailing list addresses, do not set for Reception Notice. Oth-
erwise, you will receive multiple reception notice messages from e-mail re-
cipients, and the Result column will be overwritten each time a new notice
message is received. However, if you receive a reception notice message
indicating an error, “Error” appears in the Result column and will not be
overwritten, even if you subsequently receive a reception notice message
as “OK” following the error message.
❒ Reception notice results are only shown in the Journal. The Result column
in all other files, lists, and transmission reports show “--”.
❒ Reception notice messages themselves are not recorded in the Journal.
❒ You can select whether or not to print the Reception Notice. This can be set
with User Parameters (switch 21, bit 0) in the Fax Features menu.
❒ You cannot broadcast e-mail using Reception Notice. The documents are
sent to the destinations in the order in which they were specified.
Reference
p.141 “Printing the Journal”
95
Send Settings
Fax Header Print

When the Fax Header is set to “On”, the stored name is printed on the receiver's paper.
Important
❒ In the USA, the Fax Header must contain the telephone number of the line
your machine is connected to. It will be printed on the header of every page
2 you send. Required in the USA.
B Press [TX Mode].
C Select [Print Fax Header] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
D Select [On] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.

F Specify a destination, and then press the {Start} key.
96
Fax Header Print
Note
❒ You can program fax header names using the Program Fax Information
function in the Fax Features menu.
❒ You can select whether or not dates, fax header names, file numbers, or
page numbers are printed by changing their respective User Parameters
(switch 18, bit 3, 2, 1, 0) in the Fax Features menu.
❒ You can program one of the User Function keys with operations for this
function. Using the User Function key allows you to omit steps B through E. 2
❒ In the USA, law requires that your fax number be included in the Fax
Header. Register the fax number and switch on Fax Header Print with User
Parameters (switch 18, bit 1) in the Fax Features menu. See “Fax Features”,
General Settings Guide.
Reference
97
Send Settings
Label Insertion
With this function you can have the receiver's name printed on the document
that is received at the other end.
Important
❒ To use this function, set Label Insertion to [On] when registering fax destina-
2 tions in the Address Book, and also select [Programmed Name] when sending
fax documents.
❒ When there is an image around the area where the Label is to be printed, that
image is deleted.
The receiver's name is printed as follows:
• Receiver's name: printed at the top of the page and preceded by “To:”.
Set this function as follows:
• Set Label Insertion to [On] when programming fax destinations.
• Select [Programmed Name] for Label Insertion when sending fax documents.
B Press [TX Mode].
C Select [Label Insertion] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
D Select [Programmed Name] or [Off] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK}
key.

98
Label Insertion
F Specify a destination, and then press the {Start} key.

Note
❒ [Programmed Name] is selected by default.
99
Send Settings
Setting SUB Codes for Transmission

Follow these steps to send a document with a SUB Code as a confidential transmission.
A SUB Code is an ID consisting of numbers, q, p, and spaces. Document trans-
mitted with a SUB Code is stored in the other party's memory, and not printed
automatically. The other party inputs the SUB Code to print the received docu-
ment. Privacy can be mutually protected when transmitting a confidential doc-
2 ument intended for a particular receiver, since only a person who knows the
SUB Code can print the document.
Documents can also be sent via facsimiles that have the Transfer Station function.
This function helps you save costs when you send the same document to more
than one place in a distant area, and saves time since many documents can be
sent in a single operation.
Important
❒ Documents can be sent to facsimiles that have the Personal Box function.
❒ A SUB Code cannot be used with Internet Fax.
❒ To use this function, set [SUB Code TX] to [On].
❒ Program this function to one of the User Function keys in advance.
❒ Obtain the SUB Code of the other party in advance.
❒ When sending a confidential document, inform the other party of the SUB
Code in advance.
❒ This machine cannot receive documents that are transmitted with a SUB Code.
B Press [TX Mode].
C Select [SUB Code TX] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
100
Setting SUB Codes for Transmission
D Select [On] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.

2
F Enter the fax number of a destination or an IP-Fax destination.
G Press the User Function key ({F1} to {F3}) programmed with [SUB/SEP Code].
ASO029S
H Enter a SUB Code, and then press the {OK} key.
101
Send Settings
I When a password is required, enter the SID Code using the number keys,
and then press the {OK} key.
2 When a SID Code is not required, just press the {OK} key.
J Press the {Start} key.

If you use Immediate Transmission and the fax machine at the destination
does not support the SUB Code function, a message will appear on the display
to inform you of this. When this happens, press [Exit] to cancel the transmission.
Note
❒ Make sure the number of digits in the SUB Code matches the specification
of the machine to which you are sending. For the maximum number of dig-
its for the SUB Code of this machine, see “Maximum Values”.
❒ You can store SUB Codes as well as names and fax numbers in the destina-
tion list.
❒ The SUB Code is printed on lists and reports.
Reference
eral Settings Guide
Setting a Password
There are times when you may want to use an “SID” (Sender ID) when sending
confidential faxes with the SUB Code function. When you use a Transfer Box
that has a password, enter the SID Code as the password.
Note
❒ You can store SID Codes as well as names and fax numbers in the destination list.
❒ You can enter numbers, p, q, and spaces.
❒ The SID Code is printed on lists and reports.
❒ For the maximum number of digits for the SID Code, see “Maximum Values”.
Reference
al Settings Guide
102
Setting SEP Codes for Reception

Follow these steps to enter a SEP Code to request the destination to transmit a
document.
You can receive a document stored in the destination's memory if the document
has the same SEP Code as the SEP Code you entered.
This function enables the machine to utilize services that use the polling function
or receive documents from multiple destinations.
2
Important
❒ Documents can be received from facsimiles that have Information Boxes and
the polling transmission function.
❒ A SEP Code cannot be used with Internet Fax.
❒ To use this function, set [SEP Code RX] to [On].
❒ Program this function to one of the User Function keys in advance.
A Press [TX Mode].
B Select [SEP Code RX] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
C Select [On] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
The screen returns to that of step B.
D Press the {Escape} key.

E Enter the fax number of a destination or an IP-Fax destination.
103
Send Settings
F Press the User Function key ({F1} to {F3}) programmed with [SUB/SEP Code].
2
ASO029S
G Enter a SEP Code, and then press the {OK} key.
H When a password is required, enter the PWD Code using the number keys,
When a PWD Code is not required, just press the {OK} key.

Note
❒ Make sure the number of digits in the SEP Code matches the specification
of the machine from which you are receiving. For the maximum number
of digits for the SEP Code of this machine, see “Maximum Values”.
❒ You can store SEP Codes as well as names and fax numbers in the destination list.
❒ The SEP Code is printed on lists and reports.
Reference
eral Settings Guide
104
Entering a Password
There are times you may want to use a password when receiving faxes by SEP
Code Reception using the SEP Code function.
Note
❒ You can store PWD Codes as well as names and fax numbers in the destina-
tion list. 2
❒ The PWD Code is printed on lists and reports.
❒ For the maximum number of digits for the PWD Code, see “Maximum Values”.
Reference
al Settings Guide
SEP Code RX Reserve Report

This report is printed after SEP Code Reception is set up. You can use this report
to check the reservations for SEP Code Reception.
Note
❒ You can have a destination displayed with the User Parameters (switch 04, bit 4)
❒ You can display a sender name with the User Parameters (switch 04, bit 5) in
the Fax Features menu.
Reference
105
Send Settings
SEP Code RX Result Report

This report is printed after each SEP Code Reception is completed and shows its
result.
Note
❒ You can also check the result of a SEP Code Reception with the Journal.
2 ❒ You can turn this function on or off with the User Parameters (switch 03, bit 4)
❒ To view the report without text disruption, select a font of even character
width in your e-mail application's settings.
❒ You can display a destination with the User Parameters (switch 04, bit 4) in
❒ You can display a sender name with the User Parameters (switch 04, bit 5) in
Reference
p.140 “Journal”
106
Two-Sided Transmission (Double-Sided Transmission)
Two-Sided Transmission (Double-Sided

Transmission)
Use this function to send two-sided originals.
Important
❒ The optional ARDF is required. 2
A Place the original in the ARDF, and then select the scan settings you require.
B Press [TX Mode].
C Select [2 Sided TX] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
D Select the transmission mode using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK}
key.
Select [2 Sided from 1st Page] to send a two-sided original from the first page.
Select [1 Sided for 1st Page] if you want to send a cover letter as the first page.
E Select the position of the placed document using {U} or {T}, and then press
the {OK} key.
To cancel Two-Sided Transmission, press the {Escape} key. The display re-
turns to that of step C.
107
Send Settings
F Select the page opening orientation using {U} or {T}, and then press the
{OK} key.
2 The screen returns to that of step C.
G Press the {Escape} key.

The screen returns to the standby screen.
H Specify a destination, and then press the {Start} key.

Note
❒ When using this function, two-sided originals cannot be sent by using just
the exposure glass.
❒ The front and back of the scanned original will be printed in order on separate
sheets at the other end. The orientation of alternate sheets may be reversed at
the other end. If you want to print the original with the same orientation at
the other end, specify the original position and page opening orientation.
ASO003S
❒ This function is only available with Memory Transmission.

function. Using the User Function keys allows you to omit steps B and C.
❒ Make sure that the specified original position matches the orientation of
originals loaded in the ARDF.
Reference
p.33 “Placing Originals”
p.38 “Scan Settings”
108
3. Reception
This section explains reception and reception functions such as printing received
documents or routing received documents to other fax machines.
Types of Reception
This section explains different ways of receiving fax documents.
Immediate Reception
Each page of a fax document is printed as soon as it is received. This method is
used for standard fax documents.
Important
❒ When receiving important fax documents, it is recommended that you con-
firm the contents of the received documents with the senders.
❒ The machine may not be able to receive fax documents when free memory space is low.
❒ If free memory reaches 0% during Immediate Reception, any further recep-
tion becomes impossible and the current communication is terminated.
Note
❒ If the Substitute Reception is used, a fax document is not printed: it is stored
in memory.
❒ This machine supports Standard and Detail resolutions for reception. Faxes
sent at Fine or Super Fine resolution is printed on your machine at Detail res-
olution. This may differ from the sender's intended resolution.
Reference
p.110 “Memory Reception”
p.111 “Substitute Reception”
p.123 “Printing Options”
109
Reception
Memory Reception
The machine waits until all pages of the document have been received into mem-
ory before printing it.
Important
❒ About twelve hours after the machine is turned off, all fax documents stored
in memory are lost. If any documents are lost in this way, a Power Failure Re-
port is automatically printed when the operation switch is turned on. Use this
report to identify lost documents. See “Troubleshooting When Using the Fac-
simile Function”, Troubleshooting.
❒ The machine may not be able to receive fax documents when free memory
space is low.
❒ If free memory reaches 0% during Memory Reception, any further reception
becomes impossible and the current communication is terminated.
Reference
110
Types of Reception
Substitute Reception
Substitute Reception is used when the machine cannot print any fax documents.
In Substitute Reception, a received fax document is stored in memory instead of
being printed. Fax documents received using Substitute Reception are automat-
ically printed when the condition which caused the machine to use Substitute
Reception is rectified.
Depending on why the machine cannot print, Substitute Reception might be
used for all fax documents received, or for only those documents that match a
condition specified in the User Parameters in the Fax Features menu.
The Receive File indicator lights to let you know when fax documents have been
3
received using Substitute Reception.
ASO037S
Important
❒ Reception may not take place if there is not enough free memory.
❒ If free memory reaches 0% during Substitute Reception, any further reception
becomes impossible and the current communication is terminated.
Note
❒ The Receive File indicator may light even when receiving documents using
Immediate Reception.
Reference
Receiving documents unconditionally

If one of the conditions in the following list occurs, the machine receives all fax
documents using Substitute Reception.
Problems Causes Solutions
The machine is printing The machine is busy printing The document is automatically print-
with a different function. with a different function. ed after the current job finishes.
h is lit. The cover is open. Close the cover shown in the display.
111
Reception
Receiving documents according to parameter-specified settings

If one of the conditions in the following list occurs, the machine receives only
those documents that match the conditions specified in the User Parameters
(switch 05, bit 2, 1) in the Fax Features menu.
Problems Causes Solutions
h is lit. Paper is jammed. Remove the jammed paper.
For details about removing the paper, see
“Clearing Misfeeds”, Troubleshooting.
B is lit.
3 All trays are out of paper. Add paper. For details about adding
paper, see “Adding Paper and Re-
placing Toner”, Troubleshooting.
G is lit. Toner is empty. Replace the toner bottle. For details
about replacing the toner bottle, see
“Adding Paper and Replacing Ton-
er”, Troubleshooting.
The message “Problem All trays are out of action. Call your service representative.
with this tray.”
appears.
You can specify the following conditions with the User Parameters (switch 05, bit 2, 1)
• When Own Name or Own Fax Number is received
The machine switches to Substitute Reception only when the sender has pro-
grammed their Own Name or Own Fax Number. If the power is switched off
for more than twelve hours, all the documents stored in memory are deleted.
In this case, the Journal can be used to identify the senders of the deleted doc-
uments, so you can ask them to resend.
If a sender has not programmed their Own Name or Own Fax Number, the
machine may fail to receive an important fax document. It is recommended
that you ask important senders to program an Own Name or Own Fax
Number in advance.
• Free
The machine switches to Substitute Reception regardless of whether or not
the sender has programmed their Own Name or Own Fax Number.
• Disable
The machine does not receive any documents.
Reference
“Adding Paper and Replacing Toner”, Troubleshooting
“Clearing Misfeeds”, Troubleshooting
112
Reception Modes
Reception Modes
There are two ways you can set up the machine to handle incoming calls:
• Manual Reception (the optional handset or an external telephone required)
• Auto Reception
Note
❒ The optional handset or an external telephone is required to use this machine
as a telephone.
3
Auto Switch
In this mode, the machine rings a number of times. You can answer the call while
the machine is ringing. If you do not answer the call, the machine automatically
changes to receive fax documents.
Note
❒ You can change the number of rings using “RX Mode Auto Switch Time” in
❒ When the other party send a fax document, the machine changes to receive
the fax document automatically.
❒ You can connect a telephone answering machine with Auto Switch.
❒ Set a smaller number of rings for the telephone answering machine than for
the fax machine.
❒ This function will not work with certain answering machines.
Reference
Manual Reception
When a telephone call comes in, the machine rings. If the call is a fax document,
you must switch manually to facsimile mode.
A When the machine rings, pick up the optional handset or the handset of the external telephone.
B If you hear beeps, press the {Start} key or the User Function key pro-
grammed with Start Manual Reception. (The {Start} key is only available in
facsimile mode when an original is not placed.)
C If you pressed the {Start} key in step B, press [Start RX].
113
Reception
D Replace the optional handset or the handset of the external telephone. The
machine will start receiving.
Note
❒ When the operation switch is off, even if the main power switch is on, you
cannot operate this machine using only the optional handset or the hand-
set of the external telephone. You must first press the operation switch to
turn on the machine.
Auto Reception
3 When a telephone call comes in, the machine automatically receives it as a fax
document. Use this setting on a dedicated fax line.
Switching the Reception Mode

You can switch reception modes using Reception Settings in the Fax Features
menu.
If you program a User Function key with Switch Reception Mode, you can
switch the reception mode quickly.
A Press the {Switch RX Mode} key.
ASO038S
B Select the reception mode using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
To cancel the selection, press the {Escape} key.

Reference
114
Receiving Internet Fax Documents

You can receive e-mail documents by Internet Fax.
There are two methods of receiving e-mail: Auto E-mail Reception and Manual
E-mail Reception.
Important
❒ E-mail with attachments other than TIFF-F format files cannot be received.
Senders receive an Error Mail Notification if their e-mail contains attach-
ments. You can select whether or not the machine sends this message with 3
User Parameters (switch 21, bit 7) in the Fax Features menu. However, TIFF-F
documents created by the Saving function of DeskTopBinder can be received.
❒ If [Require Secure Password Authentication (SPA) for all client connections] is select-
ed in Windows Server 2003, reception is not possible.
Note
❒ When Reception Protocol is set to POP3 or IMAP4, you can set the machine
to retain incoming e-mail or delete it from the server in “System Settings”.
❒ With User Parameters (switch 21, bit 1) in the Fax Features menu, you can
have the machine send the return receipt in response to the reception notice
request attached to the sent e-mail.
Reference
Auto E-mail Reception

When this function is turned on, the machine periodically checks the e-mail
server for incoming e-mail and downloads it as necessary.
Note
❒ If memory runs out, e-mail will not be received at the specified intervals. Re-
ception will resume when sufficient memory becomes available.
❒ E-mail auto-reception should be set in “System Settings”. When you select
auto-reception, set the reception interval in minutes.
❒ E-mail can be received manually.
Reference
115
Reception
Manual E-mail Reception

Follow these steps to receive a fax by accessing the e-mail server manually.
Important
❒ Program the Manual E-mail Reception function to a User Function key beforehand.
A Press the User Function key ({F1} to {F3}) programmed with Manual E-mail
Reception.
ASO029S
B Press the {Start} key.
The machine accesses the server to check for e-mail and receives any new e-mail.
Note
❒ Alternatively, press the {Job Information} key, and then select [Manual E-mail
Reception] to receive e-mail.
Reference
Received Images
Here is an example of an Internet Fax document sent from this machine and re-
ceived on a computer using the Outlook Express e-mail application.
The received image varies according to the e-mail application.
Important
❒ When Internet Fax e-mail is sent to computer, the following information is always in-
serted in the e-mail text “This E-mail was sent from “Host Name” (prod-
uct name) Queries to: “Administrator's e-mail address””. To check
the host name and e-mail address, see “System Settings”, General Settings Guide.
116
ALV011S
1. E-mail transmitted without speci- 6. Subject

fying a subject in “E-mail Options”. Shows the subject specified in “E-mail
2. E-mail transmitted with a subject Options” at the time of transmission. If
no subject is specified, one is automati-
specified in “E-mail Options”.
cally assigned in the format shown in 1
3. From above.
The name (e-mail address) of the sender 7. The message is inserted in all e-
4. Date mail. “xxxx” is the machine name.
The date and time of e-mail transmission 8. Attachment File
5. To Any document included by the sender is
The e-mail address of the recipient displayed as an attached document.
Note
❒ The display format of the sender name differs according to that of the Stamp
Sender Name setting and other functions.
❒ The display format of the subject varies according to Stamp Sender Name and
other settings.
Reference
p.31 “E-mail Subject”
117
Reception
Reception Functions
This section explains useful functions for receiving fax documents.
Important
❒ To use Internet Fax and IP-Fax functions, the optional printer/scanner unit
must be installed.
Forwarding Received Documents

3 This machine can forward received documents to other destinations pro-
grammed in this machine.
ALT004S
Important
❒ To use this function, specify the Forwarding destination in advance. For-
warding can be set under Administrator Tools, in Fax Features.
118
Reception Functions
Note
❒ A fax number, Internet Fax address, IP-Fax destination, or folder address can
be set as a forwarding destination.
❒ If an e-mail address is programmed as the destination, documents received
are forwarded as e-mail.
❒ If you would like the machine to forward received documents to a particular
destination according to the sender, specify the Forwarding destination for
each sender under Fax Features, Administrator Tools, Program Special Send-
er. Documents from other senders are forwarded to the default Forwarding
destination specified for this function.
❒ You can select whether the machine prints out the documents it forwards 3
with User Parameters (switch 11, bit 6) in the Fax Features menu.
❒ You can set whether or not the Folder Transfer Result Report is transmitted
to the specified e-mail address if folders are programmed as the forwarding
destinations to which documents are sent from all senders or Special Senders.
For details, see “Fax Features”, General Settings Guide.
❒ For the maximum number of destinations you can program in a group, see
Reference
SMTP Reception Using Internet Fax

You can receive a document sent by Internet Fax using SMTP reception.
With SMTP reception, e-mail is received as soon as it is sent to the e-mail address
set by the machine.
ALT005S
Important
❒ Set this machine beforehand using the MX record of the DNS server to enable
SMTP reception.
❒ Set the reception protocol to SMTP under “System Settings”.
119
Reception
Note
❒ You can route received e-mail to other Internet Fax machines as well.
❒ Even if SMTP reception is enabled on the DNS server, e-mail sent from the
SMTP server will not be received and the machine reports an error if SMTP
reception is not set in “System Settings”. Also, the SMTP server sends an error
notification to the originator.
❒ If an error occurs while receiving e-mail, reception is aborted, the e-mail is de-
leted, and Error Report is printed. Also, the SMTP server will send an error
notification to the originator.
❒ When the SMTP server attempts to route received documents to this machine
3 while the machine is transmitting e-mail, the machine will respond to the
SMTP server with a “busy” signal. Then, the SMTP server usually tries re-
sending the documents until the set timeout.
Reference
p.115 “Auto E-mail Reception”
Routing e-mail received via SMTP

E-mail received via SMTP can be routed to other fax machines.
ALT006S
Important
❒ Before routing e-mail received via SMTP, you first must set “SMTP RX File
Delivery” to “On” in the Fax Features menu.
❒ Depending on security settings, this function may not be available.
The originator can request transfer of e-mail sent to another fax machine by spec-
ifying the e-mail address as follows:
120
Reception Functions
❖ Fax Number
fax=destination fax number@host name of this machine. domain name
Example: to transfer to fax number 212-123-4567, specify:
fax=2121234567@abc.company.com
❖ Single destination programmed in the Quick Dial Keys

fax=qregistration number of 3 digits or less@host name of this machine.do-
main name
Example: to transfer to the destination number 001:
fax=q001@abc.company.com
❖ Group destination programmed in the destination list

fax=qppregistration number of 3 digits or less@host name of this ma-
3
chine.domain name
Example: to transfer to the destination programmed under Group number
004:
fax=qpp004@abc.company.com
Note
❒ E-mail received via SMTP can also be routed to single or group destinations
programmed in the destination list.
❒ If an e-mail transfer request is received when the “SMTP RX File Delivery” is
“Off” in the Fax Features menu, this machine responds with an error message
to the SMTP server.
❒ You can make settings that limit transfer to specified originators.
❒ Using this function, you can also send documents from your e-mail applica-
tion to e-mail addresses and G3 fax machines' destinations through this ma-
chine simultaneously.
❒ For the maximum number of destinations you can program in a group, see
Reference
JBIG Reception
If you use JBIG (Joint Bi-level Image Experts Group) compression, you can send
photographic originals faster than with other methods of compression. It allows
you to receive documents sent in the JBIG format through JBIG Transmission.
Important
❒ This function is not available with Internet Fax function.
121
Reception
Auto Fax Reception Power-Up

This machine can be set to shut down automatically if no one has used it for a
while. In these situations, even though the operation switch is off, the machine
can still receive incoming documents as long as the main power switch is on.
Important
❒ Reception is not possible if both the operation switch and main power switch
are turned off.
Note
3 ❒ You can set whether documents are printed as soon as they are received (Im-
mediate Reception) with the User Parameters (switch 14, bit 0) in the Fax Fea-
tures menu.
❒ You can also have fax documents received by Memory Reception (Substitute
Reception) printed after the machine is turned on.
Reference
122
Printing Options
Printing Options
This section explains useful functions for printing received documents.
Print Completion Beep

When this function is turned on, the machine beeps to let you know when a re-
ceived document is printed.
Note
❒ You can alter the volume of the beep or turn it off completely (set the volume 3
to the minimum level) using Adjust Sound Volume in the Fax Features menu.
Reference
Checkered Mark
When this function is turned on, a Checkered Mark is printed on the first page
of fax documents to help you separate them.
Note
❒ You can turn this function on or off using Checkered Mark in the Fax Features
menu.
Reference
123
Reception
Center Mark
When this function is enabled, marks are printed halfway down the left side and
at the top center of each page received.
This makes it easy for you to position a hole puncher correctly when you file re-
ceived documents.
Note
❒ You can enable or disable this function using Center Mark in the Fax Features
menu.
❒ The Center Mark may deviate a little from the exact center of the edge.
Reference
Reception Time
You can have the date, time, and file number printed at the bottom of the docu-
ment when it is received.
Note
❒ You can turn this function on or off using Print Reception Time in the Fax Fea-
tures menu.
❒ When a received document is split and printed on two or more sheets, the re-
ception time is printed on the last sheet.
❒ The time when the document was printed can also be recorded on the docu-
ment. If you need this function, contact your service representative.
Reference
124
Printing Options
Page Separation and Length Reduction

If the size of a received document is longer than the paper loaded in the machine,
each page of the document can be split and printed on several sheets, or reduced
and printed on a single sheet.
For example, this function splits the document if the document length is 20 mm
(0.79") or longer than the paper used. The document is reduced if it is less than
20 mm (0.79"). When a document is split, an asterisk (p) is inserted at the split
position and about 10 mm (0.39") of the split area is duplicated on the top of the
second sheet.
Note
❒ Your service representative can customize this function with the following
settings:
• Reduction
• Print split mark
• Overprinting
• Overprinting length
• Guideline for split
❒ You can adjust the overprinting and reduction lengths within the following
ranges:
• Overprinting length: 4 mm (0.16"), 10 mm (0.39"), 15 mm (0.59")
• Guideline for split: 5-155 mm (5 mm steps)/0.2-6.1" (0.2" steps)
TSI Print (Transmitting Subscriber Identification Print)

Usually the sender's Fax Header is printed on received documents. When you
receive an Internet Fax document, the e-mail address of the sender is printed. If
the sender has not programmed their Fax Header, you will not be able to iden-
tify them. However, if you turn this function on, the sender's Own Name or Own
Fax Number is printed instead so you can find out where the document came
from.
125
Reception
Note
❒ You can turn this function on or off in the User Parameters (switch 02, bit 3)
Reference
If There Is No Paper of the Correct Size

If there is no paper in the machine that matches the size of a received document,
3 the machine will choose a paper size based on the paper available.
Reduction in Sub-scan Direction Enabled
Page Separation Threshold 20 mm (0.79")
Width or Length Priority Width
Note
❒ The document is split over two sheets of paper depending on the paper size.
❒ Paper placed in the bypass tray is not usually selected for printing a received
document.
❒ Widths that this machine can receive are A4 and LT (81/2"×11"). Any docu-
ments narrower than A4 or LT (81/2"×11") are received at A4 or LT (81/2"×11")
width. The length of documents depends on the document.
❒ The paper size used to print a received document may be different from the
size of the sent original.
Reference
p.125 “Page Separation and Length Reduction”
Setting priority trays

With the same size of paper loaded into multiple trays, you can make the ma-
chine use one tray for one function and another tray for another function.
For example, you may load white A4 paper into tray 1 to use when making cop-
ies, and yellow A4 paper into tray 2 to use when printing received faxes. You can
then easily identify for which purpose paper has been output. You can perform
this setting in “Ppr Tray Priority:Fax” in “System Settings”.
Note
❒ When a different size of document from the priority tray is received, the tray
containing the same size of paper as the received document is used.
Reference
126
Printing Options
Just size printing

If you enable this function, received documents are printed on the sheet that has
the highest priority.
This function is enabled with User Parameters (switch 05, bit 5) in the Fax Fea-
tures menu.
If the paper tray is not stocked with paper of a suitable size to print a received doc-
ument, a message appears on the display prompting you to load paper of the re-
quired size. When you have loaded new paper, press [Exit] to print the document.
Note
❒ After pressing [Exit], procedure varies depending on machine status when the
message occurred.
• If any received documents or reports were being printed automatically, the
printer automatically continues printing from where it left off.
• If any documents or reports were being printed manually, the printer does
not resume printing. Perform the operation from the beginning again.
Reference
127
Reception
128
4. Changing/Confirming
Communication Information
This section explains the features of the {Job Information} key, which you can use
to confirm communication results on the screen or printed reports.
Printing a List of Files in Memory (Print TX

Standby File List)
Print this list if you want to find out which files are stored in memory and what their
file numbers are. Knowing the file number can be useful (for example when erasing
files).
ASO036S
B Select [Print TX Standby File List] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK}
key.
To cancel printing before pressing the {Start} key, press the {Escape} key. The
standby display appears.
To cancel printing after pressing the {Start} key, press the {Clear/Stop} key.
The display returns to that of step B.
The display returns to that of step B after printing a TX Standby File List.
129
Changing/Confirming Communication Information

Note
❒ The contents of a file stored in memory can also be printed.
❒ You can set whether or not to display a sender name with the User Param-
eters (switch 04, bit 5) in the Fax Features menu.
Reference
130
Printing a File from Memory
Printing a File from Memory

If you want to check the contents of a file that is stored in memory and not yet
sent, use this procedure to print it out.
4
ASO036S
B Select [Print TX Standby File] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
C Select the file you want to print using {U} or {T}.
To cancel printing, press the {Escape} key. The display returns to that of step
B.
D Press [Print].
To cancel printing after pressing [Print], press the {Clear/Stop} key. The display
returns to that of step B.
The display returns to that of step B after printing a TX Standby File.
Repeat from step B, if you want to print another file.

131
Note
❒ You can also print files that have not been successfully transmitted.
132
Checking the Transmission Result (TX File Status)
Checking the Transmission Result (TX File

Status)
You can confirm transmission by the display, report, or e-mail.
Confirming on Display
Follow these steps to display the transmission results.
ASO036S
B Select [TX File Status] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
C Check the transmission results using {U} or {T}.
When a fax is sent, the Own Fax Number or Own Name information of the
receiver appears. When an Internet Fax is sent, the e-mail address you entered
or the name programmed in the machine's destination list appears. For a
transmission from a computer, “-- LAN-Fax -->” is shown.
D Press the {Escape} key twice.

133
Note
❒ Only the transmission results of the latest communications are displayed.
For the maximum number of communication results you can check on this
machine, see “Maximum Values”.
❒ You can view sent fax documents and their lists, using a network computer
Web Image Monitor. For details, see the Web Image Monitor's Help.
❒ If a transmission is completed while you are using this function, the result
will not appear. To view the latest result, exit TX File Status, and then try
again.
function. Using the key allows you to omit steps A and B.
❒ When documents are transmitted from the computer to the machine,
“--LAN-Fax -->” appears. To check if the documents are sent to the receiv-
4 er, confirm the same File No.
Reference
Confirming by Report
Print reports for confirmation.
❖ Memory Transmission
If a document cannot be sent, a Communication Failure Report is automati-
cally printed. Or, you can use the Communication Result Report to check each
transmission result regardless of status.
This report is printed each time a Memory Transmission is completed if
turned on with User Parameters (switch 03, bit 0) in the Fax Features menu.
You can also print the report by programming the Print TX Status Report to
a User Function key and pressing this when specifying a destination.
If you turn the Communication Result Report on, the Communication Failure
Report is not printed.
❖ Immediate Transmission
You can confirm the result with an Immediate TX Result Report.
Select to print this report in User Parameters (switch 03, bit 5) in the Fax Features
menu. A report is printed after every Immediate Transmission is completed.
You can also print the report by programming the Print TX Status Report to
a User Function key and pressing this when specifying a destination.
Reference
p.136 “Communication Result Report (Memory Transmission)”
p.137 “Immediate TX Result Report (Immediate Transmission)”
p.138 “Communication Failure Report”
134
Confirming by E-mail
Use the E-mail TX Result function to send reports by e-mail to a computer, and
then confirm them on the computer.
The available reports are:
• Communication Result Report.
• Immediate TX Result Report.
• Polling with SEP RX Result.
Important
❒ To confirm transmission results by e-mail, the optional printer/scanner unit
must be installed.
❒ You must first register the e-mail addresses of the destinations the report is to 4
be sent to on the destination list.
Note
❒ When using the Sender Settings function to select the sender, the transmis-
sion results are sent to senders' e-mail addresses that have been registered. Se-
lect the sender from the Internet Fax destinations in the destination list.
❒ If you send fax documents from a computer, use LAN-Fax Driver to specify
whether or not the LAN-Fax Result Report is sent to the computer.
Reference
p.137 “Immediate TX Result Report (Immediate Transmission)”
al Settings Guide
Confirming by Report and E-mail

You can confirm transmission results using both the E-mail TX Result function,
which sends the results by e-mail, and the Communication Result Report print-
ed by the machine.
You can set whether to use both of these together in User Parameters (switch 10, bit 6)
Reference
135
Communication Result Report (Memory Transmission)

This report is printed when a Memory Transmission is completed, so you can
check the result of the transmission.
Note
❒ If two or more destinations are specified, this report is printed after the fax
document is sent to all the destinations.
❒ If the machine is set up not to print this report and the fax document could
not be successfully transmitted, a Communication Failure Report is printed.
❒ You can set whether or not to display a sender name with the User Parame-
4 ters (switch 04, bit 5) in the Fax Features menu.
❒ You can set whether or not to display a destination with the User Parameters
❒ The Pg(s) column gives the total number of pages. The Page Not Sent column
gives the number of pages that could not be sent successfully.
❒ “--” indicates that the Internet Fax document was sent to the mail server pro-
grammed in this machine. (However, this does not mean the e-mail was delivered.)
Reference
p.138 “Communication Failure Report”
136
Immediate TX Result Report (Immediate Transmission)

If you turn this report on, a report is printed after every Immediate Transmission
so you have a record of whether the transmission was successful or not.
If the machine is set up not to print this report and the fax document could not
be successfully transmitted, the Error Report is printed instead.
Note
❒ You can switch this report on or off in the User Parameters (switch 03, bit 5)
(switch 04, bit 4) in the Fax Features menu. 4
❒ If the page was sent successfully, the Page column gives the total number of
pages sent successfully.
Reference
137
Communication Failure Report

This report is printed when a document could not be successfully transmitted
with Memory Transmission.
If the machine is set up to print a Communication Result Report, this report is
not printed. Use it to keep a record of failed transmissions so you can send them
again.
Note
❒ You can select whether the Communication Failure Report is automatically
printed using the User Parameters (switch 04, bit 1) in the Fax Features menu.
❒ This report is only printed if the Communication Result Report is turned off
and a document could not be successfully transmitted with Memory Trans-
4 mission.
ters (switch 04, bit 5) in the Fax Features menu.
❒ The Pg(s) column gives the total number of pages. The Page Not Sent column
gives the number of pages that could not be sent successfully.
❒ “Unprogrammed” indicates that the document could not be sent because the
forwarding destination is not programmed.
❒ “--” indicates that the Internet Fax document was sent to the mail server pro-
grammed in this machine. (However, this does not mean the e-mail was delivered.)
Reference
138
Checking the Reception Result (RX File Status)
Checking the Reception Result (RX File

Status)
Confirm the reception result on the screen or in a report.
Confirming on Display
Follow these steps to display the reception result.
ASO036S
B Select [RX File Status] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
C Check the reception results using {U} or {T}.
When a fax or IP-Fax is received, the sender's fax number or Fax Header in-
formation appears. When an Internet Fax is received, the sender's e-mail ad-
dress appears.
D Press the {Escape} key twice.

139
Note
❒ Only the reception results of the latest communications are displayed. For
the maximum number of communication results you can check on this ma-
chine, see “Maximum Values”.
❒ You can view received fax documents and their lists, using a network com-
puter Web Image Monitor. For details, see the Web Image Monitor's Help.
❒ If a document is received while you are using this function, the result will
not appear. To view the latest result, exit RX File Status, and then try again.
Reference
4 “Fax Features”, General Settings Guide
Confirming by Report
Print a report to confirm reception results.
Journal
Print the Journal to confirm the latest reception results. For details, see “Journal”.
Reference
p.142 “Journal”
140
Printing the Journal

You can print the Journal manually.
Important
❒ The contents of a Journal printed automatically are deleted after printing.
Keep the journal if you require a record of transmissions and receptions.
ASO036S
B Select [Print Journal] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.

To cancel printing after pressing the {Start} key, press the {Clear/Stop} key.
The display returns to that of step B.
The display returns to that of step B after printing the Journal.

Note
❒ You can set whether the Journal is automatically printed after every 50 com-
munications in User Parameters (switch 03, bit 7) in the Fax Features menu.
❒ Depending on security settings, the Journal is not automatically printed.
❒ You can set whether or not to display a sender name with the User Param-
eters (switch 04, bit 5) in the Fax Features menu.
❒ Depending on security settings, the Destination/Sender name may not appear.
❒ For the maximum number of communication results printed in the Jour-
nal, see “Maximum Values”.
141
Reference
Journal
This section explains the items printed in the Journal.
ASO044S
1. Printing date 5. Other end

Shows the date and time the report was • For fax destinations
printed. Shows the name (for display) pro-
grammed by the other end.
2. Programmed Fax Header Shows the programmed fax number if
Shows the sender name programmed for the name (for display) was not pro-
printing. grammed.
If neither name nor fax number was
3. Date programmed by the other end, an en-
Shows the transmission or reception tered fax number or a name pro-
date. grammed in a destination list is
shown for transmissions.
4. Time
Shows the transmission or reception start
time.
142
• For Internet Fax destinations • For IP-Fax transmissions and receptions

At time of transmission, it shows the After , “T” for outgoing faxes or
e-mail address or name programmed “R” for incoming faxes, and the com-
in the destination list. At time of re- munication mode appear in alphabet-
ception, it shows the e-mail address of ical letters or symbols.
the sender. • For forwarding to the folder destinations
At time of broadcasting transmission, After , and “T” for outgoing faxes
it shows the number of destinations or e-mail, the communication mode ap-
after the e-mail addresses or names of pears in alphabetical letters or symbols.
destination.
When documents are transmitted 7. Communication time
from the computer to the machine, “-- Shows time taken for transmissions or re-
LAN-Fax -->” appears. To check if the ceptions.
documents are sent to the receiver,
confirm the same File No. 8. Number of pages
• For IP-Fax destinations Shows the number of pages transmitted
Shows the IP-Fax destination or name or received. 4
programmed in the destination list.
The fax destination details appear on 9. Communication result
the reception report. Shows the result of transmissions or re-
• For Folder destinations ceptions.
Shows the name programmed in the OK: All pages were properly transmitted
destination list. or received. When Reception Notice is ac-
tivated using the Internet Fax E-mail Op-
6. Communication mode tions, receipt of Reception Notice is
• For fax transmissions and receptions shown. The results of received docu-
After “G3”, “T” for outgoing faxes or ments that were routed are preceded by
“R” for incoming faxes, and the com- “n”.
munication mode appear in alphabet-
ical letters or symbols. --: The Internet Fax document was sent to
the mail server programmed in this ma-
• For Internet Fax transmissions and re- chine. (However, this does not mean the
ceptions
e-mail was delivered.) When using LAN-
After , “T” for outgoing e-mail or
“R” for incoming e-mail, and the com- Fax, the results of communication from a
munication mode appear in alphabet- computer to this machine are shown.
ical letters or symbols. Outgoing e- Error: A communication error occurred.
mail set for Reception Notice of E-mail D: Power was disconnected during com-
Options is indicated by “Q”, whereas munication. Not all fax documents were
“A” appears with reception notice e- transmitted.
mail.
10. User name
Shows the sender's name.
11. File number
Shows file management numbers.
Note
❒ To prioritize a fax number or name programmed in the destination list, con-
tact your service representative.
143
Transmitting Journal by E-mail

Use this function to send the Journal to the administrator's e-mail address.
The Journal is sent automatically after every 50 communications. A CSV format
Journal is attached to the e-mail.
Important
❒ To transmit the Journal by e-mail, the optional printer/scanner unit must be
installed.
❒ To transmit the Journal by e-mail, it is necessary to make settings with User
Parameters (switch 21, bit 4) in the Fax Features menu.
❒ This machine does not store sent CSV files. It is recommended that you dou-
ble-check the e-mail address of an administrator before the Journal is trans-
4 mitted. If the e-mail address of the administrator is not correct, your
important Journal may be lost. Sent CSV files are not left on the fax machine.
Note
❒ If the administrator's address is wrong, you may not be able to acquire the
Journal.
❒ If the Journal fails to be transmitted in e-mail format, the Journal is printed
out.
❒ The name of an attached CSV file is “JOURNALnyear, month, date, hours,
minutes”. For example, the file name transmitted in 14:40 on 20th, December,
2006 is “JOURNAL200612201440.csv”.
❒ The subject of a Journal sent by e-mail begins with “Journal”.
Reference
Journal by e-mail
If the setting is made so that the Journal is transmitted as e-mail, it is transmitted
to the e-mail address of an administrator.
Note
ters (switch 04, bit 5) in the Fax Features menu.
❒ To set the administrator e-mail address, see “System Settings”, General Set-
tings Guide.
❒ Depending on security settings, the Destination/Sender name may not appear.
Reference
144
Printing a File Received with Memory Lock
Printing a File Received with Memory Lock

This is a security function designed to prevent unauthorized users from reading
your documents. If Memory Lock is switched on, all received documents are
stored in memory and are not automatically printed.
To print the documents, you have to enter the Memory Lock ID. When your ma-
chine has received a document with Memory Lock, the Receive File indicator
blinks.
Before using this function, the following preparations are required in the Fax
Features menu.
• Program your Memory Lock ID.
• Set Memory Lock to On.
Important
4
❒ If the main power switch is turned off for about twelve hours, all documents
protected by Memory Lock are deleted. When this happens, the Power Fail-
ure Report is printed so you can confirm which documents have been deleted.
For details, see “Troubleshooting When Using the Facsimile Function”, Trou-
bleshooting.
A Confirm that the Receive File indicator is blinking.
ASO037S
B Press the {Job Information} key.
ASO036S
145
C Select [Print Memory Lock File] using {U} or {T}, and then press the {OK} key.
If no documents were received while Memory Lock was switched on, the
message “There are no memory lock files.” is shown, and then the dis-
play returns to that of step C.
D Enter a 4-digit Memory Lock ID with the number keys, and then press the
{Start} key.
If the Memory Lock ID does not match, the “Specified code does not
match the programmed Memory Lock ID.” message appears, and then the
display returns to the previous screen. Retry after checking the Memory Lock
ID.

Note
❒ Even when Memory Lock is available, if free memory is insufficient, recep-
tion is not possible.
❒ You can also apply a Memory Lock to documents that come only from cer-
tain senders.
❒ Documents received by SEP Code Reception are automatically printed
even if this function is switched on.
❒ If you print a Memory Lock File, it is deleted.
Reference
146
5. Fax via Computer
This section explains how to use this machine's facsimile function from a com-
puter via a network.
Sending Fax Documents from Computers

You can send a document created with a Windows application from a computer
connected to the machine to another fax machine.
Connect computers to the machine via parallel port, LAN, IEEE 802.11b (wire-
less LAN), or USB 2.0.
• To send a fax, simply select [Print...] from the Windows application, then select
LAN-Fax as the printer, and then specify a destination. LAN-Fax enables pa-
perless faxing from your computer to the other destinations.
• In addition to sending faxes, the LAN-Fax Driver allows this machine to be
used for printing out documents prepared on a computer for proof checking.
• To use the LAN-Fax Driver, connect this machine to a LAN and make the nec-
essary network settings, and then install the LAN-Fax Driver and the related
utilities on your computer.
ALT007S
147
Fax via Computer
Important
❒ To specify IP-Fax destinations or Internet Fax destinations, the optional print-
er/scanner unit must be installed.
❒ Errors occurring when the machine is used as a LAN-Fax will not be dis-
played on the computer. Check for errors by using a Web Image Monitor. See
Web Image Monitor help.
❒ USB connection is not available when using the LAN-Fax function on Windows 98.
❒ If your operating system is Windows Me, download USB Printing Support
for Windows Me from the supplier's Web site.
Note
❒ It is recommended that you use a Web Image Monitor running under the
same network environment as this machine. Otherwise, the Web browser
may not open and an error may occur.
5 Before Use
To use these features, a LAN-Fax Driver must be installed on your computer.
Use the LAN-Fax Driver included on the printer CD-ROM. You must also make
the required computer to fax network settings on the machine, according to the
type of connection.
Note
❒ When a personal computer and the machine are connected in parallel: See
“Preparing the Machine”, Printer Reference.
❒ When using Ethernet or IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN): See “Connecting the
Machine”, General Settings Guide.
Reference
“Preparing the Machine”, Printer Reference
Using the Software

This section provides information about LAN-Fax Driver, Address Book, and
LAN-Fax Cover Sheet Editor.
148
LAN-Fax Driver
This driver allows you to use LAN-Fax functions.
Important
❒ All operations cannot be guaranteed depending on the system environment.
❒ If your operating system is Windows NT 4.0, download LAN-Fax Driver for
Windows NT 4.0 from the supplier's Web site.
❒ When you use Windows NT, LAN-Fax Driver will not work in an RISC base
processor (MIPS R series, Alpha AXP, PowerPC) environment.
❖ Location of the file

The following folders are on the CD-ROM:
• LAN-Fax Driver for Windows 98/Me
\DRIVERS\LAN-FAX\WIN9X_ME
• LAN-Fax Driver for Windows 2000/XP and Windows Server 2003
\DRIVERS\LAN-FAX\WIN2K_XP 5
❖ Operating environment
• Computer
PC/AT compatible
• Operating systems
Microsoft Windows 98/Me
Microsoft Windows 2000/XP
Microsoft Windows Server 2003
Microsoft Windows NT 4.0
• Display
VGA 640×480 pixels or more
Note
❒ Before beginning installation, exit all other applications.
Address Book
Address Book helps you edit LAN-Fax transmission destinations.
❖ Operating systems
149
Fax via Computer
LAN-Fax Cover Sheet Editor

LAN-Fax Cover Sheet Editor helps you edit LAN-Fax cover sheets.
❖ Operating systems
Auto Run program

The installers for various drivers and utilities launch automatically as Auto Run
programs when you insert the CD-ROM.
LAN-Fax Driver, Address Book, and LAN-Fax Cover Sheet Editor can be in-
stalled by Auto Run.
5 Important
❒ If the plug and play function starts, click [Cancel] in the [New Hardware Found],
[Device Driver Wizard], or [Found New Hardware Wizard] dialog box, and then in-
sert the CD-ROM. The [New Hardware Found], [Device Driver Wizard], or [Found
New Hardware Wizard] dialog box appears depending on the system version of
Windows 98/Me, Windows 2000/XP, Windows Server 2003, or Windows NT
4.0.
❒ Auto Run might not work automatically with certain OS settings. If this is the
case, double-click “Setup.exe”, located on the CD-ROM root directory.
❒ If you want to cancel Auto Run, hold down the {SHIFT} key (when your sys-
tem is Windows 2000/Windows XP or Windows Server 2003, hold down the
left {SHIFT} key) while inserting the CD-ROM. Keep the {SHIFT} key held
down until the computer stops reading the CD-ROM.
❒ Clicking [Cancel] during installation aborts the installation. If you cancel the
installation, restart your computer and install the rest of the software or print-
er driver.
Note
❒ If your operating system is Windows 2000/XP or Windows Server 2003, in-
stalling a printer driver using Auto Run requires Administrator permissions.
When you install LAN-Fax Driver using Auto Run, log on using an account
that has Administrator permissions.
150
Installing Individual Applications

You need to install a LAN-Fax Driver on your computer before using the LAN-Fax
functions. The LAN-Fax Driver is on the CD-ROM included with the machine.
Address Book and LAN-Fax Cover Sheet Editor are installed with the LAN-Fax
Driver. Address Book helps you edit LAN-Fax transmission destinations. LAN-
Fax Cover Sheet Editor helps you edit LAN-Fax cover sheets.
Use the following procedure to install LAN-Fax Driver, Address Book, and
LAN-Fax Cover Sheet Editor at one time.
Important
❒ Before installing the above applications, install SmartDeviceMonitor for Client.
A Quit all applications currently running.

B Insert the CD-ROM included with this machine into the CD-ROM drive of
your computer.
The installer launches automatically, and the language selection window appears. 5
Depending on your operating system settings, the installer may not launch
automatically. If it does not, double-click “Setup.exe” in the CD-ROM root di-
rectory to launch the installer.
C Select the interface language of the software, and then click [OK].
D Click [LAN-Fax Driver].
The software license agreement window appears.
E Read all of the terms and, if you agree, select [I accept the agreement.], and
then click [Next].
If you select [I don't accept the agreement.], you cannot complete the installation.
F Select the [LAN-Fax Driver] check box, and then click [Next].
G Confirm that the [Printer Name:<LAN-Fax M11>] check box is selected, and then
click [Continue].
Select the desired port.
H Click [Finish].
The installation completion dialog box appears.
I Click [Finish].
J Click [Exit].
151
Fax via Computer
Setting LAN-Fax Driver Properties

This section explains how to set properties required for using the LAN-Fax Driver.
Note
❒ If your operating system is Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000/XP, or Windows
Server 2003, log on using an account that has Administrator rights.
Setting print properties

This section explains how to make settings such as paper size or resolution.
A On the [Start] menu, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].

With Windows XP Professional or Windows Server 2003, select [Printers and
Faxes] on the [Start] menu.
With Windows XP Home Edition, select [Control Panel] on the [Start] menu.
5 Next select [Printers and Other Hardware], and then [Printers and Faxes].
B Select to highlight [LAN-Fax M11], then click [Properties] on the [File] menu.
With Windows NT, click [Document Defaults...] on the [File] menu.
C When using Windows 98/Me, click the [Paper] tab to set the following properties.
• Paper Size
• Orientation
• Tray
• Resolution
• Gray Scale
• Print as Graphics
D When using Windows NT 4.0, set the following properties.

• Paper Size
• Orientation
• Tray
• Resolution
E When using Windows 2000/XP or Windows Server 2003, click the [Printing
Preferences...] button to set the following properties.
• Paper Size
• Orientation
• Tray
• Resolution
F Click [OK].
152
Making settings for option configuration

Make settings for optional units installed in this machine.

With Windows XP Professional or Windows Server 2003, select [Printers and
Faxes] on the [Start] menu.
With Windows XP Home Edition, select [Control Panel] on the [Start] menu.
Next select [Printers and Other Hardware], and then [Printers and Faxes].
B Select to highlight [LAN-Fax M11], then click [Properties] on the [File] menu.
C Click the [Accessories] tab, and then make the settings for the option configuration.
D When the machine is connected to a network, option configuration is auto-
matically performed. If the settings do not match the installed optional
units, click [Load from Device].
E When the machine is connected locally to your computer, select the check 5
boxes for the installed optional units.
F Click [Apply].
Option configuration settings are complete.
G Click [OK].
[Accessories] tab
The [Accessories] tab contains the following items besides option configura-
tion items.
• Prohibit manual destination entry
Check this option to inhibit direct destination specification.
• Enable E-mail
Check this when using Internet Fax with the LAN-Fax function.
• IP-Fax
Check this option when using IP-Fax.
After checking this option, select a protocol by clicking an appropriate ra-
dio button.
Note
❒ If the options on this machine are not configured as instructed, LAN-Fax
functions may fail.
❒ When this machine is connected to a network via the “SmartDeviceMoni-
tor for Client” port, option configuration is automatically performed. For
details, see LAN-Fax Driver's Help.
153
Fax via Computer
Basic Transmission
This section explains how to send fax documents created using Windows applications.
To send a fax, simply select [Print...] from the Windows application, then select
[LAN-Fax M11] as the printer, and then specify a destination in the [LAN-Fax] dialog
box.
Open the application document you want to send or create a new document, and
then perform the following procedure.
For details, see Help.
Important
❒ When using SmartDeviceMonitor for Client, you cannot send documents to
this machine using more than one LAN-Fax at the same time.
A On the [File] menu, click [Print...].

5 B Select [LAN-Fax M11] in the [Name:] list.
C Click [OK].
The LAN-Fax dialog box appears.
The setting method may differ depending on the application you are using.
In all cases, select [LAN-Fax M11] for the printer.
D Specify the destination.

For details about specifying a destination, see the LAN-Fax Driver's Help.
When user authentication is used with this machine, click [User Settings...].
E Specify necessary options.

F Click [Send].
When you click [Send & Print], the fax is sent to the destination and your ma-
chine prints a copy of the document you sent.
Note
❒ The machine can retain documents sent from a LAN-Fax Driver as files to
be sent. For the maximum number of documents the machine can retain,
see “Maximum Values”.
❒ For the maximum number of destinations you can specify per file, see
154
Reference
p.155 “Specifying a destination using a destination list”
p.155 “Specifying a destination using Address Book”
p.156 “Specifying a destination by directly entering a fax number, Internet
Fax destination, or IP-Fax destination”
p.157 “Specifying Options”
p.160 “Confirming Transmission Results by E-mail”
p.162 “Editing Address Book”
Specifying a destination using a destination list
A Click the [Address Book] or [Specify Destination] tab.

The [Address Book] or [Specify Destination] tab appears.
B Select the [Device Address] (or [Use device address]) check box. 5
C The machine's address is displayed in the [Device Address] field on the [Ad-
dress Book] tab. On the [Specify Destination] tab, enter the registration number
of the destination list in the [Device Address:] box.
D Click [Set as Destination].

The entered destination is added and appears in the [List of Destination:] box.
If you add a destination by mistake, click the wrong destination, and then
click [Delete from List].
E To specify more destinations, repeat steps C and D.

Specifying a destination using Address Book
Important
❒ In order to use this method, you need to register destinations in the address
list using Address Book.
A Click the [Address Book] tab.

The [Address Book] tab appears.
B Select a CSV file containing the desired destination list, from the [Address
Book:] dropdown menu.
Up to the three most recently used files appear in the dropdown menu. To use
a destination list that did not appear, click [Browse...], and then select the file.
155
Fax via Computer
C Select [Contact] or [Group] in the [Name:] dropdown menu as the display format.
Destination list contents change as follows, depending on the option selected:
• Contact: Individual name, company name, department name, fax number
• Group: Group name
If you selected [Group], proceed to step E.
D If you selected [Contact] in step C, select the type of fax from the [Type:]
dropdown menu.
To send by standard fax or IP-Fax, select [Fax]. To send by Internet Fax, select
[E-mail].
E Click the destination in the destination list to highlight it, and then click
[Set as Destination].
The selected destination is added and appears in the [List of Destination:] box.
5 In the Address Book list box, directly enter the name you want to search for.
You can then jump to the name you entered.
F To specify more destinations, repeat steps B through E.

Note
❒ Destination list contents can be narrowed down by selecting the first letter
of a contact name, company name or group name in the [Search] dropdown
menu.
Specifying a destination by directly entering a fax number, Internet Fax destination, or

IP-Fax destination
A Click the [Specify Destination] tab.

The [Specify Destination] tab appears.
B Select the type of fax from the [Type:] dropdown menu.

To send by standard fax or IP-Fax, select [Fax]. To send by Internet Fax, select
[E-mail].
After you select the fax type, the items corresponding to the selected type appear.
C Specify the destination.

Specify the destination depending on the selected fax type as follows:
• If you selected [Fax]: enter the fax number. To send by IP-Fax, enter the IP-
Fax destination.
• If you selected [E-mail]: enter the e-mail address.
To enter a pause in the fax number, click [Pause]. If you selected [E-mail] in step
B, [Pause] is not available.
156
D Specify settings according to the type of fax transmission.

Specify settings according to the type of fax transmission selected in step B,
as follows:
• If you selected [Fax], select a line or a protocol in the [Line:] list.
• If you selected [E-mail], select the [Do not use SMTP server] check box if you
want to bypass the SMTP server.
E Click [Set as Destination].

The entered destination is added and appears in the [List of Destination:] box.
F To specify more destinations, repeat steps B through E.

Note
Reference 5
p.48 “Sending to an E-mail Address”
Specifying Options
You can specify the options in the following list.
For details about transmission options, see the LAN-Fax Driver's Help.
• Sending at specific time
• Print Fax Header
• Attach a Cover Sheet
• Preview
• Save as file
To send a fax document at a specific time
A Click [Send Options].

The [Send Options] tab appears.
B Select the [Sending at specific time] check box, and then specify a transmission
time.
157
Fax via Computer
To print a sender stamp

B Select the [Print Fax Header] check box.

To attach a cover sheet

B Select the [Attach a Cover Sheet] check box.

A cover sheet is attached to the document you are sending.
Click [Edit Cover Sheet...] to edit the cover sheet.
5 Reference
p.165 “Editing Fax Cover Sheets”
To display preview
Selecting the [Preview] check box allows you to check how the fax document will
be output at the destination.

B Select the [Preview] check box.

C Click [Print], [Send] or [Send & Print].
The [Preview] window appears.
D Click [Next] or [Previous] to check the image.

To close the [Preview] window, click [Cancel].
Saving as files
You can save the fax document in TIFF format (TIFF-F).

B Select the [Save as file] check box.

C Click [Save to...].
D Select a folder on the folder tree.
158
E Select a method of file naming.

To enter a file name manually, select the [Specify file name when saving] check
box. To have the file assigned a name and saved automatically, select the [Au-
tomatically create a new file] check box.
F Click [OK].
G Click [Save] or [Save & Send].
If you select [Automatically create a new file], the image file is assigned a name
and saved under the specified folder.
The file name will be RicHHMMSS.tif (HH: hours, MM: minutes, SS: seconds).
H Enter a file name.

You can also change the folder in this step.
I Click [Save].
The image file is saved in the specified folder.
5
Note
❒ Single-page documents are saved as single TIFF files, and multiple-page
documents are saved as multiple TIFF files.
Checking Transmission Using LAN-Fax Driver

From “SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin”, “SmartDeviceMonitor for Client”, or
Web Image Monitor, you can check information about files sent using LAN-Fax
Driver. For the maximum number of transmission results you can check, see
Also, you can save the contents of the Journal in a personal computer as a CSV
file using [Load Fax Journal] in “SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin”.
Note
❒ When data is transmitted from the LAN-Fax Driver via the “SmartDevice-
Monitor for Client” port, the “Data-transmission complete.” message ap-
pears on the computer's display, so you can easily ascertain the
communication progress. However, if the volume of communication data
from the LAN-Fax to this machine increases, the message may appear during
the operation, due to the differences in memory capacity between this ma-
chine and “SmartDeviceMonitor for Client”. For more accurate fax transmis-
sion results, use “E-mail TX results”.
❒ The job history may differ from the machine's transmission results. In that
case, refer to the machine's transmission results.
❒ See the relevant Help for details.
Reference
159
Fax via Computer
Confirming Transmission Results by E-mail

After communicating in the LAN-Fax mode, this function transmits the commu-
nication results with the computer by e-mail.
Important
❒ To confirm transmission results by e-mail, the optional printer/scanner unit
must be installed.
When you have done [Send] or [Send & Print] using the LAN-Fax, and when the
communication was successful, it transmits e-mail of the transmission result.
Result notification e-mail is sent when printing is complete, or if an error occurs
during communication between this machine and a computer.
A Click the [E-mail Settings] tab.

B Select the [Notify] check box under [E-mail TX results].
5 C Enter the destination.
When entering the e-mail address directly, click the [Specify destinations] radio
button, and then enter the e-mail address in the [Specify destinations] field.
When entering the machine's programmed address, click the [Device Address]
radio button, and then enter the registration number of the destination list in
the [Device Address] box.
The [Device Address] box is unavailable when [Specify destinations] is selected,
and you cannot enter anything in the text box.
D Click [Send] or [Send & Print].

Note
❒ You can confirm transmission results using the E-mail TX Result function
and the Communication Result Report. You can set whether to use both of
these together in User Parameters (switch 10, bit 6) in the Fax Features
menu.
❒ If there be any insufficient configurations in the e-mail menu on this ma-
chine, or if “Auto Specify Sender Name” is set to “Off”, the LAN-Fax result
notification e-mail is not transmitted, and the LAN-Fax Result Report is
printed. See “System Settings”, General Settings Guide for the e-mail set-
tings, and see “LAN-Fax Result Report” for the LAN-Fax Result Report.
Reference
p.161 “LAN-Fax Result Report”
160
LAN-Fax Result Report

This section explains the LAN-Fax Result Report.
If “E-mail TX results” is set to “Notify”, if there be any insufficient configura-
tions in the e-mail menu on this machine, or if “Auto Specify Sender Name” is
set to “Off”, the LAN-Fax result notification e-mail is not transmitted, and the
LAN-Fax Result Report is printed. If the “E-mail TX Result” of “Sender Settings”
has not been set at “E-mail”, the LAN-Fax Result Report is printed.
Note
❒ Whether or not the LAN-Fax Result Report is printed, can be configured with
User Parameters (Switch 20, bit 0) in the Fax Features menu.
❒ When executing [Send] or [Send & Print] with the LAN-Fax Driver, and when
the E-mail TX Result Report has not arrived, the Communication Result Re-
port is printed.
Reference
p.136 “Communication Result Report (Memory Transmission)” 5
Printing and Saving

You can print documents created using Windows applications.
Open the application document you want to print or create a new document,
and then perform the following procedure.
For details about printing the fax image, see the LAN-Fax Driver's Help.

B Select [LAN-Fax M11] in the [Name:] list, and then click [OK].
The [LAN-Fax] dialog box appears.
The setting method may differ depending on the application you are using.
In all cases, select [LAN-Fax M11] for the printer.
C Click [Print] or [Send & Print].

You can save the fax image in a file. See “Specifying Options”.
Note
❒ You can also save documents in TIFF format. For details about saving in
TIFF format, see “Saving as files”.
❒ You can select the length of time the machine keeps document data in
memory if print failed due to problems such as paper shortage or paper
jams. Make this setting with User Parameters (switch 20, bit 2, 3, 4, 5) in the
Fax Features menu. Data is deleted when the specified length of time
elapses.
161
Fax via Computer
Reference
p.157 “Specifying Options”
p.158 “Saving as files”
Editing Address Book

You can program and edit destinations in the address list using the Address
Book.
For details about the Address Book, see the LAN-Fax Driver's Help.
Note
❒ You can use files created in CSV format as Address Book data. For this pur-
pose, create CSV files that conform to a certain format. For more information,
see Help.
5 Programming new destinations
A On the [Start] menu, point to [Programs], [LAN-Fax Utilities], and then click [Ad-
dress Book].
The [Address Book] dialog box appears.
If LAN-Fax Driver has already started up, click [Edit Address Book...].
B Click [New/Browse...], and then select the CSV file containing the address list
to be edited.
C Enter the destination and name.

You can enter a contact name, company name, department name, fax
number, e-mail address, and IP-Fax address. The name and destination (Fax
Number, E-mail address or IP-Fax address) cannot be omitted.
D Click [Add].
The destination is added to the destination list.
E Click [Close].
F If you made changes to a destination, a confirmation message appears. To
save the changes, click [Yes].
If you do not want to save the changes and want to quit editing, click [No].
To return to the editing display, click [Cancel].
The confirmation dialog box does not appear when you have not made any
changes after starting Address Book.
162
Note
❒ To program the contents of the destination list of this machine to the Ad-
dress Book, select the [Use device address] check box, then enter the destina-
tion list's registration number in the [Device Address:] field.
❒ For [Line:] under [Fax Number:], the following line types are selectable; G3,
G3-2, G3-3, G4, G3 Dir. Auto, G3 PABX Auto, or I-G3. However, this ma-
chine supports G3 only.
❒ For [Protocol:] under [IP-Fax address:], select [H.323] or [SIP].
❒ To bypass the SMTP server, under the [E-mail address:] box, select the [Do
not use SMTP server] check box.
Editing programmed destinations
dress Book].
The [Address Book] dialog box appears. 5
to be edited.
C Select the destination you want to edit so it is highlighted in the list.

D Edit the data.
E Click [Update].
F Click [Close].
G If you made changes to a destination, a confirmation message appears. To
163
Fax via Computer
Deleting programmed destinations
dress Book].
The [Address Book] dialog box appears.
to be edited.
C Select the destination you want to delete so it is highlighted in the list.

D Click [Delete].
E Click [Yes].
F Click [Close].
5 G If you made changes to a destination, a confirmation message appears. To
Using the Machine's Address Book Data in the Destination List of

the LAN-Fax
You can save information about fax destinations registered to this machine in a
personal computer as a CSV file using “Address Management Tool” in “Smart-
DeviceMonitor for Admin”. Saved CSV files can be inserted into the destination
table of the LAN-Fax Driver by selecting [New/Browse...] in Address Book. Save
the file again for the LAN-Fax Driver.
Note
❒ When destinations registered in groups by this machine are inserted into Ad-
dress Book, each person's destination is determined according to the follow-
ing order of priority (check before inserting and changing the order of
priority, if necessary): IP-Fax destination → Fax number → Mail address
❒ You may not be able to use the machine when it is updating the Address Book
using CSV files (retrieved using SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin) that contain
user codes.
❒ For details, see “SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin” Help.
164
Editing Fax Cover Sheets

LAN-Fax Cover Sheet Editor allows you to edit the format for fax cover sheets.
Important
❒ It is necessary to create a cover sheet file before attaching a cover sheet to fax
document using LAN-Fax Driver.
Creating a cover sheet

Use the following procedure to create a fax cover sheet.
You can edit the following items using LAN-Fax Cover Sheet Editor.
• Company name as destination information
• Department name as destination information
• Contact name as destination information
• Company name as sender information 5
• Department name as sender information
• Contact name as sender information
• Telephone number as sender information
• Fax number as sender information
• Date
• Message
A On the [Start] menu, point to [Programs], [LAN-Fax Utilities], and then click
[LAN-Fax Cover Sheet Editor].
The [LAN-Fax Cover Sheet Editor] dialog box appears.
B Edit the cover sheet.

For details about operations, see Help.
C Click [Save as...] on the [File] menu.

D Select a folder, and then enter a file name.
E Click [Save].
Note
❒ Cover sheet data is stored in its own format (using “fcp” as its extension).
165
Fax via Computer
Attaching a created cover sheet

Use the following procedure to attach a created cover sheet file to a fax document.

B Select [LAN-Fax M11] in the [Name:] list, and then click [OK].
The [LAN-Fax] dialog box appears.
C Click [Edit Cover Sheet...].

The [Cover Sheet] dialog box appears.
D Select a cover sheet file from the dropdown list or after clicking [Browse...]
in [Select Cover Sheet].
The selection made in [Select Cover Sheet] is not canceled unless you select an-
other file. If you want to change only destination information, omit this step
and proceed to step E.
5 E Select the type of information from [To:].
You can select [Use Address Book], [To Whom It May Concern], [Edit Names], or
[(None)]. Selecting [Edit Names] allows you to enter company, department, and
contact names.
F To print the date, select the [With a Date] check box.

G Enter the sender information.
You can enter company, department, and contact names, and telephone and
fax numbers.
To add a message, select the [With a Message] check box, and then enter a message.
H Click [OK].
I Specify a destination.
J Click the [Send Options] tab, and then select the [Attach a Cover Sheet] check
box.
K Click [Send] or [Send & Print].
166
Managing Facsimile Functions Using SmartDeviceMonitor for

Admin
You can check information about this machine's fax functions using a computer
and save files on a computer using SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.
Note
❒ For details about SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin and its installation, see
“Monitoring and Configuring the Printer”, Network Guide.
❒ For details, see Network Guide and SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin Help.
Reference
LAN-Fax Operation Messages

This section explains typical operation error messages displayed on the comput- 5
er when using the LAN-Fax Driver, and solutions to those messages.
Message Causes and Solutions
Cannot connect to the de- Check the network connection.
vice. Check that the power is turned on.
The number of entries in The number of destinations specified exceeds the maxi-
Destinations exceed the mum possible. The maximum number of destinations
limits. Up to 300 entries that can be specified at one time is 300.
can be entered.
"LAN-Fax" has already The [LAN-Fax] dialog box is already open. Quit LAN-Fax
been launched. Cannot once, and then start it up again.
launch it again.
Failed to allocate memo- Available memory on the computer is insufficient. Quit
ry. applications currently not in use.
167
Fax via Computer
Programming Destination Information

from Web Browser
If the receiving machine is compliant with T.37 full mode Internet Fax, you can
program the receiver's properties from Web Image Monitor. You can program
the following properties:
• Compression type
• Paper size
• Resolution
Note
❒ It is recommended that you use a Web Image Monitor running under the
same network environment as this machine. Otherwise, the Web browser
may not open and an error may occur.
❒ You can also check and manage the documents using DeskTopBinder.
5 ❒ For a detailed description, see Help for Web Image Monitor.
❒ When a receiver that is programmed as full mode in the Address Book re-
turns a Reception Notice e-mail, the contents of the newly received e-mail
overwrite the existing information.
Reference
To Edit Machine Properties Already Programmed

Follow these steps to use Web Image Monitor to edit information about the des-
tination machine registered in the Address Book.
A Start the Web browser.

B Enter the IPv4 address of the machine you want to monitor after “http://” in
the address field.
The top screen is displayed.
C Click [Login], and then enter the Administrator's name and password.
D Click [Address Book] in the left pane.
The Address Book is displayed.
E Click the radio button to the left of the machine you want to modify, and
then click [Change].
The [Change User] page appears.
168
Programming Destination Information from Web Browser
F Set the properties for Internet Fax data format other than the mode selection.
If you change the mode to “Simple Mode”, you cannot set machine properties.
G Click [OK] at the upper-left of the screen.

To cancel the setting, click [Cancel] in the upper-left of the screen.
H Close the Web browser.
To Add New Receiver

Follow these steps to use Web Image Monitor to add a new destination to the
Address Book.

B Enter the IPv4 address of the machine you want to monitor after “http://” in 5
the address field.
The top screen is displayed.
C Click [Login], and then enter the Administrator's name and password.
D Click [Address Book] in the left pane.
E Click [Add User].

The [Add User] page appears.
F Enter the registration number, name, and e-mail address, then set the nec-
essary properties.
You can set the Internet Fax data format after entering the e-mail address.
G Click [Full Mode] under [Internet Fax Data Format], and set the properties ac-
cording to the receiver's properties.
If you change the mode to “Simple Mode”, you cannot set machine properties.
H Click [OK] in the upper-left of the screen.

To cancel the setting, click [Cancel] in the upper-left of the screen.
I Close the Web browser.
169
Fax via Computer
170
6. Appendix
This section explains features and specifications of the facsimile function.
Programming Frequently Used Functions

to User Function Keys
For time saving and convenience, register frequently used functions to User
Function keys ({F1}, {F2}, and {F3}).
You can register the following functions to User Function keys:
• Print Journal
• TX File Status
• RX File Status
• 2 Sided TX (option)
• Print Fax Header
• Forwarding
• Switch Reception Mode
• Start Manual Reception
• Sender Settings
• E-mail Options (option)
• Print TX Status Report
• Manual E-mail Reception (option)
• Use SMTP Server (option)
• SUB/SEP Code
• PIN Code TX
• pNot programmed
Reference
171
Appendix
Optional Equipment
This section explains the functions of options.
Handset
You can make or receive calls by installing the optional handset and dialing
manually.
Reference
p.77 “On Hook Dial”
p.79 “Manual Dial”
172
Specifications
Specifications
❖ Fax Transmission and Reception
Standard G3
Resolution G3:
8 × 3.85/mm, 200 × 100 dpi (Standard character),
8 × 7.7/mm, 200 × 200 dpi (Detail character),
8 × 15.4/mm (Fine character)
Transmission time G3: 3 seconds at 28,800 bps, Standard resolution
(JBIG transmission: 2 seconds)
Data compression method MH, MR, MMR, JBIG
Maximum original size Standard size: A4L, 81/2" × 14"
Custom size: 216 × 1200 mm, 81/2" × 47"
Maximum scanning size 216 × 1200 mm, 81/2" × 47"
Print process Printing on standard paper using a laser
Transmission speed G3:
33,600 / 31,200 / 28,800 / 26,400 / 24,000 / 21,600 / 19,200 / 6
16,800 / 14,400 / 12,000 / 9,600 / 7,200 / 4,800 / 2,400bps
(auto shift down system)
❖ Power Consumption
Immediate Transmission approx. 110 W
Memory Transmission approx. 85 W
Memory Reception approx. 85 W
Reception approx. 350 W
❖ IP-Fax Transmission and Reception

Network LAN: Local Area Network
Ethernet/10base-T, 100base-TX, IEEE802.11b (wireless LAN)
Scan line density 8 × 3.85/mm, 200 × 100 dpi (Standard character),
8 × 7.7/mm, 200 × 200 dpi (Detail character),
8 × 15.4/mm (Fine character)
Maximum original size Standard size: A4L, 81/2" × 14"
Custom size: 216 × 1200 mm, 81/2" × 47"
Maximum scanning size 216 × 1200 mm, 81/2" × 47"
Transmission protocol Recommendation: T.38, TCP, UDP/IP communication, SIP
(RFC 3261 compliant), H.323 v2
Compatible machines IP-Fax compatible machines
173
Appendix
IP-Fax transmission function Specify an IPv4 address and send faxes to an IP-Fax compati-
ble fax through a network.
Also capable of sending faxes to a G3 fax connected to a tele-
phone line via a VoIP gateway.
IP-Fax reception function Receive faxes sent from an IP-Fax compatible fax through a
network.
Also capable of receiving faxes from a G3 fax connected to a
telephone line via a VoIP gateway.
❖ Internet Fax Transmission and Reception

Network LAN : Local Area Network
Ethernet/10Base-T, 100Base-TX, IEEE802.11b (wireless LAN)
Transmit function E-mail
Scan line density 200 × 100 dpi (Standard character), 200 × 200 dpi (Detail char-
acter), 200 × 400 dpi (Fine character) *1
Original size : Scanning width A4
Communication Protocols • Transmission
SMTP, TCP/IP
• Reception
6 POP3, SMTP, IMAP4, TCP/IP
E-mail format Single/Multi-part, MIME Conversion
Attached file forms: TIFF-F (MH, MR *1 , MMR *1 compression)
Authentication method SMTP-AUTH, POP before SMTP, A-POP
Internet communication Send and receive e-mail with a computer that has an e-mail
address
E-mail send functions Automatic conversion of sent documents to e-mail format and
e-mail transmission. Memory transmission only.
E-mail receive functions Automatic detection and printing of appended TIFF-F (MH)
files and ASCII text. Memory reception only.
*1 Full mode
174
Specifications
Specifications Required for the Internet Fax Destination

Machines
This machine can communicate with Internet Fax machines that satisfy the fol-
lowing specification requirements.
When communicating with full mode compatible machines, you can take ad-
vantage of higher specifications for coding, original size, and resolution. For de-
tails about the specifications available in full mode, see “Internet Fax
Transmission and Reception” in “Specifications”.
Communication protocols • Transmission
SMTP
• Reception
POP3, SMTP, IMAP4
E-mail format • Format
MIME, Base64
• Content-Type
Image/tiff
Multipart/mixed (text/plain, Image/tiff (attached file forms))
Data format • Profile
TIFF Profile S 6
• Coding
MH
• Original size
A4
• Resolution (dpi)
200 × 100/200 × 200 or 204 × 98/204 × 196
Reference
p.173 “Specifications”
175
Appendix
Maximum Values
The following list contains the maximum value for each item.
Item Description
Memory 4 MB
Number of documents you can store in memory for Memory Transmission 200
Number of pages you can store in memory (using A4 Standard <ITU-T q1 Approx. 320
Chart>)
Number of destinations you can register in the destination list 150
Number of groups you can register 10
Number of destinations you can register in a group 100
Number of destinations you can specify per file 300
Number of destinations you can specify for all files (including files in memory) 300
Number of destinations you can search for at a time 100
Number of redials the machine can store 10
Number of digits for a destination 128
6 Number of characters you can enter in the e-mail subject line 128
Number of digits for a SEP/SUB/PWD/SID Code 20
Number of digits in a PIN Code 20
Number of communication results you can check on this machine 100
Number of communication results printed in the Journal 50
Number of special senders you can register 30
Number of LAN-Fax Driver transmission results you can check from a net- 70
work computer “SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin”, “DeskTopBinder”, or
Web Image Monitor.
Number of documents sent from a LAN-Fax Driver that the machine can re- 200
tain as files to be sent
Note
❒ The maximum number of pages that can be stored or transmitted may de-
crease depending on the contents of documents.
176
INDEX
C
1 Sided for 1st Page, 107 Canceling a Memory Transmission, 81
2 Sided from 1st Page, 107 Canceling an Immediate Transmission, 81
2 Sided TX, 107 Canceling a transmission, 81
Canceling a transmission before the
A original is scanned, 81
Canceling a transmission before the
Acceptable original sizes, 35 transmission is started, 83
Add Dest, 20 Canceling a transmission of an Internet Fax, 81
Address Book, 149, 162 Canceling a transmission while the
Address Book Management, 59 original is being scanned, 81
Add User, 169 Canceling a transmission while the
Adjust Sound Volume, 9 original is being transmitted, 82
Administrator Tools, 9 Caution, 4
Advanced Search, 74 Center Mark, 9, 124
ARDF, 5 Check Destination key, 56
Attach a Cover Sheet, 158 Checkered Mark, 9, 123
Attaching a created cover sheet, 166 Checking files stored in memory, 129
Attach Subject, 92 Checking the reception result, 139
Authorized Reception, 9 Checking the result of the communication, 136
Authorized Reception per Sender, 9 Checking the result of the
Auto e-mail reception, 115 Immediate Transmission, 137
Auto fax reception power-up, 122 Checking the specified destination, 56
Automatic Redial, 19 Checking the transmission result, 133
Auto Reception, 114 Checking transmission using
Auto Run program, 150 LAN-Fax Driver, 159
Auto Switch, 113 Clear Modes key, 6, 81
Clear/Stop key, 81, 82
B Communicating indicator, 82
Communication Failure Report, 138
Basic Transmission, 154
Communication Page Count, 9
Before use, 148
Communication Result Report, 136
Broadcasting sequence, 20
Confirming by e-mail, 135
Bypassing the SMTP server, 51
Confirming by report, 134, 140
Confirming by report and e-mail, 135
Confirming on display, 133, 139
Confirming the reservations for
SEP Code Reception, 105
Confirming the result of a
SEP Code Reception, 106
Confirming transmission results by e-mail, 160
Creating a cover sheet, 165
CSI - Own Fax Number, 112
177
D G
Darker key, 40 G3 Analog Line, 9
Deleting programmed destinations, 164 Gatekeeper (VoIP gatekeeper), 26
Detail, 39 Gateway Settings, 9
Detecting blank sheet, 36 Gateway (VoIP gateway), 26
Display List, 65 General Settings/Adjust, 9
Double-Sided Transmission, 107
Dual Access, 20 H
E H.323, 26
H.323 Settings, 9
ECM (Error Correction Mode), 21 Handset, 79, 113, 172
Edit Cover Sheet..., 166 How to Read This Manual, 5
EditDest, 45, 48
Editing Address Book, 162 I
Editing fax cover sheets, 165
Editing programmed destinations, 163 If memory runs out while storing an original, 21
If there is no paper of the correct size, 126
E-mail, 87
Image density (contrast), 40
E-mail Options, 92
Image Density key, 40
E-mail Settings, 9
Immediate Reception, 109
E-mail subject, 31
Immediate Transmission, 13, 21
E-mail text, 116
Immediate TX Result Report, 137
E-mail TX Result, 135
Important Safety Instructions, 4
E-mail TX results, 160
Installing individual applications, 151
Enable H.323, 9
Internet fax destination machines, 175
Enable SIP, 9
Internet Fax functions, 28
Entering an e-mail address, 48
Internet Fax Settings, 9
Entering an IP-Fax destination, 45
IP, 72
Entering a pause, 43
IP-Fax functions, 24
Entering a tone, 43
IP-Fax Settings, 9
Entering numbers using the number keys, 42
Escape key, 7
J
External telephone, 79, 113
JBIG reception, 121
F JBIG transmission, 39
Job Information key, 83, 129, 133, 139, 141
Facsimile key, 6
Fax Features, 9 Journal, 140, 142
Journal by e-mail, 144
Fax Header Print, 96
Just size printing, 127
Fax via computer, 147
Fine, 39
L
Folder TX Result Report, 9
Forwarding, 9 Label Insertion, 98
Forwarding destination, 118 LAN-Fax Cover Sheet Editor, 150, 165
Forwarding received documents, 118 LAN-Fax Driver, 147, 149
Full mode, 32, 168 LAN-Fax operation messages, 167
Function list, 9 LAN-Fax Result Report, 161
Functions not available for e-mail reception, 31 LDAP Search, 62
Functions not available for LDAP server, 62
e-mail transmission, 31 Lighter key, 40
Functions not available for
IP-Fax transmission, 27
178
M Placing originals, 33
Preview, 158
Making settings for option configuration, 153 Print, 131
Managing facsimile functions using Print completion beep, 123
SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin, 167 Print Fax Header, 96, 158
Manual, 45, 48 Printing a file from memory, 131
Manual Dial, 79 Printing a file received with Memory Lock, 145
Manual E-mail Reception, 116 Printing a list of files in memory, 129
Manual Reception, 113 Printing and saving, 161
Manuals for This Machine, i Printing the Journal, 141
Maximum E-mail Size, 9 Print Journal, 9, 141
Maximum values, 176 Print Memory Lock File, 145
MDN, 94 Print Reception Time, 9
Memory Lock, 9 Print TX Standby File, 131
Memory Reception, 110 Print TX Standby File List, 9, 129
Memory Storage Report, 80 Program, 56, 57, 60, 61
Memory Transmission, 13, 15 Program Fax Information, 9
Memory Transmission sequence, 20 Programmed Name, 98
Menu Protect, 9 Program Memory Lock ID, 9
Mixing scan settings for a Programming destination information
multiple page original, 41 from Web browser, 168
Programming destinations from
N Check Destination screen, 60
Programming destinations from
Name of major item, 5
Redial screen, 61
Names of major functions, 5
Programming destinations in the
Notes on using Internet Fax, 30
Address Book, 59
Notes on using IP-Fax, 27
Programming frequently used functions
NOTICE, 1
to User Function keys, 171
Programming new destinations, 162
O
Program Special Sender, 9
OK key, 7 Properties, 152
On Hook Dial, 77 PWD Code, 105
On Hook Dial key, 77
On Hook Release Time, 9 Q
Operation switch, 122
Quick Dial key, 53, 54
Optional equipment, 172
Original size, 35 R
Original Type, 38
RDS On/Off, 9
P Reading the display, 6
Reading the display panel and using keys, 7
Page separation and length reduction, 125
Received images, 116
Paper size and scanned area, 35
Receive File indicator, 111, 145
Parallel Memory Transmission, 13, 19
Receiving documents according to
Parameter Setting, 9
parameter-specified settings, 112
Password (PWD), 105
Receiving documents unconditionally, 111
Password (SID), 102
Receiving Internet Fax documents, 115
Pause/Redial key, 43, 57
Reception functions, 118
Photo, 38
Reception modes, 113
PIN Code Transmission, 90
Reception Notice, 94
PIN Code TX, 90
Reception notice message, 94
Placing into the ARDF, 33
Reception Settings, 9
Placing on the exposure glass, 33
Reception time, 124
179
Redial, 57 Simultaneous Broadcast, 20
Regarding IP-Fax destinations, 47 SIP, 26
Report, 80, 105, 106, 129, 136, 137, 138, SIP server, 26
142, 161 SIP Settings, 9
Resolution, 39 SMTP reception using Internet Fax, 119
Returning the machine to the standby mode, 6 SMTP RX File Delivery, 9
Return Receipt, 94 Specifications, 173
Routing e-mail received via SMTP, 120 Specifying a destination, 42
RTI - Own Name, 112 Specifying a destination by
RX File Status, 139 directly entering, 156
RX Mode Auto Switch Time, 9 Specifying a destination using
Address Book, 155
S Specifying a destination using a
destination list, 155
Saving as files, 158 Specifying a destination using the
Scan Settings, 38 Quick Dial keys, 53
Scroll keys, 7 Specifying a group of destinations using
Search Address Book, 62 the Quick Dial keys, 54
Search by destination list, 65 Specifying a host name, 47
Search by E-mail Address, 70 Specifying an alias telephone number, 47
Search by fax number, 68 Specifying an IPv4 address, 45
Search by IP-Fax destination, 72 Specifying a SIP user name, 47
Search by LDAP server, 74 Specifying options, 157
Search by Name, 63 Stamp, 87
Search by Registration No., 66 Standard, 39
Search Destination key, 62 Start Manual Reception, 113
Search Fax Destination, 68, 72 Stop Communication, 83
Searching for a destination in the Stop TX, 82, 83
Address Book, 62 SUB Code TX, 100
Search LDAP, 62, 74 Subject, 92
Select Dial/Push Phone, 9 SUB/SEP Code, 100, 103
Selecting type of transmission, 14 Substitute Reception, 111
Selection keys, 7 Switching between Memory and
Select Server, 74 Immediate Transmission, 13
Send at Specified Time, 85 Switching the reception mode, 114
Sender Settings, 87 Switch Reception Mode, 9
Sending at a specific time, 85 Switch RX Mode key, 113, 114
Sending at specific time, 157 Symbols, 5
Sending by Internet Fax, 48 System Settings, 59
Sending by IP-Fax, 45
Sending fax documents from computers, 147 T
Sending multiple originals using the
exposure glass, 18, 23 T.37 full mode, 32, 168
Sending over a fax line, 42 Terminology, 26
Sending to an e-mail address, 48 Text, 38
Send Later, 85 TIFF-F format, 28
SEP Code RX, 103 To add new receiver, 169
SEP Code RX Reserve Report, 105 To edit machine properties
SEP Code RX Result Report, 106 already programmed, 168
Setting LAN-Fax Driver properties, 152 Tone, 43
Setting print properties, 152 Top to Bottom, 107
Setting priority trays, 126 Top to Top, 107
Set User Function Key, 9 Transmission, 15, 21
SID Code, 102 Transmission modes, 13
180
Transmitting Journal by e-mail, 144 U
TSI Print (Transmitting Subscriber Identification
Print), 125 User Function keys, 171
TSI - Transmitting Subscriber User Tools/Counter key, 9, 59
Identification, 125 Using the machine's Address Book data in
Two-Sided Transmission, 107 the destination list of the LAN-Fax, 164
TX File Status, 133 Using the Quick Dial keys, 53
TX Mode, 85, 92, 94, 96, 98, 100, 103 Using the software, 148
TX Standby File List, 129
Types of reception, 109
181
182 EN USA B284-7623
In accordance with IEC 60417, this machine uses the following symbols for the main power switch:
a means POWER ON.
c means STAND BY.
Trademarks
Microsoft®, Windows®, Windows NT® and Outlook® are registered trademarks or trademarks of Mi-
crosoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
PowerPC® is a trademark of International Business Machines Corporation in the United States, other
countries, or both.
Adobe® and Acrobat® are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation.
Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and might be trademarks of their
respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights to those marks.
The proper names of the Windows operating systems are as follows:
• The product name of Windows® 95 is Microsoft® Windows® 95
• The product name of Windows® Me is Microsoft® Windows® Millennium Edition (Windows Me)
• The product names of Windows® 2000 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Advanced Server
Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Server
Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Professional
• The product names of Windows® XP are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows® XP Professional
Microsoft® Windows® XP Home Edition
• The product names of Windows ServerTM 2003 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows ServerTM 2003 Standard Edition
Microsoft® Windows ServerTM 2003 Enterprise Edition
Microsoft® Windows ServerTM 2003 Web Edition
• The product names of Windows NT® are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows NT® Server 4.0
Microsoft® Windows NT® Workstation 4.0
Copyright © 2006
Operating Instructions Facsimile Reference
EN USA B284-7623
Printer Reference
1 Preparing the Machine

2 Setting Up the Printer Driver
3 Other Print Operations
4 The Functions and Settings of the Machine
5 Appendix
Introduction
Important
ating the machine.
Do not copy or print any item for which reproduction is prohibited by law.
Copying or printing the following items is generally prohibited by local law:
bank notes, revenue stamps, bonds, stock certificates, bank drafts, checks, passports, driver's licens-
es.
The preceding list is meant as a guide only and is not inclusive. We assume no responsibility for its
completeness or accuracy. If you have any questions concerning the legality of copying or printing cer-
tain items, consult with your legal advisor.
Notes:
Caution:
Important
❒ Depending on which country you are in, there m ay also be html manuals. To

Be sure to read the Safety Information in this manual before using the ma-
chine.

❖ Trouble Shooting
❖ Copy Reference
i
❖ Network Guide
❖ Other manuals
• PostScript 3 Supplement
• UNIX Supplement
Note
dealer.
ii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Notice ......................................................................................................................1
Symbols .....................................................................................................................3
Display Panel..........................................................................................................4
Reading the Display and Using Keys.........................................................................5
Printer Features Menu ...........................................................................................6
Setting Paper on the Bypass Tray...................................................................... 10
Setting the Paper Size Using the Control Panel ......................................................12
Setting the Custom Size Paper Using the Control Panel .........................................14
Setting Thick Paper or OHP Transparencies Using the Control Panel ....................16
Setting envelope Using the Control Panel ............................................................... 17
1. Preparing the Machine

Confirming the Connection Method...................................................................19
Network Connection.................................................................................................19
Local Connection .....................................................................................................22
Installing the Printer Driver................................................................................. 23
Quick Install..............................................................................................................23
Installing the Printer Driver for the Selected Port .....................................................24
Using as a Windows Network Printer ................................................................34
Using as a NetWare Print Server / Remote Printer ...........................................36
Form Feed................................................................................................................38
Banner Page ............................................................................................................38
Printing after Resetting the Printer ...........................................................................38
Installing the Printer Driver Using USB .............................................................39
Windows Me - USB ..................................................................................................39
Windows 2000 - USB ...............................................................................................41
Windows XP, Windows Server 2003 - USB .............................................................42
Printing with Parallel Connection.......................................................................44
Printing with Bluetooth Connection...................................................................46
Supported Profiles....................................................................................................46
Printing with Bluetooth Connection .......................................................................... 46
Configuring Security Mode Settings.........................................................................48
Printing in the Security Mode ...................................................................................48
Making Option Settings for the Printer ..............................................................49
Conditions for Bidirectional Communication ............................................................ 49
If Bidirectional Communication Is Disabled..............................................................50
Installing Font Manager 2000..............................................................................52
Using Adobe PageMaker Version 6.0, 6.5, or 7.0 ..............................................53
iii
2. Setting Up the Printer Driver
PCL - Accessing the Printer Properties.............................................................55
Windows 95 / 98 / Me - Accessing the Printer Properties ........................................55
Windows 2000 - Accessing the Printer Properties ...................................................56
Windows XP, Windows Server 2003 - Accessing the Printer Properties .................58
Windows NT 4.0 - Accessing the Printer Properties ................................................59
RPCS - Accessing the Printer Properties ..........................................................62
3. Other Print Operations

Printing a PDF File Directly................................................................................. 71
Printing Method ........................................................................................................71
Using DeskTopBinder Lite .......................................................................................71
Using commands .....................................................................................................74
Unauthorized Copy Control ................................................................................ 75
Using [Data security for copying] .................................................................................76
Using [Mask type:] .....................................................................................................78
Important Notice.......................................................................................................79
Form Feed.............................................................................................................80
Printing from a Selected Tray...................................................................................80
Canceling a Print Job ...............................................................................................81
Canceling a Print Job ..........................................................................................83
Canceling a Print Job Using the Control Panel ........................................................83
Windows - Canceling a Print Job from the computer ...............................................83
Checking the Error Log .......................................................................................85
Collate ...................................................................................................................86
4. The Functions and Settings of the Machine

Mainframe .............................................................................................................87
Functions..................................................................................................................87
Interface ...................................................................................................................87
List of the Setting Items ......................................................................................88
Web Image Monitor..................................................................................................88
telnet ........................................................................................................................91
Settings that can be used with PostScript 3.............................................................92
5. Appendix
Specifications.......................................................................................................93
Options.....................................................................................................................94
INDEX......................................................................................................... 96
iv
Notice
Note to users in the United States of America
Note:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class
B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed
to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential in-
stallation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency ener-
gy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause
harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee
that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does
cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be deter-
mined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to cor-
rect the interference by one more of the following measures:
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which
the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio /TV technician for help.
Caution:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
Declaration of Conformity
Product Name: Printer/Scanner Unit
Model Number: 816/Dsm416/LD016/Aficio MP 161 816f/Dsm416f/LD016f/Afi-
cio MP 161F 816pf/Dsm416pf/LD016spf/Aficio MP 161SPF
Responsible party: Ricoh Corporation
Address: 5 Dedrick Place, West Caldwell, NJ 07006
Telephone number: 973-882-2000
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. this device must accept any interference received, including interference that
may cause undesired operation.
A Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used for con-
nections to a host computer (and/or peripheral) in order to meet FCC emis-
sion limits.
B An AC adapter with a ferrite core must be used for RF interference suppres-
sion.
1
Note to users in Canada
Note:
Remarque concernant les utilisateurs au Canada

Avertissement:
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Can-
ada.
2
Symbols

notes. They can be found in the “Safety Information” section of About This Ma-
chine.

Indicates supplementary explanations of the machine’s functions, and instruc-

[]
Indicates the names of keys that appear on the machine’s display panel.
{}
Indicates the names of keys on the machine’s control panel.
3
Display Panel
This section describes configuration using the display panel when the printer
function is selected.
ASC009S
1. Operational status or messages 3. [Menu]

Displays current machine status, such as Press to display the menu to select the
“Ready”, “Offline”, and “Printing...”. following options:
2. [JobReset] • [Show Error Log]
Displays the error logs of print jobs
Press to cancel the current print job. If
that are sent from a computer.
you press it when the machine is offline
and Hex Dump is selected, Hex Dump is
canceled.
Note
❒ When the power is turned on, the copier display is shown. This is a factory
default. This initial setting can be changed. See “System Settings”, General
Settings Guide.
4
Reading the Display and Using Keys
This section explains how to read the display and using the selection key for the
initial display.
ASC010S
1. Scroll keys 3. {Escape} key

Press to move the cursor in each direc- Press to cancel an operation or return to
tion, step by step. the previous display.
When the {U}, {T}, {V}, or {W} key ap- 4. Selection keys
pears in this manual, press the scroll key
Correspond to the function items at the
of the same direction.
bottom line on the display. Example: Ba-
2. {OK} key sic screen When the instruction “press
Press to set a selected item or entered nu- [JobReset]” appears in this manual, press
meric value. the left selection key.
Note
❒ The Printer display is set as the default screen when the machine is turned on.
You can change the settings in [System Settings]. See General Settings Guide.
5
Printer Features Menu
The following explains settings and meanings of functions on Printer Feature.
Printer Feature screen appears when you press the {User Tools/Counter} key. For
details, see “Printer Features”, General Settings Guide.
❖ List/Test Print
Menu Description
Multiple Lists You can print the configuration page and er-
ror log.
Config. Page You can print the machine's current configu-
ration values.
Error Log You can print error logs listing all errors that
occurred during printing.
Menu List You can print a Menu List showing the ma-
chine's function menus.
PCL Config./Font Page You can print the current configuration and
installed PCL font list.
PS Config./Font Page You can print the current configuration and
installed PostScript font list.
PDF Config./Font Page You can print the current configuration and
installed PDF font list.
This menu can be selected only when the op-
tional PostScript 3 unit is installed.
Hex Dump You can print in the Hex Dump mode.
❖ Maintenance
Menu Description
Menu Protect This function lets you protect menu settings
from accidental change. It makes it impossi-
ble to change menu settings with normal
procedures unless you perform the required
key operations.
In a network environment, only administra-
tors can make changes to menu settings.
List/Test Print Lock You can lock the [List/Test Print] menu.
❖ System
Menu Description
Print Error Report You can print an error report when a printer
or memory error occurs.
Auto Continue You can select this to enable Auto Continue.
When it is On, printing continues after a sys-
tem error occurs.
Memory Overflow Select this to have a memory overflow error
report printed.
6
Menu Description
Memory Usage You can select the amount of memory used
in Font Priority or Frame Priority, according
to paper size or resolution.
Duplex You can select to have print on both sides of
each page.
Copies You can specify the number of print sets.
This setting is disabled if the number of pag-
es to print has been specified with the printer
driver or another command.
Blank Page Print You can select whether or not to print blank
pages.
Edge Smoothing Set this to enable Edge Smoothing.
• On (Default)
• Off
Note
❒ If Toner Saving is set to On, Edge
Smoothing is ignored even if it is set to
On.
Toner Saving Set this to enable Toner Saving.
• On (Default)
• Off
Printer Language You can specify the printer language.
Sub Paper Size You can enable the Auto Substitute Paper
Size (A4↔LT) feature.
Page Size You can select the default paper size.
Letterhead Setting You can rotate original images when printing.
When printing, original images are always
rotated by 180 degrees. Therefore, output
might not be as expected when printing onto
letterhead or preprinted paper requiring ori-
entation. Using this function, you can specify
image rotation.
Bypass Tray Priority You can specify which of the two options,
(Printer) Driver / Command or Machine Set-
tings, has priority for determining the paper
size for the bypass tray.
Edge to Edge Print You can select whether or not to print on the
entire sheet.
Default Printer Lang. You can set the default printer language if
the machine cannot find the printer language
automatically.
Tray Switching You can set to switch the paper tray.
RAM Disk You can change the settings of the RAM disk.
7
❖ Host Interface
Menu Description
I/O Buffer You can set the size of the I/O Buffer. Nor-
mally it is not necessary to change this setting.
I/O Timeout You can set how many seconds the machine
should wait before ending a print job. If data
from another port usually arrives in the mid-
dle of a print job, you should increase this
timeout period.
❖ PCL Menu
Menu Description
Orientation You can set the page orientation.
Form Lines You can set the number of lines per page.
Font Source You can set the storage location of the de-
fault font.
Font Number You can set the ID of the default font you
want to use.
Point Size You can set the point size you want to use for
the selected font.
Font Pitch You can set the number of characters per
inch for the selected font.
Symbol Set You can specify the set of print characters for
the selected font. The available options are as
follows:
Courier Font You can select a courier font type.
Ext. A4 Width You can extend the printing area width
when printing on A4 sheet with PCL.
Append CR to LF When set to On, a carriage return will follow
each line feed: CR=CR, LF=CR−LF, FF=CR−FF.
Resolution You can set the print resolution in dots per inch.
❖ PS Menu (optional)
Menu Description
Data Format You can select a data format.
❖ PDF Menu (optional)

Menu Description
Change PDF Password You can set the password for the PDF file ex-
ecuting PDF Direct Print.
PDF Group Password You can set the group password already
specified with DeskTopBinder Lite.
8
Note
❒ Depending on which optional units you have installed or the printer lan-
guage you have selected, some options are not displayed.
❒ Depending on the security settings, you might not be able to set certain op-
tions.
Reference
For details, see “Printer Features”, General Settings Guide.
For more information about copier features and system settings, see Copy
Reference and General Settings Guide.
9
Setting Paper on the Bypass Tray
This section gives instructions for setting paper on the bypass tray.
For details about paper size and paper type, see “Recommended Paper Sizes and
Types”, About This Machine.
Important
❒ The following functions are disabled when printing from the bypass tray:
• Duplex printing
• Auto Tray Select
• Auto Tray Switching
❒ When printing using the printer function, original images are always rotated
by 180 degrees (the orientation of images to be printed is opposite to that of
the copier function). When printing onto paper with specific orientation re-
quirements, such as envelopes and letterheads, be sure to rotate the paper
feed orientation to 180 degrees.
❒ Be sure to set the paper size using the printer driver when printing data from
the computer. The paper size set using the printer driver has priority over the
one set using the control panel.
❒ Paper that is thicker than 157 g/m2, 42 lb. (max.) cannot be printed from the
bypass tray.
A Open the bypass tray.
ARL009S
10
B Adjust the paper guides to the paper size, and then gently insert paper face
down into the bypass tray.
ABW020S1
1. Extender
2. Paper guides
• Open out the extender to support paper sizes larger than A4 L, 81/2 ×11 L.
• If the paper guides are not flush against the paper, skewing and misfeeds
might occur.
• Gently insert paper until it stops.
• Do not stack paper over the limit mark, otherwise a skewed image or mis-
feeds might occur.
• Fan the paper to get air between the sheets to avoid a multi-sheet feed.
• When setting an OHP transparency, make sure that its front and back sides
are properly positioned.
C Push down the paper guide release lever.
ASP003S
D Set the paper size using the printer driver or the control panel.
11
Note
❒ Paper within the following dimensions can be set in the bypass tray:
• Vertical: 90 - 216 mm (3.55 - 8.5 in.)
• Horizontal: 139 - 600 mm (5.48 - 23.62 in.)
❒ Be sure to set the paper with the side you want to print facing down in the
bypass tray.
❒ The number of sheets that can be loaded in the bypass tray depends on the
paper type.
❒ When loading OHP transparencies or thick paper in the bypass tray, make
the paper setting using the control panel or printer driver.
Reference
For details about setting the paper size, see p.12 “Setting the Paper Size Us-
ing the Control Panel”.
For details about setting paper in the regular paper tray, see General Set-
tings Guide.
When loading custom size paper, see p.14 “Setting the Custom Size Paper
Using the Control Panel”.
Select paper type when printing onto OHP transparencies or thick paper
(over 90.2 g/m2, 24 lb.). For details, see p.16 “Setting Thick Paper or OHP
Transparencies Using the Control Panel”.
Select paper type when printing onto envelopes. For details, see p.17 “Set-
ting envelope Using the Control Panel”.
When loading letterhead paper, pay attention to its orientation. See Gener-
al Settings Guide.
Setting the Paper Size Using the Control Panel

This procedure describes how to set paper size of the bypass tray using the con-
trol panel. If you select the printer driver to set paper size, this procedure is not
necessary.
ASP004S
12
B Select [System Settings] using {T} or {U}, and then press the {OK} key.
C Select [Tray Paper Settings] using {T} or {U}, and then press the {OK} key.
D Select [Printer Bypass Paper Size] using {T} or {U}, and then press the {OK}
key.
E Select the paper size using the scroll keys, and then press the {OK} key.
F Press the {User Tools/Counter} key to return to the default screen.

Reference
See the printer driver Help about the settings from the printer drivers.
Select paper type when printing onto OHP transparencies or thick paper.
For details, see p.16 “Setting Thick Paper or OHP Transparencies Using the
Control Panel”.
Select paper type when printing onto envelopes. For details, see p.17 “Set-
ting envelope Using the Control Panel”.
13
Setting the Custom Size Paper Using the Control Panel
The following procedures are not required if you select the printer driver for the
settings. In that case, set the paper size using the printer driver.
Important
❒ Custom size settings set using the printer driver have priority over those set
using the machine's control panel.
❒ When the printer driver is not used, make settings using the control panel.
ASP004S
D Select [Printer Bypass Paper Size] using {T} or {U}, and then press the {OK}
key.
14
E Select [Custom Size] using the scroll keys, and then press the {OK} key.
F Enter the horizontal size of the paper using the number keys, and press
{q}.
Available size: 139 - 600 mm (5.48 - 23.62 in.)
G Enter the vertical size of the paper using the number keys, and press {q}.
Available size: 90 - 216 mm (3.55 - 8.5 in.)
H Press the {User Tools/Counter} key to return to the default screen.

Note
❒ If the printer driver is not used, select [Machine Settings] from [Bypass Tray
Priority] in [System] of [Printer Features] (see “Printer Features”, General Set-
tings Guide). Set paper size using the control panel.
Reference
For printer driver settings, see the printer driver Help.
15
Setting Thick Paper or OHP Transparencies Using the Control
Panel
The following procedures are not required if you select the printer driver for the
settings. In that case, set the paper size using the printer driver.
Important
❒ Paper size settings set using the printer driver have priority over those set us-
ing the machine's control panel.
❒ When the printer driver is not used, make settings using the control panel.
ASP004S
D Select [Paper Type:Bypass Tray] using {T} or {U}, and then press the {OK}
key.
16
E Select paper type from the menu using {T} or {U}, and then press the {OK}
key.
F Press the {User Tools/Counter} key to return to the default screen.

Note
❒ The settings made will remain valid until they are reset again. After print-
ing on thick paper or OHP Transparencies, be sure to clear settings for the
next user.
Reference
For the printer driver settings, see the printer driver Help.
For details about printing onto envelopes, see p.17 “Setting envelope Us-
ing the Control Panel”.
Setting envelope Using the Control Panel

B Select [System Settings] using the {U} or {T} key, and then press the {OK}
key.
C Select [Tray Paper Settings] using the {U} or {T} key, and then press the {OK}
key.
D Select [Paper Type:Bypass Tray] using the {U} or {T} key, and then press the
{OK} key.
17
E Select [Thick Paper] using the {U} or {T} key, and then press the {OK} key.
F Select [Printer Bypass Paper Size], and then press the {OK} key.
G Select the paper envelope size from [C6envL], [C5envL], or [DlenvL], and
then press the {OK} key.
H Press the {User Tools/Counter} key to return to the default screen.
18
1. Preparing the Machine
Confirming the Connection Method

This machine supports network and local connection.
Before installing the printer driver, check how the machine is connected. Follow
the driver installation procedure that is appropriate to the connection method.
Network Connection
This machine can be used as a Windows printing port or network printer.
Using This Machine as the Windows Printing port

Network connections can be established through Ethernet and IEEE 802.11b.
Available ports are determined based on the combination of Windows operating
system version and connection method used.
ZZZ035S
❖ Windows 95 / 98
Connection Method Available Ports
Ethernet / IEEE 802.11b SmartDeviceMonitor for Client port
❖ Windows Me
19
Preparing the Machine
❖ Windows 2000
Standard TCP/IP
1 LPR port
❖ Windows XP
Standard TCP/IP
LPR port
❖ Windows Server 2003

Standard TCP/IP
LPR port
❖ Windows NT 4.0
LPR port
Reference
See the explanation about how to install the printer driver for each type of
port. For the SmartDeviceMonitor for Client port, see p.24 “Using the Smart-
DeviceMonitor for Client Port”.
For the Standard TCP/IP port, see p.30 “Using the Standard TCP/IP Port”.
For the LPR port, see p.32 “Using the LPR Port”.
20
Confirming the Connection Method
Using as a network printer

This machine can be used as the Windows network printer, the NetWare print
server, or the NetWare remote printer.
1
ZZZ036S
Note
❒ In an IPv6 environment, Netware servers cannot be used.
Reference
See the explanation about how to install the printer driver for each type of
network printer.
For the Windows network printer, see p.34 “Using as a Windows Network
Printer”.
For the NetWare print server and remote printer, see p.36 “Using as a Net-
Ware Print Server / Remote Printer”.
21
Local Connection
Local connections can be established via parallel, USB, and Bluetooth connec-
tions.
1 Windows operating system version determines the available connection meth-
ods.
• Windows 95:
Parallel connections
• Windows 98:
• Windows 98 SE / Me:
USB and Parallel connections
• Windows 2000:
USB, Parallel, and Bluetooth connections
• Windows XP:
• Windows Server 2003:
• Windows NT 4.0:
Reference
See the explanation about how to install the printer driver for each method of
connection.
For the USB connection, see p.39 “Installing the Printer Driver Using USB”.
For the parallel connection, see p.44 “Printing with Parallel Connection”.
For the Bluetooth connection, see p.46 “Printing with Bluetooth Connection”.
22
Installing the Printer Driver

This section explains how to install the printer driver. There are two ways to in-
stall the printer driver: using Quick Install, which installs the settings at once, or
installing the appropriate driver according to the port you want to use. 1
Important
❒ If your operating system is Windows NT4.0, download printer driver for
Windows NT4.0 from the supplier's Web site.
Quick Install
Windows 95 / 98 / Me / 2000 / XP and Windows Server 2003 users can easily
install this software using the supplied CD-ROM.
Using Quick Install, the PCL printer driver and/or RPCS printer driver, and
SmartDeviceMonitor for Client are installed under network environment, and
the TCP/IP port will be set.
Important
❒ To install printer driver under Windows 2000 / XP Professional, Windows
Server 2003, and Windows NT 4.0, you must have an account that has Man-
age Printers permission. Log on as an Administrator.
❒ If you connect using USB, refer to p.39 “Installing the Printer Driver Using
USB” and install the printer driver.

B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
The installer starts.
Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. If this hap-
pens, launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory.
C Select an interface language, and then click [OK].

The default interface language is English.
D Click [Quick Install].

The software license agreement appears in the [License Agreement] dialog box.
E After reading the agreement, click [I accept the agreement.], and then click
[Next >].
F Select the machine model you want to use in the [Select Printer] dialog box.
For network connection via TCP/IP, select the machine whose IP address is
displayed in [Connect To].
For parallel connection, select the machine whose printer port is displayed in
[Connect To].
23
G Click [Install].
The printer driver installation starts.
H Click [Finish].
1 A message about restarting the computer appears. Restart the computer to
complete installation.
I Click [Exit] in the first dialog box of the installer, and then take out the CD-
ROM.
Note
❒ To stop installation of the selected software, click [Cancel] before installa-
tion is complete.
❒ Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. If this hap-
❒ Select a machine to whose IP address is displayed in [Connect To] to install
SmartDeviceMonitor for Client when using TCP/IP.
Reference
Quick Install is not available unless bidirectional communication between
the machine and computer is enabled via parallel connection. See p.50 “If
Bidirectional Communication Is Disabled” for details about bidirectional
communication between the machine and computer.
Installing the Printer Driver for the Selected Port
Using the SmartDeviceMonitor for Client Port
Important
❒ To install SmartDeviceMonitor for Client under Windows 2000 / XP Profes-
sional, Windows Server 2003, and Windows NT 4.0, you must have an ac-
count that has Manage Printers permission. Log on as an Administrator.
❒ Install SmartDeviceMonitor for Client before installing the printer driver
when using the SmartDeviceMonitor for Client port.
Installing SmartDeviceMonitor for Client


24
D Click [DeskTopBinder - SmartDeviceMonitor for Client].

E The message to quit all other applications appears. Quit all applications,
and then click [Next >].
F The software license agreement appears in the [License Agreement] dialog 1

box. After reading through its contents, click [Yes].
G Click [Full install] or [Custom Install].

[Full install] installs all features.
[Custom Install] installs selected features.
H Follow the instructions on the display and click [Next >] to proceed next step.
I After the installation is completed, select one of the options to restart the
computer either now or later, and click [Complete].
Restart the computer to complete installation.
Note
tion is complete.
Changing the Port Settings for SmartDeviceMonitor for Client

Follow the procedure below to change the SmartDeviceMonitor for Client set-
tings, such as TCP/IP timeout, recovery/parallel printing, and printer groups.
Windows 95 / 98:
A Open the [Printers] window from the [Start] menu.

B In the [Printers] window, click the icon of the printer you want to use. On
the [File] menu, click [Properties].
C Click the [Details] tab, and then click [Port Settings].

The [Port Settings] dialog box appears.
Windows 2000 / Windows NT 4.0:
A Open [Printers] window from [Start] menu.

C On the [Ports] tab, click [Configure Port].

The [Configuration] dialog box appears. 25
Windows XP, Windows Server 2003:
A Open the [Printers and Faxes] window from the [Start] menu.
1 The [Printers and Faxes] window appears.
B Click the icon of the machine you want to use. On the [File] menu, click
[Properties]. The printer properties appear.
C Click the [Ports] tab, and then click [Configure Port].

The [Port Configuration] dialog box appears.
Note
❒ For TCP/IP, timeout setting can be configured.
❒ User, proxy, and timeout settings can be configured for IPP.
❒ If no settings on the [Recovery/Parallel Printing] tab are available, follow the
procedure below.
A Click [Cancel] to close the [Port Configuration:] dialog box.
B Start SmartDeviceMonitor for Client, and then right-click the SmartDe-
viceMonitor for Client icon on the tasktray.
C Point to [Properties], and then click [Extended Features Settings].
D Select the [Set Recovery/Parallel Printing for each port] check box.
E Click [OK] to close the [Extended Features Settings] dialog box.
Reference
For information about these settings, see “Using SmartDeviceMonitor for
Client”, Network Guide, or SmartDeviceMonitor for Client Help.
Installing the PCL or RPCS Printer Driver (TCP/IP)
Important
❒ To install this printer driver under Windows 2000 / XP Professional, Win-
dows Server 2003, and Windows NT 4.0, you must have an account that has
Manage Printers permission. Log on as an Administrators or Power Users
group member.


D Click [PCL/RPCS Printer Drivers].

26
E The software license agreement appears in the [License Agreement] dialog

box.
After reading the agreement, click [I accept the agreement.], and then click [Next >].
F Select the printer driver you want to use in the [Select Program] dialog box. 1
You can select several printer drivers.
G Click [Next >].

H Select the machine model you want to use.
The printer name can be changed in the [Change settings for 'Printer Name'] box.
I Double-click the printer name to display the printer settings.

The details shown in [Comment], [Driver], and [Port] vary depending on the op-
erating system, printer model, and port.
J Click [Port], and then click [Add].

K Click [SmartDeviceMonitor], and then click [OK].
L Click [TCP/IP], and then click [Search].
A list of printers using TCP/IP appears.
M Select the printer you want to use, and then click [OK].
Only printers that respond to a broadcast from the computer appear. To use
a machine not listed here, click [Specify Address - TCP/IP], and then enter the IP
address or host name of the machine.
N Check that the port of the selected printer is displayed in [Port].

O Set a user code, if necessary.
Up to 8 numeric characters can be entered. No alphabetic character or symbol
can be entered.
P Select the [Default Printer] check box to configure the printer as default.
Q Click [Continue].
Installation starts.
R After the installation is completed, select one of the options to restart the
computer either now or later, and then click [Finish].
Note
❒ Setting a user code allows a SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin user to dis-
play and check statistics about the number of sheets which each user
prints. For details, see SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin Help.
27
❒ Under Windows 95 / 98 / Me, you cannot add an IP address partially sim-

ilar to the one already used. For example, if “192.168.0.2” is in use,
“192.168.0.2xx” cannot be used. Similarly, if “192.168.0.20” is in use,
“192.168.0.2” cannot be used.
1 Reference
A message appears if there is a newer version of the printer driver already
installed. If there is, you cannot install the printer driver using Auto Run.
If you still want to install the printer driver, use [Add Printer]. See “When a
Message Appears during Installation of the Printer Driver”, Trouble
Shooting.
Installing the PCL or RPCS Printer Driver (IPP)
Important
❒ To install printer driver under Windows 2000 / XP Professional, Windows
Server 2003, and Windows NT 4.0, you must have an account that has Man-
age Printers permission. Log on as an Administrators or Power Users group
member.



box.
F Select a printer driver you want to use in the [Select Program] dialog box.
G Select the machine model you want to use.

H Double-click the printer name to display the printer settings.

I Click [Port], and then click [Add].

J Click [SmartDeviceMonitor], and then click [OK].
K Click [IPP].
28
L In the [Printer URL] box, enter “http://printer's address/printer” as the print-

er's address.
If the server authentication is issued, to enable SSL (a protocol for encrypted
communication), enter “https://printer's address/printer” (Internet Explor-
er 5.01, or a higher version must be installed). 1
(example IP address: 192.168.15.16)
http://192.168.15.16/printer
https://192.168.15.16/printer
You can enter “http://printer's address/ipp” as the printer's address.
M Enter a name for identifying the printer in [IPP Port Name]. Use a name dif-
ferent from the one of any existing port.
If a name is not specified here, the address entered in the [Printer URL] box be-
comes the IPP port name.
N Click [Detailed Settings] to make necessary settings.

For information about the settings, see SmartDeviceMonitor for Client Help.
O Click [OK].
P Check that the port of the selected printer is displayed in [Port].
Q Set a user code, if necessary.
Up to 8 numeric characters can be entered. No alphabetic characters or sym-
bols can be entered.
R Select the [Default Printer] check box to configure the printer as default.
S Click [Continue].
Installation starts.
T After the installation is completed, select one of the options to restart the
Note
tion is complete.
❒ Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. In that
case, launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory.
❒ Setting a user code allows a SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin user to dis-
play and check the number of sheets each user prints. For details, see
SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin Help.
29
Reference
1 Message Appears during Installation of the Printer Driver”, Trouble
Shooting.
Using the Standard TCP/IP Port

This describes how to install the PCL or RPCS printer driver using the TCP/IP
port.
Important
❒ To install this printer driver under Windows 2000 / XP Professional, and
Windows Server 2003, you must have an account that has Manage Printers
permission. Log on as an Administrators or Power Users group member.
❒ In an IPv6 environment, you cannot use the Standard TCP/IP Port. Use the
SmartDeviceMonitor for Client port.
Installing the PCL or RPCS Printer Driver



box.
G Click [Next >].

H Select the machine model you want to use.

30
K Click [Standard TCP/IP Port], and then click [OK].

Configure the Standard TCP/IP port settings, and then see Windows Help if
[Standard TCP/IP Port] does not appear.
L Click [Next >] in the [Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard] dialog box. 1
M Enter the printer name or IP address in the [Printer Name or IP Address] box.
The [Port Name] text box automatically obtains a port name. Change this name
if necessary.
When the device selection appears, select “RICOH NetworkPrinter Driver C
Model”.
N Click [Next >].

O Click [Finish] in the [Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard] dialog box.
The installation start dialog box reappears.
P Check that the port of the selected printer is displayed in [Port].

Q Configure the default printer as necessary.
R Click [Continue].
S After the installation is completed, select one of the options to restart the
Note
tion is complete.
Reference
Shooting.
31
Using the LPR Port

This describes how to install the PCL or RPCS printer driver using the LPR port.
1 Important
group member.



box.
G Select the machine model you want to use.

H Click [Next >].


K Click [LPR Port], and then click [OK].
If [LPR Port] does not appear, see Windows Help and install it.
L Enter the printer's IP address in the [Name or address of server providing lpd]
box.
M Enter “lp” in the [Name of printer or print queue on that server] box, and then click
[OK].
32 The port is added.

O Configure the default printer as necessary.
P Click [Continue]. 1
Q After the installation is completed, select one of the options to restart the
Note
tion is complete.
Reference
Shooting.
33
Using as a Windows Network Printer

This describes how to install the PCL or RPCS printer driver when using the
printer as a Windows network printer.
1 To use the print server, install the printer driver by selecting “Network printer
server”, and then select the Windows 2000 / XP, Windows Server 2003, or Win-
dows NT 4.0 shared printer.
This section assumes that the client has already been configured to communicate
with a Windows 2000 / XP, Windows Server 2003, or Windows NT 4.0 print
server. Do not begin the following procedure before the client is set up and con-
figured correctly.
Important
❒ To install the printer driver under Windows 2000 / XP Professional, Win-
group member.
❒ If you print with a print server connected to the printer using the SmartDe-
viceMonitor port, Recovery Printing and Parallel Printing cannot be used
from the client.
❒ If you print with a Windows XP or Windows Server 2003 print server, notifi-
cation functions of SmartDeviceMonitor may not be used with the client.
❒ If you print with a Windows NT 4.0 print server, install the printer driver be-
fore you connect the print server to the printer.



box.
F Select the printer driver you want to use in the [Select Program] dialog box.
34
Using as a Windows Network Printer
G Click [Next >].

H Select the [Printer Name] check box to select the printer models you want to
use.
The printer name can be changed in the [Change settings for 'Printer Name'] box. 1

K Click [Network Printer], and then click [OK].
L Double-click the computer name you want to use as a print server in the
[Browse for Printer] window.
M Select the printer you want to use, and then click [OK].
O Configure the user code as necessary.
For an RPCS printer driver, a user code can be set after the printer driver in-
stallation. For information about user code, see the printer driver Help.
P Select the [Default Printer] check box to configure the printer as default.
Q Click [Continue].
R After the installation is completed, select one of the options to restart the
Note
tion is complete.
Reference
Shooting.
35
Using as a NetWare Print Server / Remote

Printer
1 This describes how to set up the Windows computer used as the NetWare client.
Important
group member.
The following explanation assumes NetWare Client is installed on the client
computer and the NetWare server environment is correctly set up. Install all nec-
essary client applications before following this procedure.
Set up the printer driver while logging on to the NetWare file server.
The following values are used in the example:
• Operating system: Windows 98
• NetWare version: 4.1
• File server name: CAREE
• Queue name: R-QUEUE
A Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. In that case,
launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory.
B Select an interface language, and then click [OK].

C Click [PCL/RPCS Printer Drivers].

D The software license agreement appears in the [License Agreement] dialog
box.
E Select the printer driver you want to use in the [Select Program] dialog box.
F Click [Next >].

G Select the [Printer Name] check box to select the printer model you want to
use.
36
Using as a NetWare Print Server / Remote Printer
H Double-click the printer name to display the printer settings.

I Click [Port], and then click [Add]. 1

J Click [Network Printer], and then click [OK].
K Double-click the name of the NetWare file server on the network tree.
The created queue is displayed.
L Select the print queue, and then click [OK].

M Check that the port of the selected printer is displayed in [Port].
N Click [Continue].
O Click [Finish] in the [Select Program] dialog box.

P After the installation is completed, select one of the options to restart the
Q After restarting the computer, launch the [Printers] window, and then open
the printer properties.
Under Windows XP or Windows Server 2003, open the printer properties
from the [Printers and Faxes] window.
R On the [Printer Settings] tab, clear the [Form Feed] and [Enable Banner] check
boxes.
Under Windows 2000 / XP, Windows Server 2003, or Windows NT 4.0, click
the [NetWare setting] tab.
Do not select these check boxes since they are automatically selected by the
printer driver. If you select the check boxes, the printer may not print correct-
ly.
S Click [OK] to close the printer properties dialog box.

Note
tion is complete.
❒ The protocol is set to inactive as default. Enable it using Web Image Mon-
itor or Telnet.
37
Form Feed
Do not use NetWare to configure form feed. Form feed is controlled by the print-
er driver on Windows. If NetWare form feed is configured, the printer may not
1 print properly.
Follow the procedure below to disable form feed according to the operating sys-
tem used:
• Under Windows 95 / 98 / Me, clear the [Form feed] check box on the [Printer
Settings] tab in the printer properties dialog box.
• Under Windows 2000 / XP, Windows Server 2003, or Windows NT 4.0, clear
the [Form feed] check box on the [NetWare Settings] tab in the printer properties
dialog box.
Banner Page
Do not use NetWare to configure a banner page.
Follow the procedure below to disable banner pages according to the operating
system used:
• Under Windows 95 / 98 / Me, clear the [Enable banner] check box on the [Print-
er Settings] tab in the printer properties dialog box.
• Under Windows 2000 / XP, Windows Server 2003, or Windows NT 4.0, clear
the [Enable banner] check box on the [NetWare Settings] tab in the printer prop-
erties dialog box.
Printing after Resetting the Printer

Printer to print server connection requires 30 - 40 seconds to resume after the
printer is reset. During this period, jobs may be accepted (depending on Net-
Ware specifications) but not printed.
To print after resetting the printer as the remote printer, check on the print server
that the remote printer is disconnected, or wait for two minutes before trying to
print.
38
Installing the Printer Driver Using USB

This section explains how to install printer drivers using USB.
Before installing, check that only the operating system is running on the comput-
er and no print jobs are in progress.
1
The printer drivers can be installed from the supplied CD-ROM provided with
this machine.
Windows Me - USB
Important
❒ Installation via USB is not possible under Windows 95 / 98. Upgrade to Win-
dows Me or later.
❒ Download USB Printing Support for Windows Me from the supplier's Web
site.
When USB is first used, the plug and play function starts and the [New Hardware
Found], [Device Driver Wizard], or [Add New Hardware Wizard] dialog box appears, de-
pending on the operating system.
If the printer driver has already been installed, plug and play is enabled, and the
icon of the printer connected to the “USB” port is added to the [Printers] window.
A Download USB Printing Support from the supplier's Web site.

Use a search to find the model name, and then download USB Printing Sup-
port from the supplier's Web site.
Save it where you can locate it easily.
B Connect the machine to the computer using the USB cable.

Connect the USB cable firmly.
C In the Found New Hardware Wizard display, click [Search for a suitable driver
for my device [recommended]], and then click [Next >].
D Select the [Specify a location:] check box, and then click [Browse...].
The [Browse for Folder] dialog box appears.
E Specify the location where USB Printing Support is located, and then click
[Next >].
F Check the location, and then click [Next >].

USB Printing Support is installed.
G Click [Finish].
If the printer driver has already been installed, plug and play is enabled, and
the icon of the printer connected to the “USB001” port is added to the [Printers]
window.
39
H Install the printer driver. Click [Search for the best driver for your device. [Recom-
mended]], and then click [Next >].
I Select the [Specify a location:] check box, and then click [Browse...].
1 The [Browse for Folder] dialog box appears.
J Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

Note
❒ When Auto Run starts, click [Exit].
❒ To disable Auto Run, press the {Shift} key when inserting the CD-ROM
into the drive and keep it pressed until the computer finishes reading from
the CD-ROM.
K Specify the location where the source files of the printer driver are stored,
If the CD-ROM drive is D, the source files of the printer driver are stored in
the following location:
• RPCS
D:\DRIVERS\RPCS\WIN9X_ME\(Language)\DISK1
• PCL 5e
D:\DRIVERS\PCL5E\WIN9X_ME\(Language)\DISK1
• PCL 6
D:\DRIVERS\PCL6\WIN9X_ME\(Language)\DISK1
• PostScript 3
D:\DRIVERS\PS\WIN9X_ME\(Language)\DISK1
L Check the location, and then click [Next >].

Add Printer Wizard starts.
M Click [Finish].
Installation is complete. If installation is successful, the icon of the printer
connected to the “USB001” port is added to the [Printers] window.
Note
❒ The number after “USB” varies depending on the number of printers con-
nected.
❒ It is not necessary to reinstall USB Printing Support when connecting a dif-
ferent machine via USB interface when USB Printing Support is installed.
❒ After installing USB Printing Support, if the printer driver is not installed,
follow the plug-and-play instructions of the printer.
40
Windows 2000 - USB

Important
❒ Installing a printer driver requires Administrator permission. Log on using
an account that has Administrator permission.
1
When USB is first used, Found New Hardware Wizard starts, and USB Printing
Support is installed automatically.
If the printer driver is not installed, follow the plug-and-play instructions of the
printer to install it from the supplied CD-ROM.
A Connect the machine to the computer using the USB cable.

B In the Found New Hardware Wizard display, click [Search for a suitable driver
C Select the [Specify location] check box, and then click [Next >].
D Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
When Auto Run starts, click [Exit].
To disable Auto Run, press the left {Shift} key when inserting the CD-ROM
the CD-ROM.
E Specify the location where the source files of the printer driver is stored.
• RPCS
D:\DRIVERS\RPCS\WIN2K_XP\(Language)\DISK1
• PCL 5e
D:\DRIVERS\PCL5E\WIN2K_XP\(Language)\DISK1
• PCL 6
D:\DRIVERS\PCL6\WIN2K_XP\(Language)\DISK1
• PostScript 3
D:\DRIVERS\PS\WIN2K_XP\(Language)\DISK1
F Check the printer driver location, and then click [OK].

G Click [Next >].
H Click [Finish].
the icon of the printer connected to the “USB001” port is added to the [Printers]
window.
41
Note
nected.
1 Windows XP, Windows Server 2003 - USB

Important
❒ Installing a printer driver requires Administrators permission. Log on using
an account that has Administrators permission.
When USB is first used, Found New Hardware Wizard starts, and USB Printing
Support is installed automatically.
The printer drivers can be installed from the supplied CD-ROM provided with
this machine.
printer to install it from the supplied CD-ROM.
A Connect the machine to the computer using the USB cable.

B In the Found New Hardware Wizard display, click [Search for a suitable driver
C Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

If Auto Run starts, click [Cancel], and then [Exit].
To disable Auto Run, press the left {Shift} key when inserting the CD-ROM
the CD-ROM.
D Select the [Include this location in the search] check box under [Search for the best
driver in these location], and then click [Browse] to select the printer driver lo-
cation.
• RPCS
D:\DRIVERS\RPCS\WIN2K_XP\(Language)\DISK1
• PCL 5e
D:\DRIVERS\PCL5E\WIN2K_XP\(Language)\DISK1
• PCL 6
D:\DRIVERS\PCL6\WIN2K_XP\(Language)\DISK1
• PostScript 3
E Check the printer driver location, and then click [Next >].
42
F Click [Continue].
G Click [Finish].
If installation is successful, the icon of the printer connected to the “USB001”
port is added to the [Printers and Faxes] window. 1
Note
nected.
43
Printing with Parallel Connection

This describes how to install the PCL or RPCS printer driver when using the par-
allel port.
1 To use a machine connected using a parallel interface, click [LPT1] when install-
ing the printer driver.
Important
group member.



box.
F Select the printer driver you want to use in the [Select Program] dialog box.
G Click [Next >].

H Select the [Printer Name] check box to select the printer model you want to
use.

J Check that [LPT1:] is shown in [Port].

K Select the [Default Printer] check box to configure the printer as default.
44
L Click [Finish].
M After the installation is completed, select one of the options to restart the
computer either now or later, and then click [Finish]. 1
Note
tion is complete.
Reference
Shooting.
45
Printing with Bluetooth Connection

This describes how to print using with Bluetooth devices.
1
Supported Profiles
Refer the following supported profiles for Bluetooth connection.
❖ SPP, HCRP
• A maximum of two Bluetooth adaptor or Bluetooth-equipped computers
can be connected at the same time using the Bluetooth interface: one by
SPP, one by HCRP.
• When connecting more than one Bluetooth adaptor or Bluetooth-equipped
computer at the same time, the first device that establishes connection is se-
lected. When selecting the connection between the other devices, cancel
the first established connection.
• SPP connection does not support bidirectional communications.
• HCRP connection supports bidirectional communications.
❖ BIP
• For BIP connection, a module including PostScript 3 must be installed in
the machine.
• Only one Bluetooth adaptor or Bluetooth-equipped computer can be con-
nected via BIP.
• Only JPEG images that can be printed using BIP.
• User codes are disabled for BIP.
You cannot print if print functions are restricted.
• Some printers do not support BIP.
Note
❒ In this manual, the instruction referred to print using SPP. To print using
HCRP or BIP, see the Help supplied with the Bluetooth adapter you use.

To install the printer driver, follow the procedure used to install parallel interface.
Important
❒ To install the printer driver under Windows 2000 / XP Professional or Win-
dows Server 2003, you must have an account that has Manage Printers per-
mission. Log on as an Administrators or Power Users group member.
A Start 3Com Bluetooth Connection Manager.

46
B Check that the printer you want to use appears in 3Com Bluetooth Connec-
tion Manager.
C On the [Tool] menu, click [COM port].

D Check that the message “Bluetooth Serial Client (COMx) “ appears under 1
Client Ports. (X indicates the COM port number used by Bluetooth.)
E Click [Close].
F On the [Start] menu, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
The [Printers] window appears.
G Click the icon of the printer you want to use.

H On the [File] menu, click [Properties].
I Click the [Ports] tab.
J Under [Port], select the [COMx:] check box. X indicates the COM port num-
ber used by Bluetooth.
K Click [OK].
Close the [Printers] window.
Note
❒ To always use the same printer, select the [Always use for this connection]
check box.
❒ System requirements vary depending on the Bluetooth standard and spec-
ifications. For details, see the manuals supplied with each product.
❒ For information about setting up Bluetooth under other operating systems
or using it with different utilities, see the manuals supplied with those op-
erating systems or utilities.
❒ If a dialog box appears while transmitting a print job, reestablish network
connection as follows:
A Select the printer you want to use in the [Printers and Faxes] box.
B Click [Connect].
Reference
For details, see the manuals supplied with the Bluetooth adaptor or com-
puter equipped with Bluetooth.
47
Configuring Security Mode Settings

This describes how to configure the security mode settings.
1 A Start 3Com Bluetooth Connection Manager.

B On the [Tools] menu, click [Security Mode].
The [Security Mode] dialog box appears.
C Select the security mode in the [Security Mode:] list.

If you click [High], or [Custom], and specify [Link] in the [Custom Settings] dialog
box, enter the Bluetooth password. For information about entering the pass-
word, see p.48 “Printing in the Security Mode”.
For all other security modes and custom settings, no password is required.
For information about each mode, see the manuals supplied with the utility.
D Click [OK].
Close the [Security Mode] dialog box.
Reference
For details about the security mode, see 3Com Bluetooth Connection Man-
ager Help. For details about the password entry which is required to trans-
mit print jobs, see p.48 “Printing in the Security Mode”.
Printing in the Security Mode

This describes how to print in the security mode.
A Send the print job to the printer in use.

Depending on the computer configuration, the [Connect] dialog box may ap-
pear. If it does, use it to establish the network connection.
B The [Authentication] dialog box appears.

C Enter the Bluetooth password, and then click [OK].
As the Bluetooth password, enter the last four digits of the machine's serial
number. You can find the serial number on the label attached to the back of
the machine. For example, if the serial number is 00A0-001234, the Bluetooth
password is 1234.
D The print job is sent.

Note
❒ The Bluetooth password differs for each machine and cannot be changed.
48
Making Option Settings for the Printer

Make option settings for the machine using the printer driver when bidirectional
communication is disabled.
1
Reference
For details about making option settings for the printer, see p.50 “If Bidirec-
tional Communication Is Disabled”.
Conditions for Bidirectional Communication

Bidirectional communication allows information about paper size and feed di-
rection settings to be automatically sent to the printer. You can check machine
status from your computer.
• Bidirectional communication is supported by Windows 95 / 98 / Me / 2000 /
XP, Windows Server 2003, and Windows NT 4.0.
• If you use the RPCS printer driver and bidirectional communication is en-
abled under Windows 2000, the [Change Accessories] tab is unavailable.
Note
❒ The RPCS printer driver supports bidirectional communications and updates
the machine status automatically.
❒ The PCL printer driver supports bidirectional communications. You can up-
date the machine status manually.
To support bidirectional communication, the following conditions must be met:
❖ When connected with parallel cables

• The computer must support bidirectional communication.
• The machine must support bidirectional communication.
• The interface cable must support bidirectional communication.
• The machine must be connected to the computer using the standard paral-
lel cables and parallel connectors.
• Under Windows 2000, [Enable bidirectional support] must be selected, and
[Enable printer pooling] must not be selected on the [Ports] tab with the RPCS
printer driver.
49
❖ When connected with the network

• The machine must support bidirectional communication.
• DeskTopBinder Lite must be installed, or the Standard TCP/IP port must
be used.
1 • Under Windows 2000, [Enable bidirectional support] must be selected, and
[Enable printer pooling] must not be selected on the [Ports] tab with the RPCS
printer driver.
If the Standard TCP/IP port is not being used, one of the following conditions
must be met in addition to the two above:
• The SmartDeviceMonitor for Client port and the TCP/IP protocol must be
used.
• The standard TCP/IP port must be used without changing the default port
name (for Windows 2000 / XP and Windows Server 2003).
• Microsoft TCP/IP print IP address must be specified for use (for Windows
NT 4.0).
• When using IPP protocol with the PCL printer driver, the IPP port name
must include the IP address.
❖ When connected with USB

The machine must be connected to the computer's USB port using the USB in-
terface cable.
The computer must support bidirectional communication.
Note
❒ Install SmartDeviceMonitor for Client from the supplied CD-ROM.
If Bidirectional Communication Is Disabled

Set up option settings when bidirectional communications are disabled.
Important
❒ Under Windows 2000 / XP and Windows Server 2003, Manage Printers per-
mission is required to change the printer properties in the [Printers] folder.
Log on as an Administrators or Power Users group member.
❒ Under Windows NT 4.0, Full Control permission is required to change the
printer properties in the [Printers] (Windows 2000) or [Printers and Faxes] (Win-
dows XP / Windows Server 2003) folder. Log on as an Administrators or
Power Users group member.

When using Windows XP or Windows Server 2003, point to [Settings] on the
[Start] menu, and then click [Printers and Faxes]. The [Printers and Faxes] win-
dow appears.
B Click the icon of the printer you want to use.

50
C On the [File] menu, click [Properties].

D Click the [Change Accessories] tab.
If options in the [Change Accessories] tab are disabled, bidirectional connection
is enabled. In this case, no change is necessary for option settings. 1
If you are using the RPCS printer driver, click the [Change Accessories] tab.
E Select options installed from the [Options] area, and then make the neces-
sary settings.
F Select the total amount of the memory in [Total memory:] when the optional
SDRAM module is added.
G Under [Paper source tray settings:], click and highlight the tray to be used, and
then select the appropriate size, position, and type for the tray. Select the
[Do not use Auto Tray Select] check box to exclude the tray from the targets of
automatic tray selection.
H Click [OK] to close the printer properties dialog box.
51
Installing Font Manager 2000

Important
1 ❒ Under Windows 2000 / XP, Windows Server 2003, or Windows NT 4.0, in-
stalling applications by Auto Run requires administrator permission. To in-
stall a printer driver by Auto Run, log on using an account that has
administrator permission.

C Click [Font Manager 2000].

D Follow the instructions on the screen.
52
Using Adobe PageMaker Version 6.0, 6.5, or 7.0
Using Adobe PageMaker Version 6.0, 6.5,

or 7.0
Under Windows 95 / 98 / Me / 2000 / XP, Windows Server 2003, or Windows 1
NT 4.0 with Adobe PageMaker, you need to copy PPD files to the PageMaker
folder.
PPD files have the .ppd extension in the folder “DRIVERS\PS\WIN9X_ME\(Lan-
guage)\DISK1” on the CD-ROM.
The “WIN9X_ME” folder inside the “PS” folder is for Windows 95 / 98 / Me.
Use the folder at this level that is appropriate for the operating system you are
currently using.
The third folder “(Language)” may be substituted by an appropriate language
name.
Copy the .ppd file to the PageMaker folder.
• For PageMaker 6.0 default installation
The directory is “C:\PM6\RSRC\PPD4”.
The directory is “C:\PM65\RSRC\USENGLISH\PPD4”.
The “USENGLISH” may vary depending on your language selection.
The directory is “C:\PM7\RSRC\USENGLISH\PPD4”.
The “USENGLISH” may vary depending on your language selection.
Note
❒ If the driver is not set correctly after copying the “.ppd” file, printing may not
be performed properly.
❒ When using PageMaker, the optional features that can be selected by the
printer driver will not be active. The following procedure describes how to
activate the optional printer features.
A On the [File] menu, click [Print].
The [Print Document] dialog box appears.
B Make the necessary settings in the [Features] box.
53
54
2. Setting Up the Printer Driver
PCL - Accessing the Printer Properties
Windows 95 / 98 / Me - Accessing the Printer Properties

There are two methods to open the printer properties dialog box.
Making Printer Default Settings

To make the printer default settings, open the printer properties dialog box from
the [Printers] window.
Important
❒ You cannot change the printer default settings for each user. Settings made in
the printer properties dialog box are applied to all users.


D Make the necessary settings, and then click [OK].
Note
❒ With some applications, the printer driver settings are not used, and the
application's own default settings are applied.
Reference
For details, see the printer driver Help.
Making Printer Settings from an Application

You can make printer settings for a specific application.
To make printer settings for a specific application, open the printer properties
dialog box from that application. The following explains how to make settings
for the WordPad application provided with Windows 95 / 98 / Me.

The [Print] dialog box appears.
B Select the printer you want to use in the [Name] list, and then click [Proper-
ties].
The printer properties dialog box appears.
55
Setting Up the Printer Driver
C Make the necessary settings, and then click [OK].

D Click [OK] to start printing.
Note
❒ The procedure to open the printer properties dialog box may vary depend-
ing on the application. For details, see the manuals provided with the ap-
plication you use.
2 ❒ With some applications, the printer driver settings are not used, and the
❒ Any settings you make in the following procedure are valid for the current
application only.
❒ General users can change the properties displayed in the [Print] dialog box
of an application. Settings made here are used as defaults when printing
from this application.
Reference
Windows 2000 - Accessing the Printer Properties
Making Printer Default Settings - The Printer Properties
Important
❒ To change the printer default settings including option configuration settings,
log on using an account that has Manage Printers permission. Members of the
Administrator and Power Users groups have Manage Printers permission by
default.



Note
❒ Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications.
Reference
56
Making Printer Default Settings - Printing Preferences
Important

The [Printers] window appears. 2
C On the [File] menu, click [Printing Preferences...].
The [Printing Preferences] dialog box appears.

Note
Reference

To make printer settings for a specific application, open the [Printing Preferences]
for the WordPad application provided with Windows 2000.

B Select the printer you want to use in the [Select Printer] list.
C Make the necessary settings, and then click [Print] to start printing.
Note
❒ The procedure to open the [Printing Preferences] dialog box may vary de-
pending on the application. For details, see the manuals provided with the
application you use.
application only.
Reference
57
Windows XP, Windows Server 2003 - Accessing the Printer

Properties
2 Important
Administrators and Power Users groups have Manage Printers permission
by default.
A On the [Start] menu, click [Printers and Faxes].

The [Printers and Faxes] window appears.


Note
Reference
Important



Note
58 ❒ Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications.
Reference

dialog box from that application. The following explains how to make settings 2
for the WordPad application provided with Windows XP.

Note
application only.
Reference
Windows NT 4.0 - Accessing the Printer Properties
Important
log on using an account that has Full Control permission. Members of the Ad-
ministrators, Server Operators, Print Operators, and Power Users groups
have Full Control permission by default.


59


Note
2 Reference
Making Printer Default Settings - Default
Important


C On the [File] menu, click [Document Defaults].
The [Default] dialog box appears.

Note
Reference
60

for the WordPad application provided with Windows NT 4.0.
A On the [File] menu, click [Print]. 2

ties].

Note
plication you use.
application only.
Reference
61
RPCS - Accessing the Printer Properties
Windows 95 / 98 / Me - Accessing the Printer Properties

There are two dialog box types of the printer properties dialog box.
“Multi-tab” is used as an example in this manual. For details about changing the
2 dialog box types, see the printer driver Help.
❖ Multi-tab
This dialog box type is designed for users who often change print settings to
perform various printing operations.
❖ Custom Setting
This dialog box type is designed for users who rarely change print settings.
This type of dialog box may vary depending on the installed options.
Making Printer Default Settings

Important


When you open the printer properties dialog box initially after installing the
RPCS printer driver, a confirmation message appears. After clicking [OK], the
printer properties dialog box appears.

Note
Reference
62

for the WordPad application provided with Windows 95 / 98 / Me.
A On the [File] menu, click [Print]. 2

ties].

Note
plication you use.
application only.
Reference
63

This describes how to launch printer driver's properties.
2 Important
by default.



Note
Reference
Important


64

Note
Reference

2

Note
application only.
Reference
65
Windows XP, Windows Server 2003 - Accessing the Printer

Properties
2 Important
by default.



Note
Reference
Important


66

Note
Reference

2

Note
application only.
Reference
67
Important
2 log on using an account that has Full Control permission. Members of the Ad-



Note
Reference
Making Printer Default Settings - Default
Important


68
C On the [File] menu, click [Document Defaults...].


Note
Reference 2


ties].

Note
plication you use.
application only.
Reference
69
70
3. Other Print Operations
Printing a PDF File Directly

You can send PDF files directly to the machine for printing, without having to
open a PDF application.
Important
❒ The function can be used with genuine Adobe PDF files only.
❒ This function supports version 1.3, 1.4, and 1.5 PDF files.
❒ PDF files created using the transparency function of PDF version 1.4 may not
be printed.
❒ PDF files created using Crypt Filter and/or the 16 bit color image function of
PDF version 1.5 cannot be printed.
❒ PDF version 1.6 (Acrobat 7.0) files created without any functions that are ex-
clusive to PDF version 1.6 can be printed.
❒ Some types of High Compression PDF files may not be printed. Consult your
sales representative about the supported file types.
Note
❒ Paper size errors may occur when printing on custom size paper.
Printing Method
The following procedures explain the two methods of direct PDF printing - us-
ing Auto Document Link or by entering commands.
Using DeskTopBinder Lite
Installing DeskTopBinder Lite

Follow the procedure below to install DeskTopBinder Lite.

B Insert the “Scanner Driver and Utilities” CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
Auto Run may not work under certain operating system settings. In this case,
launch “Setup.exe” located on the CD-ROM root directory.

D Click [DeskTopBinder Lite] .
71
Other Print Operations
E Follow the instructions on the display to install DeskTopBinder Lite.

If you are required to restart the computer after installing DeskTopBinder
Lite, restart the computer and continue the configuration.
DeskTopBinder Lite Enhancements

Follow the DeskTopBinder Lite enhancement procedure to print PDF files di-
rectly.
A On the [Start] menu, click [Programs], [DeskTopBinder], and [Extended Features

3 Wizard].
B When [Extended Features Wizard] appears, select [Start], and then click [Next]
repeatedly until the [Printing Function2] screen appears.
C On the [Printing Function2] screen, click [Add...] to display [PDF Direct Print Prop-
erties].
D Select Driver for This Machine, click [OK], and then click [Next] repeatedly
until [Finish] is displayed.
Click [Finish].
Function Palette
The Function palette contains buttons for functions that are already configured
through DeskTopBinder Lite enhancement. Using these buttons, you can print
Windows files, preview printouts, convert images, and register scanners for doc-
uments without having to open DeskTopBinder Lite. You can also use these
functions simply by dragging a target file to the button corresponding to the re-
quired function and dropping it there.
A On the [Start] menu, click [Programs], [DeskTopBinder], and [Function Palette].

An icon for the Function palette is added to the task bar displayed at the bot-
tom right of the screen.
B Right-click the icon that is added to the task bar, and then click [Properties]
to display the Properties screen.
C Click the [Contents] tab, select the [PDF Direct Print] check box at the center,
and then click [OK].
The [Properties] screen closes and the [PDF Direct Print] icon is added to the pal-
ette.
72
Printing a PDF File Directly
PDF Direct Printing

Use the method below to print PDF files directly.
A Drag the PDF file you want to print to the PDF Direct Printing icon in the
palette and drop it there.
B [Output File List-PDF Direct Print] is displayed.

Highlight the PDF you want to print, and then click [OK].
The PDF file is printed.
3
Printing PDF Password-Protected Documents
Follow the procedure below to print password-protected PDF files.
A In the Windows [Start] menu, click [Programs], [DeskTopBinder], and [Extended

Features Wizard].
B When [Extended Features Wizard] appears, select [Start], and then click [Next].
C On the [Printing Function2] screen, click [Properties] to display [PDF Direct Print
Properties].
D Select the [Use PDF Password] check box at the bottom right of the screen, and
then click [OK].
Click [Next] repeatedly until [Finish] appears.
Click [Finish] to close the [Extended Features Wizard] screen.
E Move the PDF file you want to print to the PDF Direct Printing icon on the
palette using a drag-and-drop operation.
F [Output File List-PDF Direct Print] is displayed.

Select the PDF file you want to output to make it reverse video, and then click
[OK].
G The [PDF Direct Print Properties] screen opens.

Enter the password for the PDF file you want to print in the [PDF Password]
field at the bottom right of the screen, and then click [OK].
The password-protected PDF file is printed.
Note
❒ Before printing a password-protected PDF file, perform one of the following:
• Enter the PDF password in the PDF Direct Printing Properties screen.
• Specify a PDF password by selecting [Change PDF Password] in the [PDF
Menu] on the control panel of this machine
❒ If a [PDF Group Password] for the [PDF Menu] menu is assigned to either
DeskTopBinder Lite or the control panel of this machine, a same group
password needs to be assigned to the other.
73
PDF Direct Print Properties
3
ASC005S
1. Setting name: 8. Number of copies

Displays the plug-in configuration name Specifies the number of copies to print.
(up to 63 single byte characters)
9. Collate
2. Change Icon... Sorts printed sheets.
Changes the icon displayed on the tool
bar.
10. Range
Specify the pages you want to print.
3. Printer:
Displays a list of RPCS drivers that sup-
11. Resolution
port PDF direct printing. Specifies a print resolution.
4. Duplex 12. PDF password

Prints on both sides of sheets. If the PDF file is password-protected, en-
ter the password in this field. Otherwise,
5. Layout the file cannot be printed.
Prints multiple pages on a single sheet.
13. Group password
6. Display this dialog box before If a group password is assigned to Desk-
printing TopBinder Lite and this machine, enter
Appears in PDF direct printing mode if the group password in this field. Other-
this check box is selected. wise, printing cannot start.
7. Orientation
Specifies the original's orientation.
Using commands
You can print PDF files directly, using commands such as “ftp”, “sftp”, and
“lpr”.
Reference
For details about UNIX commands, see Network Guide.
74
Unauthorized Copy Control

To prevent unauthorized copying, you can embed patterns and text beneath the
print. You do not need a special paper to use this function. If a paper with text
or image patterns is copied by a copier or a multi-function printer, either the pat-
terns are printed vividly or the copy is grayed out, so as to protect the informa-
tion on the original from leaking. To print with protection against unauthorized
copying, you can use [Data security for copying] and [Mask type:].
Important
❒ This function is designed to discourage copying of confidential documents; it 3
does not prevent unauthorized use of information.
❒ You must install the Copy Data Security Unit to gray out files protected by
Data Security for Copying that are stored in the document server or printed.
You do not have to install the unit to print files that are protected by Data Se-
curity for Copying.
❒ You can use this machine to print files that are protected by data security for
copying. However, because you cannot install the Copy Data Security unit on
this machine, copies of files cannot be grayed out when using data security
for copying.
❒ Data security for copying cannot be used together Toner saving.
❒ Use the following setting to make the embedded pattern or text for prevent-
ing unauthorized copying more visible:
• Under [Copier Features], [Original Type Setting], set [Original Type 1 (Text)] to
[Special Mode 1].
• Note that if you make this setting, gray-scale images in documents that do
not contain embedded patterns or text might not be copied properly.
❒ To use the Unauthorized Copy Control function, configure the RPCS printer
driver settings as shown below. This function cannot be selected if other set-
tings are applied.
• In the [Paper Type:] list, select [Plain/Recycled].
Opening the Unauthorized Copy Control Window
A In the RPCS printer driver, open the [Printing Preference] window.

B Click [Add/Change Custom Settings...].
C Select the [Unauthorized copy...] check box.
D Click [Control Settings...].
The Unauthorized Copy Control window appears.
Note
❒ For details, see the printer driver Help.
75
Using [Data security for copying]

If a document printed with data security for copying is copied by or stored in the
Document Box of a copier or multi-function printer with the copy data security
unit, the copy or stored file is grayed out. This section explains how to specify
the printer driver setting for printing using [Data security for copying].
❖ Setting [Data security for copying] in the printer driver

• Select the [Data security for copying] checkbox. You can also enter the text in
the [Text:] box.
• You cannot select the [Mask type:] checkbox at the same time.
• To print a document protected by gray overprint, the machine must be set
up correctly. Consult an administrator.
76
❖ Printing a document using [Data security for copying]
AJL030S
1. The pattern and text you have set 3. The document is blanked by gray
is printed. overprint.
2. The document is copied or stored
in copiers / multifunction machines
which the Copy Data Security unit is
installed.
Note
❒ This machine can print only as described in Step 1.
❒ Only the RPCS printer driver is supported.
❒ You cannot partially embed a pattern and text in a document.
❒ Use 182 × 257 mm (71/4 × 101/2 in.) or larger paper.
❒ Use ordinary or recycled paper of at least 70% whiteness.
❒ Duplex printing may interfere with this function as a result of text and pat-
terns being visible through the paper.
❒ Printing with background patterns and text may be slower than normal print-
ing.
Reference
For details about setting [Data security for copying], see the printer driver Help.
77
Using [Mask type:]

You can embed patterns and text in a document by setting in the printer driver
to prevent unauthorized copying.
❖ Setting [Mask type:] in the printer driver

• Select a pattern from [Mask type:], and then enter text in the [Text:] box.
Note
❒ You can set only [Text:], but [Mask type:] and [Text:] must be set together.
❒ To switch text and background patterns, select the [Reverse patterns:
text/background] check box.
❖ Printing a document using [Mask type:]
AJL031S
1. The pattern and text you have set 3. The pattern and text you have set
is printed palely. appear clearly.
2. The document is copied, scanned,
or stored in copiers / multifunction
machines.
78
Note
❒ Only the RPCS printer driver is supported.
❒ You cannot partially embed patterns and text strings in a document.
❒ To make the embedded pattern clear, set the character size at least 50 pt (pref-
erably 70 to 80 pt) and character angle to between 30 and 40 degrees.
❒ Due to the effects of the settings, the results of copying, scanning, and saving
documents in the document server may vary depending on the machine
model and setting conditions.
❒ Printing with background patterns and text may be slower than normal print-
ing.
3
Reference
For details about setting [Mask type:], see the printer driver Help.
Important Notice
• The supplier does not provide warranty regarding the appearance of print
patterns and other copy protection features. The appearance of the print pat-
terns and the performance of Unauthorized Copy Control may vary depend-
ing on the quality of paper used and the machine model and settings.
• The supplier takes no responsibility for any damages sustained in connection
with use of or inability to make use of Unauthorized Copy Control print pat-
terns.
79
Form Feed
This section gives instructions for operating the machine when there is no tray
for the selected paper size or type, or when paper loaded in the machine has run
out.
Important
❒ The tray cannot be changed if the following functions are set:
• Duplex Print to a tray that does not support duplex printing
3 Note
❒ If form feed is selected for a tray with the following settings, you can change
the tray by canceling the settings:
• Duplex Print
❒ If Auto Continue is selected, form fed paper is printed after a set interval. See
“Printer Features”, General Settings Guide.
Printing from a Selected Tray

If the machine does not have a tray for the selected paper size or paper type, or
if the selected paper loaded in the machine has run out, a caution message ap-
pears. If this message appears, do the following procedure.
A When the caution message appears, press [FormFeed].
B On the confirmation screen, press {OK}.
If you want to stop printing, press [Cancel].
80
Form Feed
C Select the tray for form feed using {T} or {U} from those that appear on the
display panel, and then press the {OK} key.
If you want to print after adding paper to the tray, select the tray after loading
the correct paper.
The machine prints using the selected tray.

3
Note
❒ If a tray with a smaller paper size is selected, the print job may be cut short,
or other problems may occur.
Canceling a Print Job

Follow this procedure for canceling the print job if the message prompting form
feed appears.
A Press [JobReset].
B Press [Current].
The confirmation message appears.

To resume printing jobs, press [Resume].
C Press [Yes] to cancel the print job.
Press [No] to return to the previous display.
81
Note
❒ If the machine is shared by multiple computers, be careful not to acciden-
tally cancel someone else's print job.
❒ Under Windows, If the machine is connected to the computer using a par-
allel cable, sent print jobs may be canceled if [JobReset] is pressed while
“Waiting...” is displayed on the control panel. After the interval set in [I/O
Timeout] in Printer Features has passed, the next print job can be sent. A
print job sent from a different client computer will not be canceled in this
case.
❒ You cannot stop printing data that has already been processed. For this
3 reason, printing may continue for a few pages after you press [JobReset].
❒ A print job containing a large volume of data may take considerable time
to stop.
Reference
For details, see p.83 “Canceling a Print Job”.
82

This section gives instruction to stop printing from the computer or the control
panel.
Canceling a Print Job Using the Control Panel

A Press [JobReset] on the display panel.
A confirmation message appears.
3
B Press [Current].
To resume printing jobs, press [Resume].
C Press [Yes] to cancel the print job.
Press [No] to return to the previous display.
Windows - Canceling a Print Job from the computer

You can cancel a print job from the computer if transferring print jobs is not com-
pleted.
A Double-click the printer icon on the Windows task tray.

A window appears, showing all print jobs currently queued for printing.
Check the current status of the job you want to cancel.
B Select the name of the job you want to cancel.

C On the [Document] menu, click [Cancel Printing].
D Press the {Printer} key on the machine's control panel.
83
Note
❒ If the machine is shared by multiple computers, be careful not to acciden-
tally cancel someone else's print job.
❒ If the machine is connected to the computer using a parallel cable, sent
print jobs may be canceled if [JobReset] is pressed while “Waiting...” is dis-
played on the control panel. After the interval set in [I/O Timeout] in Printer
Features has passed, the next print job can be sent. A print job sent from a
different client computer will not be canceled in this case.
❒ In Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, and Windows NT 4.0, click [Cancel]
on the [Document] menu.
3 ❒ In Windows 95 / 98 / Me / 2000 or Windows NT 4.0, you can also open
the print job queue window by double-clicking the machine icon in the
[Printers] machine window (the [Printers and Faxes] window under Win-
dows XP and Windows Server 2003).
❒ You cannot stop printing data that has already been processed. For this
reason, printing may continue for a few pages after you press [JobReset].
❒ A print job containing a large volume of data may take considerable time
to stop.
84
Checking the Error Log
Checking the Error Log

If files could not be stored due to printing errors, identify the cause of the errors
by checking the error log on the control panel.
Important
❒ The most recent 30 errors are stored in the error log. If a new error is added
when there are 30 errors already stored, the oldest error is deleted.
❒ If the main power switch is turned off, the log is deleted.
A Press the {Printer} key to display the Printer screen. 3

B Press [Menu].
C Press [Show Error Log] and then press the {OK} key.
D Select the error log you want to check using {T} or {U}.
A detailed error log appears.

Note
❒ Press the {Escape} key until the Printer screen appears after checking the
log.
❒ To print files that appear in the error log, resend them after stored files
have been printed or deleted.
85
Collate
When printing multiple documents such as handouts for meetings, you can sep-
arate sets into order. This function is known as “Collate”. Collate stores data
transmitted from a computer in memory.
❖ Collate
Printed output is assembled as sets in sequential order.
AEU016S
Note
❒ You can set Collate in the printer driver settings.
❒ If Auto Continue occurs on the first set, Collate will be canceled.
❒ If forced printing occurs on the first set, Collate will be canceled.
❒ When setting Collate in the printer driver settings, make sure that a collate
option is not selected in the application's print settings. If a collate option is
selected, printing will not be as intended.
Reference
For information about paper sizes and the number of sets you can use Collate
with in every option, see Copy Reference.
For printing methods, see the printer driver Help.
86
4. The Functions and Settings
of the Machine
Mainframe
Network Guide, PostScript 3 Supplement, and UNIX Supplement cover all mod-
els, and therefore contain all the functions and settings. This chapter describes
the functions and setting items used for configuring the model you are using.
Reference
For details about functions and setting items, see Network Guide, PostScript
3 Supplement and UNIX Supplement.
Functions
The following functions are available with the machine:
• Copy
• Printer
• Scanner
• Fax
Note
❒ The machine must be equipped with the Printer/Scanner Unit in order to use
the printer or scanner function.
Interface
The following interfaces are available with the machine:
• Ethernet (100BASE-TX / 10BASE-T)
• USB (2.0)
• IEEE 1284 (Parallel) (Optional)
• IEEE 802.11b (Wireless LAN) (Optional)
• Bluetooth (Optional)
Note
❒ To use the IEEE 1284, IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN), or Bluetooth interface, the
machine must be equipped with the corresponding unit for that interface.
❒ You cannot have the IEEE 1284, IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN), and Bluetooth
interface on the machine at the same time.
87
The Functions and Settings of the Machine
List of the Setting Items
Web Image Monitor

The following tables show Web Image Monitor items that can be viewed or mod-
ified depending on the selected mode on the Web browser.
Select one of the following modes to log on Web Image Monitor:
• User mode: log on as a user
• Administrator mode: log on as an administrator
❖ Home
4 • Status
Menu User mode Administrator mode
Status Read Read
Toner Read Read
Input Tray Read Read
Output Tray Read Read
• Device Info
Functions Read Read
System Read Read
Version Read Read
Printer Language Read Read
• Counter
Copier Read Read
Printer Read Read
Fax Read Read
Send/TX Total Read Read
Fax Transmission Read Read
Scanner Send Read Read
Other Function(s) Read Read
88
❖ Job
• Job List
Current/Waiting Jobs Read Read
Job History Read Read
• Printer
Job History Read Read
Error Log Read Read
• Fax History
Menu User mode Administrator mode 4
Transmission Read Read
Reception Read Read
LAN-Fax Read Read
❖ Address Book
Address List None Read/Modify
❖ Configuration
• Device Settings
System Read Read/Modify
Paper Read Read/Modify
Date/Time Read Read/Modify
Timer Read Read/Modify
Logs None Read/Modify
E-mail Read Read/Modify
Auto E-mail Notification None Read/Modify
On-demand E-mail Notification None Read/Modify
File Transfer None Read/Modify
User Authentication Man- None Read/Modify
agement
Administrator Authentica- None Read/Modify
tion Management
Program/Change Administrator None Read/Modify
89

LDAP Server None Read/Modify
Firmware Update None Read/Modify
• Printer
Basic Settings Read Read/Modify
Tray Parameters (PCL) None Read/Modify
Tray Parameters (PS) None Read/Modify
PDF Temporary Password Modify None
PDF Group Password None Modify
4 PDF Fixed Password None Modify
• Fax
General None Read/Modify
Administrator Tools None Read/Modify
E-mail Settings None Read/Modify
IP-Fax Settings None Read/Modify
IP-Fax Gateway Settings None Read/Modify
Parameter Settings None Read/Modify
• Interface
Interface Settings Read Read/Modify
Wireless LAN Settings Read Read/Modify
• Network
IPv4 Read Read/Modify
IPv6 Read Read/Modify
NetWare Read Read/Modify
AppleTalk Read Read/Modify
SMB Read Read/Modify
SNMP None Read/Modify
SNMPv3 None Read/Modify
SSDP None Read/Modify
Bonjour Read Read/Modify
System Log Read Read
90
• Security
Network Security None Read/Modify
Access Control None Read/Modify
IPP Authentication None Read/Modify
SSL/TLS None Read/Modify
ssh None Read/Modify
Site Certificate None Read/Modify
Device Certificate None Read/Modify
• RC Gate
4
Setup RC Gate None Read/Modify
Update RC Gate Firmware None Read/Modify
RC Gate Proxy Server None Read/Modify
• Webpage
Webpage Read/Modify Read/Modify
• Extended Feature Settings

Startup Setting None Read/Modify
Extended Feature Info None Read
Install None Read/Modify
Uninstall None Read/Modify
Administrator Tools None Read/Modify
Copy Extended Features None Read/Modify
Copy Card Save Data None Read/Modify
Note
❒ Some items are not displayed depending on the security settings.
telnet
The following telnet can be used with the machine:
access, appletalk, authfree, autonet, bonjour (rendezvous), btconfig, device-
name, dhcp, diprint, dns, domainname, help, hostname, ifconfig, info, ipp, ipv6,
logout, lpr, netware, passwd, prnlog, route, set, show, slp, smb, snmp, sntp, ss-
dp, ssh, status, syslog, upnp, web, wiconfig, wins
91
Settings that can be used with PostScript 3

The following PostScript 3 settings can be used with the machine:
Note
❒ Depending on a type of printer drivers, different items may be displayed.
Settings Selectable Items
Fit to Paper Prompt User, Nearest Size and Scale, Nearest Size and Crop
Collate Off, On
Print Mode Through, Edge smoothing, Toner Saving
Dithering: Auto, Photographic, Text, User Setting
4 Image Smoothing: Off, On, Auto, Less than 90 ppi, Less than 150 ppi, Less than
200 ppi, Less than 300 ppi
Orientation Override Off, Landscape, Portrait
Watermark Off, On
Watermark Text CONFIDENTIAL, COPY, DRAFT, FINAL, FILE COPY,
PROOF, TOP SECRET
Watermark Font Helvetica Bold, Courier Bold, Times Bold
Watermark Size 24 Point, 36 Point, 48 Point, 60 Point, 72 Point
Watermark Angle 180 Degrees, 135 Degrees, 90 Degrees, 45 Degrees, 0 Degrees,
-45 Degrees, -90 Degrees, -135 Degrees, -180 Degrees
Watermark Style Gray, Outlined
92
5. Appendix
Specifications
This section contains the machine's electrical and hardware specifications, in-
cluding information about its options.
Component Specifications
Resolution 600/300 dpi
Printing speed 16 ppm
(A4K, 81/2 × 11 K plain paper)
Printing speeds depend on the machine. Check which type of ma-
chine you have. See About This Machine.
Interface Standard:
• Ethernet interface (100 BASE-TX / 10 BASE-T)
• USB 2.0 interface
Option:
• IEEE 1284 parallel interface
Use a standard 36-pin printer cable not longer than 3 meters (10
feet).
• IEEE 802.11b wireless LAN interface
• Bluetooth interface
Network protocol TCP/IP, IPX/SPX, AppleTalk
Printer language Standard: RPCS, PCL 5e, PCL XL
Option: PostScript 3, PDF
Fonts PCL XL/5e :
Monotype Imaging 35 Intellifonts, 10 TrueType fonts, 13 Interna-
tional fonts, and 1 Bitmap font.
PostScript 3 :
136 fonts (Type 2:24, Type 14:112)
Memory 384 MB
Network cable 100 BASE-TX / 10 BASE-T shielded twisted-pair (STP, Catego-
ry/Type5) cable.
USB Interface (Standard) • Supported Operating System:
Windows Me / 2000 / XP, Windows Server 2003, MacOS 9.2.2,
MacOS 10.3.3 or later
• Transmission spec.
USB 2.0 Standard
• Connectable Device:
Devices corresponding to USB 2.0 Standard
93
Appendix
Note
❒ When using MacOS, use only the standard USB interface. The optional USB
interface board is not supported.
❒ When using the USB Interface (Standard) with MacOS 9.2.2, only USB 1.1 is
supported.
❒ When using the USB Interface (Standard) with Windows Me, install USB
Printing Support. Windows Me only supports USB 1.1 speed.
Options
Important
❒ The IEEE 802.11b interface unit, the IEEE 1284 interface board, and Bluetooth
interface unit cannot be installed concurrently.
IEEE 1284 Interface Board Type A

5
❖ Transmission spec.:
IEEE 1284
❖ Required cable:
Standard IEEE 1284 compliant Micro Centronics 36 pin cable
IEEE 802.11b Interface Unit Type H
❖ Transmission spec.:
Based on IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN)
❖ Protocol:
TCP/IP, IPX/SPX, AppleTalk
Note
❒ SmartDeviceMonitor and Web Image Monitor are supported.
❖ Data transfer speed:

Auto select from below speed
1 Mbps, 2 Mbps, 5.5 Mbps, 11 Mbps
❖ Frequency range:
• Inch version:
2412 - 2462 MHz (1 - 11 channels)
• Metric version:
2412 - 2472 MHz (1 - 13 channels)
94
Specifications
❖ Transmittable distance:
1 Mbps 400 m
2 Mbps 270 m
5.5 Mbps 200 m
11 Mbps 140 m
Note
❒ These figures are a guideline for outdoor use. In general, the transmittable
distance indoors is 10 - 100 m, depending on environment.
❖ Transmission mode:
Ad hoc, and infrastructure mode
Bluetooth Interface Unit Type 3245
❖ Supported Profiles:
• SPP (Serial Port Profile)
• HCRP (Hardcopy Cable Replacement Profile) 5
• BIP (Basic Imaging Profile)
❖ Frequency Range:
2.45 GHz ISM band
❖ Data Transmission Speed:

723 kbps
Note
❒ The transmission speed is adjusted according to factors such as the dis-
tance and obstacles between the devices, radio signal condition and Blue-
tooth adaptor.
❖ Maximum Range:
10 m
95
INDEX
B O
Bluetooth Interface Unit Type 3245, 95 Operating system, 93
Bypass tray, 10, 12 Options, 94
C P
Canceling a job, 83 PageMaker, 53
Collate, 86 PDF Direct Print, 71
Control keys, 5 Printer Features Menu, 6
Control panel, 6 Printer language, 93
Custom size paper, 10, 14 printer properties, PCL, 55, 56, 58, 59
printer properties, RPCS, 62, 64, 66, 68
D Printing a PDF file directly, 71
printing, bypass tray, 10, 16
data security for copying, 76
Printing Method, 71
Display panel, 4
Printing speed, 93
document defaults, PCL, 60 Printing with Bluetooth Connection, 46
document defaults, RPCS, 68
Printing with Parallel Connection, 44
E Q
Envelope, 16
Quick Install, 23
Error log, 85
R
F
Resolution, 93
Font Manager 2000, 52
Fonts, 93 S
H setting the paper size, 12
Specifications, 93
Hard disk, 93
How to Read This Manual, 3 T
I Thick Paper, 16
IEEE 1284 Interface Board Type A, 94 U

IEEE 802.11b Interface Unit Type H, 94
Installing the printer driver, 23 Unauthorized copy control, 75, 76, 78
Installing the Printer Driver Using USB, 39 Using commands, 74
Interface, 93
W
M
Windows, 46, 83
Manuals for This Machine, i Windows 2000, 44, 56, 64
mask type, 78 Windows 95/98/Me, 55, 62
Memory, 93 Windows NT 4.0, 59, 60, 68
Windows Server 2003, 58, 66
N Windows XP, 58, 66
Network cable, 93
Network protocol, 93
96 EN USA B288-7603
In accordance with IEC 60417, this machine uses the following symbols for the main power switch:
a means POWER ON.
b means POWER OFF.
c means STAND BY.
Trademarks
Microsoft®, Windows® and Windows NT® are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and/or other countries.
Adobe®, PostScript®, Acrobat®, PageMaker® and Adobe Type Manager are registered trademarks of
Adobe Systems Incorporated.
PCL® is a registered trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company.
Apple, AppleTalk, EtherTalk, Macintosh, Mac OS and True Type are trademarks of Apple Computer,
Inc, registered in the U.S. and other countries.
BonjourTM is a trademark of Apple Computer Inc.
IPS-PRINTTM Printer Language Emulation Copyright© 2000, Oak Technology, Inc., All Rights Re-
served.
UNIX is a registered trademark in the United States and other countries, licensed exclusively through
X/Open Company Limited.
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are owned by the Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks
by Ricoh Company, Ltd. is under license.
NetWare is a registered trademark of Novell, Inc.
UPnP is a trademark of the UPnP Implementers Corporation.

The product name of Windows® 95 is Microsoft® Windows® 95
The product name of Windows® 98 is Microsoft® Windows® 98
The product name of Windows® Me is Microsoft® Windows® Millennium Edition (Windows Me)
The product name of Windows® 2000 are as follows:
The product name of Windows® XP are as follows:
The product names of Windows ServerTM 2003 are as follows:
The product name of Windows NT® 4.0 are as follows:
Copyright © 2006
Operating Instructions Printer Reference
EN USA B288-7603
Scanner Reference
1 Sending Scan Files by E-mail

2 Sending Scan Files by Scan to Folder
3 Delivering Scan Files
4 Using the Network TWAIN Scanner Function
5 Various Scan Settings
6 Appendix
Introduction
Important
ating the machine.
Notes:
Caution:
Important

chine.

❖ Troubleshooting
❖ Copy Reference
i
❖ Network Guide
❖ Other manuals
• PostScript3 Supplement
• UNIX Supplement
Note
❒ For "UNIX Supplement", please visit our Web site or consult an authorized
dealer.
❒ "PostScript3 Supplement" and "UNIX Supplement" include descriptions of
❒ The following software products are referred to using general names:
Product name General name
DeskTopBinder Lite and DeskTopBinder Pro- DeskTopBinder
fessional *
ScanRouter EX Professional * and ScanRouter the ScanRouter delivery software

EX Enterprise *
*Optional
ii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Notice ......................................................................................................................1
Symbols .....................................................................................................................2
Name of Major Option ................................................................................................2
About the Scanner Functions...............................................................................3
Display ....................................................................................................................4
Confirmation Displays ................................................................................................5
Scanner Features...................................................................................................7
1. Sending Scan Files by E-mail

Before Sending Scan Files by E-mail...................................................................9
Outline of Sending Scan Files by E-mail....................................................................9
Preparation for Sending by E-mail ...........................................................................10
Registering E-mail Addresses in the Address Book................................................. 10
E-mail Screen...........................................................................................................11
Basic Procedure for Sending E-mail..................................................................13
Specifying E-mail Destinations ..........................................................................15
Selecting a Destination Registered to a Quick Dial Key ..........................................15
Selecting a Destination Registered in the Machine's Address Book........................15
Manual Entry of an E-mail Address.......................................................................... 21
Searching for a Destination in the LDAP Server ......................................................22
Registering a Manually-Entered E-mail Address in the Address Book ....................25
Specifying the Sender .........................................................................................27
Selecting a Sender Registered to a Quick Dial Key................................................. 28
Selecting a Sender from the List ..............................................................................29
Using a Registration Number to Specify a Sender Name ........................................30
Searching for a Sender by Name............................................................................. 32
Searching for a Sender by E-mail Address ..............................................................34
Setting the Return Receipt Function..................................................................36
Specifying the Subject ........................................................................................37
2. Sending Scan Files by Scan to Folder

Before Sending Scan Files by Scan to Folder ..................................................39
Outline of Sending Scan Files by Scan to Folder.....................................................39
Preparation for Sending by Scan to Folder ..............................................................41
Registering Destination Folders in the Address Book.............................................. 42
Scan to Folder Screen .............................................................................................43
Basic Procedure for Sending by Scan to Folder ..............................................45
Specifying Scan to Folder Destinations ............................................................ 47
Selecting a Destination Registered to a Quick Dial Key ..........................................47
Selecting a Destination Registered in the Machine's Address Book........................48
Sending Scan Files to a Shared Folder on the Network ..........................................53
Sending Scan Files to an FTP Server......................................................................58
Sending Scan Files to NetWare Server ...................................................................61
Registering the Path to the Selected Destination in the Address Book ...................66
iii
3. Delivering Scan Files
Before Delivering Scan Files ..............................................................................69
Delivering Scan Files ...............................................................................................69
Preparation for Delivering ........................................................................................ 70
Installing DeskTopBinder Lite from Provided CD-ROM ...........................................71
Network Delivery Scanner Screen ...........................................................................72
Basic Delivery Procedure....................................................................................73
Specifying Delivery Destinations .......................................................................76
Selecting a Destination Using a Quick Dial Key.......................................................76
Selecting a Destination Registered in the Destination List of the Delivery Server ...77
4. Using the Network TWAIN Scanner Function

When Using as a TWAIN Scanner ...................................................................... 83
Outline of the TWAIN Scanner Function ..................................................................84
Preparation for Using the Network TWAIN Scanner ................................................85
Installing TWAIN Driver from Provided CD-ROM.....................................................86
Basic Procedure for Scanning Files Using TWAIN Scanner ...........................87
5. Various Scan Settings

Specifying Send Options ....................................................................................89
Resolution ................................................................................................................89
Original Orientation ..................................................................................................90
Original Setting......................................................................................................... 92
Scan Size .................................................................................................................93
File Type ..................................................................................................................97
PDF Security Encryption ..........................................................................................98
PDF Security Permissions .....................................................................................101
Selecting Original Type .....................................................................................104
Adjusting Image Density ...................................................................................106
Scan Settings When Using Twain Scanner .....................................................107
Setting Original Orientation on the TWAIN Scanner ..............................................107
6. Appendix
Relationship between Resolution and Scan Size ...........................................109
When Using for E-mail or Scan to Folder, or as a Network Delivery Scanner .......109
When Using as a Network TWAIN Scanner...........................................................110
Scan Settings and File Types ................................................................................111
Software Supplied on CD-ROM ........................................................................112
Auto-Run Program .................................................................................................112
TWAIN Driver .........................................................................................................112
DeskTopBinder Lite................................................................................................113
Values of Various Set Items for Transmission/Delivery Function ................115
Transmission..........................................................................................................115
The Network Delivery Function ..............................................................................117
Specifications.....................................................................................................118
INDEX....................................................................................................... 119
iv
Notice
❖ Declaration of Conformity
Product Name: Printer/Scanner Controller
Model Number: 816/DSm416/LD016/Aficio MP 161
816f/DSm416f/LD016f/Aficio MP 161F
816mf/DSm416pf/LD016spf/Aficio MP 161SPF
A This device may not cause harmful interference, and
B this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
❖ Note to users in the United States of America

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are
designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a
residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the in-
structions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Howev-
er, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular
installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or tele-
vision reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and
on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one more of the
following measures:
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to
which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio /TV technician for help.
❖ Caution:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible
for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
❖ Note to users in Canada

❖ Remarque concernant les utilisateurs au Canada
❖ Avertissement:
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003
du Canada.
1
This section describes how to read this manual through symbols used.
Symbols

notes. They can be found in the "Safety Information" section of About This Ma-
chine.

"Safety Information" section of About This Machine.

[]
{}
Name of Major Option

A major option of this machine is referred to as follows in this manual:
• Auto Document Feeder capable of scanning both sides of a sheet → ARDF
2
About the Scanner Functions
This section describes functions you can use in the scanner mode.
For details about each function, see respective chapters.
❖ Sending scan files

There are several methods you can use to send captured data as files to com-
puters.
• Sending scan files by e-mail
For details, see chapter 1 "Sending Scan Files by E-mail"
• Sending scan files to a shared folder
For details, see chapter 2 "Sending Scan Files by Scan to Folder".
• Sending scan files to an FTP server
• Sending scan files to a NetWare server
• Delivering scan files using the delivery server
For details, see chapter 3 "Delivering Scan Files".
❖ Scanning originals using the TWAIN Driver

Use the TWAIN driver to specify the machine where originals will be scanned
from a client computer. For details, see chapter 4 "Using the Network TWAIN
Scanner Function".
Reference
p.9 “Sending Scan Files by E-mail”
p.39 “Sending Scan Files by Scan to Folder”
p.69 “Delivering Scan Files”
p.83 “Using the Network TWAIN Scanner Function”
3
Display
This section explains the display, keys, and the two confirmation displays -
Check Destination and File Status.
You can find explanations about the E-mail screen, Scan to Folder screen, or Net-
work Delivery Scanner screen in this manual. For details, see "E-mail Screen",
"Scan to Folder Screen", and "Network Delivery Scanner Screen".
Reference
p.11 “E-mail Screen”
p.43 “Scan to Folder Screen”
p.72 “Network Delivery Scanner Screen”

This section explains how to read the display and use the selection keys.
ARO007S
1. Selection keys 2. {Escape} key

Press to select an item displayed at the Press to cancel operation or return to the
bottom of the screen. preceding display.
Example: the standby screen 3. {OK} key
• When the instruction "press [ ] Press to specify a function on the display
to switch to the E-mail screen" is given or determine a selected function.
in this manual, press the left selection
key. 4. Scroll key
• When the instruction "press [Manual] " Press to move the cursor in each direc-
is given in this manual, press the cen- tion, step by step. When the {U}, {T},
ter selection key. {V}, or {W} key appears in this manual,
• When the instruction "press [Options] " press the scroll key of the same direction.
is given in this manual, press the right
selection key.
4
Confirmation Displays
This section explains the two confirmation displays - Check Dest. and File Sta-
tus.
Check Destination
This section explains about displayed items and how to display the Check Dest.
screen.
Use the Check Dest. screen to check the details of e-mail, Scan to folder, or deliv-
ery destinations.
Pressing the {Check Destination} key switches the screen from the initial scanner
screen to the Check Dest. screen.
❖ Check Dest.
ARO002S
1. Destination 3. [Program]
Displays the transmission or delivery For e-mail or Scan to Folder, if you press
destinations. [Program], the destination that is entered
When multiple destinations are speci- directly or specified by browsing the
fied, you can change the display by press- server can be registered in the machine's
ing the {U} or {T} key. address book.
2. Transmission function icon

Displays the icon of the transmission
function (e-mail, Scan to Folder, or deliv-
ery function) in use.
5
File Status
This section explains the items that appear on the screen and how to display File
Status.
Use the File Status screen to check e-mail, Scan to Folder, and delivery results.
Press the {Job Information} key to display File Status.
❖ File Status
ARO010S
1. Date / Time 3. Number of scanned pages

Displays the date and time the machine Displays the number of scanned pages.
sent a transmission request, or the date
and time transmission status was con-
4. Status
firmed. One of the following transmission status
is displayed: "VDone", "VSending",
2. Destination "VWaiting", "VError" or "VCanceled".
The destination is displayed with the
icon of the transmission function (e-mail,
5. [Print]
Scan to Folder, or delivery function). Press to print transmission results.
When multiple destinations were select-
ed, the first selected destination is dis-
played. Other destinations appear as “+
2” (When two other destinations exist.).
Note
❒ Depending on the security settings, some transmission results might not ap-
pear in File Status.
6
Scanner Features
This section explains Scanner Features settings.
To display the Scanner Features screen, press the {User Tools/Counter} key. For
details about setting methods, see General Settings Guide.
❖ Scan Settings
Items Description
Default Scan Settings Allows you to specify the default resolution and scan
size.
Original Setting Allows you to specify whether originals are one-sided
or two-sided as the default.
This setting is available only when you have installed
the optional ARDF.
Orig. Orientation Priority Allows you to select the default original orientation
(helpful if you usually place originals in the same ori-
entation).
Original Type Setting Allows you to select a suitable original type setting.
Color Mode Priority Allows you to specify whether to scan originals in full
color or black and white.
❖ Destination List Settings

Items Description
Dest. List Priority 1 Allows you to specify whether the address book that
is managed by this machine or the "Destination List"
that is managed by the delivery server is displayed as
the default.
This setting is available only when the Network Deliv-
ery Scanner function is enabled by the ScanRouter de-
livery software.
Update Server Dest. List Allows you to update the delivery server's destination
list by pressing [Update Server Dest. List]. To use this
function, under [System Settings], set [Delivery Option] to
[On].
This setting is available only when the Network Deliv-
ery Scanner function is enabled by the ScanRouter de-
livery software.
Dest. List Priority 2 Allows you to select whether to prioritize the e-mail
destination list or the folder destination list.
7
❖ Send Settings
Items Description
TWAIN Standby Time Allows you to select the machine's response if a client
computer tries to use the TWAIN scanner while scan-
ning is in progress.
File Type Priority Allows you to specify the default file format of scan
files.
Compression (B&W) Allows you to specify a compression method for files
scanned in black and white.
Compress. (Gray/Full Clr) Allows you to specify a compression method for files
scanned in gray scale or full color.
Print&Del. Scanner Journal Allows you to specify the machine's response if the
maximum number of scanner journals is exceeded.
Print Scanner Journal Allows you to print the scanner journal. The scanner
journal is then deleted.
Delete Scanner Journal Allows you to delete the scanner journal without
printing it.
Max. E-mail Size Allows you to select whether or not to limit the size of
e-mail that has attachments.
Divide & Send E-mail Allows you to select whether or not to divide files that
exceed the size specified in [Max. E-mail Size] and send
them as multiple e-mails.
E-mail Informatn. Language Allows you to select the language of the messages that
appear when you send scanned files by e-mail.
❖ Administrator Tools
Items Description
Menu Protect Allows you to set the default access level for functions
whose settings can be changed by users other than the
administrator.
8
1. Sending Scan Files by E-mail
You can attach scan files to e-mails and send them via connections such as LAN
and the Internet.
Before Sending Scan Files by E-mail

This section explains the necessary preparations and the procedure for sending
scan files by e-mail.
Outline of Sending Scan Files by E-mail

This section outlines the function for sending scan files by e-mail.
ZZZ508S
1. This machine 3. Client computer

A scan file can be attached to an e-mail Use e-mail client software to receive e-
and sent to a mail server. mail messages and scan file attachments
that are generated by this machine.
2. SMTP server
You need to have an access to an e-mail 4. LDAP server
server that supports SMTP (Simple Mail Use this server for administering e-mail
Transfer Protocol), to send scan files by e- accounts, searching the network, and au-
mail. However, it is not essential to have thenticating the computers that access
an e-mail server inside the LAN where the machine. Using the LDAP server, you
this machine belongs. It transfers a re- can search for destinations from the ma-
ceived e-mail to a specified destination chine.
through a LAN or the Internet.
9
Sending Scan Files by E-mail
Preparation for Sending by E-mail

This section explains the preparation and settings for sending scan files by e-
mail.
1
A Connect the machine to the network.
Connect the machine to the network using an Ethernet cable or wireless LAN
(IEEE 802.11b).
B Make the necessary network settings in [System Settings].

If you have connected the machine to the network using an Ethernet cable,
make the following settings. For details, see General Settings Guide.
• Specify the machine’s IPv4 address and subnet mask.
• Specify the IPv4 gateway address.
• In [Effective Protocol], enable [IPv4].
• Specify the SMTP server.
C If necessary, change settings in [Send Settings] under [Scanner Features].

Note
❒ To connect the machine to the network using a wireless LAN (IEEE
802.11b), an extended wireless LAN board is required respectively. For de-
tails, see Network Guide.
❒ Items to set up in [System Settings] vary depending on the network environ-
ment. For more information about network settings, see General Settings
Guide.
❒ For more information about [Scanner Features], see General Settings Guide.
Registering E-mail Addresses in the Address Book

You can register frequently used e-mail addresses to the address book.
You can register frequently used e-mail addresses in the address book. Register
e-mail addresses in [Address Book Management] under [Administrator Tools] from
[System Settings]. Addresses can also be registered as groups.
Note
❒ For details about registering e-mail addresses in the address book, see Gener-
al Settings Guide.
❒ You can also register e-mail addresses in the address book using Web Image
Monitor or SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin. For details about how to install
these applications, see Network Guide. For details about registering address-
es in the address book, see Help of respective applications.
❒ Depending on the machine type, you may not be able to use the machine
when it is updating the address book using CSV files (retrieved using Smart-
DeviceMonitor for Admin) that contain user codes.
10
Before Sending Scan Files by E-mail
E-mail Screen
This section explains the screen layout when sending scan files by e-mail.
❖ Main screen 1
ZZZ601S
❖ When a destination is entered manually
ZZZ602S
❖ When a group is selected for destination
ZZZ603S
11
1. E-mail icon 5. [Options]

Indicates that the E-mail screen is dis- Press to make the scan settings and spec-
played. ify formats of files you want to send.
2. Destination field 6. [Add Dest]
1 Displays a selected destination. If multi- When selecting multiple destinations af-
ple destinations are selected, press the ter a manual entry of an e-mail address,
{U} or {T} key to display the destina- press [Add Dest], and then enter the e-mail
tions in the order they were selected. To address of the destination.
check the selected destination, press the
{Check Destination} key.
7. [EditDest]
When changing an e-mail address that
3. E-mail / Scan to Folder / Net- has been entered, press [EditDest], and
work Delivery Scanner then enter the new e-mail address.
Press to switch between screens. You can
also use this key to switch between the E-
8. [View]
mail and Scan to Folder functions when Press to check the addresses registered in
sending the same file to both e-mail and a group.
Scan to Folder destinations at the same
time.
4. [Manual]
When specifying a destination that is not
registered, press [Manual], and then enter
the e-mail address of the destination us-
ing the Quick Dial keys.
12
Basic Procedure for Sending E-mail
Basic Procedure for Sending E-mail

This section describes the basic operation for sending scan files by e-mail.
A Make sure that no previous settings remain. 1

If a previous setting remains, press the {Clear Modes} key.
B If the Network Delivery Scanner or Scan to Folder screen is displayed,

press [ ] to switch to the E-mail screen.
C Place originals.
D If necessary, select the original type.
For details, see "Selecting Original Type".
E If necessary, specify the scanning density.

For details, see "Adjusting Image Density".
F Select the destination.

You can specify multiple destinations.
For details, see "Specifying E-mail Destinations".
G Press [Options], select [Sender's Name], and then specify the e-mail sender.
For details, see "Specifying the Sender".
H If necessary, select [Return Receipt] under [Options] to make settings for the
Return Receipt function.
For details, see "Setting the Return Receipt Function".
13
I If necessary, select [Attach Subject] under [Options] to specify the e-mail sub-
ject.
For details, see "Specifying the Subject".
1 J If necessary, specify the resolution and orientation of the original under

[Options].
For details, see "Specifying Send Options".
K Press the {Start} key.

Scanning starts.
You must press the {q} key to send scan files that are scanned from the ex-
posure glass.
Scan files that are scanned from the ADF/ARDF are sent immediately.
L If you still have originals to send, place them on the machine, and then
press the {Start} key.
Repeat this step until all originals are scanned.
M After all originals are scanned, press the {q} key.

Transmission starts.
Note
❒ If you have selected two or more destinations, the destinations can be
made to appear one by one by pressing the {U} or {T} key.
❒ To cancel a selected destination, display the destination in the destination
field, and then press the {Clear/ Stop} key.
❒ In [System Settings], you can specify the administrator's e-mail address as
the default sender name. This lets you send e-mail without entering any-
thing for [Sender's Name]. For details, see General Settings Guide.
❒ Depending on the security setting, the logged-on user may be specified as
[Sender's Name].
❒ If you press the {Check Destination} key, the initial scanner screen switches
to the Check Dest. screen. You can use the Check Dest. screen to check the
details of the selected destinations. For details, see "Check Destination".
❒ To cancel scanning, press the {Clear/ Stop} key.
Reference
p.104 “Selecting Original Type”
p.106 “Adjusting Image Density”
p.15 “Specifying E-mail Destinations”
p.27 “Specifying the Sender”
p.36 “Setting the Return Receipt Function”
p.37 “Specifying the Subject”
p.89 “Specifying Send Options”
p.5 “Check Destination”
14
Specifying E-mail Destinations

This section explains how to specify e-mail destinations.
You can specify e-mail destinations by any of the following methods: 1
• Select a destination registered to a Quick Dial key
• Select a destination from the machine’s address book
• Enter an e-mail address manually
• Search the LDAP server for a destination and select it
Selecting a Destination Registered to a Quick Dial Key

This section explains how to select a destination registered to a Quick Dial key.
For details about how to register an e-mail destination to a Quick Dial key, see
A Press the Quick Dial key to which the destination is registered.

Repeat this step to add more destinations.
ZZZ609S
The illustration is an example. The actual appearance may be different.
Selecting a Destination Registered in the Machine's Address Book

This section explains how to select a destination from the machine’s address book.
Important
❒ To use this function, you must register destinations in [System Settings] in ad-
vance. For details, see General Settings Guide.
There are four methods of selecting a destination that is registered in the ma-
chine's address book:
• Select a destination from the list
• Enter the destination's registration number
• Search for a destination by name
• Search for a destination by e-mail address
15
Selecting a destination from a list

Use the following procedure to select a destination from the list.
1 A Press the {Search Destination} key.
ZZZ610S
B Press the {U} or {T} key to select [Display List], and then press the {OK} key.
C Press the {U} or {T} key to select the destination from the list, and then
press the {V} key.
The check box on the left side of the selected destination is selected.
D Press the {OK} key.
Note
❒ If under [System Settings], [LDAP Search] is set to [On], a screen to select a
search object appears when you press the {Search Destination} key. On the
screen, select [Search Address Book], and then press the {OK} key.
❒ To cancel a selected destination, press the {U} or {T} key to select the tar-
get destination, and then press the {W} key.
16
❒ Depending on the security settings, some destinations may not appear in

the destination list.
Using a registration number to select a destination

Select the destination from the machine’s address book using its registration
1
number.
ZZZ610S
B Press the {U} or {T} key to select [Search by Registration No.], and then press
the {OK} key.
C Use the number keys to enter the three-digit number assigned to the desti-
nation, and then press the {OK} key.
Example: To enter 003
Press the {3} key, and then press the {OK} key.
D Press the {V} key.
17
E Press the {OK} key.
1
Note
Searching for a destination by name

Use the following procedure to search by name for a destination in the machine's
address book.
ZZZ610S
B Select [Search by Name], and then press the {OK} key.
C Enter the beginning of the destination name, and then press the {OK} key
twice.
Destinations that match the search conditions are displayed.
18
D Press the {U} or {T} key to select the destination, and then press the {V}
key.
Note
❒ Up to 100 destinations can be displayed as search results.
Searching for a destination by e-mail address

Use the following procedure to search by e-mail address for a destination in the
machine's address book.
ZZZ610S
19
B Press the {U} or {T} key to select [Search by E-mail Address], and then press
the {OK} key.
C Enter the beginning of the e-mail address, and then press the {OK} key
twice.
key.
Note
20
Manual Entry of an E-mail Address

This section explains how to enter an e-mail address manually.
A Press [Manual]. 1
B Enter the e-mail address.
C Press the {OK} key.
Note
❒ Depending on the security settings, [Manual] may not be displayed. For de-
tails, consult the administrator.
❒ To modify or change an entered e-mail address, press [EditDest].
❒ To add another destination, press [Add Dest], and then enter an e-mail ad-
dress.
❒ You can register manually-entered e-mail addresses in the machine's ad-
dress book. For details, see "Registering a Manually-Entered E-mail Ad-
dress in the Address Book".
Reference
p.25 “Registering a Manually-Entered E-mail Address in the Address
Book”
21
Searching for a Destination in the LDAP Server

You can search the LDAP server for an address and then specify that address as
an e-mail destination.
1
Important
❒ To use this function, you must connect an LDAP server to the network.
❒ It is necessary to register the LDAP server under [System Settings]. Also, set
[LDAP Search] to [On] under [System Settings]. For details, see “General Settings
Guide”.
ZZZ610S

B Select [Search LDAP], and then press the {OK} key.
C Select [Select Server], and then press the {OK} key.
D Select the server, and then press the {OK} key.
If authentication is required to access the server, the authentication screen ap-

pears. Enter the user name and password correctly.
22 The Search LDAP screen reappears.
E Select [Advanced Search], and then press the {OK} key.
F Specify the search conditions.

The following example uses fuzzy search by destination name.
Select [Name], and then press the {OK} key.
G Enter a part of the destination name.

Search can be by surname or first name, depending on the LDAP server's set-
tings. Consult your administrator.

I Press the {U} or {T} key to select [Fuzzy Search], and then press the {OK}
key.
appears on the left side of the specified condition.

You can also refine the search by setting multiple search conditions.
J Press the {Escape} key.
23
K Press [Search].
1
L Press the {U} or {T} key to select the destination, and then press the {V}
key.
M Press the {OK} key.
Note
❒ If an e-mail address returned by the LDAP server is too long, it will be im-
possible to specify it as the destination. For details about the number of
characters that can be specified, see "E-mail".
❒ You can register multiple e-mail addresses in individual LDAP server ac-
counts. However, only one e-mail address will be displayed as the search
result. Usually, the address that was registered first on the LDAP server is
the address that is displayed.
❒ You can select criteria from the following list:
• [Include]: The names which contain an entered character or characters are
targeted.
Example) To find "ABC", enter "A", "B" or "C".
• [Exclude]: The names which do not contain an entered character or charac-
ters are targeted.
Example) To find "ABC", enter "D".
• [First Word]: The names which start with the entered character or characters
are targeted.
Example) To find "ABC", enter "A".
24
• [Last Word]: The names which end with the entered character or characters
are targeted.
Example) To find "ABC", enter "C".
• [Exact Match]: The names which correspond to an entered character or char-
acters are targeted.
Example) To find "ABC", enter "ABC".
1
• [Fuzzy Search]: a vague search (The function of this vague search depends
on the system supported by the LDAP server.)
Reference
p.115 “E-mail”
Registering a Manually-Entered E-mail Address in the Address

Book
This section explains how to register a manually entered destination in the ma-
chine's address book. You can also register a destination selected from the LDAP
server to the address book.
A Press the {Check Destination} key.
ZZZ611S
B Press the {U} or {T} key to display the destination you want to register,
and then press [Program].
C Enter the name, and then press the {OK} key.
25
D Press [Details] and [Reg. No.] to specify registration information. After you
have made all settings, press the {OK} key.
For details about specifying registration information, see General Settings

Guide.
Note
❒ Depending on the security settings, [Program] may not appear. In such case,
you cannot complete the registration. For detail, consult you administra-
tor.
26
Specifying the Sender

This section explains how to specify the e-mail sender.
To send e-mails, you must specify the name of the sender. 1
You can specify the e-mail sender by any of the following methods:
• Select a sender registered to a Quick Dial key
• Select a sender from the machine's address book list
• Enter the registration number of a sender who is registered in the machine's
address book
• Search by name for a sender in the machine's address book
• Search by e-mail address for a sender in the machine's address book
Note
❒ Senders must be registered in advance under [System Settings]. For details, see
❒ In [System Settings], you can specify the administrator's e-mail address as the
default sender name. This lets you send e-mails without entering anything for
[Sender's Name].
❒ Depending on the security setting, the logged-on user may be specified as
[Sender's Name].
❒ When a protection code has been set, a screen for entering the protection code
appears after selecting the sender. Enter the protection code, and then press
the {OK} key. If the protection code you entered is correct, the sender name is
displayed.
27
Selecting a Sender Registered to a Quick Dial Key

This section explains how to select a sender registered to a Quick Dial key.
For details about how to register e-mail senders to Quick Dial keys, see General
1 Settings Guide.
A Press [Options].
B Select [Sender's Name], and then press the {OK} key.
C Press the Quick Dial key to which the sender is registered.
ZZZ609S
"Programmed" appears, and then the Send Options screen reappears.
28
Selecting a Sender from the List

This section explains how to select a sender from the machine's address book list.
A Press [Options]. 1
C Press the {Search Destination} key.
ZZZ610S

D Press the {U} or {T} key to select [Display List], and then press the {OK} key.
E Press the {U} or {T} key to select the sender, and then press the {V} key.
The check box on the left side of the selected sender is selected.
To cancel a selected sender, press the {U} or {T} key to select the target send-
er, and then press the {W} key. 29
F Press the {OK} key.
G Press the {OK} key.
Using a Registration Number to Specify a Sender Name

Select the sender using the registration numbers specified by senders in the ma-
chine's address book.
A Press [Options].
ZZZ610S

30
D Press the {U} or {T} key to select [Search by Registration No.], and then press
the {OK} key.
E Use the number keys to enter the three-digit number assigned to the send-
er, and then press the {OK} key.
F Press the {V} key.
31
Searching for a Sender by Name

This section explains how to search by name for a sender in the machine's ad-
dress book.
1
A Press [Options].
ZZZ610S
D Select [Search by Name], and then press the {OK} key.
E Enter the beginning of the sender name, and then press the {OK} key twice.
Senders that match the search conditions are displayed.

32
F Press the {U} or {T} key to select the sender, and then press the {V} key.
1

Note
33
Searching for a Sender by E-mail Address

This section explains how to search by e-mail address for a sender in the ma-
1
A Press [Options].
ZZZ610S
D Select [Search by E-mail Address], and then press the {OK} key.
34
E Enter the beginning of the sender's e-mail address, and then press the {OK}
key twice.
F Press the {U} or {T} key to select the destination, and then press the {V}
key.

Note
35
Setting the Return Receipt Function

This section explains how to set the Return Receipt function.
1 If you set [Return Receipt], the selected sender will receive e-mail notification
when the e-mail recipient opens his/her e-mail.
A Press [Options].
B Press the {U} or {T} key to select [Return Receipt], and then press the {OK}
key.
C Select [On], and then press the {OK} key.

Note
❒ To use the Return Receipt function, you must specify the sender. Note,
however, that the [Return Receipt] notification e-mail may not be transmit-
ted if the e-mail software of the recipient does not support Message Dispo-
sition Notification.
❒ When the administrator's e-mail address is automatically specified as a
sender, notification e-mail will not be sent even if [Return Receipt] is select-
ed. For details about [Admin. E-mail Address] and [Auto Specify Sender Name],
see General Settings Guide.
36
Specifying the Subject
Specifying the Subject

This section explains how to specify the e-mail subject.
A Press [Options]. 1
B Press the {U} or {T} key to select [Attach Subject], and then press the {OK}
key.
C Enter the subject, and then press the {OK} key.
37
38
2. Sending Scan Files by Scan
to Folder
Using the Scan to Folder function, you can send scan files over the network to
shared folders, FTP server folders, or NetWare folders.
Before Sending Scan Files by Scan to

Folder
This section explains the necessary preparations and the procedure for sending
scan files by Scan to Folder.
Outline of Sending Scan Files by Scan to Folder

This section outlines the function for sending scan files by Scan to Folder.
Sending scan files to shared folders
ZZZ509S
1. This machine 2. Computer with a shared folder

You can send scan files to shared net- To use this function, it is necessary to cre-
work folders. To send scan files to shared ate a shared folder in advance. You can
network folders, use the SMB protocol. specify a shared folder to save scan files.
3. Client computer
You can also browse scanned files saved
to a shared folder from a client computer.
39
Sending Scan Files by Scan to Folder
Sending scan files to an FTP server
ZZZ510S

You can send scan files to FTP server You can browse scanned files saved to an
folders. FTP server from a client computer. You
To send scan files to FTP server folders, need to have an FTP client program on
use the FTP protocol. the computer to connect to an FTP server.
2. FTP server
The FTP server is a server that provides
file transfer services among computers
on the same network. Transferred files
are stored on this server. It is essential to
have the FTP server inside the
LAN/WAN where this machine belongs.
It is not possible to access an FTP server
via a proxy server.
40
Before Sending Scan Files by Scan to Folder
Sending scan files to NetWare server
ZZZ511S

You can send scan files to NetWare fold- To download images, a computer must
ers. To send scan files to NetWare fold- be running the NetWare client and be
ers, use the NCP protocol. logged onto the server.
2. NetWare server
You can use this server to share files over
the network via NetWare. By sending im-
age data to the server, images can be
stored on the server.
Preparation for Sending by Scan to Folder

This section explains the preparation and settings for sending scan files by Scan to Folder.
Important
❒ Files can be sent to shared folders on client computers.
❒ Files can also be sent to FTP servers if any exist on the network.
❒ Files can also be sent to NetWare servers if any exist on the network.
(IEEE 802.11b).
• Specify the IPv4 gateway address.
• To send files to shared folders, enable [SMB] in [Effective Protocol]. To send
files to NetWare folders, enable [NetWare] in [Effective Protocol]. 41

Note
802.11B), an extended wireless LAN board is required respectively. For de-
2 ment. For more information about network settings, see General Settings
Guide.
❒ For more information about [Scanner Features], see General Settings Guide.
❒ Sending files using SMB is available only under a NetBIOS over TCP/IP
environment. Sending files using SMB is not available under a NetBEUI
environment.
❒ Even when settings made with the control panel, Web Image Monitor, Tel-
net, or other methods do not permit the use of SMB and FTP, sending files
by Scan to Folder is still possible.
Registering Destination Folders in the Address Book

You can register the addresses of frequently-used destination folders in the ad-
dress book.
Register the folder addresses in [Address Book Management] under [Administrator
Tools] from [System Settings]. These addresses can also be registered as groups.
Note
❒ For details about registering the address of a destination folder in the address
book, see General Settings Guide.
❒ You can register entries in the address book using Web Image Monitor or
SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin. For details about installing these applica-
tions, see Network Guide. For details about registering addresses, see Help of
respective applications.
❒ Depending on the machine type, you may not be able to use the machine
when it is updating the address book using CSV files (retrieved using Smart-
DeviceMonitor for Admin) that contain user codes.
42
Before Sending Scan Files by Scan to Folder
Scan to Folder Screen

This section describes the screen layout when sending scan files by Scan to Fold-
er.
❖ Main screen
ZZZ604S
ZZZ605S
❖ When a group is selected for destination
ZZZ606S
43
1. Scan to Folder icon 4. [Dest.:]

Indicates that the Scan to Folder screen is When specifying a destination that is not
displayed. registered, press [Dest.:], and then enter
the path to the destination using the
2. Destination field Quick Dial keys.
Displays a selected destination. If multi-
ple destinations are selected, press the 5. [Options]
{U} or {T} key to display the destina- Press to make the scan settings and spec-
2 tions in the order they were selected. To
ify formats of files you want to send.
{Check Destination} key.

6. [Add Dest]
Press to add a manually entered folder
3. E-mail /Scan to Folder /Net- path as a destination.
work Delivery Scanner
Press to switch between screens. You can
7. [EditDest]
also use this key to switch between the E- Press to modify or change a manually en-
mail and Scan to Folder functions when tered folder path.
sending a file to both e-mail and Scan to 8. [View]
Folder destinations at the same time. Press to check the destinations registered
in a group.
44
Basic Procedure for Sending by Scan to Folder
Basic Procedure for Sending by Scan to

Folder
This section describes the basic operation for sending scan files by Scan to Fold-
er.
A Make sure that no previous settings remain. 2

If a previous setting remains, press the {Clear Modes} key.
B Ifthe Network Delivery Scanner or E-mail screen is displayed, press

[ ] key to switch to the Scan to Folder screen.
C Place originals.

F Select a destination.
For details, see "Specifying Scan to Folder Destinations".
G If necessary, press [Options] to specify the resolution and orientation of the

originals.
45
H Press the {Start} key.

Scanning starts.
posure glass.
I If you still have originals to send, place them on the machine, and then
2 press the {Start} key.
J After all originals are scanned, press the {q} key.

Note
field, and then press the {Clear/ Stop} key. To cancel a destination selected
from the address book, press the selected destination again.
Reference
p.47 “Specifying Scan to Folder Destinations”
46
Specifying Scan to Folder Destinations

This section explains how to specify Scan to Folder destinations.
You can send a file by Scan to Folder by any of the following methods:
• Select a destination registered to a Quick Dial key
• Select a destination registered in the machine’s address book
• Send a file to a shared network folder 2
• Send a file to an FTP server
• Send a file to NetWare server
Selecting a Destination Registered to a Quick Dial Key

This section explains how to select a destination registered to a Quick Dial key.
For details about how to register a Scan to Folder destination to a Quick Dial key,
see General Settings Guide.
A Press the Quick Dial key to which the destination is registered.

ZZZ609S
47
Selecting a Destination Registered in the Machine's Address

Book
This section explains how to select a destination from the machine’s address
book.
Important
2 ❒ To use this function, you must register destinations in [System Settings] in ad-
vance.
There are four methods of selecting a destination that is registered in the ma-
chine's address book:
• Search for a destination by name
• Search for a destination by folder path
Note
❒ If you have specified the protection code for accessing the address book, the
screen for entering the protection code appears.
❒ Depending on the security settings, some destinations may not appear in the
destination list.
Selecting a destination folder from the list

ZZZ610S
48
C Press the {U} or {T} key to select the destination, and then press the {V} 2
key.
Note
❒ Depending on the security settings, some destinations may not appear in
49
Using a registration number to select a destination folder

Select the destination from the machine's address book using its registration number.
ZZZ610S

B Press the {U} or {T} key to select [Search by Registration No.], and then press the {OK} key.
C Using the number keys, enter the three-digit registration number assigned
to the destination, and then press the {OK} key.
D Press the {V} key.
50

Use the following procedure to search by name for a destination in the machine's
address book.

2
ZZZ610S
twice.
key.
51
2 Note
Search for a destination by folder path

Use the following procedure to search by folder path for a destination in the ma-
ZZZ610S
B Select [Search by Folder Name], and then press the {OK} key.
C Enter the beginning of the folder path, and then press the {OK} key twice.
Enter the folder path in the following format: \\computer name\folder
name.
52
key.
The check box on the left side of the selected destination is selected. 2
Note
Sending Scan Files to a Shared Folder on the Network

This section explains how to specify the destination when sending files to a
shared network folder.
Important
❒ A shared folder must be created on a client computer in advance.
❒ Depending on the operating system of the client computer, access to the
shared folder may require authentication.
You can send a file to a shared folder over the network by any of the following
methods:
• Enter the destination path manually
• Specify the destination folder path by browsing
Entering the path to a destination folder

Use the following procedure to enter the destination path manually.
A Press [Dest.:].
53
B Select [SMB], and then press the {OK} key.
2 C Select [Manual Entry], and then press the {OK} key.
D Enter the path to the destination folder, and then press the {OK} key.
The following is an example of a path where the folder name is “user” and the
computer name is “desk01”: \\desk01\user.
Instead of specifying the destination using its computer name, you can also
use its IPv4 address.
E Enter a user name used to log on to the client computer, and then press the
{OK} key.
F Enter the password used to log on to the client computer, and then press the
{OK} key.
The Confirm Destination screen appears.
54
G Press [Com.Test].
A connection test starts.

2
H The test result appears. Press [Exit].
I Press the {OK} key.
Note
❒ If authentication is required to access the folder, the login screen appears.
Enter the user name and password.
❒ If you change the protocol after entering the path name, user name, or
password, a confirmation message appears.
❒ IPv4 address entry is supported by Windows98/Me/2000/XP, Windows
NT4.0, and Windows Server 2003.
❒ To modify or change an entered folder path, press [EditDest].
❒ To add another destination, press [Add Dest], and then enter its folder path.
❒ The connection test may take time.
❒ Even if the connection test was successful, the machine may fail to transfer
the file if you do not have write privileges for the shared folder or there is
not enough free hard disk space.
❒ You can register the destination path in the machine’s address book. For
details, see “Registering the Path to the Selected Destination in the Address
Book”.
Reference
p.66 “Registering the Path to the Selected Destination in the Address
Book”
55
Specify the path by browsing to a destination folder

Use the following procedure to specify a destination folder path by browsing
computers on the network.
A Press [Dest.:].
2
B Select [SMB], and then press the {OK} key.
C Press [Browse Network], and then press the {OK} key.
A list of domains or work groups on the network appears.
D Select the domain or workgroup that includes the destination folder you
want to specify, and then press the {OK} key.
E Select the destination computer.
If you cannot find the destination computer, press the {U} or {T} key. Select
the computer, and then press the {OK} key. The computer folder opens. Press
[Up] or the {Escape} key to go up one level.
56
F A login screen appears if authentication is required. Enter a user name and

password used to log on to the client computer, and then press the {OK}
key.
2
G Select the destination folder, and then press [Apply].
If you cannot find the destination folder, press the {U} or {T} key. Select the
folder, and then press the {OK} key. The folder opens. Press [Up] or the {Es-
cape} key to go up one level.
I Press [Com.Test].
J The test result appears. Press [Exit].
K Press the {OK} key.
57
Note
❒ If authentication is required to access the folder, the login screen appears.
Enter the user name and password.
❒ If you press [Cancel] while browsing the network, the Path Entry Method
screen reappears.
2 ❒ Computer and shared folder names containing more than 12 characters
cannot be displayed.
❒ Up to 100 computers and shared folders can be displayed on the "Browse
Ntwrk" screen.
❒ The machine may fail to transfer the file if you do not have write privileges
for the shared folder or there is not enough free hard disk space.
Book”.
Reference
Book”
Sending Scan Files to an FTP Server

This section explains how to specify destinations when sending files to an FTP
server.
Directly enter the path for the folder on the FTP Server
You can enter the path to an FTP server manually.
A Press [Dest.:].
B Select [FTP], and then press the {OK} key.
58
C Enter the FTP server name, and then press the {OK} key.
Instead of specifying the destination using its server name, you can also use
its IPv4 address.
2
D If you change the port number specified under [System Settings], enter a new
number using the number keys, and then press the {OK} key.
E Enter the user name, and then press the {OK} key.
F Enter the password, and then press the {OK} key.
G Enter the path to the destination folder, and then press the {OK} key.
The following is an example of a path where the sub folder name is “lib” and
the folder name is “user”: user\lib.
A destination confirmation screen appears.
59
H Press [Com.Test].

2
I The test result appears. Press [Exit].
J Press the {OK} key.
Note
Book”.
Reference
Book”
60
Sending Scan Files to NetWare Server

This section explains how to specify destinations when sending files to NetWare
server.
The NetWare folder of the destination can be specified in an NDS tree or on a
NetWare Bindery server, depending on the NetWare environment. Consult
your administrator.
You can send a file to NetWare server by any of the following methods:
2
• Enter the destination path manually
• Specify the destination folder path by browsing
Entering the path to a destination folder

Enter the destination folder path of the NetWare server directly.
A Press [Dest.:].
B Select [NCP], and then press the {OK} key.
C Select the connection type, and then press the {OK} key.
Select [NDS] to specify a folder in the NDS tree. Select [Bindery] to specify a
folder on the NetWare Bindery server.
D Select [Manual Entry], and then press the {OK} key.
61
E Enter the destination folder path, and then press the {OK} key.
If you set the connection type to [NDS], the NDS tree name is “tree”, the name
of the context including the volume is “context”, the volume name is “vol-
ume”, and the folder name is “folder”, the path will be \\tree\volume.con-
text\folder”. If you set the connection type to [Bindery], the NetWare server
name is “server”, the volume name is “volume”, and the folder name is “fold-
er”, the path will be “\\server\volume\folder”.
2
F Enter a user name to log on to the NDS tree or Netware Bindery server, and
If you select [NDS] for connection type, enter the user name, and then enter the
name of the context containing the user object. If the user name is “user” and
the name of the Context is “context”, the user name will be “user.context”.
G If a password is specified for the log on user, enter it, and then press the
{OK} key.
The Confirm Destination screen appears.
H Press [Com.Test].
62
I Check the test result, and then press [Exit].
J Press the {OK} key. 2
Note
❒ You can connect only to folders that you have the read privileges for.
❒ Even if the connection test was successful, the machine may fail to transfer
the file if you do not have write privileges for the file or there is not enough
free hard disk space.
Book”.
Reference
Book”
63
Specify the path by browsing to a destination folder

Specify the path by browsing to the destination folder in an NDS tree or on a
NetWare Bindery server.
A Press [Dest.:].
2
B Select [NCP], and then press the {OK} key.
C Select the connection type, and then press the {OK} key.
Select [NDS] to specify a folder in the NDS tree. Select [Bindery] to specify a
folder on the NetWare Bindery server.
D Press [Browse Network], and then press the {OK} key.
A list of NetWare Bindery servers or NDS trees on the network appears.
E Select the NDS tree or NetWare Bindery server that contains the required
destination folder, and then press the {OK} key.
A list of NDS contexts or NetWare Bindery server volumes appears.
64
F A login screen appears if authentication is required. Enter a user name and

password, and then press the {OK} key.
2
G Select a context or volume that contains the required destination folder,
A list of destination folders appears.
H Select the destination folder, and then press [Apply].
I The path to the selected folder is displayed. Check the path is correct, and
J The destination is displayed. Check the destination is correct, and then

press the {OK} key.
Note
❒ Only folders that you have the read privileges for are displayed.
65
❒ If the language used for the NDS tree or by the NetWare Bindery server
differs from that used by the machine, file names in the NDS tree or on the
NetWare Bindery server might appear garbled.
❒ If the selected NDS tree or NetWare Bindery server requires authentica-
tion, a login screen appears. Enter a user name and password for logging
on to the NDS tree or NetWare Bindery server. If you log on to the NDS
tree, enter a user name, and then enter the name of the context containing
the user object. If the user name is “user” and the name of the Context is
2 “context”, the user name will be “user.context”.
❒ The machine may fail to transfer the file if you do not have write privileges
for the folder or there is not enough free hard disk space.
Book”.
Reference
Book”
Registering the Path to the Selected Destination in the Address

Book
This section explains how to register folder paths you have entered manually or
specified by browsing the network to the machine's address book.
A Press the {Check Destination} key.
ZZZ611S
B Press the {U} or {T} key to display the destination you want to register,
and the press [Program].
66
C Enter the name, and then press the {OK} key.
D Press [Details] and [Reg. No.] to specify registration information. After you 2
have made all settings, press the {OK} key.
Note
❒ Depending on the security settings, [Program] may not appear. In such case,
you cannot complete registration. For detail, consult you administrator.
67
68
3. Delivering Scan Files
The ScanRouter delivery software enables you to deliver scan files by various
methods.
Before Delivering Scan Files

This section describes the necessary preparations and the procedure for using
the network delivery scanner.
Important
❒ To use the network delivery scanner function, you need a delivery server on
which the optional ScanRouter delivery software is installed. You must also
register destination and sender information on the delivery server.
Delivering Scan Files

This section outlines the function for delivering files using the network delivery
scanner.
ZZZ513S
1. This machine • Storing the file in a selected folder

You can send scan files to the delivery For details about delivery types and the
server. setting method, see ScanRouter delivery
software manuals.
2. Delivery server
Install the ScanRouter delivery software 3. Client computer
on this computer to use it as the delivery The delivery method determines how
server. you can check files from a client comput-
After receiving a scan file, the delivery er. For example, you can use the follow-
server delivers the file according to the ing methods to check files:
setting specified for the destination. The • Use DeskTopBinder to view a file that
delivery settings are as follows: was delivered to an in-tray
• Storing the file in an in-tray • Use an e-mail application to receive an
e-mail that has an attachment
• Delivering the file by e-mail
• Browse a folder for a stored file 69
Preparation for Delivering

This section explains the preparation and settings for delivering scan files.
Important
❒ To use the network delivery scanner function, you need a delivery server on
which the optional ScanRouter delivery software is installed. For details
about the ScanRouter delivery software, see the manuals supplied with the
ScanRouter delivery software.
❒ To view files delivered to an in-tray, you must install DeskTopBinder on the
3 client computer.

(IEEE 802.11b).
B Make the necessary settings in [System Settings].

• Set [Delivery Option] to [On].

D Using the ScanRouter delivery software, register this machine as an I/O de-
vice. In addition, register destinations and specify such settings as the de-
livery type and sender.
For details, see the ScanRouter delivery software manuals.
Note
Guide.
❒ For details about installing DeskTopBinder Lite, see “Installing DeskTop-
Binder Lite from Provided CD-ROM”.
Reference
p.71 “Installing DeskTopBinder Lite from Provided CD-ROM”
70
Before Delivering Scan Files
Installing DeskTopBinder Lite from Provided CD-ROM

This section explains how to use the supplied "Scanner Driver and Utilities" CD-
ROM to install DeskTopBinder Lite on a client computer.
To view or receive files delivered to in-trays, you must first install DeskTop-
Binder Lite on the client computer.
A Make sure Windows is running on the client computer, and then insert the
“Scanner Driver and Utilities” CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
The installer is automatically started and the [Scanner Driver and Utilities] dialog
box appears. 3
B Click [DeskTopBinder Lite].
The [DeskTopBinder Lite Setup] dialog box appears. For the subsequent instal-
lation steps, see Setup Guide that can be displayed from the [DeskTopBinder
Lite Setup] dialog box.
Note
❒ Before you start the installation, check the system requirements for Desk-
TopBinder Lite. For details, see “Software Supplied on CD-ROM”.
❒ You can install the software using the auto-run program. For details about
the auto-run program, see “Auto-Run Program”.
❒ If the installer does not start automatically, see “Auto-Run Program”.
Reference
p.112 “Software Supplied on CD-ROM”
p.112 “Auto-Run Program”
71
Network Delivery Scanner Screen

This section describes the screen layout when using the network delivery scanner.
❖ Main screen
ZZZ607S
ZZZ608S
1. Network Delivery Scanner icon 4. [Manual]

Indicates that the Network Delivery To send a file by e-mail via the delivery
Scanner screen is displayed. server to a destination not registered in the
delivery server’s Destination List, press
2. Destination field this key to display the soft keyboard. Then
Displays a selected destination. If multi- use the soft keyboard to enter the e-mail
ple destinations are selected, press the address. For details about how to send a
{U} or {T} key to display the destina- file by e-mail via the delivery server, see the
tions in the order they were selected. To ScanRouter delivery software manuals.
{Check Destination} key. 5. [Options]
Press to make the scan settings.
3. E-mail /Scan to Folder /Net-
work Delivery Scanner 6. [Add Dest]
Press to switch between screens. When selecting multiple destinations af-
ter a manual entry of an e-mail address,
press [Add Dest], and then enter the e-mail
address of the destination.
7. [EditDest]
When changing an e-mail address that
has been entered, press [EditDest], and
72 then enter the new e-mail address.
Basic Delivery Procedure

This section describes the basic operation for delivering scan files using the net-
work delivery scanner.
Important
❒ You must register destinations and senders in advance using the ScanRouter
delivery software installed on the delivery server.
A Make sure that no previous settings remain.

If a previous setting remains, press the {Clear Modes} key. 3
B If the E-mail or Scan to Folder screen is displayed, press [ ] to switch
to the Network Delivery Scanner screen.
C Place originals.

F Select the destination.

For details, see “Specifying Delivery Destinations”.
G If necessary, press [Options] to specify the resolution and the orientation of

the originals.
73
H If necessary, select [Sender's Name] under [Options], and then specify the
sender.
The sender you specify appears in the subject line of e-mail that is sent via the
delivery server. Select the sender from the destinations registered on the de-
livery server. For details, see "Specifying the Sender".
3
I If necessary, select [Attach Subject] under [Options], and then specify the sub-
ject.
The subject entered here is set for e-mail that is sent via the delivery server.
For details, see "Specifying the Subject".
J Press the {Start} key.

Scanning starts.
posure glass.
K If you still have originals to send, place them on the machine, and then
press the {Start} key.
L After all originals are scanned, press the {q} key.

Note
❒ To send e-mail via delivery server, press [Manual] on the delivery screen,
and then enter a destination e-mail address. For details about the proce-
dure for manually entering e-mail addresses, see "Manual Entry of an E-
mail Address".
field, and then press the {Clear/ Stop} key.
❒ You can use the Return Receipt function when sending e-mail via delivery
server. An e-mail is sent to the sender selected in step H, notifying him/her
that the recipient has read his/her e-mail. For details about the procedure
for setting the Return Receipt function, see "Setting the Return Receipt
Function".
74
❒ To enable the Return Receipt function, it is necessary to make the settings

to send e-mail by SMTP with ScanRouter delivery software. For details
about how to specify this setting, see the manuals supplied with the Scan-
Router delivery software. Note, however, that if the receiving party's e-
mail application does not support Message Disposition Notification
(MDN), notification e-mail might not be returned.
❒ Register the sender’s e-mail address using the ScanRouter delivery soft-
ware in advance.
❒ If you press the {Check Destination} key, the initial scanner screen switches
to the Check Dest. screen. You can use the Check Dest. screen to check the
details of the selected destinations. For details, see "Check Destination".
3
Reference
p.76 “Specifying Delivery Destinations”
p.21 “Manual Entry of an E-mail Address”
p.5 “Check Destination”
75
Specifying Delivery Destinations

This section explains how to specify delivery destinations.
You can select delivery destinations registered in the “Destination List” of the
delivery server by any of the following methods:
• Select a destination using the Quick Dial keys
• Select a destination registered in the “Destination List” of the delivery server
3 Selecting a Destination Using a Quick Dial Key

This section explains how to select a destination using a Quick Dial key.
For details about how to register a delivery destination to a Quick Dial key, see
A Press a Quick Dial key of the same number as the [Short ID] of the destina-
tion registered in the delivery server.
ZZZ609S

Note
❒ For details about how to set Short IDs, see the manuals supplied with the
ScanRouter delivery software.
76
Selecting a Destination Registered in the Destination List of the

Delivery Server
This section explains how to select a destination registered in the delivery serv-
er's Destination List.
There are four methods of selecting a destination that is registered in the deliv-
ery server's Destination List:
• Search for a destination by name 3
• Search for a destination by comment
Selecting a destination from the list

ZZZ610S
C Press the {U} or {T} key to select the destination, and then press the {V}
key.
Repeat this step to add more destinations. 77
Note
❒ To cancel a selected destination, press the key to select the target destina-
tion, and then press the {W} key.
3 ❒ Depending on the security settings, some destinations may not appear in
Using a registration number to select a destination

Select a destination by entering its Short ID number (registered using the Scan-
Router delivery software). For details about how to set Short IDs, see the manu-
als supplied with the ScanRouter delivery software.
ZZZ610S
B Press the {U} or {T} key to select [Search by Registration No.], and then press
the {OK} key.
78
C Using the number keys, enter the three-digit registration number assigned
to the destination, and then press the {OK} key.
D Press the {V} key. 3

Use the following procedure to search by name for a destination in the delivery
server's Destination List.
ZZZ610S
79
twice.
key.
Note
80
Searching for a destination by comment

Use the following procedure to search by comment for a destination in the de-
livery server's Destination List. The Search by Comment function searches for a
destination using the comment (one of the registration items required by the
ScanRouter delivery software) as a keyword.
ZZZ610S
B Select [Search by Comment], and then press the {OK} key.
C Enter the beginning of the comment, and then press the {OK} key twice.
key.
81
82
4. Using the Network TWAIN
Scanner Function
You can use this machine to scan originals into a client computer over the net-
work.
When Using as a TWAIN Scanner

This section explains the necessary preparations and the procedure for using the
network TWAIN scanner.
Important
❒ To use the network TWAIN scanner, you must install the TWAIN driver,
which is on the supplied CD-ROM. For details about installing the TWAIN
driver, see “Installing TWAIN Driver from Provided CD-ROM”.
❒ To use the network TWAIN scanner, a TWAIN-compliant application, such
as DeskTopBinder, must be installed on the client computer. DeskTopBinder
Lite is on the supplied CD-ROM. For details about installing DeskTopBinder
Lite, see “Installing DeskTopBinder Lite from Provided CD-ROM”.
Reference
p.86 “Installing TWAIN Driver from Provided CD-ROM”
83
Using the Network TWAIN Scanner Function
Outline of the TWAIN Scanner Function

This section outlines the network TWAIN scanner function.
In the TWAIN scanner mode, you can share this machine among multiple com-
puters. Therefore, you don't have to prepare a special computer for scanner or
reconnect the scanner and each computer every time you need to use it.
ZZZ514S

Scans an original after receiving a scan Specifies the scanner settings and con-
instruction from a client computer, and trols the scanner using an application,
then sends the scan file over the network such as DeskTopBinder Lite, that sup-
to the client computer. ports the network TWAIN scanner. Re-
ceives the files scanned by the machine
and displays them using an application
that supports the network TWAIN scan-
ner.
Note
❒ When using the machine as a network TWAIN scanner, you do not need to
press the {Scanner} key on the machine’s control panel. The screen switches
automatically when you scan an original from a client computer using the
TWAIN driver.
To use functions other than the network TWAIN scanner, press [Exit].
84
When Using as a TWAIN Scanner
Preparation for Using the Network TWAIN Scanner

This section explains the preparation and settings for using the network TWAIN
scanner function.
Important
as DeskTopBinder, must be installed on the client computer. DeskTopBinder
Lite is on the supplied CD-ROM. For details about installing DeskTopBinder
Lite, see “Installing DeskTopBinder Lite from Provided CD-ROM”.

(IEEE 802.11b).
4
C Install the TWAIN driver on a client computer.

For details about installing the TWAIN driver, see “Installing the TWAIN
Driver from Provided CD-ROM”.
Note
Guide.
❒ For more information about [System Settings], see General Settings Guide.
Reference
p.86 “Installing TWAIN Driver from Provided CD-ROM”
85
Installing TWAIN Driver from Provided CD-ROM

This section explains how to install the TWAIN driver on a client computer from
the supplied “Scanner Driver and Utilities” CD-ROM.
To use the network TWAIN scanner, you must install the TWAIN driver on a cli-
ent computer.
To use the TWAIN scanner function, you need to install the TWAIN driver on
the client computer.
A Start Windows, and then insert the CD-ROM labeled “Scanner Driver and
Utilities” into the CD-ROM drive of the client computer.
The installer is automatically started and the [Scanner Driver and Utilities] dialog
box appears.
4
B Click [TWAIN Driver].
C The installer of the TWAIN Driver starts. Follow the instructions.
Note
❒ Before you start the installation, check the system requirements for the
TWAIN driver. For details about the system requirements, see “Software
Supplied on CD-ROM”.
❒ You can install the software using the auto-run program. For details about
the auto-run program, see “Auto-Run Program”.
❒ If the installer does not start automatically, see “Auto-Run Program”.
❒ When the installation is complete, a message about restarting the client
computer may appear. In this case, restart the client computer.
❒ After the installation is complete, a folder with the name of the machine in
use is created in [Programs] or [All Programs] on the [Start] menu. You can
display Help from here.
❒ Notes on using the network TWAIN scanner are provided in Readme.txt.
Be sure to read them before use.
Reference
p.112 “Software Supplied on CD-ROM”
p.112 “Auto-Run Program”
86
Basic Procedure for Scanning Files Using TWAIN Scanner
Basic Procedure for Scanning Files Using

TWAIN Scanner
This section describes the basic operation for scanning with the network TWAIN
scanner.
Important
as DeskTopBinder, and the TWAIN driver must be installed on the client
computer.
The following procedure uses Windows XP and DeskTopBinder Lite by way of

example. 4
A On the [Start] menu, point to [All Programss], point to [DeskTopBinder], and
then click [DeskTopBinder].
B On the [Tools] menu, click [Scanner Settings...].

C Click [Select Scanner Driver...].
D Select the name of the machine you want to use in the list, and then click
[Select].
E Click [OK].
F Place originals.
G On the [File] menu, point to [Add Document], and then click [Scan...]. The
Scanner Control dialog box appears.
A dialog box that is used to control a scanner using the TWAIN driver is re-
ferred to as the Scanner Control dialog box.
H Make settings according to such factors as the type of original, type of scan-
ning, and orientation of the original.
For details, see the TWAIN driver Help.
I In the Scanner Control dialog box, click [Scan].

Depending on the security setting, if you press [Scan], a dialog box for enter-
ing the user name and password may appear.
If there are more originals to be scanned, place the next original, and then
click [Continue].
If there are no more originals to be scanned, click [Complete].
J On the [File] menu, click [Exit].
87
K Enter the document name, and then click [OK].

The DeskTopBinder viewer closes and the image is stored in DeskTopBinder
Lite.
Note
❒ If you have already selected a scanner, you do not need to select the scan-
ner unless you want to change it.
❒ Using DeskTopBinder, you can edit and print scan files. For more informa-
tion about DeskTopBinder, see DeskTopBinder manuals.
❒ The model name of the connected scanner appears in the title bar of the
Scanner Control dialog box. If there is more than one scanner of the same
model on the network, make sure you have selected the correct scanner. If
you have not, click [Select Scanner Driver...], and then select the scanner
4 again. If the correct scanner does not appear in the list, check that the scan-
ner is correctly connected to the network and that its IPv4 address has been
specified. If the correct scanner still does not appear, consult the network
administrator.
88
5. Various Scan Settings
This section describes various scan settings.
Specifying Send Options

This section describes procedure for specifying send options.
Note
❒ For details about setting [Sender's Name], [Attach Subject], and [Return Receipt],
see chapter 1 "Sending Scan Files by E-mail".
Reference
p.9 “Sending Scan Files by E-mail”
Resolution
Select resolution for scanning originals.
Select [100dpi], [200dpi], [300dpi], [400dpi], or [600dpi] as the scanning resolution.
A Press [Options].
B Press the {U} or {T} key to select [Resolution], and then press the {OK} key.
C Select a resolution, and then press the {OK} key.
D Press the {Escape} key. 89

Various Scan Settings
Original Orientation
This section explains how to correctly display the top/bottom orientation of
scanned originals on a client computer screen.
A Press [Options].
B Press the {U} or {T} key to select [Original Orientation], and then press the
{OK} key.
C Select or for the same orientation as the original, and then press
the {OK} key.
90
Placing Originals
To correctly display the top/bottom orientation of the scanned original on a cli-
ent computer, the placement of the original and the settings made on the control
panel must match.
Place originals correctly by referring to the following table:
❖ Exposure Glass
Original orientation Control Panel Key
top edge touches top left corner of exposure
glass
top edge touches rear of exposure glass
❖ ARDF
Original orientation Control Panel Key
top edge placed first
top edge touches rear of ARDF
Note
❒ Originals are normally rectangular ( ) or horizontally long ( ). However, the
table above uses squares to make original orientation easier to understand.
Even if the actual shape of the original is different, the combination of original
orientation and the orientation specified on the scanner driver does not
change.
91
❒ When you select Full Color or Gray Scale for Original Type, and single page
TIFF/JPEG or multi-page TIFF is selected as the file type, refer to the table be-
low for how to place originals. Originals placed in orientations that are not
recommended in the table might appear incorrectly top/bottom oriented on
client computer displays.
Placing an Original on the Exposure Glass
Placing an Original in the ARDF
Original Setting
5 This section explains the settings for scanning one-sided or two-sided originals.
Important
❒ This function is not available unless ARDF is installed.
A Press [Options].
B Press the {U} or {T} key to select [Original Setting], and then press the {OK}
key.
92
C Select [1 Sided Original] to scan one-sided originals, and then press the {OK}
key. Select [2 Sided Orig.(T to T )] or [2 Sided Orig.(T to B )] to scan two-sid-
ed originals, and then press the {OK} key.
2 Sided Orig.(T to T )
2 Sided Orig.(T to B )
5
Scan Size
Select the size of the original to be scanned.
The following items and sizes can be selected:
❖ Template size
81/2 × 14L, 81/2 × 13L, 81/2 × 11L, 51/2 × 81/2K, 51/2 × 81/2L, A4L, A5K,
A5L, B5 JISL
❖ [Custom Size]
Scans in a specified size.
Original sizes that can be scanned:
• Horizontal width: 5.5 - 14.0 inch
• Vertical length: 5.5 - 8.5 inch
A Press [Options].
93
B Press the {U} or {T} key to select [Scan Size], and then press the {OK} key.
C Press the {U} or {T} key to select the scan size in the list, and then press the
{OK} key.
5 D Press the {Escape} key.

Note
❒ If a template size is selected, the machine scans originals at the selected size
regardless of the actual size of originals. If an original is smaller than the
selected size, the machine applies margins to the scan area.
❒ If [Custom Size] is selected, the dimensions of the scan area (width and
length) can be specified in inch.
Specifying Custom Size

This section explains how to specify a custom size.
To scan a custom size original, measure its width and length, and enter these fig-
ures as the [Horiz.] and [Vert.] settings.
The following figure shows the [Horiz.] and [Vert.] of an original.
❖ Placing an original in the ARDF
ALO031S
1. Vertical
2. Horizontal
94
❖ Placing an original on the exposure glass
ALO032S
1. Vertical
2. Horizontal
A Press [Options].
5
B Press the {U} or {T} key to select [Scan Size], and then press the {OK} key.
C Press the {U} or {T} key to select [Custom Size], and then press the {OK} key.
D Using the number keys, enter the horizontal width, and then press the {OK}
key or {q} key.
95
E Using the number keys, enter the vertical length, and then press the {OK}
or {q} key.
F Press the {Escape} key.

How to set originals to scan them by custom size
This section explains how to place originals you want to scan at Custom Size.
❖ Original orientation setting

Under [Original Orientation], select [ ] or [ ] according to the orienta-
5 tion of your original. To display [Original Orientation], on the initial scanner
screen, press [Options]. For details, see "Original Orientation".
❖ Placing an original
Place originals face up in the ARDF; face down on the exposure glass.
❖ Original Orientation is [ ]
Placing an original in the ARDF
ALO029S
Placing an original on the exposure glass

Align the original vertically and then place it
face down.
ALO030S
96
❖ Original Orientation is [ ]
Placing an original in the ARDF
ALO027S
Placing an original on the exposure glass

Align the original, turn it rightward or left-
ward, and then place it face down on the expo-
sure glass.
ALO028S
Reference
p.90 “Original Orientation”
5
File Type
This section explains the procedure for selecting a file type.
Important
❒ To deliver files, set the file type using the delivery server computer. For de-
tails, see the manuals supplied with the ScanRouter delivery software.
You can select one of the following file types:
• Single Page:TIFF/JPEG
• Single Page:PDF
• Multi-page:TIFF
• Multi-page:PDF
A Press [Options].
B Press the {U} or {T} key to select [File Type], and then press the {OK} key.
97
C Press the {U} or {T} key to select the file type, and then press the {OK} key.
"Programmed" appears, and then the Send Options screen appears.
PDF Security Encryption

This section explains security settings for PDF files.
Use security settings to prevent unauthorized access to PDF files.
Important
5 ❒ Security settings can be made for PDF files only.
Encrypting PDF file

Set a password to protect a PDF file. Only users who have the password can
open the PDF file.
Important
❒ Encryption is possible only for scan files sent by e-mail or Scan to Folder.
❒ You cannot open an encrypted file without a password. Make sure you do not
forget a file's password.
A Press [Options].
B Press the {U} or {T} key to select [PDF Security Encryption], and then press the
{OK} key.
98
C Select [Encrypt Document], and then press the {OK} key.
D Select [On], and then press the {OK} key.
E Enter a password, and then press the {OK} key.

5
The password entered here will be required to open the PDF file.
F Enter the password again, and then press the {OK} key.
"Programmed" appears, and then the PDF Security Encryption screen reap-
pears.
G Press the {Escape} key twice.

Note
❒ The Encryption Password must be different from the Master Password
(which is used for changing PDF Security Permissions).
❒ You can enter up to 32 alphanumeric characters for a document password.
99
Selecting an encryption level for a PDF file

This section explains how to select an encryption level for a PDF file.
A Press [Options].
B Press the {U} or {T} key to select [PDF Security Encryption], and then press the
{OK} key.
5
C Select [Encryption level], and then press the {OK} key.
D Select [40 bit] or [128 bit], and then press the {OK} key.
"Programmed" appears, and then the PDF Security Encryption screen reap-
pears.
E Press the {Escape} key twice.

Note
❒ PDF file created under the [128 bit] Encryption Level cannot be viewed us-
ing Adobe Acrobat Reader 3.0 and 4.0.
❒ If [Permit Low Resolution Only] is specified as the print permission in [PDF Se-
curity Permissions], you cannot select [40 bit].
100
PDF Security Permissions

Set a Master Password to restrict unauthorized printing, changing, copying, or
extracting of a PDF file's content.
Only users who have the Master Password can reset or change these restrictions.
Important
❒ Encryption is possible only for scan files sent by e-mail or Scan to Folder.
❒ You cannot reset or change a file's restriction setting without the Master Pass-
word. Make sure you do not forget the Master Password.
A Press [Options].
5
B Press the {U} or {T} key to select [PDF Security Permissions], and then press
the {OK} key.
C Select [Master Password], and then press the {OK} key.
D Select [On], and then press the {OK} key.
The password entry screen appears.
101
E Enter a password, and then press the {OK} key.
The password entered here will be required to change the security settings of
the PDF file.
F Enter the password again, and then press the {OK} key.
"Programmed" appears, and then the PDF Security Permissions screen reap-
5 pears.
G Select [Permissions], and then press the {OK} key.
H Change the PDF security settings.

You can specify the following security settings:
• Print permission: [Prohibit], [Permit All] and [Permit Low Resolution Only].
• Editing permission: [Prohibit] or [Permit].
• Copying or extracting content permission: [Prohibit] or [Permit].
The following is a procedure to prohibit printing of scanned PDF files.
I Select [Print], and then press the {OK} key.
102
J Select [Prohibit], and then press the {OK} key.
"Programmed" appears, and then the Permissions screen reappears.

You can apply multiple security settings to a PDF file.
K Press the {Escape} key three times.

The Send Options screen reappears.
Note
❒ The Master Password must be different from the Encryption Password.
❒ You can enter up to 32 alphanumeric characters for a Master Password.
❒ If [40 bit] is selected as the PDF encryption level, you cannot select [Permit
Low Resolution Only] as the print permission. 5
103
Selecting Original Type

This section explains how to select an original type.
Select an original type using the {Color Scan} key in combination with the {Orig-
inal} key.
Specify the details of the selected original type using [Original Type Setting] under
[Scanner Features]. For details about [Original Type Setting], see General Settings
Guide.
The following table explains the {Color Scan} and {Original} key combinations
and their relationship with [Original Type Setting].
Default settings are shown in bold type.
{Color Scan} key {Original} key [Original Type Setting]
On Text [Type 1(Color: Text)]
• Full Color: Text / Photo
5 • Full Color: Glossy Photo

On Photo [Type 2(Color: Photo)]
• Full Color: Text / Photo
• Full Color: Glossy Photo
Off Text [Type 3(B&W: Text)]
• Text/Line Art
• Text
• Text/Photo
• Photo
• Gray Scale
Off Photo [Type 4(B&W: Photo)]
• Text/Line Art
• Text
• Text/Photo
• Photo
• Gray Scale
104
Selecting Original Type
A Press the {Color Scan} key to switch between on and off.

The {Color Scan} key is on when the indicator is lit, and off when the indicator
is unlit.
ARP004S
B Press the {Original} key to select text or photo.

5
ARP005S
The indicator of the selected original type lights up.

Note
❒ To scan originals in gray scale, you must first select [Scanner Features], [Orig-
inal Type Setting], and then for [Type 3(B&W: Text)] or [Type 4(B&W: Photo)], se-
lect [Gray Scale]. Then, to scan your original in gray scale, select the original
type that you set to [Gray Scale]. For details about [Original Type Setting], see
❒ If images scanned in gray scale are not clear enough, you can rescan them
by selecting [Type 1(Color: Text)] or [Type 2(Color: Photo)].
105
Adjusting Image Density

This section explains how to specify the scanning density.
There are five levels of scanning density.
A Press the {Lighter} or {Darker} key to adjust the density.

The density indicator moves.
5 ARP006S
The image density changes in five increments as follows:
ABU042S
106
Scan Settings When Using Twain Scanner
Scan Settings When Using Twain Scanner

This section explains how to specify original orientation originals when using the TWAIN
scanner.
Setting Original Orientation on the TWAIN Scanner

This section explains how to correctly display the top/bottom orientation of
scanned originals on a client computer screen.
ent computer, the placement of the original and the settings made in the Scanner
Control dialog box must match.
A Open the Scanner Control dialog box.

For details about how to open the Scanner Control dialog box, see "Basic Pro-
cedure for Scanning Files Using TWAIN Scanner".
5
B In the [Original Scan Method:] list, select the place where the original is placed.
C In the [Orig.Orientn.:] list, select [ ] or [ ].
D In the [Orientation:] list, select [ / ], [ / ],

[ / ] or [ / ].
Reference
p.87 “Basic Procedure for Scanning Files Using TWAIN Scanner”
Placing Originals
The following table shows the relationship between the original orientation and
the Scanner Control dialog box settings:
❖ Exposure Glass
Original orientation TWAIN Scanner control dialog box key
top edge touches top left of exposure glass
This orientation is the TWAIN driver's stan-
dard setting. Place originals in this orientation
normally.
top edge touches rear of exposure glass
107
❖ ARDF
Original Orientation TWAIN Scanner Properties Dialog Box Key
top edge of original placed first
top edge touches rear of ARDF
Note
❒ Originals are normally rectangular ( ) or horizontally long ( ). However, the
table above uses squares to make original orientation easier to understand.
Even if the actual shape of the original is different, the combination of original
orientation and the orientation specified on the scanner driver does not
5 change.
❒ For details about the Scanner Control dialog box, see the TWAIN driver Help.
❒ Depending on the settings, originals of different sizes are scanned differently.
108
6. Appendix
This appendix details specifications of the scanner function and explains supple-
mentary settings.
Relationship between Resolution and Scan Size

This section explains the relationship between resolution and scan size.
Resolution and scan area are inversely related. The higher the resolution is set,
the smaller the area that can be scanned. Conversely, the larger the scan area, the
lower the resolution that can be set.
The relationship between the scanning resolution and the scan size is shown be-
low. If the file size is too large, the message “Exceeded max. data capacity.
Check resolution and Start.” appears on the machine's control panel dis-
play. Change the condition until scanning is enabled.
Note
❒ Image compression level can limit Maximum image size.
When Using for E-mail or Scan to Folder, or as a Network Delivery

Scanner
This section explains the relationship between resolution and scan size when us-
ing the E-mail, Scan to Folder, or Network Delivery Scanner function.
The original type you select determines the resolution and scan sizes that are
available. For details about original types, see "Selecting Original Type".
Reference
❖ If [Text/Line Art], [Text], [Text/Photo], [Photo], is selected as the original type

All combinations up to A4/81/2" × 14" and 600 dpi can be scanned.
❖ If [Gray Scale] is selected as the original type

The originals can be scanned using combinations marked with in the table.
100 dpi 200 dpi 300 dpi 400 dpi 600 dpi
A4
B5
A5
Legal (81/2 × 14)
81/2 × 13
Letter (81/2 × 11)
51/2 × 81/2
109
Appendix
❖ If [Full Color: Text / Photo] or [Full Color: Glossy Photo] is selected as the original
type
The originals can be scanned using combinations marked with in the table.
100 dpi 200 dpi 300 dpi 400 dpi 600 dpi
A4
B5
A5
Legal (81/2 × 14)
81/2 × 13
Letter (81/2 × 11)
51/2 × 81/2
When Using as a Network TWAIN Scanner

This section explains the relationship between resolution and scan size when us-
ing the machine as a TWAIN scanner.
6 To specify the scan area or resolution on the machine you are using as a network
TWAIN scanner directly, see the TWAIN driver Help.
❖ If [Binary(Text)], [Binary(Photo)], or [8 Colors] is selected in [Col./ Grad.:]

All combinations up to A4/81/2" × 14" and 600 dpi can be scanned.
❖ If [Gray Scale] is selected in [Col./ Grad.:]

The originals can be scanned using combinations marked with in the table
if the original orientation is L.
100 dpi 200 dpi 300 dpi 400 dpi 500 dpi 600 dpi
A4
B5
A5
B6
A6
A7
Legal (81/2 × 14)
81/2 × 13
Letter (81/2 × 11)
51/2 × 81/2
Note
110 ❒ Enter size A7 (2.9 × 4.1 inches) directly.
Relationship between Resolution and Scan Size
❖ If [16770K colors] is selected in [Col./ Grad.:]

The originals can be scanned using combinations marked with in the table
if the original orientation is L.
100 dpi 200 dpi 300 dpi 400 dpi 500 dpi 600 dpi
A4
B5
A5
B6
A6
A7
Legal (81/2 × 14)
81/2 × 13
Letter (81/2 × 11)
51/2 × 81/2
Note
❒ Enter size A7 (2.9 × 4.1 inches) directly.
6
Scan Settings and File Types

This section explains about the relationship between the file type specified when
scanning originals and the file type to which files are converted when sending
by e-mail or Scan to Folder.
❖ Single page file type
Original type setting TIFF/JPEG specified PDF specified
Black and white TIFF PDF
Full color or gray scale TIFF (uncompressed)/JPEG (com- PDF
pressed)
❖ Multi-page file type

Original type setting TIFF specified PDF specified
Black and white TIFF PDF
Full color or gray scale TIFF (uncompressed) PDF
Note
❒ If [Single Page:TIFF/JPEG] is specified when scanning a full color original, de-
pending on the [Compress. (Gray/Full Clr)] settings under on [Scanner Features],
the file format changes as follows:
• [On]....JPEG
• [Off]....TIFF 111
Appendix
Software Supplied on CD-ROM

This section explains the applications on the supplied "Scanner Driver and Util-
ities" CD-ROM.
Auto-Run Program
This section explains the auto-run program.
When the CD-ROM is inserted into a client computer running Windows
95/98/Me/2000/XP, Windows Server 2003, or Windows NT 4.0, the installer
starts up automatically (auto run) to install various software.
Note
❒ For installation under Windows 2000/XP, Windows Server 2003, or Win-
dows NT 4.0, log on as an Administrators group member.
❒ Auto-run program may not automatically work with certain operating sys-
tem settings. If this happens, start “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory.
❒ To disable auto-run, set CD-ROM while pressing Shift key. Keep the Shift
key pressed until the computer finishes reading from the CD-ROM.
6 ❒ If [Cancel] is pressed during installation, the installation of all the software
thereafter will be stopped. If cancelled, reinstall the remaining software after
restarting the client computer.
TWAIN Driver
This section tells you the file path to the TWAIN driver and the TWAIN driver's
system requirements.
You must install this driver if you want to scan originals or use the machine as a
network TWAIN scanner.
❖ File path
The TWAIN driver is stored in the following folder on the CD-ROM:
\DRIVERS\TWAIN
❖ System requirements
• Hardware
PC/AT-compatible machines that support the operating system properly
This driver cannot be used in RISC-based processor (MIPS R series, Alpha
AXP, or PowerPC) Windows NT environments.
• Operating system
Microsoft Windows 95/98/Me
• Display resolution
112 800 × 600 pixels, 256 colors or higher
DeskTopBinder Lite
This section tells you the file path to DeskTopBinder Lite, the DeskTopBinder
Lite system requirements, and the applications that are installed with DeskTop-
Binder Lite.
DeskTopBinder is installed on the client computers to integrate and manage var-
ious kinds of files such as scan files, files created with applications, and existing
scan files. This software allows you to use various functions for stored scan files
such as viewing stored files. Also, with the ScanRouter delivery software, you
can view the files stored in in-trays of the delivery server or use other functions
for stored files. For details about DeskTopBinder Lite, see DeskTopBinder Lite
manuals or DeskTopBinder Lite Help.
❖ File path
The DeskTopBinder Lite is stored in the following folder on the CD-ROM
provided with this machine:
\UTILITY\DESKV2
• Hardware
PC/AT-compatible machines that support the operating system properly
6
When installing all functions of DeskTopBinder
Microsoft Windows 98SE/Me/2000 Professional SP1 or later/2000 Server
SP1 or later/2000 Advanced Server SP1 or later/XP Professional/XP
Home Edition
Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Standard Edition/Enterprise Edition
When installing only SmartDeviceMonitor for Client

Microsoft Windows 95 SP1/98/98SE/Me/2000 Professional SP1 or lat-
er/2000 Server SP1 or later/XP Professional/XP Home Edition
Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Standard Edition/Enterprise Edition
Microsoft Windows NT 4.0 SP5 or later
• Display resolution
800 × 600 pixels, 64K colors or higher
❖ Software installed with DeskTopBinder Lite

• Auto Document Link
Auto Document Link on the client computer monitors in-trays of the deliv-
ery server periodically, retrieves files delivered to in-trays, and notifies the
user of delivery.
• Function Palette
Function Palette allows you to use functions such as Scan using TWAIN
scanner or Print without starting DeskTopBinder. To use these functions
from Function Palette, you must first configure them using DeskTopBind-
er Extended Features. For details about Function Palette, see DeskTop-
Binder manuals.
113
Appendix
• Extended Features Wizard

The Extended Features Wizard allows you to make settings as in the [Ex-
tended Features...] of the [Tools] menu. For details, see DeskTopBinder Help.
114
Values of Various Set Items for Transmission/Delivery Function
Values of Various Set Items for Transmission/Delivery

Function
This section explains the values of various transmission/delivery function set-
tings.
Note
❒ Depending on the type or settings of the file or original, you may not be able
to specify the destination or enter the maximum number of characters stated
below.
Transmission
This section explains the values of transmission function settings.
E-mail
The following table tells you the maximum values of the e-mail sending function
settings.
6
Item Maximum value Comments
Number of subject line charac- 128 alphanumeric charac- -
ters ters
Number of e-mail address char- 128 alphanumeric charac- E-mail addresses found via
acters ters LDAP server search cannot be
selected if they contain more
than 128 characters.
Number of addresses you can 100 You can specify 50 destinations
specify at the same time by direct entry, including
LDAP search. Select the remain-
ing 50 destinations from regis-
tered addresses.
Sendable file size 31.875 MB per file -
Sendable number of pages 100 pages per file -
115
Appendix
Scan to Folder
The following table tells you the maximum values of the Scan to Folder function
settings.
Number of path name charac- 128 alphanumeric charac- -
ters on SMB ters
Number of user name charac- 64 alphanumeric charac- -
ters on SMB ters
Number of password charac- 64 alphanumeric charac- -
ters on SMB ters
Number of server name charac- 64 alphanumeric charac- -
ters on FTP ters
ters on FTP ters
ters on FTP ters
6 ters on FTP ters
ters on NCP ters
ters on NCP ters
ters on NCP ters
Number of addresses that can 32 You can specify a maximum of
be specified simultaneously 32 directly entered destinations.
Simultaneous Transmission
The following table tells you the maximum values of settings for using the E-
mail and Scan to Folder functions simultaneously.
Number of destinations you can 132 -
select for E-mail and Scan to
Folder
Number of destinations you can 100 You can specify a maximum of
select for sending by e-mail 50 directly entered destinations,
including LDAP search-re-
trieved destinations.
Number of destinations you can 32 -
set for sending by Scan to Fold-
er
116
Values of Various Set Items for Transmission/Delivery Function
The Network Delivery Function

The following table tells you the values of setting items for the network delivery
scanner function.
Number of subject line charac- 128 alphanumeric charac- -
ters ters
Number of e-mail address char- 128 alphanumeric charac- -
acters ters
Number of addresses you can 100 You can specify 50 destinations
specify at the same time by direct entry, including
LDAP search. Select the remain-
ing 50 destinations from regis-
tered addresses.
The maximum number of desti-
nations you can specify differs
depending on which ScanRout-
er delivery software you are us-
ing. For details, see the manuals
supplied with the ScanRouter
delivery software. 6
117
Appendix
Specifications
The following table tells you the specifications of the scanner.
Scan method Flatbed scanning
Scan speed When using the E-mail/ Scan to Folder/ Net-
work Delivery Scanner function:
Black and white: 22 page/min
(Original size: A4L, Original type: Text, Reso-
lution: 200dpi, Compression (B&W): On, ITU-
T No.1 chart, 1-side scanning)
Full color: 9 page/min (Original size: A4L,
Original type: Text/Photo, Resolution: 200dpi,
Compress. (Gray/Full Clr): Compression level
3, Original Chart, 1-side scanning)
Scanning speed differs depending on the fol-
lowing: operating environment of the machine
and computer, scan settings, and the content
of originals (denser images require more
time).
6 Image sensor type CCD Image Sensor

Scan type Sheet, book
Interface Ethernet interface (10BASE - T or 100BASE -
TX), IEEE 802.11b (Wireless LAN) (option)
Maximum scan size A4, 81/2 × 14 inches
Basic scanning resolution 600 dpi (24-bit full color)
Selectable scanning resolutions when using 100 dpi, 200 dpi, 300 dpi, 400 dpi, 600 dpi
the E-mail/Scan to Folder/Network delivery
scanner function
Selectable scanning resolution when using 100 dpi to 600 dpi
TWAIN scanner
Sendable file formats TIFF, PDF, JPEG
Image compression type for black and white TIFF (MH, MR, MMR)
(two-value)
Image compression type for gray scale/full JPEG
color
Network protocol IPv4, IPX
Protocol for sending e-mail SMTP, POP3
Protocol for Scan to Folder SMB, FTP, NCP
118
INDEX
A I
Address book, 10, 42 Image Density, 106
registering e-mail address, 25 Install, 71, 86
registering folder path, 66 I/O device, 70
ARDF, 2
Attach Subject, 37 J
Auto Document Feeder, 2
Auto-run program, 112 Job Information, 6
JPEG, 111
B
L
Bindery, 61, 64
Browse Network, 56, 64 LDAP server, 9
C M
Manual Entry
CD-ROM, 112
E-mail address, 21
DeskTopBinder Lite, 113
path to a destination folder, 53, 61
TWAIN driver, 112
Multi-pages, 111
Check destination, 5
Confirmation displays, 5
N
CSV file, 10, 42
Custom size, 94 NCP, 64
NDS, 61, 64
D NetWare, 39, 61, 64
Network Delivery function, 117
Delivering scan files, 69, 73
Notice, 1
Delivery server, 69
Number of destinations for simultaneous
Density, 106
transmission, 116
DeskTopBinder Lite, 69, 71, 113
Destination, 15, 76
O
Destination folder, 47
Destination List, 77 Options, 89
Display, 4 Original Orientation, 90, 96
confirmation displays, 5 Original Setting, 92
Display and using keys, 4 Original type, 104
E P
E-mail address, 10 PDF, 98, 111
Encrypt Document, 98 changing security permissions, 101
Encryption level, 100 encrypting, 98
Ethernet, 10, 41, 85 encryption level, 100
PDF Security Encryption, 98
F PDF Security Permissions, 101
Preparation
File Status, 6
delivering scan files, 70
File Type, 97
sending by e-mail, 10
Folder path, 52
sending by scan to folder, 41
FTP, 39, 58
using the Network TWAIN scanner, 85
Functions, 3
119
Q Specifying the sender, 27
destination list, 29
Quick Dial key, 15, 28, 47, 76 Quick Dial key, 28
registration number, 30
R Specifying the subject, 37
Subject, 37
Registration number, 30, 78
Symbol, 2
Resolution, 89
Resolution and scan size, 109
T
Return Receipt, 36
TIFF, 111
S Transmission, 115
TWAIN driver, 86, 112
Scanner driver, 87
TWAIN scanner, 83, 87, 107, 110
Scanner Features, 7
Administrator Tools, 7
V
Destination List settings, 7
Scan Settings, 7 Value of set item for sending e-mail, 115
Send Settings, 7 Values for set items of Scan to Folder
Scanner Mode, 3 function, 116
ScanRouter delivery software, 69 Values of various set items
Scan Size, 93 Delivery, 115
Scan to Folder, 45 Transmission, 115
Screen
E-mail, 11 W
Network delivery scanner, 72
Scan to Folder, 43 Web Image Monitor, 10, 42
Search by Name, 79 Wireless LAN, 10, 41, 85
Search Destination
by comment, 81
by folder path, 52
by name, 18, 51, 79
destination list, 16, 48, 77
e-mail address, 19
LDAP, 22
registration number, 17, 78
Searching for a sender
by e-mail address, 34
by name, 32
by registration number, 30
Selecting a destination, 47, 76, 77
address book, 15, 48
Quick Dial key, 15
registration number, 50
Sender, 27
Sending e-mail, 13
Sending scan files by e-mail, 9
Sending Scan Files by Scan to Folder, 39
Send Options, 89
Shared folder, 39
Single page, 111
SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin, 10, 42
SMB, 53, 56
SMTP server, 9
Specifications, 118
120 EN USA B288-7663
Trademarks
Adobe®, PostScript®, and Acrobat® are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
Pentium® is a registered trademark of Intel Corporation.
NetWare® is a registered trademark of Novell, inc.
Microsoft®, Windows®, and Windows NT® are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and might be trade-
marks of their respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights to those marks.
• The product name of Windows® 95 is Microsoft® Windows® 95.
• The product name of Windows® 98 is Microsoft® Windows® 98.
• The product name of Windows® Me is Microsoft® Windows® Millennium Edition (Windows Me).
• The product names of Windows NT® 4.0 are as follows:
Copyright © 2006
Operating Instructions Scanner Reference
EN USA B288-7663
DDST Unit Type D
Printer / Scanner Reference
1 Getting Started
2 Installing the Software
3 Using the Printer Function
4 Using the TWAIN Scanner Function
5 Appendix
Introduction
Important
ating the machine.
es.
Caution:
Trademarks

• The product name of Windows® Me is Microsoft® Windows® Millennium Edition (Windows Me)
• The product name of Windows® 2000 are as follows:
• The product name of Windows® XP are as follows:
Notes:
Important

chine.
explains the control panel, preparation procedures for using the machine, and
how to install the CD-ROMs provided.

Explains User Tools settings. Also refer to this manual for explanations on
how to register user codes.
❖ Copy Reference
❖ Printer/Scanner Reference
Explains system settings, functions and operations for the machine's print-
er/scanner unit. Also refer to this manual for explanations on how to connect
the machine.
❖ Network Guide
Note
❒ Some manuals include descriptions of functions and settings that are not
available on machines with copier function only or with the DDST Unit.
i
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Symbols .....................................................................................................................1
1. Getting Started
Control Panel..........................................................................................................3
Connecting the Machine .......................................................................................5
Requirements.............................................................................................................5
Connecting the machine to the host using a USB cable ............................................5
2. Installing the Software

Auto Run.................................................................................................................7
Installing the Printer Driver................................................................................... 8
Installing the TWAIN Driver................................................................................... 9
Software Supplied on CD-ROM ..........................................................................10
DDST Driver.............................................................................................................10
DDST TWAIN Driver ................................................................................................10
3. Using the Printer Function

Printer Features Menu .........................................................................................11
Adjusting Printer Features..................................................................................12
Printer Features Parameters...............................................................................13
Paper Input...............................................................................................................13
List/Test Print ...........................................................................................................13
Maintenance.............................................................................................................14
System .....................................................................................................................15
Host Interface...........................................................................................................16
Setting Paper on the Bypass Tray...................................................................... 17
Setting the paper size ..............................................................................................18
Setting custom size paper........................................................................................ 19
Setting thick paper or OHP transparencies..............................................................20
Setting envelopes.....................................................................................................21
Setting Up the Printer Driver and Canceling a Print Job .................................22
Windows 98SE / Me - Accessing Printer Properties ................................................22
Windows 2000 / XP and Windows Server 2003 - Accessing Printer Properties ......23
Canceling a Print Job ...............................................................................................24
4. Using the TWAIN Scanner Function

TWAIN Scanner ....................................................................................................27
Process Flow............................................................................................................27
Preparation for Using the Network TWAIN Scanner.........................................28
TWAIN Scanner Screen........................................................................................... 28
Setting Originals ..................................................................................................29
Placing Originals ...................................................................................................... 29
ii Scanning Originals ..............................................................................................32
5. Appendix
The Printer Function............................................................................................33
Collate ......................................................................................................................33
The Scanner Function .........................................................................................34
Relationship between Resolution and File Size .......................................................34
Specifications.......................................................................................................35
Printer....................................................................................................................... 35
Scanner.................................................................................................................... 35
INDEX......................................................................................................... 36
iii
iv
Symbols

notes. They can be found in the "Safety Information" section of About This Ma-
chine.

"Safety Information" section of About This Machine.

[]
{}
1
2
1. Getting Started
Control Panel
ARL016S
1. {Scanner} key 8. {Clear/Stop} key

Press to activate the scanner function. Clear: clears an entered numeric value.
2. {Printer} key 9. Main power indicator and On in-
Press to activate the printer function. dicator
The main power indicator lights when
3. Indicators the main power switch is turned on. The
Displays errors and machine status. On indicator lights when the operation
h: Error indicator. See Network Guide switch is turned on.
and General Settings Guide.
B: Load Paper indicator. See Copy Ref-
10. Operation switch
erence. Press to turn the power on. The On indicator
lights. To turn the power off, press again.
D: Add Toner indicator. See Copy Refer-
ence. This key is inactivate during printing or
while setting printer defaults.
4. Display
Displays operation status and messages.
11. {Online} key
Press to switch the printer between on-
5. Selection keys line and offline.
Correspond to items on the display. Press
to select the corresponding item.
12. Data In indicator
Blinks while the printer is receiving data
6. Scroll keys from a computer or printing. Lit when
Press to select an item. preparing to print.
{U}: scroll upward 13. {Escape} key
{T}: scroll downward Press to cancel an operation or return to
{V}: scroll right the previous display.
{W}: scroll left
14. {OK} key
7. {User Tools/Counter} key Press to set a selected item or entered nu-
Press to change default or operation pa- meric value.
rameters according to requirement.
15. Number keys
Press to enter numeric values.
3
Getting Started

This section explains how to read the display and use the selection keys on the
initial display.
1
1 2 3 4
ARL006S
1. Selection keys 3. {OK} key

Correspond to the function items at the Press to set a selected item or entered nu-
bottom line on the display. meric value.
Example: Basic screen 4. Scroll keys
When the instruction "press [JobReset]" Press to move the cursor in each direc-
appears in this manual, press the center tion, step by step.
selection key.
When the {U}, {T}, {V}, or {W} key ap-
2. {Escape} key pears in this manual, press the scroll key
Press to cancel an operation or return to of the same direction.
the previous display.
Note
❒ The copy display is set as the default screen when the machine is turned on.
You can change the settings in [System Settings]. See General Settings Guide.
4
Connecting the Machine
Connecting the Machine
Requirements B Connect the other end to the USB

port on the host computer. 1
Before using this machine, make sure The machine and computer are
all environmental and electrical re- now connected. The printer driver
quirements are met. Connect the ma- and TWAIN driver must be in-
chine to the host computer using the stalled next. For details about how
USB port or network interface unit. to install the printer driver and
TWAIN driver, see p.8 “Installing
Make sure all cables, connectors, and
the Printer Driver” and p.9 “In-
electrical outlets necessary for attach-
ing the machine to the host computer stalling the TWAIN Driver”.
or network are close at hand.
Note
Connecting the machine to the ❒ If USB 2.0 is used with Win-
dows 98 SE/Me, only speeds
host using a USB cable equivalent to those of USB 1.1
You can connect the machine to the are possible.
host computer using a USB cable. Reference
Follow the procedure below to con- For details about connection us-
nect the machine to the host computer ing Ethernet, see "Connecting
using a USB cable. the Network Cable to the Net-
A Connect the USB 2.0 cable to the work", Network Guide.
USB port on the right side of the
machine's back cover.
ARL008S
5
Getting Started
6
2. Installing the Software
This manual assumes you are familiar with general Windows procedures and
practices. If you are not, see the operating instructions that come with Windows
for details.
Auto Run
Inserting the CD-ROM into the CD-
ROM drive starts the installer auto-
matically. The installer helps you in-
stall the printer drivers and software
easily.
Important
❒ Under Windows 2000 / XP or Win-
dows Server 2003, installing soft-
ware using Auto Run requires
Administrator permission. To in-
stall software using Auto Run, log
on using an account that has Ad-
ministrators permission.
Note
❒ When “plug and play” starts, click
[Cancel] in [New Hardware Found],
[Device Driver Wizard] or [Found New
Hardware Wizard] dialog box, and
then insert the CD-ROM. The [New
Hardware Found], [Device Driver Wiz-
ard] or [Found New Hardware Wizard]
dialog box appears depending on
the version of Windows 98SE / Me
/ 2000 / XP or Windows Server
2003.
❒ Auto Run may not work with cer-
tain operating system settings. If
this happens, launch "Setup.exe"
on the CD-ROM root directory.
❒ To disable Auto Run, press the left
{SHIFT} key when inserting the
CD-ROM into the drive and keep it
pressed until the computer finish-
es reading from the CD-ROM.
7
Installing the Software

To use the printer function, you must Note
first install the printer driver from the
❒ The printer driver has been in-
supplied CD-ROM.
stalled, plug and play is en-
A Quit all applications currently run- abled, and the icon of the
2 ning. printer connected to the “USB”
port is added to the [Printers] or
B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD- [Printers and Faxes] window.
ROM drive. ❒ For details about using the
The driver installer starts. printer function via Ethernet
under Windows 98SE / Me, see
C Select an interface language, and "Using the Printer Function",
then click [OK]. Network Guide.
The default interface language is ❒ For details about using the print-
English. er function via Ethernet under
D Click [DDST Printer Driver]. Windows 2000 / XP / Server
2003, see "Using the Printer
The DDST Printer Driver installer Function", Network Guide.
starts.
E The software license agreement

appears in the [License Agreement]
dialog box. After reading through
its contents, click [I accept the agree-
ment.], and then click [Next >].
F Follow the instructions on the

display to install DDST Printer
Driver.
If you are required to restart the
computer after installing DDST
Printer Driver, restart the comput-
er.
8
Installing the TWAIN Driver
Installing the TWAIN Driver

To use the scanner function, you must
first install the TWAIN driver on the
supplied CD-ROM.
A Quit all applications currently run-

ning. 2
B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-
ROM drive.
The driver installer starts.
C Select an interface language, and

then click [OK].
The default interface language is
English.
D Click [DDST TWAIN Driver].

The DDST TWAIN Driver installer
starts.
E Click [Close].
9
Installing the Software

This section explains the software on the CD-ROMs supplied with the printer option.
DDST Driver
2 The DDST drivers are included on the CD-ROMs that comes with this machine.
These drivers enable a client computer to communicate with the machine via a
printer language.
Operating system
• Microsoft Windows 98SE
• Microsoft Windows Me
• Windows 2000
• Windows XP
• Windows Server 2003
Hard disk space
• 80 MB or more
DDST TWAIN Driver

This driver is required for scanning originals on the machine.
You must install this driver to use the machine as a network TWAIN scanner.
• Hardware
PC/AT compatible
• CPU
Pentium 300 MHz or faster recommended
Microsoft Windows 98 (SE or later)
Microsoft Windows Millennium Edition
Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional
Microsoft Windows 2000 Server
Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition
Microsoft Windows XP Professional
• Memory
128 MB or more recommended
• Hard disk space
200 MB or more
• Connection
Ethernet/USB
10
Printer Features Menu

There are five menu items in the Printer Features menu:
• Paper Input
• List/Test Print
• Maintenance
• System
• Host Interface
You can select the following functions:
❖ Paper Input (See p.13 “Paper Input”)

Menu Default
Bypass Paper Size Metric version: A4 / Inch version: 11 × 81/2
Auto Paper Select On
Duplex On
❖ List/Test Print (See p.13 “List/Test Print”)

Menu Default
Operations Test ––
❖ Maintenance (See p.14 “Maintenance”)

Menu Default
Menu Protect Off
❖ System (See p.15 “System”)

Menu Default
Auto Continue Off
Edge Smoothing On
Toner Saving Off
❖ Host Interface (See p.16 “Host Interface”)

Menu Default
I/O Timeout 15 seconds
Reference
For more information about copier features and system settings, see Copy
Reference and General Settings Guide.
11
Using the Printer Function
Adjusting Printer Features

Use Printer Features to make basic adjustments when using the machine as a
printer.
Although factory default settings are suitable for most print jobs, Printer Fea-
tures allows you to access settings that control basic printer operations. The
Printer Features settings you make are retained even after you turn off the ma-
chine.

3 B Select [Printer Features] using the {U} or {T} key, and then press the {OK}
key.
C Select the desired item using the {U} or {T} key, press the {OK} key, and
then change its settings.
{OK}: Press to make new settings and go back to previous menus.

{Escape}: Press to return to a previous menu without changing any setting.
D After changing the Printer Features settings, press the {User Tools/Counter}
key.
Note
❒ Changes made to functions remain in effect even after you turn off the ma-
chine.
Reference
For details about copier features and system settings, see Copy Reference
12
Printer Features Parameters
Paper Input List/Test Print

❖ Bypass Paper Size ❖ Operations Test
The size of the paper set in the by- You can print an operations test
pass tray. page.
Default:
• Metric version: A4 Printing the operations test page 3
• Inch version: 11 × 81/2
❖ Auto Paper Select

Set this to enable Auto Paper Se- The User Tools main menu ap-
lect. The machine automatically pears.
detects the paper size from the
print data, and selects a suitable
B Select [Printer Features] using the
{U} or {T} key, and then press
paper feed tray accordingly. the {OK} key.
Default: On
❖ Duplex
You can set this to enable duplex
printing. The machine detects du-
plex printing from the print data,
and selects a suitable paper feed The Printer Features menu ap-
tray accordingly. pears.
Default: On
Reference
C Select [List/Test Print] using the
For more information about paper the {OK} key.
sizes that can be set in the bypass
tray, see General Settings Guide.
D Select [Operations Test] using the

the {OK} key.
The operations test page is printed.
E Press the {User Tools/Counter} key. 13

Maintenance D Select [Menu Protect], and then

press the {OK} key.
❖ Menu Protect
This procedure allows you to pro-
tect menu settings from accidental
change. It makes it impossible to
change menu settings with normal
procedures unless you perform the
required key operations.
E Enter an access code using the
number keys, and then press the
• Level 1 {OK} key.
3 You can protect “Maintenance”,
”System”, and “Host Interface”.
• Level 2
You can protect ”Paper Input”,
“Maintenance”, ”System”, and
“Host Interface”.
• Off F Select a menu protect level, and
Default: Off then press the {OK} key.
Setting Menu Protect

The User Tools main menu ap-
pears. G Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.
{U} or {T} key, and then press Canceling Menu Protect
the {OK} key.
the {OK} key.
The Printer Features menu ap-

pears.
C Select [Maintenance] using the {U}

or {T} key, and then press the
{OK} key.
14
C Select [Maintenance] using the {U} Temporarily canceling Menu Protect

{OK} key. When you select protected items in
Printer Features, a screen for entering
the access codes appears. When this
happens, enter the correct access
codes using the number keys, and
then press the {OK} key. Menu Pro-
tect is then temporarily canceled.
A screen for entering the access
code appears. Note
❒ If you enter a correct access code, 3
D Enter an access code using the Menu Protect is disabled as long as
number keys, and then press the the Printer Features menu is dis-
{OK} key. played.
System
❖ Auto Continue
You can select this to enable Auto
E Select [Menu Protect], and then Continue. When it is On, printing
press the {OK} key. continues even if a system error oc-
curs.
• Off
• 0 minutes
• 1 minute
• 5 minutes
F Enter an access code using the • 10 minutes
number keys, and then press the
{OK} key. • 15 minutes
Default: Off
❖ Edge Smoothing
Set this to enable Edge Smoothing.
• On
• Off
G Select[Off], and then press the Default: On
{OK} key. If Toner Saving is set to On, Edge
Smoothing is ignored even if it is
set to On.
❖ Toner Saving
Set this to enable Toner Saving.
• On
H Press the {User Tools/Counter} key. • Off
Default: Off
15
Host Interface
❖ I/O Timeout
You can set how many seconds the
machine should wait before end-
ing a print job. If data from another
port usually arrives while an earli-
er job is printing out, increase the
timeout period.
• 10 seconds
3 • 15 seconds
• 20 seconds
• 25 seconds
• 60 seconds
Default: 15 seconds
16

The following explains setting paper
on the bypass tray. Use the bypass
A Open the bypass tray.
tray to print onto OHP transparen-
cies, labels, thick paper, and enve-
lopes that cannot be loaded in the
paper tray.
Important
❒ The following functions are dis- 3
abled when printing from the by-
pass tray:
• Duplex Printing ARL009S
• Auto Tray Select

• Auto Tray Switching
B Adjust the paper guides to the pa-
per size.
❒ When printing using the printer
function, original images are al- C Gently insert paper face down
ways rotated by 180 degrees (the into the bypass tray.
orientation of images to be printed
is opposite to that of the copier
function). When printing onto pa-
per with specific orientation re-
quirements, such as envelopes and
letterheads, make sure to rotate the
paper feed orientation by 180 de-
grees.
❒ Be sure to set the paper size using
the printer driver when printing
data from the computer. The paper ABW020S1
size set using the printer driver has
priority over the size set using the 1. Extender
control panel.
2. Paper guides
❒ If the paper guides are not flush
against the paper, images might Do not stack paper over the limit
appear skewed and misfeeds mark. If you do, images might ap-
could occur. pear skewed and misfeeds could
occur.
Reference Fan the paper to get air between
For details about setting paper in the sheets to avoid a multi-sheet
the paper tray, see General Set- feed.
tings Guide. When setting an OHP transparen-
cy, make sure that its front and
back sides are properly positioned.
17
D Push down the paper guide re-

❒ The number of sheets that can
be loaded in the bypass tray de-
lease lever.
pends on the paper type.
Reference
Set the paper size, see p.18 “Set-
ting the paper size”
Setting the paper size

You can set the paper size using the
3 ASP003S printer driver. The following proce-
dures are not necessary when setting
E Set the paper size using the print- paper size using the printer driver.
er driver or the control panel.
Important
Note ❒ The paper size set using the printer
❒ Select the paper type when driver has priority over the size set
printing onto OHP transparen- using the control panel.
cies or thick paper (over ❒ If you are not using the printer
105g/m2). For details, see p.20 driver to make settings, use the
“Setting thick paper or OHP control panel.
transparencies”.
❒ Select the paper type when A Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.
printing onto envelopes. For de-
tails, see p.21 “Setting enve-
lopes”.
the {OK} key.
❒ When loading letterhead paper,
pay attention to its orientation.
See “Orientation-Fixed Paper or
Two-Sided Paper”, Copy Refer-
ence.
❒ Paper within the following di-
mensions can be set in the by- C Select [Paper Input] using the {U}
pass tray: or {T} key, and then press the
• Vertical: 90.0-216.0 mm (3.55 {OK} key.
in.- 8.50 in.)
• Horizontal: 139.0-600.0 mm
(5.47 in.-23.62 in.)
❒ Be sure to set the paper with the
side you want to print facing
down in the bypass tray.
❒ When loading OHP transparen-
cies or thick paper in the bypass
tray, make the paper setting us-
ing the control panel or printer
driver.
18
D Select [Bypass Paper Size], and then A Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.
press the {OK} key.
the {OK} key.
E Select the paper size using the

the {OK} key.
C Select [Paper Input] using the {U} 3
{OK} key.
When printing onto thick paper or

OHP transparencies, select the pa-
per type. For details, see p.20 “Set-
ting thick paper or OHP D Select [Bypass Paper Size], and then
transparencies”. press the {OK} key.
F Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.
Reference
For printer driver settings, see
the printer driver Help.
For details about setting custom
sizes, see p.19 “Setting custom E Select [Custom Size] using the {U}
size paper”. or {T} key, and then press the
{OK} key.
Setting custom size paper

Custom sizes can also be set using the
printer driver. The following proce-
dures are not necessary when setting
custom sizes using the printer driver. F Enter the horizontal size of the
paper using the number keys, and
Important
❒ Custom size settings made using
the printer driver have priority
over those made using the ma-
chine's control panel.
❒ If you are not using the printer
driver to make settings, use the
control panel.
19
G Enter the vertical size of the paper C Select [Tray Paper Settings] using
using the number keys, and then the {U} or {T} key, and then
press the {OK} key. press the {OK} key.
H Press the {User Tools/Counter} key. D Select [Paper Type:Bypass Tray] us-
ing the {U} or {T} key, and then
3 Reference press the {OK} key.
For printer driver settings, see
Setting thick paper or OHP

transparencies
Paper settings can also be set using
E Select [OHP (Transparency)] or [Thick
Paper] using the {U} or {T} key,
the printer driver. The following pro- and then press the {OK} key.
cedures are not necessary when set-
ting paper sizes using the printer
driver.
Important
❒ Paper size settings made using the
printer driver have priority over
those made using the machine's F Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.
control panel.
Note
❒ If you are not using the printer ❒ Settings remain valid until they
driver to make settings, use the are reset again. After printing
control panel. on OHP transparencies or thick
A Press the {User Tools/Counter} key. paper, make sure you clear set-
tings for the next user.
B Select [System Settings] using the Reference
the {OK} key. For printer driver settings, see
20
Setting envelopes G Select [Printer Features] using the

the {OK} key.
B Select [System Settings] using the
the {OK} key.
H Select [Paper Input] using the {U}

{OK} key.
3
C Select [Tray Paper Settings] using

the {U} or {T} key, and then
press the {OK} key.
I Select [Bypass Paper Size], and then

press the {OK} key.
D Select [Paper Type:Bypass Tray] us-

ing the {U} or {T} key, and then
press the {OK} key.
J Select the paper envelope size
from [C5 EnvL], [C6 EnvL], or [DL
EnvL], and then press the {OK}
key.
E Select [Thick Paper] using the {U}

{OK} key.
K Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.
F Press the {Escape} key twice to re-

turn to the User Tools main menu.
21
Setting Up the Printer Driver and Canceling

a Print Job
Windows 98SE / Me - Making settings from an application

Accessing Printer Properties To make settings for a specific appli-
cation, use the printer properties dia-
log box inside that application. The
Changing default settings following example describes how to
3 make settings for the WordPad appli-
A On the [Start] menu, point to [Set- cation that comes with Windows
tings], and then click [Printers]. 98SE / Me.
The [Printers] window appears. A On the [File] menu, click [Print].
B Click the icon of the machine The [Print] dialog box appears.
whose default settings you want
to change. B In the [Name] list, select the ma-
chine you want to use, and then
C On the [File] menu, click [Proper- click [Properties].
ties]. The printer properties dialog box
appears.
C Make the settings you require,
D Make the settings you require, and and then click [OK].
then click [OK].
Note
Note
❒ Settings made in some applica-
tions override settings made us- ❒ Procedures for opening the print-
ing the printer driver. er properties dialog box vary
depending on the application.
For more information, see the
operating instructions that
come with the application you
are using.
❒ Any settings you make in the
following procedure are valid
for the current application only.
22
Setting Up the Printer Driver and Canceling a Print Job
Windows 2000 / XP and Changing default settings - Printing

preferences properties
Windows Server 2003 -
Accessing Printer Properties Important
❒ Changing machine settings requires
Manage Printers permission. Mem-
Changing default settings - Printer bers of the Administrators and
properties Power Users groups have Manage
Printers permission by default. To
Important set up options, log on using an ac-
❒ Changing machine settings re- count that has Manage Printers per- 3
quires Manage Printers permis- mission.
sion. Members of Administrators
and Power Users groups have A On the [Start] menu, point to [Set-
Manage Printers permission by de- tings], and then click [Printers].
fault. To set up options, log on us- The [Printers] window appears.
ing an account that has Manage Under Windows XP Professional
Printers permission. and Windows Server 2003, open
A On the [Start] menu, point to [Set- the [Printers and Faxes] window on
the [Start] menu.
tings], and then click [Printers].
Under Windows XP Home Edi-
tion, open the [Printers and Faxes]
Under Windows XP Professional window by clicking [Control Panel]
and Windows Server 2003, open from the [Start] button on the task-
the [Printers and Faxes] window on bar, click [Printers and Other Hard-
the [Start] menu. ware], and then click [Printers and
Under Windows XP Home Edition, Faxes].
open the [Printers and Faxes] win-
dow by clicking [Control Panel] from B Click the icon of the machine
the [Start] button on the taskbar, whose default settings you want
click [Printers and Other Hardware], to change.
and then click [Printers and Faxes].
C On the [File] menu, click [Printing
B Click the icon of the machine Preferences...].
whose default you want to The [Printing Preferences] dialog box
change. appears.
C On the [File] menu, click [Properties]. D Make the settings you require,
The printer properties dialog box and then click [OK].
appears. Note
D Make the settings you require, ❒ Settings you make here are used
and then click [OK]. as the defaults for all applica-
tions.
Note
❒ Settings you make here are used
as the defaults for all applica-
tions.
23
Making settings from an application Canceling a Print Job

To make settings for a specific appli-
cation, use the [Print] dialog box with- Important
in that application. The following ❒ If the machine is shared by multi-
example describes how to make set- ple computers, be careful not to ac-
tings for the WordPad application cidentally cancel someone else's
that comes with Windows 2000 / XP print job.
and Windows Server 2003.
A Double-click the printer icon on
A On the [File] menu, click [Print...]. the Windows taskbar.
3 The [Print] dialog box appears. A window appears, showing all
print jobs currently queued for
B In the [Select Printer] list, select the printing. Check the current status
machine you want to use, and of the job you want to cancel.
then click the tab that contains the
print settings you want to change. B Select the name of the job you
Under Windows XP and Windows want to cancel.
Server 2003, click [Preference] to
open the Printing Preferences dia-
C On the [Document] menu, click
[Cancel Printing].
log box.
Under Windows 2000 / XP, and
C Make the settings you require. Windows Server 2003, click [can-
cel] on the [Document] menu.
D Click [Print] to start printing.
Under Windows XP and Windows D Press the {Printer} key.
Server 2003, click [OK], and then
click [Print] to start printing.
E Press [JobReset].
Note
❒ Procedures for opening the
[Print] dialog box vary depend-
ing on the application. For de-
tails, see the operating
instructions that come with the F Press [Current].
application you are using.
❒ Any settings you make in the
following procedure are valid
for the current application only.
• [Current]: cancels the print job

currently being processed.
• [Resume]: resumes printing jobs.
24
Setting Up the Printer Driver and Canceling a Print Job
G Press [Yes] to cancel the print job.
Press [No] to return to the previous

display.
Note
❒ Under Windows 98SE / Me / 3
2000 / XP, or Windows Server
2003, you can also open the
print job queue window by
double-clicking the machine
icon in the [Printers] machine
window (the [Printers and Faxes]
window under Windows XP
and Windows Server 2003).
❒ You cannot stop printing data
that has already been pro-
cessed. For this reason, printing
may continue for a few pages
after you press [JobReset].
❒ Data-heavy jobs may take con-
siderable time to stop.
25
26
4. Using the TWAIN Scanner
Function
TWAIN Scanner
Client computers can use this machine as a network TWAIN scanner.
Using direct USB connection, stand alone computers can also use this machine
as a TWAIN scanner.
Procedures for network scanning are the same as those for scanning via USB
connection.
ARL013S
1. This machine 3. Stand-alone computer

Connects to computers via Ethernet Uses the scanner via direct USB connec-
(TCP/IP) and/or USB. tion and a TWAIN-compliant application
(such as Imaging).
2. Client computer
Uses the scanner via a TWAIN-compliant
application (such as Imaging).
Process Flow
A Scanning commands are sent to the machine (1.) via the TWAIN driver
from a TWAIN-compliant application installed on the client (2.) or stand-
alone (3.) computer.
B The machine (1.) scans the originals.

C Scanned data is edited and stored using the TWAIN-compliant application
on the client (2.) or stand-alone (3.) computer.
27
Using the TWAIN Scanner Function
Preparation for Using the Network TWAIN

Scanner
The following diagram shows the preparation required to use this machine as a
TWAIN scanner.
See p.9 “Installing the

Install the TWAIN driver on a client computer. *1
TWAIN Driver”.
USB connection: See p.5

4 “Connecting the machine to
the host using a USB cable”.
Connect the scanner and client computer with a cable.
Ethernet connection: See
“Connecting the Machine”
in Network Guide.
*1
To you use this machine as a TWAIN scanner, you must be running a TWAIN-com-
pliant application on a client computer.
TWAIN Scanner Screen

When using the machine as the TWAIN scanner, it is not necessary to press the
{Scanner} key on the control panel. When the TWAIN driver becomes active, the
display automatically switches to the following screen:
28
Setting Originals
Setting Originals
The following explains the procedure for placing originals on the exposure glass
and in the ARDF, and setting the scan area and orientation according to how you
have set your originals.
ent computer, the placement of the original and the settings made on the control
panel and scanner driver must match.
Placing Originals
Place originals in one of the two orientations show in the table below.
Important 4
❒ Normally, an original is or , but the table below uses a square original to
make orientation easier to understand. Even if the shape of your original is
different to that shown in the table, the combination of original orientation
and the orientation specified on the control panel or scanner driver does not
change.
❖ Specifying original orientation and setting originals
An original to be scanned
Exposure glass ARDF
Decide the placement method.

Place the Place the Place the top Place the
original so original so edge of the original so
Place the original. that the top that the top original first. that the top
(There are two original orien- edge touches edge touches edge touches
tations.) the top left of the rear of the back of
the expo- the exposure the ARDF.
sure glass. glass.
The original displayed on a

computer
29
❖ When placing the original so that

Placing on the Exposure Glass the top edge touches the top left of
Originals that do not fit into the the exposure glass
ARDF, such as sheets with glued-on When using the machine as a
parts, books, etc., can be placed di- network TWAIN scanner, this
rectly on the exposure glass for scan- orientation is the standard set-
ning. ting for the TWAIN driver. This
orientation is suitable for most
For details about originals that you originals.
can place on the exposure glass, see
Copy Reference.
A Lift the exposure glass cover or

the ARDF.
Lift the exposure glass cover or
4 ARDF to an angle of more than 30
R
degrees. The opening/closing ac-
tion triggers the automatic original
size detection process.
B Place the original on the exposure ABF008S

glass with the side to be scanned
facing down. Align the original 1. Positioning mark
with the back left corner mark.
There are two original orienta- C Lower the exposure glass cover or
tions. the ARDF.
❖ When placing the original so that D Select the original orientation ac-
the top edge touches the rear of cording to the orientation of the
placed original.
the exposure glass
Reference
p.29 “Specifying original orien-
tation and setting originals”
R
ABF007S
1. Positioning mark
30
Setting Originals
❖ When placing the top edges of the

Placing in the Auto Document Feeder originals first
The ARDF allows you to place multi- When using the machine as a
ple originals at once. Originals placed network TWAIN scanner, this
in the ARDF can be scanned on one orientation is the standard set-
side or both sides. ting for the TWAIN driver. This
orientation is suitable for most
❖ Originals that can and cannot be originals.
placed in the ARDF
For details about originals that you
can place in the ARDF, see Copy
Reference.
Attempting to feed unsuitable
originals into the ARDF can result
in misfeeds and damage to the 4
originals. Place such originals di-
rectly on the exposure glass.
A Adjust
ARL012S
the original guide to

match the size of the originals. C Select the original orientation ac-
cording to the orientation of the
B Place the originals with the side placed originals.
to be scanned facing up.
To scan both sides of an original, Reference
place the original so that its first For information about placing
side is face up. originals in the ARDF, see Copy
Reference.
There are two orientations.
p.29 “Specifying original orien-
❖ When placing the originals so that tation and setting originals”
the top edges touch the back of the
ARDF
ARL011S
31
Scanning Originals
This section explains how to scan
originals using the TWAIN scanner
I Click [Preview] or [Scan] to pre-
view or scan the image.
function. This procedure explains
scanning originals using Imaging un- Click [Scan] to return to Imaging.
der Windows 2000.
J Save the scan file in Imaging.
A On the [Start] menu, point to [Pro- K On the [File] menu, click [Save].
gram], point to [Product Name], and
then click [Setting]. L Enter the file name, select the
The TWAIN Driver dialog box ap- folder in which you want to save
pears. the file, and then click [Save].
4 B Select the connection method. For details about the scanning
function, click [Help] in the Initial
If you are using Network TWAIN, Settings dialog box.
click [Discover]. The IP address ap-
pears in the [Select Scanner]. Reference
If you are using USB TWAIN, click p.29 “Placing Originals”
the [USB] check box.
C Click [OK].
D On the [Start] menu, point to [Pro-
gram], point to [Accessories], and
then click [Imaging].
E Click [Select Device…] on the [File]

menu.
If the scanner is already selected,
no scanner settings are necessary.
Proceed to step G.
F Select the name of the machine

you want to use in the list, and
then click [OK].
G Place the original in the scanner.

H Click [Acquire Image…] on the [File]
menu.
The Initial Settings window ap-
pears.
32
5. Appendix
The Printer Function
Collate
If you select the collate function on the printer driver, the machine will store
print data in memory and automatically collate the printouts.
The collate function can be turned on or off from the printer driver.
Important
❒ You cannot use the bypass tray with this function.
❖ Collate
Orders output into sequential sets.
CP160-a
33
Appendix
The Scanner Function
Relationship between Resolution and File Size

Resolution and scan area are inversely related. The higher the resolution is set,
the smaller the area that can be scanned. Similarly, the larger the scan area, the
lower the resolution that can be set.
The relationship between scanning resolution and file size is shown below. If the
file size is too large, the message “Exceeded max.data capacity. Check the scan-
ning resolution.” appears on the machine's control panel, and you must specify
the scan size and resolution again.
Note
❒ Maximum image size is limited according to the level of compression.
5 When Using as a TWAIN Scanner

All combinations up to 216 × 356 mm/8.5 × 14.0 inches (A4, 81/2 × 14 inches) and
600 dpi are possible.
Reference
To specify the scanning area or resolution when using the machine as a net-
work TWAIN scanner, see TWAIN driver Help.
34
Specifications
Specifications
Printer
This section details the machine's electrical and hardware specifications, includ-
ing information about its options.
Component Specifications
Resolution 600 dpi
Printing speed 16 ppm
(A4L, 81/2" × 11"L plain paper)
Interface USB 2.0 interface
Ethernet interface (100BASE-TX/10BASE-T)
Network protocol TCP/IP
IPP
5
Printer language Host-Based Printing
Memory 64 MB
Operating systems sup- Windows 98SE / Me
ported by this machine Windows 2000
Windows XP
Windows Server 2003
Required network cable 100BASE-TX/10BASE-T shielded twisted-pair (STP, Category/Type5)
cable.
Scanner
Scan method Flatbed scanning
Scan speed *1 Approx. 18 pages/minute [Scan size: A4L, Colors/Grada-

tions:Binary, Resolution: 200dpi, Select device data com-
pression (Binary/Halftone): Data compression (MMR),
Document feeder: ARDF, ITU-T No.1 Chart]
Maximum power consumption Less than 900 W
Image sensor type CCD Image Sensor
Scan types Sheet, book
Interface USB interface, Ethernet interface (10BASE-T or 100BASE-TX)
Maximum scan size 216 × 356 mm/8.5 × 14.0 inches (A4, 81/2 × 14 inches)
Resolution 600 dpi
Variable range of scan resolution Setting range: 100 dpi - 600 dpi
*1
Scanning speeds vary according to machine operating conditions, computer (speci-
fication, network traffic, and software, etc.), and original types.
35
INDEX
A P
adjusting, 12 Paper Input, 13
Auto Run, 7 paper size, 18
parameters, 13
B Placing on the exposure glass, 30
Placing original in the
Bypass tray, 17 Auto Document Feeder (ARDF), 31
Placing Originals, 29, 30, 31
C Printer driver, 10, 22
Canceling a job, 24 printer driver, 7, 8
Connection, 5 Printer Features, 11, 12, 13
Control Panel, 3 Printer Language, 35
Custom size paper, 17, 19 printer properties, printer driver, 22, 23
Printer properties, Windows 2000 / XP
D and Windows Server 2003, 23
Printer properties, Windows 98SE / Me, 22
DDST, 10 printing, bypass tray, 17, 20
DDST TWAIN Driver, 10 Printing speed, 35
Display, 4
R
E
Relationship between resolution and file size, 34
Ethernet board connection, 5 Resolution, 35
H S
Host Interface, 16 Scanning originals, 32
Setting Originals, 29
I Software supplied on CD-ROM, 10
Specifications, 35
installing, 8, 9
System, 15
Interface, 35
T
L
Thick Paper, 20
List/Test Print, 13
TWAIN, 9
M TWAIN scanner, 27
Maintenance, 14 U
Memory, 35
USB connection, 5
menu, 11
W
N
When Using as a TWAIN Scanner, 34
Network Cable, 35
Windows 2000 / XP and
Network protocol, 35
Windows Server 2003, 23
O Windows 98SE / Me, 22
OHP Transparencies, 20
Operating system, 35
Operations Test, 13
36 EN USA B292-7900
Note to users in the United States of America
Note:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursu-
ant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against
harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur
in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television re-
ception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to
correct the interference by one more of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is
connected.
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio /TV technician for help.
Caution:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void
the user's authority to operate the equipment.
Declaration of Conformity
Product Name: Printer/Scanner Controller
Model Number: DDST Unit Type D
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
1. Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used for connections to a host
computer (and/or peripheral) in order to meet FCC emission limits.
2. An AC adapter with a ferrite core must be used for RF interference suppression.
Note to users in Canada
Note:
Remarque concernant les utilisateurs au Canada
Avertissement:
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.
Copyright © 2006
DDST Unit Type D Operating Instructions Printer / Scanner Reference
EN USA B292-7900
Network Guide
1 Using a Printer Server

2 Monitoring and Configuring the Printer
3 Special Operations under Windows
4 Appendix
Introduction
Important
ating the machine.
Notes
Software Version Conventions Used in This Manual

• NetWare 3.x means NetWare 3.12 and 3.2.
• NetWare 4.x means NetWare 4.1, 4.11, 4.2 and IntranetWare.
Important

chine.

❖ Copy Reference
i
❖ Network Guide
❖ Other manuals
• Manuals for This Machine
• Safety Information
• Quick Reference Copy Guide
• Quick Reference Fax Guide
• Quick Reference Printer Guide
• Quick Reference Scanner Guide
• UNIX Supplement
Note
dealer.
ii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Symbols .....................................................................................................................1
Setting Up the Machine on a Network..................................................................2
Initial Settings Overview.............................................................................................2
Initial Settings.............................................................................................................4
1. Using a Printer Server

Preparing Printer Server .....................................................................................15
Printing notification via SmartDeviceMonitor for Client ............................................15
Using NetWare .....................................................................................................17
Setting Up as a Print Server (NetWare 3.x) .............................................................17
Setting Up as a Print Server (NetWare 4.x, 5 / 5.1, 6 / 6.5) .....................................19
Using Pure IP in the NetWare 5 / 5.1 or 6 / 6.5 Environment................................... 20
Setting Up as a Remote Printer (NetWare 3.x) ........................................................21
Setting Up as a Remote Printer (NetWare 4.x, 5 / 5.1, 6 / 6.5) ................................ 23
2. Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

Using Web Image Monitor...................................................................................27
Displaying Top Page ................................................................................................29
When user authentication is set ...............................................................................30
About Menu and Mode.............................................................................................31
Access in the Administrator Mode............................................................................33
Displaying Web Image Monitor Help........................................................................33
Using SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin ...............................................................34
Installing SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin .................................................................35
Changing the Network Interface Board Configuration.............................................. 35
Locking the Menus on the Machine's Control Panel ................................................36
Changing the Paper Type ........................................................................................ 37
Managing User Information......................................................................................37
Configuring the Energy Saver Mode ........................................................................39
Setting a Password ..................................................................................................40
Checking the Machine Status ..................................................................................40
Changing Names and Comments ............................................................................41
Load Fax Journal .....................................................................................................42
Managing Address Information ................................................................................42
Using SmartDeviceMonitor for Client ................................................................43
Monitoring Printers ...................................................................................................43
Checking the Machine Status ..................................................................................43
When Using IPP with SmartDeviceMonitor for Client .............................................. 44
Printer Status Notification by E-Mail..................................................................45
Auto E-mail Notification............................................................................................46
On-demand E-mail Notification ................................................................................47
Mail authentication ...................................................................................................47
On-demand E-mail Notification ................................................................................48
iii
Remote Maintenance by telnet ...........................................................................50
Using telnet ..............................................................................................................50
access ......................................................................................................................50
appletalk...................................................................................................................51
authfree .................................................................................................................... 52
autonet .....................................................................................................................52
bonjour(rendezvous) ................................................................................................53
btconfig.....................................................................................................................54
devicename..............................................................................................................54
dhcp .........................................................................................................................54
diprint ....................................................................................................................... 55
dns ...........................................................................................................................56
domainname ............................................................................................................57
help ..........................................................................................................................57
hostname .................................................................................................................58
ifconfig......................................................................................................................58
info ...........................................................................................................................59
ipp ............................................................................................................................59
ipv6........................................................................................................................... 60
lpr .............................................................................................................................60
netware .................................................................................................................... 60
passwd .....................................................................................................................61
prnlog ....................................................................................................................... 61
route .........................................................................................................................61
set ............................................................................................................................63
show.........................................................................................................................64
slp.............................................................................................................................64
smb ..........................................................................................................................64
snmp ........................................................................................................................65
sntp ..........................................................................................................................67
ssdp..........................................................................................................................68
ssh............................................................................................................................68
status........................................................................................................................68
syslog ....................................................................................................................... 68
upnp .........................................................................................................................69
web...........................................................................................................................69
wiconfig .................................................................................................................... 69
wins ..........................................................................................................................73
SNMP.....................................................................................................................74
Getting Printer Information over the Network...................................................75
Current Printer Status ..............................................................................................75
Printer configuration .................................................................................................80
Understanding the Displayed Information ........................................................81
Print Job Information ................................................................................................81
Print Log Information................................................................................................82
Configuring the Network Interface Board .................................................................83
Message List ........................................................................................................90
System Log Information ........................................................................................... 90
iv
3. Special Operations under Windows
Printing Files Directly from Windows ................................................................97
Setup........................................................................................................................97
Using a Host Name Instead of an IPv4 Address......................................................97
Printing Commands..................................................................................................99
4. Appendix
When Using Windows Terminal Service / MetaFrame.................................... 101
Operating Environment ..........................................................................................101
Supported Printer Drivers.......................................................................................101
Limitations ..............................................................................................................101
Using DHCP........................................................................................................103
Using AutoNet ........................................................................................................103
Precautions ........................................................................................................104
Connecting a Dial-Up Router to a Network ............................................................104
NetWare Printing.................................................................................................... 105
When the optional IEEE 802.11b interface unit Is Installed ...................................106
Information about Installed Applications ........................................................107
RSA® BSAFE .........................................................................................................107
Specifications.....................................................................................................108
INDEX....................................................................................................... 110
v
vi
Symbols

chine.


[]
{}
1
Setting Up the Machine on a Network
This section describes the network settings you can change with User Tools (Sys-
tem Settings). Make settings according to functions you want to use and the in-
terface to be connected.
Important
❒ These settings should be made by the systems administrator, or after consult-
ing with the systems administrator.
Initial Settings Overview

❖ Interface Settings
❖ Network
Menu Description
Machine IPv4 Address Specifies the machine IPv4 address and sub-
net mask in the network environment.
IPv4 Gateway Address Configure the gateway address for the router
or host computer used as a gateway.
Machine IPv6 Address Specifies the machine IPv6 address and sub-
net mask in the network environment.
IPv6 Gateway Address Configure the gateway address for the router
or host computer used as a gateway.
IPv6 Stateless Setting Specifies the automatic configuration of the
IPv6 Stateless Address.
DNS Configuration Make settings for the DNS server.
DDNS Configuration Specifies the DDNS settings.
Domain Name Specifies the domain name.
WINS Configuration Specifies the WINS server settings.
Effective Protocol Select the protocol to use in the network.
NCP Delivery Protocol Select the protocol for NCP delivery:
NW Frame Type Select the frame type when you use NetWare.
SMB Computer Name Specifies the SMB computer name.
SMB Work Group Specifies the SMB work group.
Ethernet Speed Set the access speed for networks.
LAN Type Select interface, IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN)
or Ethernet when you have installed the op-
tional IEEE 802.11b interface unit.
Ping Command Check the network connection with ping
command using given IP address.
Permit SNMPv3 Communictn. Set the encrypted communication of SNMP v3.
Permit SSL/TLS Comm. Set the encrypted communication of SSL/TLS.
2
Menu Description
Host Name Specify the host name.
Machine Name Specify the machine name.
Communication Mode Specifies the communication mode of the
wireless LAN.
❖ IEEE 802.11b
Menu Description
SSID Setting Specifies SSID to distinguish the access point
in infrastructure mode or 802.11 ad hoc mode.
Channel Specifies a channel when you select 802.11b
ad hoc mode or ad hoc mode.
Security Type Specifies the encryption of the IEEE 802.11b
(wireless LAN).
Communication Speed Specifies the communication speed of the
IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN).
Restore Defaults Return the IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN) set-
tings to their defaults.
❖ File Transfer
Menu Description
Delivery Option Enables or disables sending scanned docu-
ments via the ScanRouter delivery software
delivery server.
SMTP Server Specifies the SMTP server name.
SMTP Authentication Configures SMTP authentication (PLAIN,
LOGIN, CRAM-MD5, DIGEST-MD5
POP before SMTP Configures POP authentication (POP before
SMTP).
Reception Protocol Specifies Reception Protocol for receiving
Internet faxes.
POP3/IMAP4 Settings Specify the POP3 or IMAP4 server name for
receiving Internet faxes.
Admin. E-mail Address This appears as the sender’s address on e-
mailed scanned documents, if the sender is
not specified .
E-mail Communication Port Specifies the POP3, IMAP4, and SMTP port
numbers for receiving Internet faxes.
E-mail Recept. Interval Specify, in minutes, the time limit for receiv-
ing Internet faxes via POP3 or IMAP4 server.
Max. Recept. E-mail Size Specifies the Max. Reception E-mail Size for
receiving Internet faxes.
E-mail Storage in Server Specifies whether or not to store received Inter-
net fax e-mails on the POP3 or IMAP4 server.
3
Menu Description
Default User Name/PW(Send) Specifies the user name and password re-
quired when sending scan file directly to a
shared folder on a computer running Win-
dows, or to an FTP server.
Auto Specify Sender Name Set name of the sender when sending an e-
mail.
Fax E-mail Account Specify [E-mail Address], [User Name], and
[Password] for receiving Internet faxes.
Initial Settings
❖ Printer/LAN-Fax (IPv6 cannot be used on LAN-Fax.)
Interface Settings
Ethernet Interface Settings/Network Machine IPv4 Address
IPv4 Gateway Address
Machine IPv6 Address
IPv6 Stateless Setting
DNS Configuration
DDNS Configuration
Domain Name
WINS Configuration
Effective Protocol
NCP Delivery Protocol
NW Frame Type
SMB Computer Name
SMB Work Group
Ethernet Speed
LAN Type
Permit SNMPv3 Communictn.
Permit SSL/TLS Comm.
Host Name
Machine Name
4
Interface Settings
IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN) Interface Settings/Network Machine IPv4 Address
IPv6 Stateless Setting
DNS Configuration
DDNS Configuration
Domain Name
WINS Configuration
Effective Protocol
NW Frame Type
SMB Computer Name
SMB Work Group
Ethernet Speed
LAN Type
Host Name
Machine Name
Interface Settings/IEEE Communication Mode
802.11b
SSID Setting
Channel
Security Type
Communication Speed
5
❖ Internet Fax (IPv6 cannot be used on this function.)
Interface Settings
DNS Configuration
DDNS Configuration
Domain Name
WINS Configuration
Effective Protocol
Ethernet Speed
LAN Type
Host Name
File Transfer Delivery Option
SMTP Server
SMTP Authentication
POP before SMTP
Reception Protocol
POP3/IMAP4 Settings
Admin. E-mail Address
E-mail Communication Port
E-mail Recept. Interval
Max. Recept. E-mail Size
E-mail Storage in Server
Default User Name/PW(Send)
Fax E-mail Account
6
Interface Settings
DNS Configuration
WINS Configuration
DDNS Configuration
Domain Name
Effective Protocol
Ethernet Speed
LAN Type
Host Name
802.11b
SSID Setting
Channel
Security Type
Communication Speed
File Transfer SMTP Server
SMTP Authentication
POP before SMTP
Reception Protocol
POP3/IMAP4 Settings
E-mail Recept. Interval
Max. Recept. E-mail Size
E-mail Storage in Server
Fax E-mail Account
7
❖ IP-Fax (IPv6 cannot be used on this function.)
Interface Settings
DNS Configuration
DDNS Configuration
Domain Name
WINS Configuration
Effective Protocol
Ethernet Speed
LAN Type
Host Name
DNS Configuration
WINS Configuration
DDNS Configuration
Domain Name
Effective Protocol
Ethernet Speed
LAN Type
Host Name
802.11b
SSID Setting
Channel
Security Type
Communication Speed
8
❖ E-mail (IPv6 cannot be used on this function.)
Interface Settings
DNS Configuration
DDNS Configuration
Domain Name
WINS Configuration
Effective Protocol
Ethernet Speed
LAN Type
Host Name
SMTP Authentication
POP before SMTP
Reception Protocol
POP3/IMAP4 Settings
9
Interface Settings
DNS Configuration
DDNS Configuration
Domain Name
WINS Configuration
Effective Protocol
Ethernet Speed
LAN Type
Host Name
802.11b
SSID Setting
Channel
Security Type
Communication Speed
SMTP Authentication
POP before SMTP
Reception Protocol
10
❖ Scan to Folder (IPv6 cannot be used on this function.)
Interface Settings
DNS Configuration
DDNS Configuration
Domain Name
WINS Configuration
Effective Protocol
Ethernet Speed
LAN Type
Host Name
File Transfer Default User Name/PW(Send)
DNS Configuration
DDNS Configuration
Domain Name
WINS Configuration
Effective Protocol
Ethernet Speed
LAN Type
Host Name
802.11b
SSID Setting
Channel
Security Type
Communication Speed
File Transfer Default User Name/PW(Send)
11
❖ Network Delivery Scanner (IPv6 cannot be used on this function.)
Interface Settings
Ethernet Interface Settings/Network Delivery Option
DNS Configuration
DDNS Configuration
Domain Name
WINS Configuration
Effective Protocol
Ethernet Speed
LAN Type
Host Name
DNS Configuration
DDNS Configuration
Domain Name
WINS Configuration
Effective Protocol
Ethernet Speed
LAN Type
Host Name
802.11b
SSID Setting
Channel
Security Type
Communication Speed
12
❖ Network TWAIN Scanner (IPv6 cannot be used on this function.)
Interface Settings
DNS Configuration
DDNS Configuration
Domain Name
WINS Configuration
Effective Protocol
Ethernet Speed
LAN Type
Host Name
DNS Configuration
DDNS Configuration
Domain Name
WINS Configuration
Effective Protocol
Ethernet Speed
LAN Type
Host Name
802.11b
SSID Setting
Channel
Security Type
Communication Speed
13
Note
❒ Depending on which optional units you have installed or the printer lan-
guage you have selected, some options are not displayed.
❒ Depending on the security settings, you might not be able to set certain op-
tions.
Reference
For details, see “System Settings”, General Settings Guide.
For details about copier features and system settings, see Copy Reference and
14
1. Using a Printer Server
Preparing Printer Server

This section explains how to config-
ure the machine as a Windows net-
D To share the machine with users
using a different version of Win-
work printer. The machine is
dows, click [Additional Drivers...].
configured to enabling network cli-
ents to use it. When the network If you have installed an alternative
printer is connected via SmartDevice- driver by selecting [Share As: ] dur-
Monitor for Client, you can set the ing the printer driver installation,
printing notification function to noti- this step can be ignored.
fy clients of the results of their print
jobs.
E Click [OK], and then close the
printer properties.
Important
❒ Under Windows 2000, Windows
XP Professional, or Windows Serv-
Printing notification via
er 2003, to change printer proper- SmartDeviceMonitor for Client
ties in the [Printer] folder, you need
Printer Management access au- Follow the procedure below to con-
thentication; under Windows NT figure the machine to use the printing
4.0, Full Control access authentica- notification function of SmartDevice-
tion. Log on to the file server as an Monitor for Client.
Administrator or member of the
PowerUsers group. Setting the print server
A Open the [Printers] window from Important
the [Start] menu.
❒ Under Windows 2000, Windows
XP Professional, or Windows Serv-
Under Windows XP or Windows er 2003, to change printer proper-
Server 2003, [Printer and Fax] win- ties in the [Printer] folder, you need
dow appears. Printer Management access au-
B Click the icon of the machine you thentication; under Windows NT
4.0, Full Control access authentica-
want to use. On the [File] menu, tion. Log on to the file server as an
click [Properties]. The printer Administrator or member of the
properties appear. PowerUsers group.
C On the [Sharing] tab, click [Shared A On the [Start] menu, point to [Pro-
As: ]. grams], [DeskTopBinder], [SmartDe-
viceMonitor for Client], and then
click [Print Server Setting].
The print server setting dialog box
appears.
15
Using a Printer Server
B Select the [Notify client PCs of print- Setting a Client

out/data-transmission ] check box,
A On the [Start] menu, point to [Pro-
After print server setting is made, a gram], [DeskTopBinder], [SmartDe-
1 dialog box appears. Confirm the viceMonitor for Client], and then
dialog box content, and click [OK]. click [Extended Features Settings].
Click [Cancel] to interrupt the pro- A dialog box for setting the expan-
cedure. sion function appears.
A dialog box appears for client set-
ting. B Select the [Notify of printout/data-
transmission when using print server]
C Click [OK]. check box.
The print server setting is complet-
ed. Each client must be set to re-
C Click [OK].
ceive print notification. The client setting is completed.
Note Note
❒ Current printing jobs restart ❒ Set the printing notification
from the beginning after the function on the printer driver as
spooler pauses briefly. well as on SmartDeviceMonitor
for Client.
❒ When the expansion function is
not used, the function is auto-
matically set as available.
❒ If you log on using an account
that does not have Administra-
tor privileges, the client may not
be notified.
16
Using NetWare
Using NetWare
This section describes the setting pro- ❖ Using SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin
cedure for network printers in the To use the machine in a NetWare
NetWare environment. In the Net- environment, use SmartDevice-
1
Ware environment, you can connect Monitor for Admin to set the Net-
the machine as a “print server” or “re- Ware printing environment.
mote printer”.
Note
Important ❒ The NetWare Client provided
❒ IPv6 cannot be used on this func- by Novell is required to set the
tion. printing environment using
SmartDeviceMonitor for Ad-
❖ Setting procedure min under the following envi-
• When using the machine as a ronments:
print server • NDS mode in Windows 95/
A Installing SmartDeviceMon- 98/Me
itor for Admin • NDS or Bindery mode in Win-
B Setting the network interface dows 2000/XP, Windows NT
board. 4.0
C Turning the machine off and Reference
then back on.
p.35 “Installing SmartDevice-
• When using the machine as a Monitor for Admin”
remote printer
A Installing SmartDeviceMoni-
❖ Printers listed by SmartDeviceMoni-
tor for Admin. tor for Admin
SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin
B Setting the network interface
lists printers connected to the net-
board.
work. If you cannot identify the
C Setting NetWare. machine you want to configure,
D Starting the print server. print configuration page, and then
check the machine name.
Note
❒ This procedure assumes an envi-
ronment is already prepared for Setting Up as a Print Server
normal NetWare running the (NetWare 3.x)
printing service setting.
❒ The procedure is explained with Follow the procedure below to con-
the following example settings: nect the machine as a print server us-
ing NetWare 3.x.
• File server’s name …CAREE
• Print server’s name …PSERV A Log on to the file server as a su-
• Printer’s name …R-PRN pervisor or supervisor equivalent.
• Queue name …R-QUEUE B Start NIB Setup Tool from the
[Start] menu.
C Click [Wizard], and then click [OK]. 17

D Select the printer you want to con- • NDS Context Name: To enable
NDS mode, enter the print serv-
figure, and then click [Next].
er context. Use up to 127 charac-
A dialog box prompting you to ters.
perform the remaining configura-
1 tion tasks in the Web browser ap-
• Operation Mode: Specify wheth-
er to use the interface board as a
pears. Click [OK], and then wait
print server or a remote printer.
until Web Image Monitor starts au-
tomatically. • Remote Printer No.: This item is
effective when the interface
E Click [Login]. board is specified as a remote
A dialog box for entering the login printer. Enter the same number
user name and password appears. as the number of the printer to
be created on the print server (0
F Enter the login user name and to 254 characters).
password, and then click [Login]. • Job Timeout: When the interface
For details about the login user board is used as a NetWare re-
name and password, consult your mote printer, the printer cannot
network administrator. detect when a print job ends.
Therefore, the printer termi-
G Click [Configuration] in the left ar- nates printing when a certain
ea, and then click [NetWare]. period of time has elapsed since
• Print Server Name: Enter the it last received print data (i.e.,
NetWare print server name. To when it has not received print
use the interface board as a data for a certain period of
print server, enter the name of a time). Specify here this period
print server that is not active on of time (3 to 255 seconds). The
the file server. Use up to 47 initial value is 15 (seconds).
characters. • Frame Type: Select the frame
• Logon Mode: Specify whether type from the drop-down
to designate a file server or NDS menu.
tree when logging on to Net- • Print Server Protocol: Select the
Ware. protocol for NetWare from the
• File Server Name: When a file drop-down menu.
server name is entered here, • NCP Delivery Protocol: Select
only the specified file server is the protocol for NCP delivery.
searched for. This item is man-
datory. Use up to 47 characters. H Confirm the settings, and then
• NDS Tree: To enable NDS click [OK].
mode, enter the name of the Configuration is now complete.
NDS tree you want to log on to. Wait several before restarting Web
Use up to 32 alphanumeric Image Monitor.
characters.
18
Using NetWare
I Click [Logout]. B Start NIB Setup Tool from the

[Start] menu.
Note
❒ To check the configuration is C Click [Wizard], and then click [OK].
correct, enter the following
from the command prompt: D Select the printer you want to con- 1
F:> USERLIST
A dialog box prompting you to
❒ If the printer works as config- perform the remaining configura-
ured, the name of the print serv- tion tasks in the Web browser ap-
er appears as a connected user. pears. Click [OK], and then wait
❒ If you cannot identify the print- until Web Image Monitor starts au-
er you want to configure, check tomatically.
the printer name against the
configuration page printed E Click [Login].
from the printer. For details A dialog box for entering the login
about printing a configuration user name and password appears.
page, see Printer Reference.
❒ If no printer names appear in F Enter the login user name and
the list, match the frame types password, and then click [Login].
of IPX/SPXs for the computer For details about the login user
and printer. Use the [Network] name and password, consult your
dialog box of Windows to network administrator.
change the frame type of the
computer. G Click [Configuration] in the left ar-
ea, and then click [NetWare].
Setting Up as a Print Server H Confirm the settings, and then

click [OK].
(NetWare 4.x, 5 / 5.1, 6 / 6.5) Configuration is now complete.
Follow the procedure below to con- Wait several minutes before re-
nect the machine as a print server us- starting Web Image Monitor.
ing NetWare 4.x, NetWare 5 / 5.1, or
NetWare 6 / 6.5.
I Click [Logout].
Reference
Important
p.17 “Setting Up as a Print Serv-
❒ When using the printer as a print
er (NetWare 3.x)”
server in NetWare 4.x, NetWare 5
/ 5.1, or NetWare 6 / 6.5, set it to
the NDS mode.
❒ When using NetWare 5 / 5.1 or
NetWare 6 / 6.5, set the printer as
a print server.
A Log on to the file server as an ad-

ministrator or administrator
equivalent.
19
Using Pure IP in the NetWare 5 / G Check the settings, and then click
[Create].
5.1 or 6 / 6.5 Environment
H Select the object in which the
1 Follow the procedure below to con-
nect the machine as a print server in a
printer is located, and then click
[Create] on the [Object] menu.
pure IP environment of NetWare 5 /
5.1 or NetWare 6 / 6.5. I In the [Class of new object] box,
click [Printer], and then click [OK].
Important For NetWare 5, click [Printer (Non
❒ When creating a queued print NDPS)].
server in a pure IP environment of
NetWare 5 / 5.1 or NetWare 6 / J In the [Printer name] box, enter the
6.5, create a print queue on the file printer name.
server using NetWare Administra-
tor.
K Select the [Define additional proper-
ties] check box, and then click
❒ This printer is not available as a re- [Create].
mote printer for use in a pure IP
environment. L Click [Assignments], and then click
❒ To use the printer in a pure IP en- [Add] in the [Assignments] area.
vironment, set it to IPv4. M In the [Available objects] box, click
the queue you created, and then
Setting up using NWadmin click [OK].
A From Windows, start NWadmin. N Click [Configuration], click [Parallel]

in the [Printer type] list, and then
For details about NWadmin, see click [Communication].
the NetWare manuals.
O Click [Manual load] in the [Commu-
B Select the object in which the nication type] area, and then click
print queue is located in the direc- [OK].
tory tree, and then click [Create] on
the [Object] menu. P Check the settings, and then click
[OK].
C In the [Class of new object] box,
click [Print Queue], and then click Q Select a context specified using
[OK]. NIB Setup Tool, and then click
[Create] on the [Object] menu.
D In the [Print Queue Name] box, enter
the name of the print queue. R In the [Class of new object] box,
click [Print Server], and then click
E In the [Print Queue Volume] box, [OK]. For NetWare 5, click [Print
click [Browse]. Sever (Non NDPS)].
F In the [Available objects] box, click S In the [Print Server Name] box, enter
the volume in which the print the print server name.
queue is created, and then click Use the same print server name
[OK]. specified using NIB Setup Tool.
20
Using NetWare
T Select the [Define additional proper- H Confirm the settings, and then
ties] check box, and then click click [OK].
[Create]. Configuration is now complete.
U Click [Assignments], and then click Wait several minutes before re-
starting Web Image Monitor. 1
[Add] in the [Assignments] area.
V In the [Available objects] box, click I Click [Logout].

the queue you created, and then Reference
click [OK]. p.17 “Setting Up as a Print Serv-
W Check the settings, and then click er (NetWare 3.x)”
[OK].
Setting Up as a Remote Printer
Setting up using NIB Setup Tool (NetWare 3.x)
A Log on to the file server as an ad- Follow the procedure below to use
ministrator or administrator the machine as a remote printer un-
equivalent. der NetWare 3.x.
B Start NIB Setup Tool from the

Setting up using PCONSOLE
[Start] menu.
C Click [Property Sheet], and then A Enter“PCONSOLE” from the

click [OK]. command prompt.
D Select the printer you want to con- F:> PCONSOLE
figure, and then click [Next]. B Create a print queue.
A dialog box prompting you to When using the existing print
perform the remaining configura- queue, go to the procedure for cre-
tion tasks in the Web browser ap- ating a printer.
until Web Image Monitor starts au- C From the [Available Options] menu,
tomatically. select [Print Queue Information], and
then press the {Enter} key.
E Click [Login].
A dialog box for entering the [Login D Press {Insert} key, and then enter a
User Name:] and [Login Password:] print queue name.
appears.
E Press {Esc} key to return to the
F Enter the user login user name [Available Options] menu.
and password, and then click
[Login]. F Set up the network connection to
a printer.
For details about the login name
and password, consult your net- G On the [Available Options] menu,
work administrator. click [Print Server Information], and
then press the {Enter} key.
G Click [Configuration] in the left ar-
21
H To create a new print server, press S Press the {Insert} key to select a
the {Insert} key, and then enter a queue serviced by the printer.
print server name. You can select several queues.
For a currently defined print serv-
1 er, select a print server in the [Print T Follow the instructions on the
Server] list. screen to make other necessary
settings.
Use the same printer name speci-
fied using NIB Setup Tool. Following these steps, check that
the queues are assigned.
I From the [Print Server Information]
menu, select [Print Server Configura- U Press the {Esc} key until "Exit?"
tion]. appears, and then select [Yes] to
exit PCONSOLE.
J From the [Print Server Configuration]
menu, select [Printer Configuration]. V Start the print server by entering
the following from the console of
K Select the printer indicated as [Not the NetWare server.
Installed]. If the print server is in operation,
Use the same printer number spec- quit and restart it.
ified as the remote printer number
using NIB Setup Tool. ❖ To quit
L To change the printer name, enter CAREE: unload pserver

a new name. ❖ To start
A name “printer x” is assigned to CAREE: load pserver
the printer. The “x” stands for the print_server_name
number of the selected printer.
Note
M As type, select [Remote Parallel, ❒ If the printer works as config-
LPT1]. ured, the message "Waiting for
The IRQ, Buffer size, Starting form, job" appears.
and Queue service mode are auto-
matically configured. Setting up using NIB Setup Tool
N Press the {Esc} key, and then
click [Yes] on the confirmation A Log on to the file server as a su-
message. pervisor or supervisor equivalent.
O Press the {Esc} key to return to B Start NIB Setup Tool from the
[Print Server Configuration Menu]. [Start] menu.
P Assign print queues to the created C Click [Property Sheet], and then
printer. click [OK].
Q From [Print Server Configuration

Menu], select [Queues Serviced By
Printer].
R Select the printer created.

22
Using NetWare
D Select the printer you want to con- Setting Up as a Remote Printer

A dialog box prompting you to (NetWare 4.x, 5 / 5.1, 6 / 6.5)
tion tasks in the Web browser ap-
Follow the procedure below to use
the printer as a remote printer under
1
NetWare 4.x, 5 / 5.1 and 6 / 6.5.
tomatically. Important
E Click [Login]. ❒ To use the printer as a remote
printer under NetWare 4.x, 5 / 5.1,
A dialog box for entering the [Login 6 / 6.5, set it to NDS mode.
User Name:] and [Login Password:]
appears. ❒ Do not use the printer as a remote
printer when Pure IP is used.
F Enter the login user name and
password, and then click [Login]. Setting up using NWadmin
For details about the login user
name and password, consult your A From Windows, start NWadmin.
network administrator.
For details about NWadmin, see
G Click [Configuration] in the left ar- the NetWare manuals.
B Set up the network connection to
H Confirm the settings, and then a print queue. Select the object in
click [OK]. which the print queue is located
in the directory tree, and then
Configuration is now complete.
click [Create] on the [Object] menu.
Wait several minutes before re-
starting Web Image Monitor. C In the [Class of new object] box,
I Click [Logout]. click [Print Queue], and then click
[OK].
Reference
D In the [Print Queue Name] box, enter
the name of the print queue.
er (NetWare 3.x)”
E In the [Print Queue Volume] box,
click [Browse].
F In the [Available objects] box, click

the volume in which the print
queue is created, and then click
[OK].
G Check the settings, and then click

[Create].
23
H Set up the network connection to S Select the [Define additional proper-

a printer. Select the object in ties] check box, and then click
which the printer is located, and [Create].
then click [Create] on the [Object]
1 menu. T Assign the printer to the created
print server. Click [Assignments],
I In the [Class of new object] box, and then click [Add] in the [Assign-
click [Printer], and then click [OK]. ments] area.
For NetWare 5, click [Printer (Non
NDPS)]. U In the [Available objects] box, click
J In the [Printer name] box, enter the click [OK].
printer name
V In the [Printers] area, click the
K Select the [Define additional proper- printer you assigned, and then
ties] check box, and then click click [Printer Number]
[Create].
W Enter the printer number, and
L Assign print queues to the created then click [OK]. Check the set-
printer. Click [Assignments], and tings, and then click [OK].
then click [Add] in the [Assign- Use the same printer number spec-
ments] area. ified as the remote printer number
M In the [Available objects] box, click using NIB Setup Tool.
click [OK].
X Start the print server by entering
the following from the console of
N Click [Configuration], click [Parallel] the NetWare server.
in the [Printer type] list, and then If the print server is in operation,
click [Communication]. quit and restart it.
O Click [Manual load] in the [Commu- ❖ To exit

nication type] area, and then click CAREE: unload pserver
[OK]. Check the settings, and then
click [OK]. ❖ To start
P Set up the network connection to CAREE: load pserver
print_server_name
a print server. Select a context
specified using NIB Setup Tool,
and then click [Create] on the [Ob-
Y Enter the printer server name as
the context name, and then press
ject] menu. the {Enter} key.
Q In the [Class of new object] box, Z Select the printer name on the
click [Print Server], and then click context menu, and then press the
[OK]. For NetWare 5, click [Print {Enter} key.
Sever (Non NDPS)].
R In the [Print Server Name:] box, en-

ter the print server name.
Use the same print server name
specified using NIB Setup Tool.
24
Using NetWare
Setting up using NIB Setup Tool
A Log on to the file server as an ad-

ministrator or administrator
equivalent. 1
B Start NIB Setup Tool from the
[Start] menu.
C Click [Property Sheet], and then

click [OK].
D Select the printer you want to con-

A dialog box prompting you to
tion tasks in the Web browser ap-
tomatically.
E Click [Login].
A dialog box for entering the [Login
User Name:] and [Login Password:]
appears.
F Enter the user login name and

password, and then click [Login].
name and password, consult your
G Click [Configuration] in the left ar-

H Confirm the settings, and then

click [OK].
Configuration is now complete.
Wait several minutes before re-
starting Web Image Monitor.
I Click [Logout].
Reference
er (NetWare 3.x)”
25
26
2. Monitoring and Configuring
the Printer
Using Web Image Monitor
Using Web Image Monitor, you can check the machine status and change set-
tings.
❖ Available operations
The following operations can be remotely performed using Web Image Mon-
itor from a client computer.
• Displaying machine status or settings
• Checking the print job status or history
• Interrupting currently printing jobs
• Resetting the printer
• Managing the Address Book
• Making machine settings
• Making network protocol settings
• Making security settings
❖ Configuring the machine

To perform the operations from Web Image Monitor, TCP/IP is required. Af-
ter the machine is configured to use TCP/IP, operations from Web Image
Monitor become available.
❖ Recommended Web browser

• Windows:
Internet Explorer 5.5 SP1 or higher
Netscape Navigator 6.2 or higher
• Mac OS:
Netscape Navigator 6.2 or higher
Safari 1.0 or higher
Note
❒ To use Netscape Navigator with Secured Sockets Layer (SSL: an encryption
protocol), use Netscape Navigator 7.0 or higher.
❒ Use Netscape Navigator 7.0 or higher with IPv6.
❒ Safari cannot be used on Mac OS X 10.4.1.
❒ If the previous versions of the Web browser above are used or JavaScript and
cookies are not enabled with the Web browser used, display and operation
problems may occur.
❒ If you are using a proxy server, change the Web browser settings. Contact
your network administrator for information about the settings.
27
Monitoring and Configuring the Printer
❒ The previous page may not appear even after the back button of a Web
browser is clicked. If this happens, click the refresh button of a Web browser.
❒ Updating the machine information is not automatically performed. Click [Re-
fresh] in the display area to update the machine information.
❒ We recommend using Web Image Monitor in the same network.
❒ You cannot access to the machine from outside the firewall.
❒ When using the machine under DHCP, the IP address may be automatically
2 changed by the DHCP server settings. Enable DDNS setting on the machine,
and then connect using the machine's host name. Alternatively, set a static IP
address to the DHCP server.
❒ If the HTTP port is disabled, connection to the machine using the machine's
URL cannot be established. SSL setting must be enabled on this machine. For
details, consult your network administrator.
❒ When using the SSL encryption protocol, enter “https://(printer's ad-
dress)/”. Internet Explorer must be installed on your computer. Use the most
recent available version. We recommend Internet Explorer 6.0 or later.
28
Displaying Top Page

This section explains the Top Page and how to display Web Image Monitor.
A Start your Web browser.

B Enter “http: //(machine's address)/” in the address bar of a Web browser.
Top Page of Web Image Monitor appears. 2
If the machine's host name has been registered on the DNS or WINS server,
you can enter it.
When setting SSL, a protocol for encrypted communication, under environment
which server authentication is issued , enter "https://(machine's address)/".
Every Web Image Monitor page is divided into the following areas:
ASC006S
1. Menu area 4. Help

If you select menu, it's content will be Use Help to view or download Help
shown on the work area, or the sub area. file contents.
2. Tab area 5. Display area
Details about each menu appears. Displays the contents of the item se-
lected in the menu area.
3. Header area
Machine information in the display
The dialog box for switching to the
area is not automatically updated.
user mode and administrator mode
Click [Refresh] at the upper right in the
appears, and each mode's menu will
display area to update the machine in-
be displayed.
formation. Click the Web browser's
The link to help and dialog box for [Refresh] button to refresh the entire
keyword search appears. browser screen.
Note
❒ When using a host name under Windows Server 2003 with IPv6 protocol, perform
host name resolution using an external DNS server. The host file cannot be used.
29
When user authentication is set
Login (using Web Image Monitor)

Follow the procedure below to log on
when user authentication is set.
2 A Click [Login].
B Enter a login user name and pass-
word, and then click [Login].
Note
❒ For user code authentication,
enter a user code in [User Name],
❒ The procedure may differ de-
pending on the Web browser
used.
Log Off (using Web Image Monitor)

Click [Logout] to log off.
Note
❒ When you log on and made the
setting, always click [Logout].
30
About Menu and Mode

There are two modes available with Web Image Monitor: user mode and admin-
istrator mode.
Displayed Items may differ depending on the machine type.
❖ About User Mode

In the user mode, machine status, settings, and print job status can be viewed, 2
but the machine settings cannot be changed.
ASC007S
1. Home 2. Job
The [Status], [Device Info], and [Counter] Display all print files.
tab are displayed. Details of the tab
menu are displayed on the work area.
3. Configuration
Display current machine and network
settings.
31
❖ Administrator Mode
In the administrator mode, you can configure various machine settings.
ASC008S
1. Home 4. Configuration
The [Status], [Device Info], and [Counter] Make system settings for the machine,
tab are displayed. Details of the tab interface settings, and security.
menu are displayed on the work area.
5. Reset Device
2. Job Click to reset the printer. If a print job
Display all print files. is being processed, the printer will be
reset after the print job is completed.
3. Address Book This button is located on Top Page.
User information can be registered,
displayed, changed, and deleted. 6. Reset Printer Job
Click to reset current print jobs and
print jobs in queue. This button is lo-
cated on Top Page.
32
Access in the Administrator Downloading Help

Mode A In the [OS] list, select the operat-
Follow the procedure below to access ing system.
Web Image Monitor in the adminis-
trator mode.
B In the [Language] list, select the
language.
A On Top Page, click [Login]. C Click [Download]. 2
The window for entering the login
user name and password appears. D Download Help by following the
instructions on the screen.
B Enter your login user name and
password, and then click [Login]. E Store the downloaded compressed
For details about the login user file in a location, and then decom-
name and password, consult your press the file.
network administrator. To view the downloaded Web Im-
age Monitor Help, set the path to
the location of the decompressed
Displaying Web Image Monitor file.
Help
Linking the URL of the Help File to the
When using Help for the first time, [Help] Button.
clicking either [Help] in the header
area or the icon marked "?" in the dis- You can link the URL of the help file
play area makes the following screen on a computer or Web server to the
appear, in which you can view Help [Help] button.
in two different ways, as shown be-
low: A Log on to Web Image Monitor in
the administrator mode.
❖ Viewing Help on our Web site
Downloading Help to your com- B In the menu area, click [Configura-
puter tion].
❖ Downloading and Checking Help C Click [Webpage].

You can download Help to your
computer. As the Help URL, you D In the [Set Help URL Target] box, en-
can specify the path to the local file ter the URL of the help file.
to view the Help without connect- I f y ou sa ve d t he h el p fi le to
ing to the Internet. "C:\HELP\EN", enter "file://C:/
HELP/". For example, if you saved
Note the file to a Web server, and the
❒ By clicking [Help] in the header ar- URL of the index file is "http://
ea, the contents of Help appear. a.b.c.d/HELP/EN/index.html",
❒ By clicking "?", the Help icon in the enter "http://a.b.c.d/HELP/".
display area, Help for the setting
items in the display area appears.
E Click [OK].
33
Using SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin

Using SmartDeviceMonitor for Ad- ❖ Available operations
min, you can monitor the network The following functions are availa-
printers. Also, you can change the ble:
configuration of the network inter- • Limits settings done from the
face board using TCP/IP or IPX/SPX. control panel, and disables
2 changes made to certain items.
Important
❒ IPv6 cannot be used on this func- • Enables selection of paper type
tion. loaded in the machine.
• Switches to, and comes out of
❖ Protocol stack provided with Operat- Energy Saver mode.
ing System
• Checks information about print-
• Windows 95/98/Me ing, paper quantity, etc.
TCP/IP
• Simultaneously monitors multi-
IPX/SPX
ple printers. When there are
NetWare
many printers, you can create
NetWare Client32 for Windows 95
groups and classify printers to
IntraNetWare Client for Win-
facilitate management.
dows 95
Novell Client for Windows • Checks the machine's network
95/98/Me settings and detailed device in-
formation.
• Windows 2000
TCP/IP • Enables you to change the ma-
IPX/SPX chine's network settings.
NetWare • You can check details of print
Novell Client for Windows jobs sent from a computer.
NT/2000/XP
• Allows you to check job histo-
• Windows Server 2003 ries of printed, faxed (LAN-
TCP/IP Fax), scanned, and photocopied
IPX/SPX documents identified by user
• Windows XP codes.
TCP/IP • Allows selection of functions
IPX/SPX such as printing and scanning
Novell Client for Windows for each user code.
NT/2000/XP
• Fax numbers and e-mail ad-
• Windows NT 4.0 dresses stored in the machine
TCP/IP can be changed and saved by
IPX/SPX computer.
Client Service for NetWare
• You can check each fax job his-
NetWare Client32 for Windows NT
tory entry.
IntraNetWare Client for Win-
dows NT • You can make settings for and
Novell Client for Windows display the status changes of
NT/2000/XP group devices.
34
• Using Address Management

Tool, you can manage LAN-Fax
H Click [OK].
numbers, user names for Scan A message about restarting the
to Folder, and addresses for computer may appear. Restart the
sending and receiving Internet computer to complete installation.
faxes.
Note
• The e-mail sender’s name and ❒ Auto Run may not work under
folder can be protected. certain operating system set-
tings. In this case, launch “Set-
2
up.exe” located on the CD-
Installing SmartDeviceMonitor ROM root directory.
for Admin ❒ If you are required to restart the
computer after installing Smart-
Follow the procedure below to install
DeviceMonitor for Admin, re-
SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin
start the computer and continue
A Quit all applications currently the configuration.
running.
B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD- Changing the Network

ROM drive. Interface Board Configuration
Follow the procedure below to
C Select an interface language, and change the network interface board
then click [OK]. configuration using SmartDevice-
The following languages are avail- Monitor for Admin.
able: Czech, Danish, German, Eng-
lish, Spanish, French, Italian,
A Start SmartDeviceMonitor for Ad-
min.
Hungarian, Dutch, Norwegian,
Polish, Portuguese , Finnish, B On the [Group] menu, point to
Swedish, Chinese Simple and Chi- [Search Device], and then click
nese Traditional. [TCP/IP], [IPX/SPX] or [TCP/IP
D Click [SmartDeviceMonitor for Ad-
&SNMPv3].
min]. A list of machines using the select-
ed protocol appears.
E Click [Next>]. Select the protocol of the machine
The software license agreement whose configuration you want to
appears in the [License Agreement] change.
dialog box. If you are using TCP/IP SNMP v3,
F After reading through its con-
enter the user authentication.
tents, click [Yes]. C In the list, select a machine whose
G Follow the instructions on the
configuration you want to
change.
screen.
A message appears when the in-
stallation is completed.
35
D On the [Tools] menu, click [NIB Set- Locking the Menus on the
up Tool].
A Web browser opens and the Machine's Control Panel
window for entering the login user
Follow the procedure below to lock
name and password for the Web
the menus on the machine's control
Image Monitor administrator ap-
panel.
pears.
2 NIB Setup Tool starts when the A Start SmartDeviceMonitor for Ad-
network interface board is default. min.
Click [Web browser], and then click
[OK]. B On the [Group] menu, point to
[Search Device], and then click
E Enter the login user name and [TCP/IP], [IPX/SPX] or [TCP/IP
password, and then click [Login]. &SNMPv3].
For details about the login user A list of machines using the select-
name and password, consult your ed protocol appears.
network administrator. Select the protocol of the machine
F Configure settings using Web Im- whose configuration you want to
change.
age Monitor.
If you are using TCP/IP SNMP v3,
G Quit Web Image Monitor. enter the user authentication.
H Quit SmartDeviceMonitor for C Select a machine.
Admin.
D On the [Tools] menu, point to [De-
Reference vice Settings], and then click [Lock
p.27 “Using Web Image Moni- Operation Panel Menu].
tor” A Web browser opens and the
window for entering the login user
Image Monitor administrator ap-
pears.
E Enter the login user name and

For details about the user name
and password, consult your net-
work administrator.
The [System] page of Web Image
Monitor appears. Enter required
setting items.
F Quit Web Image Monitor.

G Quit SmartDeviceMonitor for Ad-
min.
36
Note F Quit Web Image Monitor.

❒ For details about setting items,
see Help in the [General Settings] G Quit SmartDeviceMonitor for Ad-
on [Configuration] page. min.
Note
Changing the Paper Type ❒ For details about setting items,
see Help in the [General Settings]
Follow the procedure below to on [Configuration] page. 2
change the paper type.
A Start SmartDeviceMonitor for Ad- Managing User Information

min.
Follow the procedure below to man-
B On the [Group] menu, point to age the user's information using
[Search Device], and then click SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.
[TCP/IP], [IPX/SPX] or [TCP/IP Prints jobs can be managed and func-
&SNMPv3]. tions restricted by user codes.
A list of machines using the select-
Starting User Management Tool
Select the protocol of the machine
whose configuration you want to Follow the procedure below to start
change. User Management Tool.
min.
C In the list, select a machine whose B On the [Group] menu, point to
configuration you want to [Search Device], and then click
change. [TCP/IP], [IPX/SPX] or [TCP/IP
D On the [Tools] menu, point to [De- &SNMPv3].
vice Settings], and then click [Select A list of machines using the select-
Paper Type]. ed protocol appears.
A Web browser opens and the Select the protocol of the machine
window for entering the login user whose configuration you want to
name and password for the Web change.
Image Monitor administrator ap- If you are using TCP/IP SNMP v3,
pears. enter the user authentication.
E Enter the login user name and C In the list, select a machine you
password, and then click [Login]. want to manage.
name and password, consult your D On the [Tools] menu, click [User
network administrator. Management Tool].
The [Paper] page appears. The dialog box for entering the
login user name and password ap-
Select a paper type in the [Paper pears.
Type] list for each tray. Enter re-
quired setting items.
37
E Enter the user name and pass- E Click [Exit] on the [File] menu to
word, and then click [OK]. quit User Management Tool.
and password, consult your net- Resetting the number of pages printed to 0.
work administrator.
User Management Tool starts. Follow the procedure below to reset
the number of pages printed under
2 Note each user code to 0.
❒ For details about User Manage-
ment Tool, see SmartDevice- A Start SmartDeviceMonitor for
Monitor for Admin Help. Admin User Information Man-
agement Tool.
Displaying the Number of Sheets Printed B Click the [User Counter Information]
tab of User Management Tool.
Follow the procedure below to dis-
play the number of sheets printed un- C Click the user whose information
der each user code. you want to reset.
A Start SmartDeviceMonitor for D On the [Edit] menu, click [Reset

Admin User Management Tool. User Counters].
B Click the [User Counter Information] E Select the check box of the items
tab of User Management Tool. you want to reset, and then click
[OK].
The number of pages printed un-
der each user code appears. A confirmation message appears.
C Click [Exit] on the [File] menu to F Click [OK].

quit User Management Tool. The number of pages printed is re-
set to 0.
Exporting the information about the
number of pages printed
G On the [Edit] menu, click [Apply
Settings].
Follow the procedure below to export Changes are applied to informa-
the information of the number of pag- tion on the [User Counter Informa-
es printed under each user code as a tion] tab.
.csv file.
H Click [Exit] on the [File] menu to
A Start SmartDeviceMonitor for Ad- quit User Management Tool.
min User Management Tool.
B Click the [User Counter Information]

tab of User Management Tool.
C On the [File] menu, click [Export

User Statistics List].
D Specify the save location and file

name, and then click [Save].
38
Restricting Functions F Click [OK].

The new user is added.
Follow the procedure below to re-
strict use of individual functions. G On the [Edit] menu, click [Apply
Settings].
A Start SmartDeviceMonitor for Ad- The settings are applied.
min User Management Tool.
B Click the [User Counter Information] H Click [Exit] on the [File] menu to 2
tab of User Management Tool. quit User Management Tool.
C Clickthe user whose functions

Note
❒ For details about setting restric-
you want to restrict.
tions, see SmartDeviceMonitor
D On the [Edit] menu of User Man- for Admin Help.
agement Tool, click [Restrict Ac-
cess To Device].
Configuring the Energy Saver
E Select the check box of the func- Mode
tions you want to restrict.
F Click [OK]. Follow the procedure below to con-

figure Energy Saver mode.
G Click [Yes]. min.
The settings are applied.
B On the [Group] menu, point to
Setting Applicable Functions to New [TCP/IP], [IPX/SPX] or [TCP/IP
Users &SNMPv3].
Follow the procedure below to add
new users and set functions applica-
ble to them. Select the protocol of the machine
whose configuration you want to
A Start SmartDeviceMonitor for Ad- change.
min User Management Tool. If you are using TCP/IP SNMP v3,
B Click the [Access Control List:] tab enter the user authentication.
of User Management Tool. C Select the machine whose set-
C On the [Edit] menu, click [Add New tings you want to make.
User]. To make settings for all machines
in the selected group, select no ma-
D Enter the user code and user name. chine.
E Select the check box of the func-
tions applicable to the new user.
If the check boxes are unavailable,
there is no restriction to use that
function.
39
D On the [Group] menu, point to [En- D On the [Tools] menu, click [NIB Set-
ergy Save Mode], point to [Set Indi- up Tool].
vidually] to make the settings for A Web browser opens and the dia-
only the selected machine or log box for entering the login user
point to [Set By Group] to make the name and password for the Web
settings for all machines in the se- Image Monitor administrator ap-
lected group, and then click [On] pears.
or [Off].
2 NIB Setup Tool starts when the
E Quit SmartDeviceMonitor for network interface board is default.
Admin. Follow the instructions on the
screen.
Note
❒ For details about the setting for E Enter the login user name and
Energy Saver mode, see Smart- password, and then click [Login].
DeviceMonitor for Admin For details about the user name
Help. and password, consult your net-
work administrator.
Setting a Password F Click [Configuration].
Follow the procedure below to set a G Click [Program/Change Administra-
password. tor] on the [Device Settings] area,
and then change the settings.
min. H Quit Web Image Monitor.
B On the [Group] menu, point to I Quit SmartDeviceMonitor for Ad-
[Search Device], and then click min.
[TCP/IP], [IPX/SPX] or [TCP/IP
&SNMPv3].
Checking the Machine Status
ed protocol appears. Follow the procedure below to check
Select the protocol of the machine machine status.
change. A Start SmartDeviceMonitor for Ad-
min.
enter the user authentication. B On the [Group] menu, point to
C In the list, select a machine whose [Search Device], and then click
configuration you want to
&SNMPv3].
change.
Select the protocol of the machine
change.
40
C To obtain status details, select the C Select a machine in the list, and
machine in the list, and then click then click [NIB Setup Tool] on the
[Open] on the [Device:] menu. [Tools] menu.
The machine status appears in the A Web browser opens and the
dialog box. window for entering the login user
D Click [System] or [Printer]. Image Monitor administrator ap-
The machine status appears in the pears. 2
dialog box. NIB Setup Tool starts when the
E Quit SmartDeviceMonitor for Ad- network interface board is default.
Follow the instructions on the
min.
screen.
Note
❒ For details about items in the di-
D Enter the login user name and
alog box, see SmartDeviceMon-
itor for Admin Help. For details about the login user
Changing Names and
E Click [Configuration].
Comments
F Click [System] on the [Device Set-
Follow the procedure below to tings] area, and then change the
change the names and comments of settings.
the machine.
G Quit Web Image Monitor.
min. H Quit SmartDeviceMonitor for Ad-
min.
[Search Device], and then click Note
[TCP/IP], [IPX/SPX] or [TCP/IP ❒ In the [Device Name] box, enter a
&SNMPv3]. device name on the machine us-
A list of machines using the selecting up to 31 characters.
ed protocol appears. ❒ In the [Comment] box, enter a
Select the protocol of the machine comment on the machine using
whose configuration you want to up to 31 characters.
change.
41
Load Fax Journal Managing Address

Information
min. A Start SmartDeviceMonitor for Ad-
B On the [Group] menu, point to min.
2
&SNMPv3]. [TCP/IP], [IPX/SPX] or [TCP/IP
A list of machines using the select- &SNMPv3].
ed protocol appears. A list of machines using the select-
Select the protocol of the machine ed protocol appears.
whose configuration you want to Select the protocol of the machine
change. whose configuration you want to
If you are using TCP/IP SNMP v3, change.
enter the user authentication. If you are using TCP/IP SNMP v3,
C Select a machine in the list, and enter the user authentication.
then click [Load Fax Journal] on the
[Tools] menu.
C Select a machine in the list, and
then click [Address Management
A Web browser opens and the Tool]on the [Tools] menu.
window for entering the login user The dialog box for entering the
name and password for the Web login user name and password ap-
Image Monitor administrator appears.
pears.

password, and then click [OK].
Address Management Tool starts.
name and password, consult your For details about the login user
network administrator. name and password, consult your
Load Fax Journal area appears in
the Web Image Monitor. Note
❒ For details, see Address Man-
E Quit Web Image Monitor. agement Tool Help.
F Quit SmartDeviceMonitor for Ad-
min.
Note
❒ For details, see Help in [Load Fax
Journal] area.
42
Using SmartDeviceMonitor for Client
Using SmartDeviceMonitor for Client

To view the status of machines using
SmartDeviceMonitor for Client, con- Checking the Machine Status
figure SmartDeviceMonitor for Client
beforehand. Follow the procedure below to check
machine status using SmartDevice-
Monitor for Client. 2
Monitoring Printers
A For status details, right-click the
Follow the procedure below to moni- SmartDeviceMonitor for Client
tor the machine using SmartDevice- icon, and then click the machine.
Monitor for Client. The machine status appears in the
A Right-click the SmartDeviceMon- dialog box.
itor for Client icon, point to [Prop- Note
erties], and then click [Option..]. ❒ For details about items in the di-
The [SmartDeviceMonitor for Client - alog box, see SmartDeviceMon-
Options] dialog box appears. itor for Client Help.
B Select the machine you want to
monitor, and then select the [To be
Monitored] check box in the Moni-
toring Information Settings area.
To display the machine status in
the task tray using the SmartDe-
viceMonitor for Client icon, select
the [Displayed on Task Bar] check
box.
C Click [OK].
The dialog box closes and the con-
figured machine is monitored.
Note
❒ For details about status icons,
see SmartDeviceMonitor for
Client Help.
43
• An IP address cannot be used for

When Using IPP with the IPP port name because the IP
SmartDeviceMonitor for Client address is used for the SmartDe-
viceMonitor for Client port name.
When using IPP with SmartDevice- • When setting SSL, a protocol for
Monitor for Client, note the follow- encrypted communication, under
ing: environment which server authen-
tication is issued, enter "ht-
2 • The network printer can only re-
ceive one print job from SmartDe- tps://(machine's address)/".
viceMonitor for Client at a time. Internet Explorer must be installed
While the network printer is print- on your computer. Use the highest
ing, another user cannot access it version. Internet Explorer 6.0 or
until the job is finished. In this higher is recommended.
case, SmartDeviceMonitor for Cli- • If the [Security Alert] dialog box ap-
ent tries to access the network pears when accessing the machine
printer until the retry interval ex- using IPP to create or configure an
pires. IPP port, or when printing, install
• If SmartDeviceMonitor for Client the certificate. To select the certifi-
cannot access the network printer cate store location when using Cer-
and times out, it will stop sending tificate Import Wizard, click [Place
the print job. In this case, you all certificates in the following store],
should cancel the paused status and then click [Local Computer] un-
from the print queue window. der [Trusted Root Certification Author-
SmartDeviceMonitor for Client ities].
will resume access to the network Note
printer. You can delete the print
❒ For details about SSL settings,
job from the print queue window,
consult your network adminis-
but canceling a print job printed by
trator.
the network printer might cause
the next job sent from another user
to be incorrectly printed.
• If a print job sent from SmartDe-
viceMonitor for Client is interrupt-
ed and the network printer cancels
the job because something went
wrong, send the print job again.
• Print jobs sent from another com-
puter do not appear in the print
queue window, regardless of pro-
tocol.
• If various users send print jobs us-
ing SmartDeviceMonitor for Client
to network printers, the printing
order might not be the same as that
in which the jobs were sent.
44
Printer Status Notification by E-Mail

Whenever a paper tray becomes emp- ❒ Other call results can be displayed,
ty or paper is jammed, an e-mail alert depending on the machine type.
is issued to the registered addresses ❒ For details about the service call,
to notify the printer status. contact your service or sales repre-
For this notification, you can make sentative.
the e-mail notification settings. 2
Notification timing and e-mail con-
A On the [Administrator Tools] menu,
set [Notify Machine Status] to [On] us-
tent can be set.
ing the control panel.
You can be notified of the following
The default is [On].
events:
• Service call. B Open a Web browser, and then
• Toner cartridge is empty. enter “http://(machine's ad-
dress)/” in the address bar.
• Toner cartridge is nearly empty.
Top Page of Web Image Monitor
• Waste toner bottle is full. appears.
• Waste toner bottle is nearly full. When setting SSL, a protocol for
• Paper has jammed. encrypted communication, under
• Open door is detected. environment which server authen-
tication is issued , enter “ht-
• The paper tray is empty. tps://(machine's address)/”.
• The paper tray is nearly empty.
• A paper tray error occurred.
C Click [Login] on Top Page of Web
Image Monitor.
• Output paper tray is full.
The window for entering the login
• Unit connection error. user name and password appears.
• Duplex unit error.
Note password, and then click Login.
❒ When the service call is set, follow- For details about the login user
ing call results can be sent. name and password, consult your
• Failure automatic call success network administrator.
• Failure automatic call out of
time
E In the menu area, click [Configura-
tion].
• Failure automatic call failure
• Consumable automatic call suc-
F Click [E-mail] on the [Device Set-
tings] area.
cess
• Remote machine check failure
• Firmware update confirmed
45
G Make the following settings: Auto E-mail Notification

• Items in the Reception column:
Make the necessary settings for
sending and receiving e-mail. A Click [Configuration] in the menu
area, and then click [Auto E-mail No-
• Items in the SMTP column: tification] on the [Device Settings] ar-
Configure the SMTP server. ea.
Check your mailing environ-
2 ment, and then specify the nec- The dialog box for making notifi-
cation settings appears.
essary items. You can also
perform mail authentication for
the SMTP server.
B Make the following settings:
• Items in Notification Message
• Items in the POP before SMTP column: You can set this accord-
column: Configure the POP ing to your needs, for example,
server. Check your mailing en- the machine's location, service
vironment, and then specify the representative contact informa-
necessary items. You can also tion.
perform mail authentication for
the POP server. • Items in the Groups to Notify
column: E-mail notification ad-
• Items in the POP3/IMAP4 col- dresses can be grouped as re-
umn: Configure the POP3 or quired.
IMAP4 server. Check your
mailing environment, and then • Items in the Select Groups/Items
specify the necessary items. to Notify column: Select groups
for each notification type, such as
• Items in the E-mail Communi- machine status and error.
cation Port column: Configure To make detailed settings for
the port to be used for access to these items, click [Edit] next to
the mail server. [Detailed Settings of Each Item].
• Items in the FAX E-mail Ac-
count column: Specify internet C Click [OK].
fax addresses, user names, and
password settings. D Click [Logout].
• Items in the E-Mail Notification E Quit Web Image Monitor.
Account column: Specify these
items if you want to use on-de-
mand e-mail notification.
H Click [OK].
46
On-demand E-mail Notification Mail authentication

A Click [Configuration] in the menu You can configure mail authentica-
tion to prevent illegal use of the mail
area, and then click [On-demand E-
server.
mail Notification] on the [Device Set-
tings] area. ❖ SMTP Authentication
The dialog box for making notifi-
cation settings appears.
Specify SMTP authentication. 2
When mail is sent to the SMTP
server, authentication is per-
B Make the following settings: formed using the SMTP AUTH
• Notification Subject: Enter a text protocol by prompting the mail
string to be added to the subject originator to enter the user name
line of return e-mails. and password. This prevents ille-
• Items in Notification Message gal use of the SMTP server.
column: You can set this accord- A In the menu area, click [E-mail]
ing to your needs, for example, B Make the following settings:
the machine's location, service
representative contact informa- • SMTP Authentication: Ena-
tion. ble or disable SMTP authen-
tication.
• Items in the Access Restriction
to Information column: Select • SMTP Auth. E-mail Address:
whether to restrict accesses Enter the e-mail address.
based on a specific category of • SMTP Auth. User Name: En-
information. ter the SMTP account name.
• Items in the Receivable E-mail • SMTP Auth. Password: To
Address/Domain Name Set- set or change the password
tings column: Enter an e-mail for SMTP AUTH.
address or domain name to use • SMTP Auth. Encryption: Se-
for requesting information by e- lect whether to encrypt the
mail and to receive its return e- password or not.
mail. [Encryption]-[Auto Select]: If
C Click [OK]. the authentication method is
P L A I N , LO G I N , C R A M -
D Click [Logout]. MD5, or DIGEST-MD5.
[Encryption]-[Active]: If the au-
E Quit Web Image Monitor. thentication method is
CRAM-MD5 or DIGEST-
MD5.
[Encryption]-[Inactive]: If the
authentication method is
PLAIN or LOGIN.
C Click [OK]
D Click [Logout].
E Quit Web Image Monitor.
47
❖ POP before SMTP Authentication C Click [OK].

Select whether to log on to the D Click [Logout].
POP3 server before sending e-
E Quit Web Image Monitor.
mail.
A In the menu area, click [E-mail]. ❖ Format of on-demand e-mail messag-
B Make the following settings: es
To use mail notification, you need
• POP before SMTP: Enable or
2 disable POP before SMTP.
to send an on-demand e-mail mes-
sage to this machine.
• POP E-mail Address: Enter Using your mail software, enter
the e-mail address. the following:
• POP User Name: Enter the Item Description
POP account name.
Subject (Referred Enter a request re-
• POP Password: To set or to as Subject) garding the device.
change the POP password. For details, see the
• Timeout setting after POP table below.
Auth.: Enter the time availa- From (Referred to Specify a valid
ble before connecting to the as From) mail address. The
SMTP server after logging on device information
to the POP server. will be sent to the
address specified
C Click [OK]. here.
D Click [Logout].
E Quit Web Image Monitor. Note
❒ A mail message must be within
1 MB in size.
On-demand E-mail Notification ❒ E-mail may be incomplete if
sent immediately after power
To use on-demand e-mail notifica-
on.
tion, perform the following configu-
ration tasks in Web Image Monitor. ❖ Subject field
A In the menu area, click [E-mail]. Format: devicestatus?parameter-
B Make the following settings: name=parameter[&=parame-
ter][&=parameter]...
• E-mail Notification E-mail Ad-
dress: Enter the address using Note
alphanumeric characters. ❒ The Subject field is case-insensi-
• Receive E-mail Notification: tive.
Specify whether to use on-de- ❒ Parameter names can be written
mand e-mail notification. in any order.
• E-mail Notification User Name:
Enter the administrator's user
name as the mail originator
name.
• E-mail Notification Password:
Enter the password of the mail
notification user.
48
❖ Subject field coding examples ❖ Parameters specifying the

information to be obtained
Coding example Action
devicestatus?re- The device's sys- Information to be Parameter
quest=syscon- tem configuration obtained
fig&format=text&l information will be System configura- sysconfig
ang=en sent in an English tion information
text format.
Network configu- netconfig
devicestatus?re- The device's sys- ration information 2
quest=sysconfig tem configuration
information will be Printer configura- prtconfig
sent in a preset for- tion information
mat and language. Supplies informa- supply
tion
❖ Parameters Device status in- status
Parameter Meaning Default formation
request Informa- Mandatory ❖ Parameters specifying the mail

tion to be
obtained format
format Mail format Mail will be Mail format Parameter
sent in the
Text text
format pre-
set for each HTML html
mail ad-
XML xml
dress.
lang Language Mail will be Note
for mail sent in the
body language ❒ HTML and XML can be selected
preset for for subject field, but output is
each mail text only.
address.
❖ Parameters that specify the
language for mail bodies
Language Parameter
Japanese ja
English en
49
Remote Maintenance by telnet

Important E Enter "yes" to save the changes,
❒ Remote Maintenance should be and then press the {Enter} key.
password-protected so that access If you do not want to save the chang-
is allowed to administrators only. es, enter "no", and then press the
2 ❒ The password is the same as the {Enter} key. To make further chang-
one of Web Image Monitor admin- es, enter "return" at the command
istrator. When the password is line, and then press the {Enter} key.
changed using "mshell", other
passwords change also. Note
❒ If the message "Can not write
❒ Some command cannot be set de-
NVRAM information" appears,
pending on the model type.
the changes are not saved. Re-
peat the procedure above.
Using telnet ❒ When the changes are saved, the
network interface board is reset
Follow the procedure below to use automatically with that changes.
telnet. ❒ When the network interface
Important board resets, the print job in
❒ Only one user at a time can log on print process will be printed.
to perform remote maintenance. However, print jobs in queue
will be canceled.
A Use the IP address or the host
name of the machine to start tel-
net. access
% telnet IP_address Use the “access” command to view
B Enter your user name and pass- and configure access control. You can
also specify two or more access ranges.
word.
For details about the user name ❖ View settings
and password, consult your net- msh> access
work administrator.
For user authentication, enter a ❖ IPv4 Configuration
login user name and password. msh> access range “start-
For user code authentication, enter address end-address”
a user code in User Name. • The star mark represents a tar-
get number between 1 and 5.
C Enter a command. (Up to five access ranges can be
D Quit telnet. registered and selected.)
Example: to specify accessible IPv4
msh> logout addresses between 192.168.0.10
The configuration message about and 192.168.0.20:
saving the changes appears. msh> access 1 range
192.168.0.10 192.168.0.20
50
❖ IPv6 Configuration ❒ IPv6 can register and select the

msh> access range6 “start- range and the mask for each access
address end-address” ranges.
• The star mark represents a tar- ❒ IPv6 mask ranges between 1 - 128
get number between 1 and 5. can be selected.
(Up to five access ranges can be ❒ Up to five access ranges can be
registered and selected.) specified. The entry is invalid if the
Example: to specify accessible IPv6
addresses between 2001:DB8::100
target number is omitted. 2
❒ You cannot send print jobs, or ac-
and 2001:DB8::200. cess Web Image Monitor and
msh> access 1 range6 2001: diprint from a restricted IP ad-
DB8::100 2001:DB8::200 dress.
❖ IPv6 access mask Configuration

msh> access mask6 “base- appletalk
address prefixlen”
Use the “appletalk” command to
• The star mark represents a tar- view and configure Appletalk param-
get number between 1 and 5. eters.
(Up to five access ranges can be
registered and selected.) ❖ View settings
Example: to specify accessible IPv6 msh> appletalk
addresses to 2001:DB8::/32
• [2] means "active" and [0]
msh> access 1 mask6 2001: means "inactive".
DB8:: 32
• The default is [2].
❖ Access control initialization
❖ Changing PAP timeout configuration
msh> access flush
msh> appletalk ptimeout
• Use the "flush" command to re- value > 0
store the default settings so that
all access ranges become • Timeout value becomes effec-
"0.0.0.0" for IPv4, and "::" for tive.
IPv6. msh> appletalk ptimeout
value = 0
Note
• Timeout value becomes ineffec-
❒ The access range restricts comput- tive.
ers from use of the machine by IP
address. If you do not need to re-
strict printing, make the setting
"0.0.0.0" for IPv4, and "::" for IPv6.
❒ Valid ranges must be from lower
(start address) to higher (end ad-
dress).
❒ If you are running IPv4 or IPv6, up
to five access ranges can be regis-
tered and selected.
51
authfree autonet
Use the “msh> set bonjour” com- Use the “autonet” command to con-
mand to display and configure au- figure AutoNet parameters.
thentication exclusion control
settings. ❖ View settings
The following command displays
2 ❖ View Settings the current AutoNet settings:
msh> authfree msh> autonet
If print job authentication exclu-
sion is not set, authentication ex- ❖ Configuration
clusion control cannot be You can configure AutoNet set-
displayed. tings.
msh> autonet {on|off}
❖ IPv4 address settings
• {on} means "active" and {off}
msh> authfree "ID" range_ means "inactive".
addr1 range_addr2
❖ Current interface priority configura-
❖ IPv6 address settings tion display
msh> authfree "ID" range6_ msh> autonet priority
addr1 range6_addr2
❖ Interface priority configuration
❖ IPv6 address mask settings
msh> autonet priority
msh> authfree "ID" mask6_ “interface_name”
addr1 masklen
• You can give interface's Au-
❖ Parallel/USB settings toNet parameter priority.
msh> authfree [parallel| • Priority settings are available
usb] [on|off] when multiple interfaces are in-
To enable authfree, set to "on". To stalled.
disable authfree, set to "off". • wlan can be specified only
Always specify the interface. when the IEEE 802.11b interface
is installed.
❖ Authentication exclusion control ini-
tialization Interface name Interface configured
msh> authfree flush ether Ethernet interface

wlan IEEE 802.11b inter-
Note face
❒ For IPv4 and IPv6, up to five access
ranges can be registered and se- Note
lected. ❒ If an interface is not selected, the
current interface connection set-
tings remain in effect.
❒ For details about AutoNet, refer to
autonet parameters.
52
❖ IP TTL setting
bonjour(rendezvous) msh> bonjour ip ttl {1-255}
You can specify the IP TTL (the
Use the “bonjour(rendezvous)” com-
number of routers a packet can
mand to display bonjour(rendez-
pass through).
vous)-related settings.
Note
❖ View settings
❒ The default is 255.
Bonjour settings are displayed. 2
msh> bonjour ❖ Resetting the computer name and lo-
cation information
❖ Bonjour service name setting You can reset the computer name
You can specify the bonjour serv- and location information.
ice name.
msh> bonjour clear {cname
msh> bonjour cname “compu- | location}
ter name”
• cname
• The computer name can be en- Reset the computer name. The
tered using up to 63 alphanu- default computer name will be
meric characters. displayed when the computer is
restarted.
❖ Bonjour Installation location informa-
tion setting • location
You can enter information about Reset the location information.
the location where the printer is in- The previous location informa-
stalled. tion will be deleted.
msh> bonjour location “lo- ❖ Interface configuration
cation”
msh> bonjour linklocal
• Information about location can “interface_name”
be entered using up to 32 alpha-
• If many types of interface are in-
numeric characters.
stalled, configure the interface
❖ Setting order of priority for each pro- that communicates with linklo-
tocol cal address.
• If you do not specify an inter-
• diprint
face, the Ethernet interface is
msh> bonjour diprint [0– automatically selected.
99]
• wlan can be specified only
• lpr when the IEEE 802.11b interface
msh> bonjour lpr [0–99] is installed.
• ipp Interface Interface configured
msh> bonjour ipp [0–99] ether Ethernet interface
You can specify the order of prior-
ity for “diprint”, “lpr”, and “ipp”. face
Smaller numbers indicate higher
priority.
53
btconfig dhcp
Use the "btconfig" command to make Use the "dhcp" command to config-
Bluetooth settings. ure DHCP settings.
❖ View settings ❖ View settings

Bluetooth settings are displayed. The following command displays
2 msh> btconfig the current DHCP settings.
msh> dhcp
❖ Mode settings
You can set the Bluetooth opera- ❖ Configuration
tion mode to {private} or {public}. You can configure DHCP.
msh> btconfig {private | msh> dhcp “interface_name”
public} {on|off}
• The default is {public}. • Click {on} to enable dhcp. Click
{off} to disable DHCP.
• If the DNS server address and
devicename domain name are obtained from
Use the "devicename" command to DHCP, be sure to click {on}.
display and change the printer name. • wlan can be specified only
when the IEEE 802.11 interface
❖ View settings is installed.
msh> devicename Interface name Interface configured
❖ Printer name configuration ether Ethernet interface
msh> devicename name wlan IEEE 802.11 inter-

“string” face
• Enter a printer name using up ❖ Current interface priority configura-

to 31 alphanumeric characters.
tion display
• Set single names for each print-
msh> dhcp priority
er.
❖ Printer name initialization ❖ Interface priority configuration

msh> devicename clear name msh> dhcp priority
“interface_name”
• Reset the printer name to its de-
fault. • You can select which interface
has DHCP parameter priority.
• Priority settings are available
when multiple interfaces are in-
stalled.
54
❖ DNS server address selection

msh> dhcp dnsaddr {dhcp | diprint
static}
The direct printing port enables direct
• Specify whether to obtain the printing from a network-connected
DNS server address from the computer.
DHCP server or use the address
Use the “diprint” command to
set by a user.
change direct printing port settings.
• To obtain the DNS server ad- 2
dress from the DHCP server, ❖ View settings
specify "dhcp". To use the ad- The following command displays
dress set by a user, specify "stat- the current direct printing port set-
ic". tings:
❖ Domain name selection msh> diprint
Example output:
msh> dhcp domainname {dhcp
port 9100
| static}
timeout=300(sec)
• Specify whether to obtain the bidirect on
domain name from the DNS con multi
server or use the domain name apl async
set by a user.
• The “port” specifies the port
• To obtain the domain name number of the direct printing port.
from the DHCP server, specify
• The “bidirect” setting indicates
"dhcp". To use the domain
whether the direct printing port
name set by a user, specify "stat-
is bidirectional or not.
ic".
Reference ❖ Setting timeout
p.103 “Using DHCP” msh> diprint timeout
[30~65535]
p.56 “dns”
• You can specify the timeout in-
p.57 “domainname”
terval to use when the printer is
expecting data from the net-
work.
• The default is 300 seconds.
❖ Specifying the number of concurrent

connections
msh> diprint con {multi |
single}
• The above command specifies
the number of concurrent
diprint connections. Specify
“multi” for multiple connec-
tions or “single” for a single
connection.
• The default is “multi”.
55
❖ Dynamic DNS function setting

dns msh> dns “interface_name”
ddns {on|off}
Use the “dns” command to configure
or display DNS (Domain Name Sys- • You can set the dynamic DNS
tem) settings. function "active" or "inactive".
• {on} means "active" and {off}
❖ View settings means "inactive".
2 The following command displays
current DNS settings:
when the IEEE 802.11b interface
msh> dns is installed.
❖ IPv4 DNS server configuration Interface name Interface configured
The following command enables ether Ethernet interface
or disables the IPv4 DNS server
address:
face
msh> dns “number” server
“server address” ❖ Specifying the record overlap opera-
The following command displays tion
a configuration using the IP ad-
dress 192.168.15.16 on a DNS 1 msh> dns overlap {up-
server: date|add}
msh> dns 1 server 192.168. • You can specify operations per-
15.16 formed when records overlap.
• You can register IPv4 DNS Serv- • update
er address. To delete old records and regis-
ter new records.
• You can register up to three
IPv4 DNS server numbers. • add
To add new records and store
• You cannot use “255.255.255.255” the old records.
as the DNS server address.
• When CNAME overlaps, it is al-
❖ IPv6 DNS server configuration ways changed, irrespective of
The following command enables settings.
or disables the IPv4 DNS server
address: ❖ CNAME registration
msh> dns “number” server6 msh> dns cname {on|off}
“server address” • You can specify whether to reg-
• You can register IPv6 DNS Serv- ister CNAME.
er address. • {on} means "active" and {off}
• You can register up to three means "inactive".
IPv6 DNS server numbers. • The CNAME registered is the
default name beginning with
rnp. CNAME cannot be
changed.
56
❖ A records registration ❖ Setting the Domain Name

msh> dns arecord {dh- msh> domainname “interface_
cp|own} name” name “domain name”
• {dhcp} • A domain name can be entered
You can specify the method of using up to 63 alphanumeric
registering an A record when characters.
the dynamic DNS function is • The Ethernet interface and IEEE
enabled and DHCP is used. 802.11b interface will have the 2
• {own} same domain name.
To register an A record using • wlan can be specified only
the printer as the DNS client. when the IEEE 802.11b interface
The DNS server address and the is installed.
domain name already designat-
ed are used for the registration. Interface Interface set
ether Ethernet interface
❖ Record updating interval settings
msh> dns interval “time” face
• You can specify the interval af-
ter which records are updated ❖ Deleting the Domain Name
when using the dynamic DNS msh> domainname “interface_
function. name” clear name
• The updating interval is speci-
fied hourly. It can be entered be-
tween 1 and 255 hours. help
• The default is 24 hours. Use the "help" command to display
the available command list and the
domainname procedures for using those com-
mands.
Use the "domainname" command to
❖ Command list display
display or configure the domain
name settings. msh> help
You can configure the Ethernet inter- ❖ Display of procedure for using com-
face or IEEE 802.11b interface. mands
❖ View settings msh> help “command_name”
the current domain name:
msh> domainname
❖ Interface domain configuration

msh> domainname
“interface_name”
57
hostname ifconfig
Use the “hostname” command to Use the "ifconfig" command to view
change the printer name. and configure TCP/IP (IP address,
subnet mask, broadcast address, de-
❖ View settings fault gateway address) for the printer.
msh> hostname
2 ❖ View settings
❖ IPv4 Configuration msh> ifconfig
msh> hostname “interface_
name ” “printer_name” ❖ IPv4 Configuration
• Enter the printer name using up msh> ifconfig “interface_
to 63 alphanumeric characters. name” “parameter” “address”
• You cannot use a printer name • If you did not enter an interface
beginning “RNP” (in either up- name, it is automatically set to
per or lower case). the Ethernet interface.
• The Ethernet interface and IEEE • wlan can be specified only
802.11b interface will have the when the IEEE 802.11b interface
same printer name. is installed.
• wlan can be specified only Interface name Interface configured
when the IEEE 802.11b interface ether Ethernet Interface
is installed.
wlan IEEE 802.11b Inter-
Interface name Interface configured face
ether Ethernet interface The following explains how to
wlan IEEE 802.11b inter- configure an IPv4 address
face 192.168.15.16 on Ethernet inter-
face.
❖ Initializing the printer name for each msh> ifconfig ether 192.
interface 168.15.16
msh>hostname
“interface_name” clear ❖ IPv6 Configuration
name msh> ifconfig ether inet6
interface_name ”
“printer_name”
The following explains how to
configure a IPv6 address to
2001:DB8::100 with prefix length
64 on the Ethernet interface.
msh> ifconfig ether inet6
2001:DB8::100 64
58
❖ Netmask configuration
msh> ifconfig “interface_ info
name” netmask “address”
Use the "info" command to display
The following explains how to
printer information such as paper
configure a subnet mask
tray, output tray, and printer lan-
255.255.255.0 on Ethernet inter-
guage.
face.
msh> ifconfig ether net- ❖ Printer information display 2
mask 255.255.255.0 msh> info
❖ Broadcast address configuration Reference
msh> ifconfig “interface_ p.75 “Getting Printer Information
name” broadcast “address” over the Network”
❖ Changing the Interface
msh> ifconfig “interface” ipp
up
Use the “ipp” command to view and
• You can specify either the Eth- configure IPP settings.
ernet interface or IEEE 802.11b
interface when using the op- ❖ Viewing settings
tional IEEE 802.11b interface The following command displays
unit. the current IPP settings:
Note msh> ipp
❒ To get the above addresses, contact ❖ IPP timeout configuration
your network administrator. Specify how many seconds the
❒ Use the default configuration if computer waits before canceling
you cannot obtain setting address- an interrupted print job. The time
es. can be entered between 30 to 65535
❒ The IP address, subnet mask and seconds.
broadcast address are the same as msh> ipp timeout [30 -
that for the Ethernet interface and 65535]
IEEE 802.11b interface.
❒ TCP/IP configuration is the same ❖ IPP user authorization configuration
for both Ethernet and IEEE 802.11 Use IPP user authorization to re-
interface. If interfaces are changed, strict users to print with IPP. The
the new interface inherits the con- default is “off”.
figuration. msh> ipp auth {basic|di-
❒ Use "0x" as the initial two letters of gest|off}
a hexadecimal address. • User authorization settings are
“basic” and “digest”.
• If user authorization is speci-
fied, register a user name. You
can register up to 10 users.
59
❖ IPP user configuration

Configure IPP users according to netware
the following messages:
Use the “netware” command to view
msh> ipp user
and configure the NetWare settings
The following message appears:
such as the print server name or file
msh> Input user number (1 server name.
to 10):
2 Enter the number, user name, and ❖ Netware Printer Server Names
password. msh> netware pname charac-
msh> IPP user name:user1 ter string
msh> IPP password:******* • Enter the NetWare print server
After configuring the settings, the name using up to 47 characters.
following message appears:
User configuration changed. ❖ Netware File Server Names
msh> netware fname charac-
ter string
ipv6
• Enter the NetWare file server
Use the “ipv6” command to display name using up to 47 characters.
and configure IPv6 settings.
❖ Encap type
❖ View Setting msh> netware encap
msh> ipv6 {802.3|802.2|snap|etherne
t2|auto}
❖ IPv6 stateless address
❖ Remote Printer Number
msh> ipv6 stateless {on|off}
msh> netware rnum {0–254}
lpr ❖ Timeout
msh> netware timeout {3–255}
Use the “lpr” command to view and
configure LPR settings. ❖ Printer server mode
❖ View Setting msh> netware mode pserver
msh> netware mode ps
msh> lpr
❖ Remote printer mode
❖ Checking host name when deleting
the job msh> netware mode rprinter
msh> netware mode rp
msh> lpr chkhost {on|off}
❖ NDS context name
msh> netware context char-
acter string
❖ SAP interval
msh> netware “sap_interval”
60
❖ Setting login mode for file server Note

msh> netware login server ❒ Be sure not to forget or lose the
password.
❖ Setting login mode for NDS tree
❒ The password can be entered us-
msh> netware login tree ing up to 32 alphanumeric charac-
ters. Passwords are case-sensitive.
❖ Setting login mode for NDS tree name
For example, "R" is not the same as
msh> netware tree “NDS
name”
"r". 2
❖ File transfer protocol prnlog
msh> netware trans
{ipv4pri|ipxpri|ipv4|ipx} Use the “prnlog” command to obtain
printer log information.
• If you do not specify the proto-
col, the current setting is dis- ❖ Print logs display
played.
msh> prnlog
Protocol Set Protocol • Display previous print jobs.
ipv4pri IPv4+IPX(IPv4) msh> prnlog “ID Number”
ipxpri IPv4+IPX(IPX) • Specify the ID number of the
ipv4 IPv4 displayed print log information
to display additional details
ipx IPX
about a print job.
Reference
passwd p.75 “Getting Printer Information
over the Network”.
Use the “passwd” command to
change the remote maintenance pass-
word. route
❖ Changing the Password Use the “route” command to view
msh> passwd and control the routing table.
• Enter the current password.
❖ Specified route information display
• Enter the new password.
msh> route get “destina-
• Renter the new password to tion”
confirm it.
• Specify the IPv4 address to des-
❖ Changing the Password of the admin- tination.
istrators using the Supervisor “0.0.0.0” cannot be specified as
destination address.
msh> passwd {Administra-
tor ID}
• Enter the new password.
• Renter the new password to
confirm it.
61
❖ Enabling/disabling specified IPv4 ❖ Deleting a specified IPv6 destination

destination from Routing Table
msh> route active {host|net} msh> route delete6 {desti-
“destination” {on | off} nation} prefixlen
• You can turn the specified desti- • Specify the IPv6 address to des-
nation on or off. Host becomes tination and gateway.
the default setting.
2 ❖ Display information about a specified
❖ Adding IPv4 Routing Table IPv6 route information
msh> route add {host|net} msh> route get6 {destina-
“destination” “gateway” tion}
• Adds a host or network route to • Specify the IPv6 address to des-
“destination”, and a gateway tination and gateway.
address to “gateway” in the ta-
ble. ❖ Enabling/disabling a specified IPv6
• Specify the IPv4 address to des- destination
tination and gateway. msh> route active6 {desti-
• Host becomes the default set- nation} prefixlen {on |
ting. off}
❖ Setting the Default IPv4 Gateway ❖ Route initialization

msh> route add default msh> route flush
“gateway” Note
❖ Deleting specified IPv4 destination ❒ The maximum number of IPv4
from Routing Table routing tables is 16.
msh> route delete {host|net} ❒ The maximum number of IPv6
“destination” routing tables is 2.
• Host becomes the default set- ❒ Set a gateway address when com-
ting. municating with devices on an ex-
ternal network.
• IPv4 address of destination can
be specified. ❒ The same gateway address is
shared by all interfaces.
❖ Setting IPv6 Default Gateway ❒ “Prefixlen” is a number between 1
msh> route add6 default and 128.
gateway
❖ Adding a specified IPv6 destination to

Routing Table
msh> route add6 {destina-
tion} prefixlen gateway
• Specify the IPv6 address to des-
tination and gateway.
62
msh> set nbt

set msh> set ssdp
Use the "set" command to set the pro- msh> set ssh
tocol information display "active" or msh> set sftp
"inactive". msh> set sftp6
❖ View settings ❖ Configuration
• Enter “up”to enable protocol, 2
protocol information (active/inac-
tive). and enter “down” to disable
protocol.
msh> set ipv4 You can set the protocol to "active"
msh> set ipv6 or "inactive".
msh> set appletalk msh> set ipv4 {up | down}
msh> set netware • If you disable IPv4, you cannot
msh> set smb use remote access after logging
off. If you did this by mistake,
msh> set protocol you can use the control panel to
• When protocol is specified, in- enable remote access via IPv4.
formation about TCP/IP, Ap- • Disabling IPv4 also disables lpr,
pleTalk, Netware, and SMB ftp, rsh, diprint, web, snmp, ssl,
appears. ipp, http, bonjour, and sftp.
msh> set lpr msh> set ipv6 {up | down}
msh> set lpr6 • If you disable IPv6, you cannot
msh> set ftp use remote access after logging
msh> set ftp6 off. If you did this by mistake,
you can use the control panel to
msh> set rsh
enable remote access via IPv6.
msh> set rsh6
• Disabling IPv6 also disables
msh> set diprint lpr6, ftp6, rsh6, diprint6, ssl6,
msh> set diprint6 ipp6, http6, and sftp6.
msh> set web msh> set appletalk {up |
msh> set snmp down}
msh> set netware {up | down}
msh> set ssl
msh> set smb {up | down}
msh> set ssl6
msh> set nrs msh> set lpr {up | down}
msh> set lpr6 {up | down}
msh> set rfu
msh> set ftp {up | down}
msh> set rfu6
msh> set ipp msh> set ftp6 {up | down}
msh> set rsh {up | down}
msh> set ipp6
msh> set rsh6 {up | down}
msh> set http
msh> set http6 msh> set diprint {up | down}
msh> set diprint6 {up | down}
msh> set bonjour
63
msh> set web {up | down}

msh> set snmp {up | down} slp
msh> set ssl {up | down} Use “slp” command to view and con-
msh> set ssl6 {up | down} figure SLP settings.
• If Secured Sockets Layer (SSL, msh> slp ttl “ttl_val”
an encryption protocol) func- • You can search the NetWare server
tion is not available for the
2 printer, you cannot use the
using SLP in the PureIP environ-
ment of NetWare 5/5.1. Using the
function by enabling it. "slp" command, you can configure
msh> set nrs {up | down} the value of TTL which can be used
msh> set rfu {up | down} by SLP multicast packet.
msh> set rfu6 {up | down} • The default value of TTL is 1. A
search is executed only within a lo-
msh> set ipp {up | down} cal segment. If the router does not
msh> set ipp6 {up | down} support multicast, the settings are
msh> set http {up | down} not available even if the TTL value
is increased.
msh> set http6 {up | down}
• The acceptable TTL value is be-
msh> set bonjour {up | down}
tween 1 and 255.
msh> set ssh {up | down}
msh> set ssdp {up | down}
smb
msh> set nbt {up | down}
msh> set sftp {up | down} Use the “smb” command to configure
msh> set sftp6 {up | down} or delete the computer or workgroup
name for SMB.
show ❖ Computer Name settings

msh> smb comp “computer
Use the "show" command to display name”
network interface board configura- • Set computer name using up to
tion settings. 15 characters. Names beginning
❖ View settings with "RNP" or "rnp" cannot be
entered.
msh> show
• If "-p" is added, you can view ❖ Working Group Name settings
settings one by one. msh> smb group “work group
name”
Reference
• Set workgroup name using up
p.83 “Configuring the Network In-
to 15 characters
terface Board”
❖ Comment settings
msh> smb comment “comment”
• Set comment using up to 31
characters.
64
❖ Notify print job completion • If "-p" is added, you can view

msh> smb notif {on | off} settings one by one.
• To notify print job completion, • To display the current commu-
specify “on”. Otherwise, specify nity, specify its registration
“off” number.
❖ Deleting Computer Name ❖ Display

msh> smb clear comp msh> snmp ?
2
❖ Deleting Group Name ❖ Community name configuration
msh> smb clear group msh> snmp “number” name
“community_name”
❖ Deleting Comment • You can configure ten SNMP
msh> smb clear comment access settings numbered 1-10.
• The printer cannot be accessed
❖ View Protocol from SmartDeviceMonitor for
msh> smb protocol Admin or SmartDeviceMonitor
for Client if “public” is not reg-
istered in numbers 1-10. When
snmp changing the community name,
use SmartDeviceMonitor for
Use the “snmp” command to display Admin and SNMP Setup Tool
and edit SNMP configuration settings to correspond with printer set-
such as the community name. tings.
❖ View settings • The community name can be
entered using up to 15 charac-
msh> snmp ters.
• Default access settings 1 is as
follows: ❖ Deleting community name
Community name: public msh> snmp “number” clear
IPv4 address: 0.0.0.0 name
IPv6 address:::
IPX address: ❖ Access type configuration
00000000:000000000000 msh> snmp “number” type
Access type: read-only “access_type”
Effective Protocol: IPv4/IPv6/
IPX Access type Type of access per-
mission
• Default access settings 2 is as
follows: no not accessible
Community name:admin read read only
IPv4 address: 0.0.0.0
write read and write
IPv6 address:::
IPX address: trap user is notified of
00000000:000000000000 trap messages
Access type: read-write
Effective Protocol: Pv4/IPv6/
IPX
65
❖ Protocol configuration • To specify IPv4 or IPv6, enter

msh> snmp {ipv4|ipv6|ipx} "ipv4" or "ipv6" followed by a
{on|off} space, and then the IPv4 or IPv6
address.
• Use the following command to
set protocols "active" or "inac- • To specify IPX/SPX, enter "ipx"
tive": If you set a protocol "inac- followed by a space, the IPX ad-
tive", all access settings for that dress followed by a decimal,
and then the MAC address of
2 protocol are disabled.
the network interface board.
• Specify "ipv4" for IPv4, "ipv6"
for IPv6, or "ipx" for IPX/SPX. ❖ sysLocation configuration
• {on} means "active" and {off} msh> snmp location
means "inactive".
• All protocols cannot be turned ❖ Deleting sysLocation
off concurrently. msh> snmp clear location
❖ Configuration of protocol for each ❖ sysContact setting

registration number msh> snmp contact
msh> snmp “number” active
{ipv4|ipv6|ipx} {on|off} ❖ Deleting sysContact
• To change the protocol of access msh> snmp clear contact
settings, use the following com-
mand. However, if you have ❖ SNMP v1v2 function configuration
disabled a protocol with the msh> snmp v1v2 {on|off}
above command, activating it • Specify "on" to enable, and "off"
here has no effect. to disable.
❖ Access configuration ❖ SNMP v3 function configuration
msh> snmp “number” msh> snmp v3 {on|off}
{ipv4|ipv6|ipx} “address”
• Specify "on" to enable, and "off"
• You can configure a host ad- to disable.
dress according to the protocol
used. ❖ SNMP TRAP configuration
• The network interface board ac- msh> snmp trap {v1|v2|v3}
cepts requests only from hosts {on|off}
that have IPv4, IPv6, and IPX • Specify "on" to enable, and "off"
addresses with access types of to disable.
"read-only" or "read-write". En-
ter “0” to have network inter- ❖ Remote Configuration Authorization
face board accept requests from configuration
any host without requiring a
specific type of access. msh> snmp remote {on|off}
• Enter a host address to deliver • Specify "on" to enable, and "off"
"trap" access type information to disable the SNMP v1v2 set-
to. ting.
66
❖ SNMP v3 TRAP configuration display

msh> snmp v3trap sntp
msh> snmp v3trap {1-5} The printer clock can be synchronized
• If a number from 1-5 is entered, with a NTP server clock using Simple
settings are displayed for that Network Time Protocol (SNTP). Use
number only. the "sntp" command to change SNTP
settings.
❖ Configuring a sending address for
❖ View settings
2
SNMP v3 TRAP
msh> snmp v3trap {1-5} msh> sntp
{ipv4|ipv6|ipx} “address”
❖ NTP server address configuration
❖ Configuring a sending protocol for You can specify the IP address of
SNMP v3 TRAP the NTP server.
msh> snmp v3trap {1-5} ac- msh> sntp server “IP_address”
tive {ipv4|ipv6|ipx}
{on|off}
❖ Interval configuration
msh> sntp interval
❖ Configuring a user account for SNMP “polling_time”
v3 TRAP • You can specify the interval at
msh> snmp v3trap {1-5} ac- which the printer synchronizes
count “account_name” with the operator-specified
• Enter an account name using up NTP server. The default is 60
to 32 alphanumeric characters. minutes.
• The interval can be entered
❖ Deleting an SNMP v3 TRAP user ac- from 0, or between 16 and
count 10,080 minutes.
msh> snmp v3trap {1-5} • If you set 0, the printer synchro-
clear account nizes with the NTP server only
when you turn the printer on.
❖ Configuring an SNMP v3 encryption After that, the printer does not
algorithm synchronize with the NTP serv-
msh> snmp v3auth {md5|sha1} er.
❖ Configuring SNMP v3 encryption ❖ Time-zone configuration

msh> snmp v3priv {auto|on} msh> sntp timezone “+/-
hour_time”
• Set "auto" for automatic encryp-
tion configuration • You can specify the time differ-
ence between the printer clock
• Set "on" for mandatory encryp-
and NTP server clock. The val-
tion configuration.
ues are between –12:00 and
+13:00.
67
❖ Setting an open key for SSH/SFTP

ssdp msh> ssh genkey {512|768|
1024} "character string"
Use the “ssdp” command to view and
Create an open key for SSH/SFTP
configure SSDP settings.
communication.
❖ View settings Usable characters are ASCII 0x20-
0x7e (32 bytes) other than "0".
msh> ssdp The default key length is 1024, and
2 the character string is blank.
❖ Setting effective time
msh> ssdp profile {1801– ❖ Deleting open key for ssh/sftp com-
86400} munication
The default is 10800 seconds. msh> ssh delkey
❖ Advertise packet TTL settings Note
msh> ssdp ttl {1–255} ❒ If you do not specify a character
The default is 4. string, current setting is displayed.
ssh status
Use the “ssh” command to view and Use the “status” command to display
configure SSH settings. the printer status.
❖ View settings ❖ view messages
msh> ssh msh> status
❖ Data compression communication Reference
settings p.75 “Current Printer Status”
msh> ssh compression
{on|off}
The default is "on".
syslog
❖ SSH/SFTP communication port setting Use the “syslog” command to display
the information stored in the printer's
msh> ssh port {22, 1024– system log.
65535}
The default is 22. ❖ View message
❖ SSH/SFTP communication timeout msh> syslog
setting Reference
msh> ssh timeout {0–65535} p.90 “System Log Information”
The default is 300.
❖ SSH/SFTP communication login time-

out setting
msh> ssh logintimeout {0–
65535}
The default is 300.
68
❖ Link name configuration

upnp You can enter the name for URL
that appears on Web Image Moni-
Use the "upnp" command to display tor.
and configure the universal plug and Specify "1" or "2" for x as the corre-
play. sponding number to the link
name.
❖ Public URL display
msh> web name “Name you
msh> upnp url want to display” 2
❖ Public URL configuration ❖ Resetting URL names registered as
msh> upnp url "string" link destinations
• Enter the URL string in the char- msh> web x clear name
acter string. Specify "1" or "2" for x as the
number corresponding to the link
❖ Deleting Public URL name.
msh> upnp clear url
❖ Help URL Configuration
You can set URLs linked by click-
web ing [Help] or [?] on Web Image
Monitor.
Use the “web” command to display msh> web help http://”Help
and configure parameters on Web URL or IP address”/help/
Image Monitor.
❖ Resetting Help URL
❖ View Settings
msh> web clear help
msh> web
❖ URL Configuration wiconfig

You can set URLs linked by click-
ing [URL] on Web Image Monitor. Use the "wiconfig" command to make
Specify "1" or "2" for x as the settings for IEEE 802.11b.
number corresponding to the URL.
Up to two URLs can be registered ❖ View settings
and specified. msh> wiconfig
msh> web url http://”The
URL or IP address you want ❖ View IEEE 802.11b settings
to register”/ msh> wiconfig cardinfo
❖ Resetting URLs registered as link • If IEEE 802.11b is not working
destinations correctly, its information is not
displayed.
msh> web x clear url
Specify "1" or "2" for x as the corre- ❖ Configuration
sponding number to the URL.
msh> wiconfig “parameter”
69
Parameter Value configured Parameter Value configured

mode [ap|ad- You can set the in- key [ “key value” ] You can specify
hoc|802.11adhoc] frastructure val [1|2|3|4] the WEP key when
mode(ap) , the entering in hexa-
802.11 Ad hoc decimal.
mode With a 64-bit WEP,
(802.11adhoc), or you can use 10 dig-
the ad hoc mode it hexadecimals.
2 (adhoc). With a 128-bit
The default is ad WEP, you can use
hoc mode. 26 digit hexadeci-
mal.
ssid “ID value” You can make set-
tings for the SSID Up to four WEP
in the infrastruc- keys can be regis-
ture mode. tered. Specify the
number to be reg-
Usable characters
istered with “val”.
are ASCII 0x20-
0x7e (32 bytes). When a WEP is
specified by key,
An SSID value is
the WEP specified
set automatically
by key phrase is
to the nearest ac-
overwritten.
cess point if no set-
ting is made. To use this func-
tion, set the same
If no setting is
key number and
made for the
WEP key for all
802.11 ad hoc
ports that transmit
mode, the same
data to each other.
values for the in-
Put “0x”on the
frastructure mode
front of WEP key.
or an ASSID value
is automatically You can omit the
set. The default is numbers with
blank. “val”. The key
number is set to 1
channel frequency You can enable or when making
“channel no.” disable the WEP these omissions.
function. To enable The default is
the WEP function, blank.
specify [on]; to dis-
able it, specify
[off].
To start the WEP
function, enter the
correct WEP key.
The default is “11”.
70

keyphrase [ “phrase” ] You can specify rate [au- You can set the
val [1|2|3|4] the WEP key when to|11m|5.5m|2m IEEE 802.11b trans-
entering in ASCII. |1m] mitting speed.
With a 64-bit WEP, The speed you
you can use10 digit specify here is the
hexadecimals. With speed at which
a 128-bit WEP, you data is sent. You
can use 26 digit can receive data at 2
hexadecimals. any speed.
Up to four WEP auto: automatical-
keys can be regis- ly set (default)
tered. Specify the 11m: 11 Mbps fixed
number to be reg-
5.5m: 5.5 Mbps fixed
istered with “val”.
2m:2 Mbps fixed
When a WEP is
specified by key 1m: 1 Mbps fixed
phrase, the WEP security You can specify
specified by key is {none|wep|wpa} the security mode.
overwritten.
none: No encryp-
To use this function(default)S
tion, set the same
wep: WEP encryp-
key number and
tion
WEP key for all
ports that transmit wpa: WPA encryp-
data to each other. tion
You can omit the wpaenc {tkip|ccmp} You can specify
numbers with WPA encryption
“val”. The key key when using
number is set to 1 WPA encryption.
when making tkip: TKIP (default)
these omissions.
The default is ccmp: CCMP
blank. (AES)
encval [1|2|3|4] You can specify wpaauth You can specify

which of the four {wpapsk|wpa} the WPA authenti-
WEP keys is used cation mode when
for packet encod- using WPA en-
ing. “1” is set if a cryption.
number is not wpapsk: WPA-
specified. PSK authentica-
tion(default)
wepauth You can set an au-
[open|shared] thorization mode wpa: WPA(802.1X)
when using WEP. authentication
The specified value psk "character You can specify
and authorized string" the Pre-Shared
mode are as follows: key.
open: open system Usable characters:
authorized (de- ASCII 0x20-0x7e (8
fault) to 63 bytes).
shared: shared key The default is
authorized rate blank.
71

eap You can specify domain "character You can specify
{tls|ttls|leap|pea the EAP authenti- string" the login domain
p} {chap|msc- cation type. name for the Radi-
hap|mschapv2|p tls: EAP-TLS (de- us server.
ap|md5|tls} fault) Usable characters:
ttls: EAP-TTLS ASCII0x20-0x7e
(31 bytes) other
2 leap: LEAP
peap: PEAP
than "@". The de-
fault is blank.
chap, mschap,
password "charac- You can specify
mschapv2, pap,
ter string" the login password
md5, or tls are set-
for the Radius
tings for the phase
server.
2 method, and
must be set when Usable characters:
using EAP-TTLS ASCII 0x20-
orPEAP. 0x7e(128 bytes).
The default is
Do not make these
blank.
settings when us-
ing other EAP au- srvcert {on|off} You can set the
thentication types. server certifi-
If you select EAP- cate.The default is
TTLS, you can se- "off".
lect chap, mschap, imca {on|off} You can enable or
mschapv2, pap, or disable the certifi-
md5. cate when the in-
If you select PEAP, termediate
you can select certificate authori-
mschapv2 or tls. ty is present. The
default is "off".
username "charac- You can specify
ter string" the login user srvid "character You can set the
name for the Radi- string" server ID and sub-
us server. domain of the cer-
Usable characters: tificate server.
ASCII 0x20-
0x7e(31 bytes) oth-
er than "@". The
default is blank.
username2 "char- You can specify
acter string" the phase 2 user-
name for EAP-
TTLS/PEAP phase
2 authentication.
Usable characters:
ASCII 0x20-0x7e
(31 bytes) other
than "@". The de-
fault is blank.
72
❖ NBT (NetBIOS over TCP/IP) Scope ID

wins Selection
You can specify the NBT scope ID.
Use the "wins" command to configure
msh> wins “interface_name”
WINS server settings.
scope “scope ID”
❖ Viewing settings • The scope ID can be entered us-
msh> wins ing up to 31 alphanumeric char-
• If the IPv4 address obtained
acters. 2
from DHCP differs from the • Be sure to specify the interface.
WINS IPv4 address, the DHCP • wlan can be specified only
address is the valid address. when the IEEE 802.11b interface
is installed.
❖ Configuration
Interface name Interface configured
{on | off} ether Ethernet interface
• {on} means "active" and {off} wlan IEEE 802.11b inter-

means "inactive". face
• Be sure to specify the interface.

when the IEEE 802.11b interface
is installed.
Interface name Interface configured
ether Ethernet interface
face
❖ Address configuration
Use the following command to
configure a WINS server IP ad-
dress:
{primary|secondary} “IP
address”
• Use the “primary” command to
configure a primary WINS serv-
er IP address.
• Use the "secondary" command
to configure a secondary WINS
server IP address.
• Do not use “255.255.255.255” as
the IP address.
73
SNMP
The SNMP agent operating on UDP ❖ Supported MIBs(SNMPv3)
and IPX is incorporated into the built- • MIB-II
in Ethernet board and optional IEEE
802.11b interface unit of this printer. • PrinterMIB
Using the SNMP manager, you can • HostResourceMIB
2 get information about the printer. • RicohPrivateMIB
Important • SNMP-FRAMEWORK-MIB
❒ If you changed the machine's com- • SNMP-TARGET-MIB
munity name, change the configu- • SNMP-NOTIFICATION-MIB
ration of the connected computer • SNMP-USER-BASED-SM-MIB
accordingly, using SNMP Setup
Tool. For details, see SNMP Setup • SNMP-VIEW-BASED-ACM-
Tool Help. MIB
The default community names are
[public] and [admin]. You can get MIB
information using these community
names.
❖ Start SNMP Setup Tool

• Windows 95/98/Me, Windows
2000, Windows NT 4.0:
Click the [Start] button.
Point to [SmartDeviceMonitor for
Admin] on the [Programs] menu.
Click [SNMP Setup Tool].
• Windows XP:
Click the [Start] button.
Point to [SmartDeviceMonitor for
Admin] on the [All Programs]
menu.
Click [SNMP Setup Tool].
❖ Supported MIBs(SNMPv1/v2)
• MIB-II
• PrinterMIB
• HostResourceMIB
• RicohPrivateMIB
74
Getting Printer Information over the Network
Getting Printer Information over the

Network
This section explains details of each item displayed in the printer status and in-
formation.
This manual covers all models, and therefore contains functions and settings
that may not be available for your model. 2
Current Printer Status
The printer status can be checked using the following commands:
• UNIX: Use the "lpq" command and "rsh", "rcp", “ftp”, and "sftp" parameters.
• mshell: Use the "status" command.
Messages Description
Access Restricted The job was canceled because user have no authority.
Adjusting... The machine is initializing or calibrating.
Alert at Printer: Yellow LED An error has occurred.
Call Service Center There is a malfunction in the machine.
Canceled The job is reset.
Canceling Job... The job is being reset.
Configuring... Setting is being changed.
Cooling Down Fusing Unit... The fusing unit is cooling down.
Cover Open: ADF The document feeder is open.
Cover Open: Duplex Unit The cover of the duplex unit is open.
Cover Open: Front Cover The front cover is open.
Cover Open: Fusing Unit Cover The cover of the fusing unit is open.
Cover Open: Lower Right Cover The lower right cover is open.
Cover Open: Right Cover The right cover is open.
Cover Open: Upper Cover The upper cover is open.
Cover Open: Upper Exit Cover The upper exit cover is open.
Data Size Error The data size error occurred.
Empty: Black Toner The black toner cartridge is almost empty.
Empty: Toner The toner cartridge is almost empty.
Energy Saver Mode The machine is in Energy Saver Mode.
Envelope Setting Error: None Printing paper type other than envelope is instructed
when B2 lever is down.
Envelope Setting Error: Others Printing envelope is instructed when B2 lever is down.
75
Error An error has occurred.
Error at Printer: Red LED An error has occurred.
Error in Printer An error has occurred.
Error: Address Book An error has occurred in the data of the address book.
Error: Command Transmission An error has occurred in the machine.
2 Error: DIMM Value A memory error occurred.
Error: Ethernet Board An Ethernet board error has occurred.
Error: Memory Switch A memory switch error has occurred.
Error: Optional Font An error has occurred in the font file of the machine.
Error: Optional RAM An error has occurred in the optional memory unit.
Error: Parallel I/F Board An error has occurred in the parallel interface.
Error: PDL An error has occurred in the page description language.
Error: Rem. Certificate Renewal An error has occurred in the remote sever renewal.
Error: USB Board An error has occurred in theUSB interface board.
Error: USB Interface An error has occurred in the USB interface.
Error: Wireless Card Wireless card is not inserted during start up, or the
IEEE 802.11b interface unit or the wireless card is tak-
en out after start up .
Error: Wireless Board An error has occurred in the IEEE802.11b interface unit.
Full: Internal Tray 1 Internal tray 1 is full.
Full: Internal Tray 2 Internal tray 2 is full.
Full: Waste Toner Waste toner is full.
Hex Dump Mode It is a hex dump mode.
Immed. Trans. not connected It did not connect directly with the other party of the
transmission.
Immediate Transmission Failed An error has occurred while transmitting directly.
In Use: Copier The copier is being used.
In Use: Fax The fax is being used.
In Use: Input Tray Other functions is using the input tray.
Independent-supplier Toner Toner that is not recommended is set.
Key Card not inserted The machine is waiting for key card to be inserted.
Key Card/Counter not inserted The machine is waiting for key card or key counter to
be inserted.
Key Counter not inserted The machine is waiting for key counter to be left in it.
Loading Toner... Toner is being supplied.
Low: Black Toner The black toner cartridge is not set correctly, or toner
is almost running out.
76
Low: Toner The toner cartridge is not set correctly, or toner is al-
most running out.
Malfunction: Duplex Unit There is a problem with the duplex unit.
Malfunction: Ext. Charge Unit There is a problem with the external charge unit.
Malfunction: Tray 1 There is a problem with tray 1.
Malfunction: Tray 2 There is a problem with tray 2. 2
Memory Low: Copy Memory shortage has occurred while the copy was
operating.
Memory Low: Data Storage Memory shortage has occurred while the document
was being accumulated.
Memory Low: Fax Scanning Memory shortage has occurred while transmitting the fax.
Memory Low: Scanning Memory shortage has occurred while the scanner was
working.
Miscellaneous Error Other error has occurred.
Mismatch: Paper Size Indicated paper tray does not contain paper of select-
ed size.
Mismatch: Paper Size and Type Indicated paper tray does not contain paper of select-
ed size and type.
Mismatch: Paper Type Indicated paper tray does not contain paper of select-
ed type.
Near Replacing: Black PCU Prepare the new black photoconductor unit.
Near Replacing: Cleaning Unit Prepare the new cleaning unit.
Near Replacing: Develop. Unit K Prepare the new development unit (black).
Near Replacing: Fusing Unit Prepare the new fusing unit.
Near Replacing: Transfer Unit Prepare the new transfer unit.
Nearly Full: Waste Toner Waste toner bottle is nearly full.
No Paper: Selected Tray There is no paper in specified tray.
No Paper: Tray 1 There is no paper in tray 1.
Not Detected: B2 Lever B2 lever is not correctly set.
Not Detected: Black Toner Black toner is not correctly set.
Not Detected: Charger Charger is not correctly set.
Not Detected: Develop. Unit (K) The development unit (black) is not correctly set.
Not Detected: Duplex Feed Unit The duplex unit is not correctly set.
77
Not Detected: Duplex Unit The duplex feed unit is not correctly set.
Not Detected: Fusing Unit The fusing unit is not correctly set.
Not Detected: Input Tray The paper feed tray is not correctly set.
Not Detected: PCU The photoconductor unit is not correctly set.
Not Detected: Tray 1 Tray 1 is not correctly set.
2 Not Detected: Tray 2 Tray 2 is not correctly set.
Not Detected: Waste Toner Bottle Waste toner bottle is not correctly set.
Not Reached, Data Deleted Unreached job is deleted.
Offline Printer is offline.
Original on Exposure Glass The original remains on the exposure glass.
Operating Thermo-range Error The machine is operating outside the permissible tem-
perature range.
Panel Off Mode The machine is in Panel-Off mode.
Panel Off Mode>>Printing ava. The machine is in Control Panel-Off mode.
Paper in Duplex Unit The paper remains in the duplex unit.
Paper Misfeed: ADF The paper has jammed in Document Feeder.
Paper Misfeed: Duplex Unit The paper has jammed in the duplex unit.
Paper Misfeed: Input Tray The paper has jammed in the input tray.
Paper Misfeed: Internal/Output The paper has jammed inside the machine.
Print Complete The print was completed.
Printing... Printing is in progress.
Processing Data is being processed.
Proxy Address / Port Incorrect The proxy address and port setting is incorrect.
Proxy User / Password Incorrect The proxy user name and password setting is incorrect.
Ready The machine is ready to print.
Renewing Remote Certificate The remote certificate is being renewed.
Replace Cleaning Web It is time to replace the Cleaning Web.
Replace Develop. Unit It is time to replace the development unit.
Replace Feed Belt It is time to replace the feed belt.
Replace Feed Roller It is time to replace the transfer roller.
Replace Fuser Oil Unit It is time to replace the fuser oil unit.
Replace Fusing Unit It is time to replace the fusing unit.
Replace PCU It is time to replace the photoconductor unit.
Replace Transfer Cleaning Unit It is time to replace the transfer cleaning unit.
78
Retarding... Printing has stopped momentarily to allow printed
sheets to dry.
SD Card Authentication failed SD card authentication failed.
Setting Remotely The RDS setting is being processed.
Skipped due to Error Skipped the error.
Storage Complete The storage is complete. 2
Storage Failed The storage has failed.
Supplies Order Call failed The supply order call has failed.
Transmission Aborted The transmission was interrupted.
Transmission Complete The transmission completion was completed.
Transmission Failed The transmission has failed.
Tray Error: Chaptering The paper feed tray specification error has occurred
because chaptering as well as the normal paper use
the same tray for printing.
Tray Error: Duplex Printing Selected paper tray cannot be used for duplex print-
ing.
Unit Left Open: ADF Document feeder is opened.
Waiting for Job Suspension The machine is waiting for Job Suspension.
Warming Up... The machine is warming up.
Note
❒ For details about UNIX commands, see UNIX Supplement.
❒ Check the error contents that may be printed in the configuration page. For
details about printing a configuration page, see Printer Reference.
79
Printer configuration
You can check the printer configuration using telnet.
This section explains the checking procedure for input/output tray and printer
language.
• UNIX: Use the "info" command and "rsh", "rcp", “ftp”, and "sftp" parameters.
2 • mshell: Use the "info" command.
❖ Input Tray
Item Description
No. ID number of the paper tray
Name Name of the paper tray
PaperSize Size of paper loaded in the paper tray
Status Current status of the paper tray
• Normal: Normal
• NoInputTray: No tray
• PaperEnd: No paper
❖ Output Tray
Item Description
No. ID number of the output tray
Name Name of the output tray
Status Current status of the output tray
• Normal: Normal
• PaperExist: Paper exist
• OverFlow: Paper is full
• Error: Other errors
❖ Printer Language
Item Description
No. ID number of the printer language used by the
printer
Name Name of the printer language used in the
printer
Version Version of the printer language
Note
❒ For details about UNIX commands and parameters, see UNIX Supplement.
80
Understanding the Displayed Information

This section explains how to read status information returned by the network in-
terface board.
Print Job Information

2
Use the following command to display print job information:
• UNIX: Use the "info" command and "rsh", "rcp", “ftp”, and "sftp" parameters.
• mshell: Use the "info" command.
Item Description
Rank Print job status.
• Active
Printing or preparing for printing.
• Waiting
Waiting to be transferred to the printer.
Owner Print request user name.
Job Print request number.
Files The name of the document.
Total Size The size of the data (spooled).
The default is 0 bytes.
Note
81
Print Log Information

This is a record of the most recent jobs printed.
Use the following command to display print log information:
• UNIX: Use the "prnlog" command and "rsh", "rcp", "ftp", and "sftp" parame-
ters.
2 • telnet : Use the “prnlog” command.
Item Description
ID Print request ID.
User Print request user name.
Page Number of pages printed
Result Print Request Result
Communication Result
• OK
Print was completed normally. However, the print result may
not be as required due to printer problems.
• NG
Printing was not completed normally.
• Canceled
An "rcp", "rsh", or "lpr" command print request was canceled,
possibly due to the printing application. Not applicable to the
"ftp" or "rprinter" command.
Time Time the print requested was received.
Time of print request reception
User ID Printer driver-configured User ID.
Appears when the print request ID is specified.
JobName Name of the document for printing
Appears when the print request ID is specified.
Note
82
Configuring the Network Interface Board

Use the following command to display network interface board settings:
• telnet : Use the “show” command.
Item Description
Common
Mode
2
Protocol Up/Down Protocol Settings
AppleTalk
IPv4
IPv6
TCP/IP
Netware
SMB
Device Up/Down Device Settings
Parallel
USB
Bluetooth
Ethernet interface
Syslog priority
NVRAM version
Device name
Comment
Location
Contact
Soft switch
AppleTalk AppleTalk settings
Mode
Net
Object
Type
Zone
83
Item Description
TCP/IP TCP/IP settings
Mode(IPv4)
Mode(IPv6)
ftp
lpr
2 rsh
telnet
diprint
web
http
ftpc
snmp
ipp
autonet
Bonjour
ssl
nrs
rfu
nbt
ssdp
ssh
sftp
IPv4
DHCP
Address
Netmask
Broadcast
Gateway
IPv6
Stateless
Manual
Gateway
EncapType
Host name
DNS Domain
84
Item Description
Access Control Access Control settings
IPv4 X can be set between 1 and 5.
AccessEntry[X]
IPv6
AccessEntry[X] X can be set between 1 and 5.
Time server Time settings 2
Time Zone
Time server polling time
SYSLOG server Websys settings
Home page URL1
Home page link name1
Home page URL2
Home page link name2
Help page URL
Netware
EncapType
RPRINTER number
Print server name
File server name
Context name
Switch
Mode
NDS/Bindery
Packet negotiation
Login Mode
Print job timeout
Protocol
SAP interval time
NDS Tree Name
Transfer Protocol
85
Item Description
SMB SMB settings
Switch
Mode
Directprint
Notification
2 Workgroup name
Computer name
Comment
Share name[1]
Protocol
IEEE 802.11b IEEE 802.11b settings
Host Name
Communication mode
SSID
Channel range
Channel
TX Rate
Security
WEP Authentication
WEP Encryption key number
WEP Encryptionkeys [X] X can be set between 1 and 5.
WPA Encryption
WPA Authentication
Pre-Shared Key
User name
Domain name
EAP Type
Password
Phase 2 username
Phase 2 Method TTLS
Phase 2 Method PEAP
Server cert
IntermediateCA
Server ID
86
Item Description
DNS DNS settings
IPv4
Server[X] X can be set between 1 and 3.
Selected IPv4 DNS Server
IPv6
Server[X] X can be set between 1 and 3. 2
Domain Name
ether
wlan
DDNS
ether
wlan
WINS WINS settings
ether
Primary WINS
Secondary WINS
wlan
Primary WINS
Secondary WINS
Bluetooth Bluetooth settings
Bluetooth mode Bluetooth connection mode
SSDP SSDP settings
UUID
Profile
TTL
UPnP UPnP settings
URL
87
Item Description
Bonjour Bonjour (Redezvous) settings
Computer Name (cname)
Local Hostname (ether)
Local Hostname (wlan)
Location
2 Priority (diprint)
Priority (lpr)
Priority (ipp)
IP TTL
LinkLocal Route for Multi I/F
SNMP SNMP settings
SNMPv1v2
SNMPv3
protocol
v1Trap
v2Trap
v3Trap
SNMPv1v2 Remote Setting
SNMPv3 Privacy
ssh ssh settings
Compression
Port
TimeOut
Login TimeOut
AuthFree Authfree settings
IPv4
AuthFreeEntry[X] X can be set between 1 and 5.
IPv6
AuthFreeEntry[X] X can be set between 1 and 5
Parallel
USB
88
Item Description
LPR
lprm check host
Certificate
Verification
Shell mode Remote maintenance tool mode
2
89
Message List
This is a list of messages that appear in the machine's system log. The system log
can be viewed using the "syslog" command.
System Log Information

2
Use the following command to display the system log information:
• UNIX: Use the "syslog" command and "rsh", "rcp", “ftp”, and "sftp" parame-
ters.
• telnet : Use the “syslog” command.
Message Problem and solutions
Access to NetWare server <file server name> (In the print server mode) Login to the file
denied. Either there is no account for this print server failed. Make sure that the print server is
server on the NetWare server or the password registered on the file server. If a password is
was incorrect. specified for the print server, deleteit.
account is unavailable: User account is disabled. This could be be-
Same account name be used. cause it use the same account name as the ad-
ministrator account.
account is unavailable: User account is disabled. This could be be-
The authentication password is not set up. cause the authentication password is not set,
and only the encryption account is set.
account is unavailable: Encryption is not possible and account is disa-
encryption is impossible. bled. This could be because:
• Security option is not installed.
• Encryption password has not been specified.
add_sess_IPv4: bad trap <IPv4 address>com- The IPv4 address (0.0.0.0.) is unavailable when
munity <community name> the community access type is TRAP. Specify
the host IPv4 address for the TRAP destination.
add_sess_IPv6: bad trap <IPv6 address>com- The IPv6 address [::] is unavailable when the
munity <community name> community access type is TRAP. Specify the
host IPv6 address for the TRAP destination.
add_sess_IPv4: community<community The same community name already exists.
name> already defined. Use another community name.
add_sess_IPv6: community <community The same community name already exists.
add_sess_IPX: bad trap<IPX address>commu- The IPX address (00:00:00:00:00:00) is unavail-
nity <community name> able when the community access type is
TRAP. Specify the host IPX address for the
TRAP destination.
add_sess_ipx: community <community- The same community name already exists.
Attach FileServer= <file servername> Connection to the file server as the nearest
server has been established.
90
Message List

Attach to print queue <print queue name> (In the print server mode) Attached to the
print queue.
Authentication mode mismatch< SSID > Authentication mode is different to the AP. The
required SSID is the SSID of the access point
connected to when in infrastructure mode.
btd is disabled. Communication via Bluetooth is unavailable
because btd is disabled in the security mode. 2
Enable the btd in the security mode.
centrod is disabled. Communication via parallel connections una-
vailable because centrod is disabled in the se-
curity mode.
Enable centrod in the security mode.
Cannot create service connection (In the remote printer mode) Connection to the
file server has not been established. The
number of file server users may have exceeded
the maximum capacity of the file server.
Cannot find rprinter (<print server The printer with the number displayed on the
name>/<printer number>) print server does not exist. Make sure that the
printer number is registered on the print server.
Change IP address from DHCP Server. The IP address changes when DHCP lease is re-
newed. To always assign the same IP address,
set a static IP address to the DHCP server.
child process exec error! (process name) The network service failed to start. Turn the
printer off and then on. If this does not work,
contact your service or sales representative.
Client password rejected The client's password was rejected. Check the
client password.
Client tls certificate rejected The client's TLS certificate was rejected. Check
the certificate.
Connected DHCP Server(<DHCP server ad- The IP address was successfully received from
dress>). the DHCP server.
Could not attach to File Server<error number> (In the remote printer mode) Connection to the
file server has not been established. The file
server has refused the connection. Check the
file server configuration.
Could not attach to P Server<print server> (In the remote printer mode) Connection to the
print server has not been established. The
print server has refused the connection. Check
the print server configuration.
Current Interface Speed:xxxMbps Speed of the network (10Mbps, 100 Mbps, or 1Gbps).
Current IP address <currentIP address> Current IPv4 address.
Current IPX address<IPX address> Current IPX address
DHCP lease time expired. DHCP lease time has expired. The printer tries
to discover the DHCP server again. The IP ad-
dress until now becomes invalid.
91

DHCP server not found. The DHCP server was not found. Make sure
that the DHCP is on the network.
dhcpcd start. The DHCPCD service (dhcp client service) has
started.
Duplicate IP=<IP address>(from<MAC ad- The same IP address (IPv,or IPv6 address) was
dress>). used. Each IP address (IPv, or IPv6 address)
2 must be unique. Check the address of the de-
vice indicated in [MAC address].
Established SPX Connection with PServ- (In the remote printer mode) Connection to the
er,(RPSocket=<socketnumber>, con- print server has been established.
nID=<connection ID>)
exiting The lpd service has ended and the system is
exiting the process.
Exit pserver (In the print server mode) The print server
function is disabled because the necessary
print server settings have not been made.
Frametype =<frame typename> The frame type name is configured to be used
on NetWare.
httpd start. The httpd service has started.
IEEE 802.11b <communication mode> mode Displays IEEE 802.11b communication mode.
inetd start. The inetd service has started.
Interface (interface name): Duplicate IP Ad- The same IP (IPv4 or IPv6) address was used.
dress (IP address). Each IP address must be unique. Check the ad-
dress of the device indicated in [IP address].
< Interface > started with IP: < IP address > IP address (IPv4, or IPv4 address) has been set
for the interface and is operating..
< Interface >: Subnet overlap. The same IP address (IPv, orIPv6 address) and
the subnet mask is used with other device.
IPP cancel-job: permission denied. The printer could not authenticate the name of
the user attempting to cancel a job.
ipp disable. Printing with ipp is disabled.
ipp enable. Printing with ipp is enabled.
IPP job canceled. jobid=%d. The spooled job was canceled due to error or
user request.
LeaseTime=<lease time>(sec), Renew- The resource lease time received from the
Time=<renewtime>(sec). DHCP server is displayed in [lease time] in
seconds. The renewal time is displayed in [re-
new time] in seconds.
Login to fileserver <file server name> (In the print server mode) Login to the file
(<IPX|IPv4|IPv6>,<NDS|BIND- server is in the NDS or BINDERY mode.
ERY|NDS|BINDERY>)
Memory allocate error. Data cannot be obtained.
Disconnect the USB cable, and then connect it.
92
Message List

Name registration success. WINS Serv- Name registration of <NetBIOS Name> to
er=<WINS server address> NetBIOS <WINS server address> was successful.
Name=<NetBIOS name>
Name registration success in Broadcast Name registration by Broadcast name of <Net-
name=<NetBIOS Name> BIOS Name> was successful.
Name registration failed. name=<NetBIOS Name registration of <NetBIOSName> failed.
name> Change to different NetBIOS name. 2
nbtd start. The nbtd service has started.
nprinter start (Netware) (In the remote printer mode) The NetWare
service has started.
nwstart start. (NetWare) The service for NetWare protocol stack setting
has started.
Open log file <file name> (In the print server mode)The specified log file
has been opened.
phy release file open failed. Replacing the network interface board is required.
Contact your sales or service representative.
Print queue <print queue name> cannot be (In the print server mode) The print queue
serviced by printer 0, <print server name> cannot be established. Make sure that print
queue exists on the specified file server.
Print server <print servername>has no print- (In the print server mode) The printer is not as-
er. signed to the print server. Using NWadmin,
assign the printer, and then restart it.
print session full No more print jobs can be accepted.
Printer <printer name> has no queue (In the print server mode) The print queue is
not assigned to the printer. Using NWadmin,
assign the print queue to the printer, and then
restart it.
pserver start. (NetWare) (In the print server mode) The NetWare serv-
ice has started.
Required file server (<file servername>) not The required file server is not found.
found
received EAP Failure EAP reception failed.
restarted. The lpd service has started.
sap enable, saptype=<SAP type>, sap- The SAP function has started. The SAP packet
name=<SAP name> is issued to advertise the service on the SAP ta-
ble on the NetWare server.
server identity invalid The server ID is disabled. Check the server au-
thentication.
session IPv4 <community name> not defined. The requested community name is not defined.
session IPv6 <community name> not defined. The requested community name is not defined.
session <community name> already defined. The requested community name is not defined.
session_ipx <community name> not defined. The requested community name is not defined.
93

Set context to <NDS contextname> An NDS context name has been set.
smbd start. (NETBIOS) The smbd service has started.
SMTPC: failed to get smtp server ip-address. The SMTP server IP address could not be ob-
tained. This could be because:
• The specified DNS server could not be found.
• No connection to the network has been es-
2 tablished.
• The specified DNS server could not be found.
• An incorrect DNS server is specified.
• The specified SMTP server IP address
could not be found in the DNS server.
SMTPC: failed to connect smtp server. timeout. Connection to the SMTP server failed due to
timeout. This could be because the specified
SMTP server name is incorrect, or no connec-
tion to the network has been established, or the
network configuration is incorrect, so there is
no response from the SMTP server. Check the
SMTP server name, or the network connection
and configuration.
SMTPC: refused connect by smtp server. Connection to the SMTP server is denied. This
could be because server other than the SMTP
server has been specified, or the specified
SMTP server port number is incorrect. Check
the SMTP server name, port number, or the
SMTP server port number.
SMTPC: no smtp server. connection close. Connection to the SMTP server failed due to
no response from SMTP. This could be be-
cause a server other than the SMTP server has
been specified, or the specified SMTP server
port number is incorrect. Check the SMTP
server name, port number, or the SMTP server
port number.
SMTPC: failed to connect smtp server. Connection to the SMTP server failed. This
could be because no connection to the network
has been established,or the network configura-
tion is incorrect, so there is no response from
the SMTP server, or the specified SMTP server
name is incorrect, or the specified SMTP server
IP address could not be found in the DNS serv-
er, or a server other than the SMTP server has
been specified, or the specified SMTP server
port number is incorrect. Check the DNS Serv-
er's IP address and SMTP server's IP address, or
the SMTP server name and SMTP port number,
or the SMTP server's SMTP port number, or the
network connection and configuration.
94
Message List

SMTPC: username or password wasn’t cor- Connection to the SMTP server failed, because
rect. [response code] (information) the specified SMTP user name is incorrect, or
the specified SMTP password is incorrect.
Check the SMTP user name and password.
Snmp over IPv4 is ready Communication over IPv4 with snmp is available.
Snmp over IPv6 is ready. Communication over IPv6 with snmp is available.
Snmp over ipx is ready. Communication over IPX with snmp is available. 2
snmpd start. The snmpd service has started.
started. The direct print service has started.
Started. The bonjour (rendezvous) function is enabled.
terminated. The bonjour (rendezvous) function is disabled.
The print server received error <error number> Login to the file server failed. The print server
during attempt to log in to the network. Access is not registered or a password is specified.
to the network was denied. Verify that the print Register the print server without specifying a
server name and password are correct. password.
trap account is unavailable. v3Trap cannot be sent. This could be because
the Trap destination account is different from
the account specified by the printer.
usbd is disable. Plug and Play function and printing is disabled
because usbd is disabled in the security mode.
Enable usbd in the security mode.
WINS name registration: No response to serv- There was no response from the WINS server.
er<WINS server address> Check the correct WINS server address is en-
tered. Alternatively, check the WINS server is
functioning properly.
WINS wrong scopeID=<Scope ID> An invalid scope ID was used. Use a valid
scope ID.
wpa authentication Failed WPA authentication failed. Check the WPA
configuration.
wpa authentication started WPA authentication has started.
wpa IEEE802.1X started WPA authentication has started.
wpa connecting to authenticator WPA is connecting to authenticator.
wpa link up WPA key exchange has finished, and commu-
nication has been terminated.
wpa probe response doesn’t have IE. WPA probe response does not have IE.
wpa success authenticated WPA authentication was successful.
wpa success key received WPA key reception was successful.
wpa waiting for key Waiting for WPA key.
wpasupd start wpasupd has started.
wpasupd stop wpasupd has ended.
95
Note
96
3. Special Operations under
Windows
Printing Files Directly from Windows
You can print files directly using
Windows commands. For example, Using a Host Name Instead of
you can print PostScript files for Post- an IPv4 Address
Script 3.
When a host name is defined, you can
❖ Windows 95/98/Me
specify a printer by host name instead
You can print files directly using
of IP address. The host names vary
ftp or sftp command. depending on the network environ-
❖ Windows 2000/XP, Windows Server ment.
2003, Windows NT 4.0
You can print files directly using When using DNS
lpr, rcp ftp or sftp command.
Use the host name set to the data file
on the DNS server.
Setup
Follow the procedure below to make When setting the IPv4 address of a
network environment settings. printer using DHCP
A Enable TCP/IP with the control Use the printer name on the configu-
panel, and then set up the print- ration page as the host name.
er’s network environment about Note
TCP/IP including IP addresses.
❒ For details about printing a config-
TCP/IP of the printer is set as de- uration page, see General Settings
fault. Guide.
B Install a TCP/IP in Windows to
set up the network environment.
Consult the network administrator
for the local setting information.
C To print under Windows 2000/XP,

Windows Server 2003, or Win-
dows NT 4.0, install “Printing
service for UNIX” as the network
application. To print under Win-
dows NT 4.0, install “Microsoft
TCP/IP printing” as the network
application.
Reference
p.103 “Using DHCP”
97
Special Operations under Windows
In other cases Windows 2000/XP, Windows Server

2003, Windows NT 4.0
Add the IP address and host name of
the network printer to the hosts file
on the computer used for printing.
A Open the hosts file using memo
pad files, for instance.
Methods of addition vary depending
on operating systems. The hosts file is in the following
folder:
Windows 95/98/Me \WINNT\SYSTEM32\DRIV-
ERS\ETC\HOSTS
3 A Copy \WINDOWS\HOSTS.SAM "\WINNT" is the directory of the
to the same directory and name it installation destination for Win-
“HOSTS” with no extension. dows 2000/XP, Windows Server
2003, and Windows NT 4.0.
B Open the "\WINDOWS\HOSTS"
file created using memo pad files, B Add an IPv4 or IPv6address and
for instance. host name to the hosts file using
the following format:
C Add an IP address and host name 192.168.15.16 host # NP
to the hosts file using the follow-
ing format: "192.168.15.16" is the IPv4 address,
"host" is the printer's host name,
192.168.15.16 host # NP and "#NP" is replaced by com-
"192.168.15.16" is the IP address, ments. Insert a space or tab be-
"host" is the printer's host name, tween "192.168.15.16" and "host",
and "#NP" is replaced by com- between "host" and "#NP" respec-
ments. Insert a space or tab be- tively, using one line for this for-
tween "192.168.15.16" and "host", mat.
between "host" and "#NP" respec- 2001:DB::100 host # NP
tively, using one line for this for-
mat. "2001:DB::100" is the IPv6 address,
"host" is the printer's host name,
D Save the file. and "#NP" is replaced by com-
ments. Insert a space or tab be-
tween "2001:DB::100" and "host",
between "host" and "#NP" respec-
tively, using one line for this for-
mat.
C Save the file.

Note
❒ When using a host name under
Windows Server 2003 with IPv6
protocol, perform host name
resolution using an external
DNS server. The host file cannot
be used.
98
Printing Files Directly from Windows
❒ The “option” specified in a com-

Printing Commands mand is an intrinsic printer option
and its syntax is similar to printing
The following explains printing oper- from UNIX. For details, see UNIX
ations using the “lpr”, “rcp”, and Supplement.
“ftp” commands.
Enter commands using the command lpr
prompt window. The location of the
command prompts varies depending
❖ When specifying a printer by IP ad-
on operating systems:
dress
• Windows 95/98
[Start] - [Programs] - [MS-DOS Prompt] c:> lpr -Sprinter's IP ad- 3
dress [-Poption] [-ol]
• Windows Me \pass name\file name
[Start] - [Programs] - [Accessories] -
[MS-DOS Prompt] ❖ When using a host name instead of an
• Windows 2000 IP address
[Start] - [Programs] - [Accessories] - c:> lpr -Sprinter's host
[Command Prompt] name [-Poption] [-ol]
• Windows XP, Windows Server 2003 \pass name\file name
[Start] - [All Programs] - [Accesso- When printing a binary file, add
ries] - [Command Prompt] the "-ol" option (lowercase O, and
• Windows NT 4.0 lowercase L).
[Start] - [Programs] - [Command When using a printer with the host
Prompt] name "host" to print a PostScript file
named "file 1" located in the
Note "C:\PRINT" directory, the command
❒ Match the data format of the file to line is as follows:
be printed with the emulation c:> lpr -Shost -Pfile-
mode of the printer. type=RPS -ol C:\PRINT\file1
❒ If the message "print requests full"
appears, no print jobs can be ac-
rcp
cepted. Try again when sessions
end. For each command, the First, register the printer's host name
amount of possible sessions is indi- in the hosts file.
cated as follows:
c:> rcp [-b] \pass name\file
• lpr: 5 name [pass name\file
• rcp, rsh: 5 name...] printer's host
• ftp: 3 name:[option]
• sftp: 3 Note
❒ Enter the file name in a format in- ❒ In file names, "*" and "?" can be
cluding the path from the directo- used as wild cards.
ry executing commands. ❒ When printing a binary file, add
the “-b” option.
99
Special Operations under Windows
When using a printer with the host

name "host" to print a PostScript file
C When printing a binary file, set
the file mode to binary.
named "file 1" or "file 2" located in the
"C:\PRINT" directory, the command ftp> bin
line is as follows: When printing a binary file in AS-
c:> rcp -b C:\PRINT\file1 CII mode, print may not come out
C:\PRINT\file2 host:file- correctly.
type=RPS
D Specify files to be printed.
Reference The following shows the examples
p.97 “Using a Host Name Instead of printing a PostScript file named
3 of an IPv4 Address” "file 1" in the "C:\PRINT" directory
and printing file 1 and file 2.
ftp/sftp ftp> put C:\PRINT\file1
filetype=RPS
Use the "put" or "mput" command ac- ftp> mput C:\PRINT\file1
cording to the number of files to be C:\PRINT\file2
printed.
E Quit ftp.
❖ When one file is printed ftp> bye
ftp> put \pass name\file
name [option] Note
❒ “=”, “,”, “_”, and “;”cannot be
❖ When multiple files are printed used for filenames. File names
ftp> mput \pass name\file will be read as option strings.
name [\pass name\file ❒ For “mput” command, option
name...] [option] can not be defined.
Follow the procedure below to print ❒ For “mput” command, “*” and
using the "ftp" command. “?” can be used as wild cards in
file names.
A Formulate the printer's IP address ❒ When printing a binary file in
or the host name of the hosts file
ASCII mode, print may not
printer as an argument and use
come out correctly.
the "ftp" or “sftp” command.
% ftp printer's IP address
B Enter the user name and pass-

word, and then press the {# Enter}
key.
and password, consult your net-
work administrator.
User:
Password:
When user authentication is set,
enter a login user name and pass-
word.
100
4. Appendix
When Using Windows Terminal Service /

MetaFrame
The following explains how to use Note
Windows Terminal Service and
❒ Some RPCS printer driver func-
Maintenance.
tions do not work if Windows Ter-
minal Service is installed.
Operating Environment
The following operating systems and Limitations
MetaFrame versions are supported.
The following limitations apply to the
❖ Windows NT Server 4.0 Terminal Windows Terminal Service environ-
Server Edition ment.
• MetaFrame 1.8 SP3 / FR1+SP3 / These limitations are built in Win-
SP4 dows Terminal Service or Meta-
Frame.
• MetaFrame XP 1.0 SP1 / SP2 / FR1
❖ Windows Terminal Service
❖ Windows 2000 Server / Advanced Server In the Windows Terminal Service
• MetaFrame 1.8 SP3 / FR1+SP3 / environment, some of the printer
SP4 driver’s functions is unavailable.
• MetaFrame XP 1.0 SP1 / SP2 / In an environment where Win-
SP3 / FR1 / FR2 / FR3 dows Terminal Service is installed,
some of the printer driver’s func-
• MetaFrame Presentation Server 3.0 tions is unavailable, even if any
• Citrix Presentation Server 4.0 function of Windows Terminal
Service is not used. When you in-
❖ Windows 2003 Server stall SmartDeviceMonitor for Cli-
• MetaFrame XP 1.0 FR3 ent in an environment where the
• MetaFrame Presentation Server 3.0 Terminal Service is running on a
Windows NT Server 4.0 Terminal
• Citrix Presentation Server 4.0 Server Edition or the Windows
2000 Server family computer, be
sure to install it using the install
Supported Printer Drivers mode. The following are the two
methods of installation using the
❖ When Windows Terminal Service is install mode:
operating
• PCL drivers
• PostScript 3
• RPCS drivers
101
Appendix
A Use [Add/Remove Programs] in • If a print error occurs on the

[Control Panel] to install Smart- server and the print job or a
DeviceMonitor for Client. printer created in [Auto-creating
B Enter the following command client printers] cannot be deleted,
in the MS-DOS command we recommend the following:
prompt: • MetaFrame 1.8 SP3, Meta-
To quit the install mode, enter the Frame XP 1.0 SP1/FR1
following command in the MS- Make settings in [Delete unfin-
DOS command prompt. ished print jobs] in the registry.
For details, see the Readme
❖ MetaFrame's [Auto-creating client print- file provided with Meta-
ers] Frame.
Using [Auto-creating client printers] • MetaFrame XP 1.0 FR2
can select a logical printer created Make settings in [Delete pend-
4 by copying the client's local printer
data to the MetaFrame server. We
ing print jobs at logout] under
[Printer Properties Management]
strongly recommend testing this of Citrix Management Con-
function in your network environ- sole.
ment before using it for your work.
• The settings for optional equip- ❖ MetaFrame's [Printer driver replica-
ment will not be stored in the tion]
server after the equipment is Using [Printer driver replication] can
disconnected. The settings for distribute printer drivers across all
optional equipment will be re- servers in a server farm. We
stored to its defaults each time strongly recommend testing this
the client computer logs on to function in your network environ-
the server. ment before using it for your work.
• When printing a large number • If the printer drivers are not
of bitmap images or using the properly copied, install them di-
server in a WAN environment rectly onto each server.
over dial-up lines such as ISDN,
printing may not be possible or
errors may occur, depending on
data transfer rates.
• When using MetaFrame XP 1.0
or higher versions, we recom-
mend making settings in [Client
Printer bandwidth] under [Citrix
Management Console] according
to the environment.
102
Using DHCP
Using DHCP
You can use the printer in a DHCP en-
vironment. You can also register the Using AutoNet
printer NetBIOS name on a WINS
server when it is running. If the printer IPv4 address is not auto-
matically assigned by the DHCP serv-
Note er, a temporary IP address starting
❒ Printers that register the printer with 169.254 and not used on the net-
NetBIOS name on a WINS server work can be automatically selected by
must be configured for the WINS the printer.
server.
Note
❒ Supported DHCP servers are Mi-
❒ The IP address assigned by the
crosoft DHCP Server included
with Windows 2000 Server, Win- DHCP server is given priority over 4
dows Server 2003, and Windows that selected by AutoNet.
NT 4.0, and the DHCP server in- ❒ You can confirm the current IPv4
cluded with NetWare and UNIX. address on the configuration page.
❒ If you do not use the WINS server, For more information about the
reserve the printer's IP address in configuration page, see General
the DHCP server so the same IP Settings Guide.
address is assigned every time. ❒ When AutoNet is running, the
❒ To use the WINS server, change NetBIOS name is not registered on
the WINS server setting to “active” the WINS server.
using the control panel. ❒ The machine cannot communicate
❒ Using the WINS server, you can with devices that do not have the
configure the host name via the re- AutoNet function. However, this
mote network printer port. machine can communicate with
Macintosh computers running
❒ DHCP relay-agent is not support- Mac OS X 10.2.3. or higher.
ed. If you use DHCP relay-agent
on a network via ISDN, it will re-
sult in increased line charges. This
is because your computer connects
to the ISDN line whenever a packet
is transferred from the printer.
❒ If there is more than one DHCP
server, use the same setting for all
servers. The machine operates us-
ing data from the DHCP server
that responds first.
103
Appendix
Precautions
Please pay attention to the following
when using the network interface Configuring the printer with
board. When configuration is neces- NetWare
sary, follow the appropriate proce-
dures below. A Following the setup method de-
scribed earlier in this manual,
configure the file server.
Connecting a Dial-Up Router
to a Network B Set the frame type for NetWare
environment.
Reference
4 When using NetWare (file server)
For more information about se-
If the NetWare file server and printer lecting a frame type, see the
are on opposite sides of a router, General Settings Guide.
packets are sent back and forth con-
tinuously, possibly incurring com- Configuring the printer without
munications charges. Because packet NetWare
transmission is a feature of NetWare,
you need to change the configuration
of the router. If the network you are
A When not printing, the network
interface board sends packets
using does not allow you to configure
over the network. Set NetWare to
the router, configure the machine in-
“inactive”.
stead.
Reference
❖ Configuring the router
For more information about se-
Filter packets so they do not pass
lecting a protocol, see General
over the dial-up router.
Settings Guide.
Note
❒ The MAC address of the filter-
ing printer is printed on the
printer configuration page. For
more information about print-
ing a configuration page, see
Printer Reference.
❒ For more information about
configuring the printer if the
router cannot be configured, see
the following instructions.
104
Precautions
❖ When connected to a computer that

When Using Network Utility uses dial-up access
If the machine is connected to a net- • Do not install ScanRouter V2
work, observe the following points Professional on a computer
when setting up the machine or which uses dial-up access.
changing settings: • When using ScanRouter V2 Pro-
For more details, see the operating in- fessional, DeskTopBinder
structions and Help for ScanRouter Lite/Professional, Auto Docu-
V2 Professional and DeskTopBinder ment Link, or a TWAIN driver
Lite/Professional. on a computer with dial-up ac-
cess, a dial-up connection may
❖ When a dial-up router is connected in be performed when connecting
a network environment to the delivery server and other
The settings for the delivery server equipment, depending on the
to be connected must be made ap- setup. If the computer is set up 4
propriately for the machine with to connect to the Internet auto-
ScanRouter V2 Professional, Auto matically, the confirmation dia-
Document Link, or DeskTopBind- log box will not appear, and
er Lite/Professional. In addition, telephone charges may be in-
set up connected devices using the curred without your being
I/O settings of ScanRouter V2 Ad- aware of it. To prevent unneces-
ministration Utility. sary connections, the computer
If the network environment chang- should be set up so the confir-
es, make the necessary changes for mation dialog box always ap-
the delivery server using the ma- pears before establishing a
chine, the administration utility of connection. Do not make unnec-
client computers, Auto Document essary connections when using
Link, and DeskTopBinder the above listed software.
Lite/Professional. Also, set the
correct information for the con-
nected devices using the I/O set- NetWare Printing
tings of ScanRouter V2
Administration Utility.
Form feed
Important
❒ If the machine is set up to con- You should not configure form feed
nect to the delivery server via a on NetWare. Form feed is controlled
dial-up router, the router will by the printer driver on Windows. If
dial and go online whenever a NetWare form feed is configured, the
connection to the delivery serv- printer might not work properly. If
er is made. Telephone charges you want to change form feed set-
may be incurred. tings, always configure them using
Windows.
• Under Windows 95/98/Me, clear
the [Form feed] check box on the
[Printer Settings] tab in the printer
properties dialog box.
105
Appendix
• Under Windows 2000/XP and

Windows Server 2003, clear the When the optional IEEE 802.11b
[Form feed] check box on the [Net- interface unit Is Installed
Ware Settings] tab in the printer
properties dialog box. When using the wireless LAN interface
• Under Windows NT 4.0, clear the on the network, note the following:
[Form feed] check box on the [Net-
Ware Settings] tab in the printer ❖ When moving the machine
properties dialog box. Detach the antennas when relocat-
ing the machine locally.
After moving the machine, reat-
Banner page tach the antennas, ensuring that:
You should not configure a banner • The antennas are positioned
page on NetWare. If you want to clear of obstacles.
4 change the banner page setting, al- • There is 40 to 60 mm between
ways configure it using Windows. the antennas, so that they do not
• Under Windows 95/98/Me, clear touch.
the [Enable banner] check box on the • The exposure glass cover and the
[Printer Settings] tab in the printer Auto Document Feeder (ADF)
properties dialog box. do not knock the antennas.
• Under Windows 2000/XP and
Windows Server 2003, clear the ❖ If the network area provides poor ra-
[Enable banner] check box on the dio environment
[NetWare Settings] tab in the printer Where radio wave conditions are
properties dialog box. bad, the network may not function
due to interrupted or failed con-
• Under Windows NT 4.0, clear the
nections. When checking the wire-
[Enable banner] check box on the
less LAN signal and the access
[NetWare Settings] tab in the printer
point, follow the procedure below
properties dialog box.
to improve the situation:
• Position the access point nearer
Printing after resetting the machine to the machine.
After resetting the remote printer, the • Clear the space between access
connection from the print server will point and machine of obstruc-
be cut off for about 30-40 seconds be- tions.
fore re-connecting. Depending on the • Move radio wave generating
NetWare specification, print jobs may applia nc es, such as micro-
be accepted, but they will not be waves, away from the machine
printed during this interval. and access point.
When using the machine as a remote
Note
printer, wait about two minutes after
resetting before attempting to print. ❒ For information about how to
check radio wave status, see the
❒ For more information about access
point radio wave conditions, refer
to the access point manual.
106
Information about Installed Applications
Information about Installed Applications
RSA® BSAFE
• This product includes RSA®

BSAFE cryptographic or security 4
protocol software from RSA Secu-
rity Inc.
• RSA is a registered trademark and
BSAFE is a registered trademark of
RSA Security Inc. in the United
States and/or other countries.
• RSA Security Inc. All rights re-
served.
107
Appendix
Specifications
Interface 100BASE-TX, 10BASE-T, IEEE 802.11b
Frame type EthernetII, IEEE 802.2, IEEE 802.3, SNAP
Printer (LAN-Fax) IPv4
LPR
RSH
RCP
DIPRINT
FTP
IPP
IPX/SPX (NetWare)
4 AppleTalk
SMB
Internet Fax IPv4
SMTP
POP3
IMAP4
Network Scanner IPv4
RSH
FTP
SMTP
POP3
SMB
NCP
Management Function IPv4
RSH
RCP
FTP
SNMP
HTTP
TELNET (mshell)
NBT
DHCP
DNS
LDAP
SNMP v1/v2 MIB-II, PrinterMIB, HostResourceMIB, RicohPrivateMIB
SNMP v3 MIB-II, PrinterMIB, HostResourceMIB, RicohPrivateMIB, SNMP-
FRAMEWORK-MIB, SNMP-TARGET-MIB, SNMP-NOTIFICA-
TION-MIB, SNMP-USER-BASED-SM-MIB, SNMP-VIEW-
BASED-ACM-MIB
108
Specifications
To use IPP and SMB, use the SmartDeviceMonitor for Client port.
To use IPP under Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, use the Standard IPP
port. To use IPP under Windows 98, Windows 2000, Windows NT, use Smart-
DeviceMonitor for Client.
Appletalk can be used when the PostScript 3 module is installed.
109
INDEX
A I
About Menu and Mode, 31 IEEE 802.11b, 69
Access Control, 50 ifconfig, 58
appletalk, 51 info, 59
authfree, 52 information, 64, 81, 82, 83, 90
Auto E-mail Notification, 46 Installing, 35
AutoNet, 103 IPP, 59
Autonet, 52 ipv6, 60
B L
Bluetooth, 54 Locking the Menus on
Bonjour, 53 the machine's Control Panel, 36
lpr, 60
C
M
Changing the Network Interface Board
Configuration, 35 Mail authentication, 47
Changing the Paper Type, 37 Managing User Information, 37
Configuring the Energy Saver Mode, 39 message, 90
MIB, 74
D
N
DHCP, 54, 103
dial-up router, 104 netware, 60
Displaying Web Image Monitor Help, 33 NetWare 5/5.1, 19, 20
DNS, 56 NetWare 6/6.5, 19, 20
dns, 56 Notify by e-mail function, 45
Domain Name, 57
O
G
On-demand E-mail Notification, 48
Getting Printer Information
over the Network, 75 P
Going to the Top Page, 29
passwd, 61
H Password, 61
precautions, 104
Host Name, 58 Printer Status Notification by E-mail, 45
How to Read This Manual, 1 Printing Commands, 99
Printing Files Directly from Windows, 97
prnlog, 61
Pure IP, 20
R
remote printer, setup, 23
route, 61
110
S
set, 63
Setting a Password, 40
Setting Up as a Print Server, 17, 19, 20
Setting Up as a Remote Printer, 21, 23
Setup, 97
show, 64
slp, 64
SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin, 35
smb, 64
SNMP, 74
snmp, 65
sntp, 67
specifications, 108
status, 68
syslog, 68
T
TCP/IP address, 58
telnet, 50, 52, 73
U
Using a Host Name Instead of an IP Address, 97
W
Web Image Monitor, 27
WINS, 73
111
112 GB GB EN USA AE AE B843-7900
Trademarks
Apple, AppleTalk, EtherTalk, Macintosh, Mac OS , and TrueType are trademarks of Apple Computer,
Inc, registered in the United States and other countries.
BonjourTM is a trademark of Apple Computer Inc.
Netscape and Netscape Navigator are registered trademarks of Netscape Communications Corporation.
Novell, NetWare, NDS and NDPS are registered trademarks of Novell, Inc.
PostScript® and Acrobat® are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems, Incorporated.
Citrix® and MetaFrame® are registered trademarks of Citrix Systems, Inc.
UPnP is a trademark of the UPnP Implementers Corporation.

• The product name of Windows® 95 is Microsoft® Windows 95.
• The product name of Windows® Me is Microsoft® Windows Millennium Edition (Windows Me).
• RSA Data Security, Inc. MD5 Message-Digest Algorithm
Copyright© 1991-2, RSA Data Security, Inc. Created 1991. All rights reserved.
License to copy and use this software is granted provided that it is identified as the “RSA Data Se-
curity, Inc. MD5 Message-Digest Algorithm” in all material mentioning or referencing this software
or this function.
License is also granted to make and use derivative works provided that such works are identified
as “derived from the RSA Data Security, Inc. MD5 Message-Digest Algorithm” in all material men-
tioning or referencing the derived work.
RSA Data Security, Inc. makes no representations concerning either the merchantability of this soft-
ware or the suitability of this software for any particular purpose. It is provided “as is” without ex-
press or implied warranty of any kind.
These notices must be retained in any copies of any part of this documentation and/or software.
Copyright © 2006
Network Guide
GB GB
EN USA
AE AE B843-7900
Network Guide
1 Functions Available over a Network

2 Connecting the Network Cable to the Network
3 Setting Up the Machine on a Network
4 Windows Configuration
5 Using the Printer Function
6 Configuring the Network Interface Board Using a Web Browser
7 Appendix
Introduction
Important
ating the machine.
Trademarks

• The product names of WindowsTM Server 2003 are as follows:
Microsoft® WindowsTM Server 2003 Standard Edition
Microsoft® WindowsTM Server 2003 Enterprise Edition
Microsoft® WindowsTM Server 2003 Web Edition
Note:
Important

chine.
explains the control panel, preparation procedures for using the machine, and
how to install the CD-ROMs provided.

Explains User Tools settings. Also refer to this manual for explanations on
how to register user codes.
❖ Copy Reference
❖ Printer/Scanner Reference
Explains system settings, functions and operations for the machine's print-
er/scanner unit. Also refer to this manual for explanations on how to connect
the machine.
❖ Network Guide
Note
❒ Some manuals include descriptions of functions and settings that are not
available on machines with copier function only or with the DDST Unit.
i
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Symbols .....................................................................................................................1
1. Functions Available over a Network

Using the Printer ....................................................................................................3
Network TWAIN Scanner.......................................................................................4
2. Connecting the Network Cable to the Network

Confirming Connection .........................................................................................5
Connecting to the Ethernet Interface .........................................................................6
3. Setting Up the Machine on a Network

User Tools Menu (Interface Settings) ..................................................................7
Printer.........................................................................................................................7
Network TWAIN Scanner ...........................................................................................7
Network Configuration................................................................................................8
Settings You Can Change with User Tools................................................................9
4. Windows Configuration
Configuring TCP/IP ..............................................................................................11
Configuring a Windows 98SE / Me Computer..........................................................11
Configuring a Windows 2000 Computer ..................................................................11
Configuring a Windows XP Computer......................................................................12
Configuring a Windows Server 2003 computer........................................................12
Configuring a Windows NT 4.0 Computer................................................................13

Printing with a Print Server................................................................................. 15
Printing without a Print Server ...........................................................................16
Using RICOH TCP/IP Port .......................................................................................16
Using Standard TCP/IP Port ....................................................................................17
Using LPR Port ........................................................................................................17
Using the IPP Port....................................................................................................17
6. Configuring the Network Interface Board Using a Web Browser

Features ................................................................................................................ 19
Settings You Can Change Using a Web Browser .............................................20
Configuring the Network Interface Board Using...............................................21
ii
7. Appendix
Using DHCP..........................................................................................................23
SNMP.....................................................................................................................24
Error Messages on the Display ..........................................................................25
Messages without Code Numbers ...........................................................................25
Messages with Code Numbers ................................................................................26
Specifications.......................................................................................................27
INDEX......................................................................................................... 28
iii
iv
Symbols

chine.

Indicates supplementary explanations of the machine's functions, and instruc-

[]
Indicates the names of keys that appear on the machine's display panel.
{}
Indicates the names of keys on the machine's control panel.
1
2
1. Functions Available over a
Network
This machine provides printer and scanner functions over a network.
Using the Printer

The network interface board is compatible with Windows NT4.0 / 2000
(TCP/IP, IPP *1 ), Windows XP (TCP/IP, IPP *1 ), Windows Server 2003 (TCP/IP,
IPP *1 ), and Windows 98SE / Me operating systems and protocols. This flexibil-
ity allows you to operate the machine in networks that use different protocols
and operating systems.
*1
IPP (Internet Printing Protocol) is a protocol for printing via the Internet.
ARL001S
Reference
For details about network settings you need to make, see p.7 “Setting Up the
Machine on a Network”.
For details about network printing, see p.15 “Using the Printer Function”.
3
Functions Available over a Network
Network TWAIN Scanner

You can use the scanning function of this machine from a computer connected
via a network. You can scan documents the same way you would if you were
1 using a scanner connected directly to your computer.
ARL002S
Reference
For details about network settings you need to make, see p.7 “Setting Up the
Machine on a Network”.
For details about TWAIN scanning over a network, see "Using the TWAIN
Scanner Function", Printer / Scanner Reference.
4
2. Connecting the Network
Cable to the Network
Confirming Connection
ARL003S
1. 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX port
Port for connecting the network interface
cable.
5
Connecting the Network Cable to the Network
Connecting to the Ethernet C Connect the network interface ca-

ble to the 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX
Interface port.
The network interface board supports

10BASE-T or 100BASE-TX connec-
tions.
2 Important
❒ Make sure the main power is off.
See “Turning On the Power”,
Copy Reference.
A Turn off the main power switch. ARL016S
B Loop the network interface cable D Turn on the main power switch.
and attach the ferrite core.
Check the LEDs on the 10BASE-
The network interface cable loop
T/100BASE-TX port.
should be about 10 cm (4”)( )
from the end of the cable (closest
end to the printer). The ferrite core
at the end of the cable should be a
ring type. AAW022S1
1. Indicator (green)
Remains green when the machine is
properly connected to the network.
2. Indicator (yellow)
Turns yellow when 100 BASE-TX is
operating. Turns off when 10 BASE-T
is operating.
AAW026S1
6
3. Setting Up the Machine on
a Network
User Tools Menu (Interface Settings)
This section describes the network settings you can change with User Tools (In-
terface Settings). Make settings according to the functions you want to use and
the interface to be connected.
Important
❒ These settings should be made by the systems administrator, or after consult-
ing with the systems administrator.
❖ Viewing the Information Displayed in the List

These items must be set to use the function. Be sure to set them before at-
tempting to use the corresponding function.
These items must be set if required.
Reference
For details about settings, see p.9 “Settings You Can Change with User
Tools”.
Printer
Settings
Interface Settings/Network IP Address
See p.9 “Interface Settings”.
Gateway Address
Ethernet Speed
Network TWAIN Scanner

Settings
Interface Settings/Network IP Address
See p.9 “Interface Settings”.
Gateway Address
Ethernet Speed
7
Network Configuration D Change the setting, and then press

the {OK} key.
Changes made with User Tools re- Press the {Escape} key to cancel
main in effect after the main power the setting.
switch or operation switch is turned
off, or the {Clear Modes} key is E Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.
pressed. Note
❒ Operations for Interface Set-
Configuring the network using the tings are different from normal
control panel operations. To exit User Tools,
3 press the {User Tools/Counter}
A Press the {User Tools/Counter} key. key.
❒ If a key operator code has been
B Select [Interface Settings] using the set, the key operator code entry
{U} or {T} key, and then press screen appears. Enter the code,
the {OK} key. and then press the {OK} key.
C Select the setting you want to
For details about the key opera-
tor code, see General Settings
change, and then press the {OK} Guide.
key.
Configuring the network using other utilities

Network settings can be made not only from the control panel, but by Web
browser also. The following table shows the settings you can make using a Web
browser:
Indicates machine settings that can be changed.
- Indicates the setting cannot be changed from that device.
Name on the control panel Web browser
Interface Set- Network IP Address Auto-Obtain (DHCP)
tings
Specify IP Add.
Subnet M
Mac Add. -
Gateway Address
Ethernet Speed -
8
User Tools Menu (Interface Settings)
Settings You Can Change with

User Tools
Interface Settings
❖ IP Address
To use this machine in a network
environment, you must first con-
figure its IP address and subnet
mask. 3
• Auto-Obtain (DHCP)
• Specify
When you select [Specify], enter
[IP Address:] and [Sub-net Mask:]
as “xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx”(“x” indi-
cates a number).
• IP Address: 011.022.033.044
• Sub-net Mask: 000.000.000.000
Default: Auto-Obtain (DHCP)
When you select [Specify], be sure
not to set the same [IP Address:] as
that of another machine on the net-
work.
The physical address (MAC ad-
dress) also appears.
❖ Gateway Address
A gateway is a connection or inter-
change point between two net-
works. Configure the gateway
address for the router or host com-
puter used as a gateway.
• Gateway Address: 000.000.000.000
Default: 000.000.000.000
❖ Ethernet Speed
Set the network access speed.
Select a speed that is suitable for
your network environment. [Auto
Select] should usually be selected.
• Auto Select
• 100Mbps Fixed
• 10Mbps Fixed
Default: Auto Select
9
10
Configuring TCP/IP
This section explains configuring
Windows for TCP/IP and IPP. Configuring a Windows 2000
Computer
Configuring a Windows 98SE / Follow the procedure below to con-
Me Computer figure a Windows 2000 computer to
use TCP/IP.
Follow the procedure below to con-
figure a Windows 98SE / Me comput- A On the [Start] menu, point to [Set-
er to use TCP/IP. tings], and then click [Network and
Dial-up Connections].
A Open [Control Panel], and then
double-click the Network icon. B Double-click [Local Area Connec-
Make sure [TCP/IP] is selected in tion]. On the [General] tab, click
the [The following network compo- [Properties].
nents are installed] box on the [Con-
figuration] tab. C Make sure [Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)]
is selected in the [Components
Select TCP/IP if it is not already
checked are used by this connection]
selected.
box on the [General] tab.
If TCP/IP is not installed, click
[Add] on the [Configuration] tab to
selected.
install it. For details about install-
ing TCP/IP, see Windows 98SE / If TCP/IP is not installed, click [In-
Me Help. stall] on the [General] tab to install
it. For details about installing
B Click [Properties]. TCP/IP, see Windows 2000 Help.
C Configure TCP/IP using the ap- D Click [Properties].

propriate IP address, subnet
mask, and other settings. E Configure TCP/IP using the ap-
Check with the network adminis-
mask, and other settings.
trator that the settings are correct.
11
Windows Configuration
Configuring a Windows XP Configuring a Windows Server

Computer 2003 computer
Follow the procedure below to con- Follow the procedure below to con-
figure a Windows XP computer to use figure a Windows Server 2003 com-
TCP/IP. puter to use TCP/IP.
A On the [Start] menu, click [Control A On the [Start] menu, point to [Con-
Panel], and then click [Network Con- trol Panel], point to [Network Connec-
nections]. tions], and then click [Local Area
Connection].
B Click [Network Connections], and
then double-click [Local Area Con- B On the [General] tab, click [Proper-
nection]. ties].
4
C On the [General] tab, click [Proper- C Make sure [Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)]
ties]. is selected in the [This connection
uses the following items] box on the
D Make sure [Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)] [General] tab.
is selected in the [This connection
uses the following items] box on the
selected.
[General] tab.
If TCP/IP is not installed, click [In-
stall] on the [General] tab to install
selected.
If TCP/IP is not installed, click [In- TCP/IP, see Windows Server 2003
stall] on the [General] tab to install Help.
TCP/IP, see Windows XP Help. D Click [Properties].
E Click [Properties]. E Configure TCP/IP using the ap-
F Configure TCP/IP using the ap- mask, and other settings.
12
Configuring TCP/IP
Configuring a Windows NT 4.0

Computer
Follow the procedure below to con-
figure a Windows NT 4.0 computer to
use TCP/IP.
A Open [Control Panel], and then

double-click the Network icon.
Make sure [TCP/IP Protocol] is se-
lected in the [Network protocols]
box on the [Protocols] tab.
selected. 4
If TCP/IP is not installed, click
[Add] on the [Protocols] tab to in-
stall it. For more information about
installing TCP/IP, see Windows
NT 4.0 Help.
B Click [Properties].
C Configure TCP/IP using the ap-
13
14
Printing with a Print Server

This section explains configuring a
network client computer when using
A Right-click [My Network Places],
and then click [Explore] in the con-
Windows 2000 / XP or Windows
text menu.
Server 2003 as a print server.
When using a Windows 2000 / XP or B On the network tree, double-click
Windows Server 2003 print server, se- the name of the computer used as
lect a shared printer. the print server. The printers con-
This section describes running [Add nected to the network are dis-
Printer Wizard] on each client comput- played.
er, and adding the Windows 2000 /
XP, or Windows Server 2003 print
C Double-click the name of the
printer you want to use, and then
server as the network printer. click [Yes].
These instructions are for Windows The printer icon appears in the
98SE. [Printers] window.
Note
❒ If you are using a Windows XP
print server, client computers
cannot receive notification of
print job completion.
ARL005S
This section assumes the client is al-

ready configured to communicate
with a Windows 2000 / XP, or Win-
dows Server 2003 print server. Do not
begin the following procedure until
the client computer is set up and con-
figured correctly.
15
Printing without a Print Server

You can use this machine as a net-
work printer without connecting to a
C Click the [Other] radio button,
click [RICOH TCP/IP Port], and then
print server.
click [OK].
You can configure the following
Add Ricoh TCP/IP Printer Port
ports:
Wizard will start.
❖ RICOH TCP/IP Port D Click [Next >].
Print via TCP/IP using RICOH
TCP/IP Port. E Enter the IP address, and then
RICOH TCP/IP Port can be used click [Next >].
with Windows 98SE / Me.
Enter [Port Name:] if necessary.
❖ Standard TCP/IP port
Print via TCP/IP using a standard
F Click [Finish].
TCP/IP port.
5 A standard TCP/IP port can be Configuring the port settings
used with Windows 2000 / XP or
Windows Server 2003. Important
❒ Do not change Port Number, Tim-
❖ LPR port eout, or Queue Name.
Print via TCP/IP using an LPR
port. A In the [Printers] window, click the
An LPR port can be used with icon of the printer you want to
Windows 2000 / XP, or Windows use. On the [File] menu, click
Server 2003. [Properties].
❖ IPP port B Click the [Details] tab, and then
Print via ipp or http using an IPP click [Port Settings…].
port. The RICOH TCP/IP Port Configu-
An IPP port can be used with Win- ration dialog box appears.
dows XP, or Windows Server 2003.
• You can select either Raw or
LPR port.
Using RICOH TCP/IP Port • You can change the IP address
of the port.
RICOH TCP/IP Port can be used with If the IP address of the machine
Windows 98SE / Me if the necessary is changed, you must change
printer driver has been installed. the port settings also.
A In the [Printers] window, click the • Both Raw and LPR support SN-
icon of the printer you want to MP.
use. On the [File] menu, click
[Properties].
B Click the [Details] tab, and then

click [Add Port].
16
Printing without a Print Server
Using Standard TCP/IP Port C Click [LPR Port], and then click
[New Port].
This procedure explains changing the
port settings under Windows 2000
D In the [Name or address of server pro-
viding lpd] box, enter the printer's
when a printer driver has been in- IP address.
stalled.
You must install “Print Services for
A In the [Printers] window, click the Unix” before you can use the LPR
icon of the printer you want to port. If the dialog box does not ap-
use. On the [File] menu, click pear, install the necessary print
[Properties]. service, and then try again.
B Click the [Ports] tab, and then

For details about performing in-
stallations, see your operating sys-
click [Add Port]. tem’s Help files.
C Click [Standard TCP/IP], and then E In the [Name of printer or print queue
click [New Port]. on that server] box, enter “lp”, and
D In the [Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port then click [OK]. 5
Wizard] dialog box, click [Next >]. F Click [Close].
E In the [Printer Name or IP Address] G Check the location for the select-
box, enter the printer name or IP ed printer, and then click [Close].
address, and then click [Next >].
F In the [Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Using the IPP Port

Port Wizard] dialog box, click [Fin-
ish]. An IPP port can be used with Win-
G Click [Close]. dows 2000 / XP or Windows Server
2003.
H Check the location of the selected This procedure explains making the
printer, and then click [Close]. port settings under Windows XP.
A In the [Printers and Faxes] window,

Using LPR Port click [Add Printer] on the [File]
menu.
This procedure explains changing the
Add Printer Wizard will start.
port settings under Windows 2000
when a printer driver has been in- B Click [Next >].
stalled.
C Click the [A network printer or a at-
A In the [Printers] window, click the tached to another computer] radio
icon of the printer you want to button, and then click [Next >].
use. On the [File] menu, click
[Properties].
B Click the [Ports] tab, and then

click [Add Port].
17
D Click the [Connect to a printer on the

Internet or on a home or office network:]
radio button, and then enter “ht-
tp://printer's IP address/ipp/port1”
or “ipp://printer's IP address/ipp/
port1” in the [URL:] box.
(Example: IP address is
192.168.15.16)
http://192.168.15.16/ipp/
port1
E Click [Next >].

F Click [Have Disk], and then click
[Browse].
G Select the printer driver.

5 The printer driver paths are as fol-
lows:
• Windows 98SE / Me
CD-ROM drive:\DRIVERS\
DDST\WIN9X_ME\(lan-
guage)\DISK1
• Windows 2000 / XP or Win-
dows Server 2003
CD-ROM drive:\DRIVERS\
DDST\WIN2K_XP\(lan-
guage)\DISK1
H Click [OK] twice.

I Click [Next >], and then [Finish].
18
6. Configuring the Network Interface
Board Using a Web Browser
Features
You can check the status of the machine and change its settings using a Web
browser.
❖ What can I do?

You can remotely check the status of the machine remotely, and if necessary
change its settings over the network using a Web browser.
The following functions are available using a Web browser:
• Displaying machine status/settings
• Resetting network settings
• Making machine settings
❖ Configuring the machine

This requires TCP/IP to be installed. After the machine has been configured
to use TCP/IP, it will be possible to adjust its settings using a Web browser.
❖ Browser
If you are using a proxy server, change the Web browser settings. Consult
your network administrator about the settings.
The machine's information is not updated automatically. Click [Reload] or [Re-
fresh] on the Web browser to update it.
❖ Specifying the address

Enter the machine's IP address in the [Address] box, using the following for-
mat: http://XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX (Replace XXX with the appropriate num-
bers.) Alternatively, you can enter the machine's host name if it is already
registered on the DNS or WINS server.
Reference
For details about configuring the machine to use TCP/IP, see p.7 “Setting Up
the Machine on a Network”.
19
Configuring the Network Interface Board Using a Web Browser
Settings You Can Change Using a Web

Browser
❖ System
• Reset
Reset the machine's settings.
• Factory Defaults
Reset the machine's settings to their default values.
• Unit Status
Display the machine's network settings.
• Network Address
Display the machine's serial number and Ethernet address (MAC address).
• Change Password
Change the password.
❖ Protocols
• Setup TCP/IP
Configure the machine's TCP/IP settings.
6
• Setup IPP
Configure the machine's IPP settings.
❖ Others
Printer Status
Display the machine's printer status.
20
Configuring the Network Interface Board Using
Configuring the Network Interface Board

Using

B Enter the machine's IP address in the
[Address] box, using the following
format: http://XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX
(Replace XXX with the appropriate
numbers.)
The Web browser identifies the
machine by its IP address, and
then displays the status of that ma-
chine.
C In the menu area, select the set-

ting you want to change, and then
configure it as necessary.
Note 6
❒ Enter a password if necessary.
❒ Default password is "sysadm".
21
Configuring the Network Interface Board Using a Web Browser
22
7. Appendix
Using DHCP
If this machine is configured for DHCP, and the DHCP request fails four times,
BOOTP takes over the request. If the BOOTP request fails three times, the De-
fault IP address is used.
23
Appendix
SNMP
The machine is equipped with an SNMP (Simple Network Management Proto-
col) agent that operates under UDP and IPX on the Ethernet interface. The
SNMP manager enables you to get information about the machine.
The default community names are “public” and “private”. You can get MIB in-
formation using these community names.
❖ Supported MIBs
• MIB-II
• PrinterMIB
• HostResourceMIB
24
Error Messages on the Display
Error Messages on the Display

This section explains the most common network-related messages that appear
on the display. If a message not shown here appears, follow its instructions.
Messages without Code Numbers

Message Causes Solutions
hCannot connect to network Network connection could Check the machine's IP ad-
Check IP Address not be established. dress.
hCannot connect to network Network connection could Check the network. If this
Contact key operator not be established. message continues to appear,
contact your key operator.
Ethernet Board Error An Ethernet board error has Turn off the main power
occurred. switch, wait a few seconds,
and then turn it back on. If this
message continues to appear,
contact your sales or service
representative.
hServer communicat. failed Cannot communicate with the Check the server. If this mes-
Contact key operator server. sage continues to appear, con-
tact your key operator.
7
Reference
Before turning the main power off, see “Turning On the Power”, Copy Ref-
erence.
25
Appendix
Messages with Code Numbers

Code
Message Causes Solutions
numbers
Cannot The DHCP server cannot be Check the DHCP server is running 101
connect found. on the network.
with DH-
CPserver
The same The specified IP address overlaps The IP address specified for the 102
IP Ad- another IP address. machine overlaps another IP ad-
dress al- dress in use. Check the address of
ready the device indicated in <MAC ad-
exists dress>.
Check An unauthorized value is speci- Change the IP address, subnet 103
network fied as the IP address or gateway mask, or gateway address to the
settings address. correct value.
The same IP addresses overlap across multi- The IP address of the specified in- 004
IP Ad- ple interfaces. terface overlaps the IP address of
dress ex- IP addresses of simultaneously another interface. Configure the
ists on operating interfaces overlap. IP address so it does not overlap.
several
interfaces
Cannot The subnet masks of simulta- The subnet range of the specified 005
7 set with- neously operating interfaces over-
in the lap.
interface overlaps the subnet
range of another interface.
same sub- Configure the subnet mask so it
net range does not overlap.
❖ Code Numbers
Displays the problem interface.
• 1XX: Ethernet
• 0XX: Independent of interface
26
Specifications
Specifications
Interface 100BASE-TX, 10BASE-T
Protocol • Printer
TCP/IP
LPR
IPP
• Network Scanner
TCP/IP
• Management Function
TCP/IP
SNMP
HTTP
DHCP
SNMP MIB-II, PrinterMIB, HostResourceMIB
27
INDEX
C S
Configuring TCP/IP, 11 SNMP, 24
Configuring the Network Interface Board, 21 specifications, 27
Connecting the Network, 5 Standard TCP/IP Port, 17
D T
DHCP, 23 TCP/IP, 11
TWAIN, 4
E
U
Error Message, 25
Ethernet Speed, 9 User Tools, 9
User Tools Menu (Interface Settings), 7
F
W
Features, 19
Windows Configuration, 11
G
Gateway Address, 9
I
Interface Settings, 7, 9
IP Address, 9
IPP Port, 17
L
LPR Port, 17
M
MIB, 24
P
Print Server, 15
R
RICOH TCP/IP Port, 16
28 EN USA B292-7905
Copyright © 2006
Network Guide
EN USA B292-7905
PostScript 3 Supplement
1 Windows Configuration
2 MacOS Configuration
3 Using PostScript 3
4 Printer Utility for Mac
Introduction
Important
ating the machine.
Notes:
Important

chine.

❖ Copy Reference
i
❖ Network Guide
❖ Other manuals
• UNIX Supplement
Note
dealer.
ii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Symbols .....................................................................................................................1
Using the DeskTopBinder - SmartDeviceMonitor for Client Port......................3
Installing DeskTopBinder - SmartDeviceMonitor for Client ........................................3
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows 95 / 98 / Me - TCP/IP)................4
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows 95 / 98 / Me - IPP) .....................5
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows 2000 - TCP/IP)...........................7
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows 2000 - IPP) ................................8
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows XP, Windows Server 2003 - TCP/IP)...9
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows XP, Windows Server 2003 - IPP) ...11
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows NT 4.0 - TCP/IP)......................12
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows NT 4.0 - IPP)............................13
Changing the Port Settings for DeskTopBinder - SmartDeviceMonitor for Client .... 15
Using the Standard TCP/IP Port .........................................................................17
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows 2000) .......................................17
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows XP, Windows Server 2003) .....18
Using the LPR Port ..............................................................................................20
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows NT 4.0).....................................22
Using as the Windows Network Printer .............................................................24
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows 95 / 98 / Me) ............................24
Using as the NetWare Print Server / Remote Printer........................................28
When using the PostScript 3 Printer Driver..............................................................28
Installing the Printer Driver Using USB .............................................................29
Windows 98 SE / Me - USB .....................................................................................29
Windows 2000 - USB ...............................................................................................31
Windows XP, Windows Server 2003 - USB .............................................................32
Troubleshooting for using USB ................................................................................33
Printing with Parallel Connection.......................................................................34
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows 95 / 98 / Me) ............................34
Installing the PostScript 3 printer driver (Windows 2000) ........................................35
Printing with Bluetooth Connection...................................................................38
Supported Profiles....................................................................................................38
Printing with Bluetooth Connection .......................................................................... 38
If a Message Appears during Installation ..........................................................41
Making Option Settings for the Printer ..............................................................42
iii
Setting Up the Printer Driver...............................................................................43
2. MacOS Configuration
MacOS...................................................................................................................51
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver and PPD File ............................................51
Setting Up PPD Files ...............................................................................................52
Setting Up Options ...................................................................................................53
Installing Adobe Type Manager ...............................................................................53
Installing Screen fonts..............................................................................................54
Changing to EtherTalk .............................................................................................55
Mac OS X ..............................................................................................................56
Installing the PPD Files ............................................................................................56
Setting Up the PPD File ........................................................................................... 57
Setting Up Options ...................................................................................................57
Using USB Interface.................................................................................................58
Using Bonjour (Rendezvous) ...................................................................................58
Changing to EtherTalk .............................................................................................59
Configuring the Printer........................................................................................60
3. Using PostScript 3
Setting Up Options ..............................................................................................61
Printing a Document............................................................................................63
Job Type ..................................................................................................................63
User Code ................................................................................................................64
Paper Selection........................................................................................................64
Paper Size................................................................................................................65
Fit to Paper...............................................................................................................65
Input Slot ..................................................................................................................66
Resolution ................................................................................................................66
Orientation Override.................................................................................................67
Print Mode................................................................................................................67
Duplex Printing......................................................................................................... 68
Collate ......................................................................................................................70
Paper Type...............................................................................................................70
Destination ...............................................................................................................71
Watermark................................................................................................................71
Watermark Text........................................................................................................72
Watermark Font .......................................................................................................72
Watermark Size........................................................................................................72
Watermark Angle .....................................................................................................73
Watermark Style.......................................................................................................73
Dithering...................................................................................................................74
Image Smoothing .....................................................................................................75
iv
4. Printer Utility for Mac
Installing Printer Utility for Mac..........................................................................77
Starting Printer Utility for Mac ............................................................................78
Mac OS .................................................................................................................... 78
Mac OS X.................................................................................................................78
Printer Utility for Mac Functions ........................................................................79
Downloading PS Fonts.............................................................................................80
Displaying Printer's Fonts.........................................................................................81
Deleting Fonts ..........................................................................................................81
Page Setup ..............................................................................................................81
Printing Fonts Catalog..............................................................................................82
Printing Fonts Sample..............................................................................................82
Renaming the Printer ...............................................................................................82
Restarting the Printer ...............................................................................................83
Downloading PostScript Files ..................................................................................83
Selecting the Zone ...................................................................................................84
Displaying the Printer Status....................................................................................85
Launching the Dialogue Console ............................................................................. 85
INDEX......................................................................................................... 86
v
vi
Symbols

chine.


[]
{}
1
2
Using the DeskTopBinder -

SmartDeviceMonitor for Client Port
Installing DeskTopBinder - SmartDeviceMonitor for Client

Important
❒ To install DeskTopBinder - SmartDeviceMonitor for Client under Windows 2000
/ XP Professional, Windows Server 2003, and Windows NT 4.0, you must have
an account that has Manage Printers permission. Log on as an Administrator.
❒ Install DeskTopBinder - SmartDeviceMonitor for Client before installing the
printer driver when using the DeskTopBinder - SmartDeviceMonitor for Cli-
ent port.


D Click [DeskTopBinder - SmartDeviceMonitor for Client].

E Select an interface language, and then click [OK].
F The message to quit all other applications appears. Quit all applications,
G The software license agreement appears in the [License Agreement] dialog

box. After reading through its contents, click [Yes].
H Follow the instructions on the display and click [Next >] to proceed next step.
I After the installation is completed, select one of the options to restart the
computer either now or later, and click [Complete].
Note
tion is complete.
3
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows 95 / 98 / Me -

TCP/IP)
1 A Quit all applications currently running.

The printer driver with the selected language will be installed. The English
printer driver is installed when the following language is selected: Cestina,
Magyar, Polski, Portugues, Suomi.
D Click [PostScript 3 Printer Driver].

E Click [Next >].

F Click [Local Printer], and then click [Next >].
A dialog box for selecting the printer manufacturer and model name appears.
G Select the name of the machine whose driver you want to install, and then
click [Next >].
H In the [Available ports:] box, click [Printer Port], and then click [Next >].
I Change the printer name if you want, and then click [Next >].
Select the [Yes] check box to configure the printer as default.
J Specify whether or not to print a test page, and then click [Finish].
K On the [Start] menu, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
L Click the icon of the printer you want to use. On the [File] menu, click [Prop-
erties].
M On the [Details] tab, click [Add Port…].

N Click [DeskTop Binder-SmartDeviceMonitor] in the [Other] list, and then click
[OK].
O Click [TCP/IP], and then click [Search].

4
Using the DeskTopBinder - SmartDeviceMonitor for Client Port
P Select the printer you want to use, and then click [OK].
a machine not listed here, click [Specify Address], enter the IP address or host
name of the machine, and then click [OK].
You cannot add an IP address partially similar to the one already used. For 1
example, if “192.168.0.2” is in use, “192.168.0.2xx” cannot be used. Similarly,
if “192.168.0.20” is in use, “192.168.0.2” cannot be used.
Q Check that the selected port is highlighted in [Print to the following port], and
then click [OK].
R Restart the computer to complete installation.

Note
❒ A user code can be set after the printer driver installation. For information
about user code, see the printer driver Help.
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows 95 / 98 / Me - IPP)



E Click [Next >].

F Click [Local Printer], and then click [Next >].
G Select the name of the machine whose driver you want to install, and then
click [Next >].
5
K On the [Start] menu, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
1 L Click the icon of the printer you want to use. On the [File] menu, click [Prop-
erties].
M On the [Details] tab, click [Add Port…].

N Click [DeskTop Binder-SmartDeviceMonitor] in the [Other] list, and then click
[OK].
O Click [IPP].
P In the [Printer URL] box, enter “http://(printer's address)/printer” as the print-
er's address.
If the server authentification is issued, to enable SSL ( a protocol for encrypted
communication), enter “https://(printer's address)/printer” (Internet Ex-
plorer 5.01, or a higher version must be installed).
http://192.168.15.16/printer
You can enter "http://printer's address/ipp" as the printer's address.
Q Enter a name for identifying the printer in [IPP Port Name]. Use a name dif-
R Click [Detailed Settings] to configure proxy server, IPP user name, and other
settings. Make these settings, and then click [OK].
S Click [OK].
T Check that the selected port is highlighted in [Print to the following port], and
then click [OK] .
U Restart the computer to complete installation.

Note
6
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows 2000 - TCP/IP)

Important
❒ Installing this printer driver requires Administrators permission. Log on us-
ing an account that has Administrators permission.
1


E Click [Next >].

F Click [Local printer], and then click [Next >].
G Click [Create a new port:].
H Click [DeskTop Binder-SmartDeviceMonitor], and then click [Next >].
I Click [TCP/IP], and then click [Search].
J Select the printer you want to use, and then click [OK].
a machine not listed here, click [Specify Address], and then enter the IP address
or host name of the machine.
K Check that the name of the machine whose driver you want to install is se-
lected, and then click [Next >].
L Change the printer name if you want, and then click [Next >].
M Specify whether or not to share the printer, and then click [Next >].
N Specify whether or not to print a test page, and then click [Next >].
O Click [Finish].
7
Note
1 case, launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory.
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows 2000 - IPP)

Important



E Click [Next >].

F Click [Local printer attached to this computer], and then click [Next >].
I Click [IPP].
J In the [Printer URL] box, enter “http://(printer's address)/printer” as the print-
er's address.
If the server authentification is issued, to enable SSL (a protocol for encrypted
http://192.168.15.16/printer
8
K Enter a name for identifying the printer in [IPP Port Name]. Use a name dif-
ferent from the name of any existing port.
1
L Click [Detailed Settings] to configure proxy server, the IPP user name and oth-
er settings. Specify the necessary settings, and then click [OK].
For information about the settings, see DeskTopBinder - SmartDeviceMoni-
tor for Client Help.
M Click [OK].
N Check that the name of the machine whose driver you want to install is se-
O Change the printer name if you want, and then click [Next >].
P Specify whether or not to print a test page, and then click [Next >].
Q Click [Finish].
Note
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows XP, Windows

Server 2003 - TCP/IP)
Important


9

E Click [Next >].

1 F Click [Local printer attached to this computer.], and then click [Next >].
I Click [TCP/IP], and then click [Search].
J Select the printer you want to use, and then click [OK].
M Specify whether or not to print a test page, and then click [Next >].
N Click [Finish].
Note
case, launch “Setup.exe”on the CD-ROM root directory.
10

Server 2003 - IPP)
Important 1



E Click [Next >].

F Click [Local printer attached to this computer.], and then click [Next >].
I Click [IPP].
J In the [Printer URL] box, enter “http://(printer's address)/printer” as the print-
er's address.
http://192.168.15.16/printer
K Enter a name for identifying the printer in [IPP Port Name]. Use a name dif-
11
L Click [Detailed Settings] to make necessary settings.

1 M Click [OK].
N Check that the name of the printer driver you want to install is selected, and
then click [Next >].
O Change the name of the printer if you want, and then click [Next >].
P Specify whether or not to print a test page, and then click [Next >].
Q Click [Finish].
Note
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows NT 4.0 - TCP/IP)

Important
A Double-click on "SETUP.EXE" in the downloaded folder.

B Select [My Computer], and then click [Next >].

C Click [Add Port...].
D Click [DeskTop Binder-SmartDeviceMonitor], and then click [New Port...].
E Click [TCP/IP], and then click [Search].
A list of printers using [TCP/IP] appears.
F Select the printer you want to use, and then click [OK].
12
G Click [Close] to close the [Printer Port] dialog box.

H Click [Next >].
I Check that the name of the machine whose driver you want to install is se- 1
J Change the printer name if you want, and then click [Next >].
K Specify whether or not to share the printer, and then click [Next >].
L Specify whether or not to print a test page, and then click [Finish].
M Restart the computer to complete installation if necessary.

Note
❒ A user code can be set after the printer driver installation . For information
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows NT 4.0 - IPP)

Important


D Click [DeskTop Binder-SmartDeviceMonitor], and then click [New Port...].
E Click [IPP].
13
F In the [Printer URL] box, enter “http://(printer's address)/printer”as the print-

er's address.
1 plorer 5.01, or a higher version must be installed).
http://192.168.15.16/printer
G Enter a name for identifying the printer in [IPP Port Name]. Use a name dif-
H Click [Detailed Settings] to make necessary settings.

I Click [OK].
J Click [Close] to close the [Printer Port] dialog box.
K Click [Next >].
L Check that the name of the machine whose driver you want to install is se-
M Change the printer name if you want, and then click [Next >].
N Specify whether or not to share the printer, and then click [Next >].
O Specify whether or not to print a test page, and then click [Finish].
P Restart the computer to complete installation if necessary.

Note
14
Changing the Port Settings for DeskTopBinder -

SmartDeviceMonitor for Client
Follow the procedure below to change the DeskTopBinder - SmartDeviceMoni-
tor for Client settings, such as TCP/IP timeout, recovery/parallel printing, and
1
printer groups.
Windows 95 / 98:

C Click the [Details] tab, and then click [Port Settings].

The [Port Settings] dialog box appears.
Windows 2000 / Windows NT 4.0:

C On the [Ports] tab, click [Configure Port]

Windows XP, Windows Server 2003:
A Open the [Printers and Faxes] window from the [Start] menu.
B Click the icon of the machine you want to use. On the [File] menu, click
[Properties]. The printer properties appear.
C Click the [Port] tab, and then click [Configure Port].

• For TCP/IP, timeout setting can be configured.
• User, proxy, and timeout settings can be configured for IPP.
Reference
For information about these settings, see DeskTopBinder - SmartDevice-
Monitor for Client Help.
15
How to enable Recovery/Parallel Printing

If no settings on the [Recovery/Parallel Printing] tab are available, follow the proce-
dure below.
1 A Start DeskTopBinder - SmartDeviceMonitor for Client, and then right-
click the DeskTopBinder - SmartDeviceMonitor for Client icon on the task-
bar.
B Click [Extended Features Settings], and then select the [Set Recovery/Parallel
Printing for each port] check box.
C Click [OK] to close the [Extended Features Settings] dialog box
16
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows 2000) 1

Important
DeskTop Binder-SmartDeviceMonitor port.



E Click [Next >].

H Click [Standard TCP/IP Port], and then click [Next >].
I Click [Next >] in the [Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard] dialog box.
J Enter the printer name or IP address in the [Printer Name or IP Address] box.
if necessary.
When screen for Device selection appears, select "RICOH NetworkPrinter
Driver C Model".
K Click [Next >]

L Click [Finish] in the [Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard] dialog box.
M Check that the name of the machine whose driver you want to install is se-
17
N Change the printer name if you want, and then click [Next >].
O Click [Next >].

1 P Specify whether or not to print a test page, and then click [Next >].
Q Click [Finish].
Note
❒ A user code can be set after the printer driver installation . For information

Server 2003)
Important
DeskTop Binder-SmartDeviceMonitor port.



E Click [Next >].

F Click [Local printer attached to this printer], and then click [Next >].
H Click [Standard TCP/IP Port] in [Create a new port], and then click [Next >].
18
I Click [Next >] in the [Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard] dialog box.
J Enter the printer name or IP address in the [Printer Name or IP Address] box.
if necessary.
When screen for Device selection appears, select "RICOH NetworkPrinter
Driver C Model". 1
K Click [Next >]
L Click [Finish] in the [Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard] dialog box.
M Check that the name of the machine whose driver you want to install is se-
N Change the printer name if you want, and then click [Next >].
O Specify whether or not to print a test page, and then click [Next >].
P Click [Finish].
Note
19
Using the LPR Port
1 Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows 2000)

Important



E Click [Next >].

H Click [LPR Port], and then click [Next >].
I Enter the printer's IP address in the [Name or address of server providing lpd]
box.
J Enter “lp” in the [Name of printer or print queue on that server] box, and then click
[OK].
M Click [Next >].

O Click [Finish].
20
Using the LPR Port
Note
case, launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory. 1
Server 2003)
Important
❒ In an IPv6 environment, you cannot use the LPR Port. Use the DeskTop Bind-
er-SmartDeviceMonitor port.



E Select [My Computer], and then click [Next >].

F Click [Local Printer attached to this computer.], and then click [Next >].
H Click [LPR Port] in [Create a new port], and then click [Next >].
I Enter the printer's IP address in the [Name or address of server providing lpd]
box.
J Enter “lp” in the [Name of printer or print queue on that server box], and then click
[OK].
21
M Click [Next >].

1 O Click [Finish].
Note
case, launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory."
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows NT 4.0)

Important


D Select [LPR Port], and then click [New Port...].
E Enter the printer's IP address in the [Name or address of server providing lpd]
box.
F Enter “lp” in the [Name of printer or print queue on that server:] box, and then
click [OK].
G Click [Close] to close the [Printer Port] dialog box.

H Click [Next >].
I Check that the name of the machine whose driver you want to install is se-
J Change the printer name if you want, and then click [Next >].
K Specify whether or not to share the printer, and then click [Next >].
22
Using the LPR Port
M Restart the computer to complete installation.

Note
1
23
Using as the Windows Network Printer
1 Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows 95 / 98 / Me)

Important
❒ If you print from a print server connected to the printer using the DeskTop
Binder-SmartDeviceMonitor port, the client cannot use Recovery Printing
and Parallel Printing.



E Click [Next >].

F Click [Network printer], and then click [Next >].
G Click [Browse].
H Click the computer name you want to use as a print server in the [Browse for
Printer] window.
I Select the printer you want to use, and then click [OK].
J Check the location of the selected printer is shown, and then click [Next >].
K Change the printer name if you want, and then click [Next >].
M Restart the computer.
Note
24
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows 2000)

Important
1



E Click [Next >].

F Click [Network printer], and then click [Next >].
G Select the location method from the [Locate Your Printer] screen, and then
click [Next >].
H Double-click the computer name you want to use as a print server in the
[Shared printers] window.
I Select the printer you want to use, and then click [Next >].
J The printer driver installation starts.
K Click [Next >].
L Click [Finish].
Note
25

Server 2003)
1 Important
❒ If you print with a Windows XP or Windows Server 2003 print server, Desk-
Top Binder-SmartDeviceMonitor notification functions may not be possible
for the client.



E Click [Next >].

F Click [A network printer, or a printer attached to another computer] and then click
[Next >].
G Select [Browse for a printer], and then click [Next >].

H Double-click the computer name you want to use as a print server in the
I Select the printer you want to use, and then click [Next >].
J The printer driver installation starts.
K Click [Next >].
L Click [Finish].
26
Note
case, launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory. 1
Important
❒ To print from a Windows NT 4.0 print server, install the printer driver before
you connect the print server to the printer.

B Click [Network printer server], and then click [Next >].

C Click [Next >].
D Double-click the computer name you want to use as a print server in the
E Select the printer you want to use, and then click [Next >].
F Check the location of the selected printer is shown, and then click [Next >].
G Change the printer name if you want, and then click [Next >].
H Specify whether or not to print a test page, and then click [Finish].
Note
27
Using as the NetWare Print Server / Remote

Printer
1
When using the PostScript 3 Printer Driver
Important
Follow the procedure below to set up the PostScript 3 printer driver.
A In the [Printers] or [Printers and Faxes] window, open the printer properties.
B Click the [PostScript] tab.
When using Windows 2000 / XP or Windows NT 4.0, click the [Device Set-
tings] tab, and then proceed to step to clear the check box.
C Click [Advanced].
D Clear the [Send CTRL+D before job] and [Send CTRL+D after job] check boxes, and
then click [OK].
E Click [OK] to close the printer properties dialog box.
28

This section explains how to install printer drivers using USB.
Important 1
❒ Make sure that machine is connected to the computer's USB ports using the
USB interface cable.
Before installing, check that only the operating system is running on the compu-
ter and no print jobs are in progress.
The printer drivers can be installed from the CD-ROM provided with this ma-
chine.
Windows 98 SE / Me - USB
Important
❒ Installation via USB is not possible under Windows 95 / 98. Upgrade to Win-
dows 98 SE / Me.
icon of the printer connected to the "USB" port is added to the [Printers] window.
A Turn off the power of the machine.

C Turn on the power of the machine.

The plug and play function starts and the [New Hardware Found], [Device Driver
Wizard], or [Add New Hardware Wizard] dialog box appears, depending on the op-
erating system.
D Click [Next >].

E Click [Search for the best driver for your device. {Recommended}.], and then click
[Next >].
F Select the [Specify a location:] check box, and then click [Browse...].
G Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

H Specify the location where USB Printing Support is located, and then click
[Next >].
If the CD-ROM drive is D, the source files of USB Printing Support are stored
in the following location:
D:\DRIVERS\RPCS\WIN9X_ME
29
I Check the location, and then click [Next >].

USB Printing Support is installed.
J Click [Finish].
1 If the printer driver has already been installed, plug and play is enabled, and
the icon of the printer connected to the "USB001" port is added to the [Printers]
window.
K Click [Next >].

L Click [Search for the best driver for your device. {Recommended}.], and then click
[Next >].
M Select the [Specify a location:], check box, and then click [Browse...].
N Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

O Specify the location where the source files of the printer driver is stored,
• PostScript 3
D:\DRIVERS\PS\WIN9X_ME\(Language)\DISK1
P Check the location, and then click [Next >].

Q Click [Finish].
Installation is complete. If installation is successful, the icon of the printer
connected to the "USB001" port is added to the [Printers] window.
Note
❒ To disable Auto Run, press the {Shift} key when inserting the CD-ROM
the CD-ROM.
❒ The number after "USB" varies depending on the number of printers con-
nected.
❒ It is not necessary to reinstall USB Printing Support when connecting a dif-
ferent machine via USB interface when USB Printing Support is installed.
❒ After installing USB Printing Support, if the printer driver is not installed,
follow the plug-and-play instructions of the printer.
❒ Install the printer driver from the CD-ROM provided with the printer.
30
Windows 2000 - USB

Important
1
printer to install it from the CD-ROM provided.
A Check that the power of the printer is off.


Found New Hardware Wizard starts, and USB Printing Support is installed
automatically.
D Click [Next >] in the [Found New Hardware Wizard] dialog box.
E Select the [Search for a suitable driver for my device (recommended)] check box,
F Select the [Specify location] check box, and then click [Next >].
G Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
H Specify the location where the source files of the printer driver is stored.
• PostScript 3
I Check the printer driver location, and then click [OK].

J Click [Next >].
K Click [Finish].
the icon of the printer connected to the "USB001" port is added to the [Printers]
window.
31
Note
❒ To disable Auto Run, press the left {Shift} key when inserting the CD-ROM
1 the CD-ROM.
nected.
Windows XP, Windows Server 2003 - USB

Important
The printer drivers can be installed from the CD-ROM provided with this ma-
chine.
printer to install it from the CD-ROM provided.
A Turn off the power of the machine.


Found New Hardware Wizard starts, and USB Printing Support is installed
automatically.
D In the Found New Hardware Wizard display, click [Search for a suitable driver
for my device [recommended] ], and then click [Next >].
E To disable Auto Run, press the left {Shift} key when inserting the CD-ROM
the CD-ROM.
F Select the [Include this location in the search] check box under [Search for the best
driver in these location], and then click [Browse] to select the printer driver lo-
cation.
• PostScript 3
G Check the printer driver location, and then click [Next >].
32 H Click [Continue].
I Click [Finish].
If installation is successful, the icon of the printer connected to the "USB001"
port is added to the [Printers] window.
Note 1
❒ If Auto Run starts, click [Cancel], and then [Exit].
nected.
Troubleshooting for using USB

Problems Solutions
The machine is not automatically rec- Turn off the power of the machine, reconnect the USB
ognized. cable, and then turn it on again.
Windows has already configured the Open Windows' Device Manager, and then, under [Uni-
USB settings. versal Serial Bus controllers], remove any conflicting de-
vices. Conflicting devices have a yellow [!] or [?] icon by
them. Take care not to accidentally remove required de-
vices. For details, see Windows Help.
Note
❒ When using Windows 2000 / XP or Windows Server
2003, an erroneous device is displayed under [USB
Controller] in the [Device Manager] dialog box.
33

To use a machine connected using a parallel interface, click [LPT1] when install-
ing the printer driver.
1
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows 95 / 98 / Me)


E Click [Next >].

G Select the name of the machine whose printer driver you want to install,
K Restart the computer to complete installation.
Note
34
Installing the PostScript 3 printer driver (Windows 2000)

Important
1


E Click [Next >].

G Select [LPT1] at the [Printer Port] dialog box, and then click [Next >].
H Select whether or not to share the printer, and then click [Next >].
I Select the name of the machine whose driver you want to install, and then
click [Next >].
J Select whether or not you want to print a test page, and then click [Finish].
K Restart the computer to complete installation if necessary.

Note
35

Server 2003)
1 Important



E Click [Next >].

F Click [Local printer attached to this computer], and then click [Next >].
G Select the port you want to use, and then click [Next >].
H Select the name of the machine whose driver you want to install, and then
click [Next >].
I Click [Close] to close the [Printer Port] dialog box.

J Click [Next >].
K Change the printer name if you want, and then click [Next >].
M Restart the computer to complete installation.

Note
36

Important
1


C Select the port you want to use, and then click [Next >].
D Select the name of the machine whose driver you want to install, and then
click [Next >].
E Change the printer name if you want, and then click [Next >].
F Specify whether or not to share the printer, and then click [Next >].
G Specify whether or not to print a test page, and then click [Finish].
H Restart the computer to complete installation if necessary.

Note
37
1 Supported Profiles
❖ SPP, HCRP
• A maximum of two Bluetooth adaptor or Bluetooth-equipped computers
can be connected at the same time using the Bluetooth interface: one by
SPP, one by HCRP.
• When connecting more than one Bluetooth adaptor or Bluetooth-equipped
computer at the same time, the first device that establishes connection is se-
lected. When selecting the connection between the other devices, cancel
the first established connection.
• Conditions for bidirectional communications
• SPP connection does not support bidirectional communications.
• HCRP connection supports bidirectional communications.
❖ BIP
• For BIP connection, a module including PostScript 3 must be installed in
the machine.
• Only one Bluetooth adaptor or Bluetooth-equipped computer can be con-
nected via BIP.
• Only JPEG images that can be printed using BIP.
• User codes are disabled for BIP.
You cannot print if print functions are restricted.
• Some printers do not support BIP.

To install the printer driver, follow the procedure used to install parallel inter-
face.
Important
❒ To install the printer driver under Windows 2000 / XP Professional or Win-
dows Server 2003, you must have an account that has Manage Printers per-
mission. Log on as an Administrator or Power Users group member.
Note
❒ System requirements vary depending on the Bluetooth standard and specifi-
cations. For details, see the manuals provided with each product.
❒ For information about setting up Bluetooth under other operating systems or
using it with different utilities, see the manuals provided with those operat-
ing systems or utilities.
38

B Check that the printer you want to use appears in 3Com Bluetooth Connec-
tion Manager.
C On the [Tool] menu, click [COM port]. 1

D Check that the message "Bluetooth Serial Client (COMx) " appears under
Client Ports. (X indicates the COM port number used by Bluetooth.)
E Click [Close].
F On the [Start] menu, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
G Click the icon of the printer you want to use.

H On the [File] menu, click [Properties].
I Click the [Ports] tab.
J Under [Port], select the [COMx:] check box. X indicates the COM port
number used by Bluetooth.
K Click [OK].
Close the [Printers] window.
If a dialog box appears while transmitting a print job, reestablish network

connection as follows:
A Select the printer you want to use in the [Printers and Fax] box.
B Click [Connect].
Note
❒ To always use the same printer, select the [Always use for this connection]
check box.
Reference
For details, see the manuals provided with the Bluetooth adaptor or com-
puter equipped with Bluetooth.
39
Configuring Security Mode Settings

1 B On the [Tools] menu, click [Security Mode].
The [Security Mode] dialog box appears.
C Select the security mode in the [Security Mode:] list.

If you click [High], or [Custom], and specify [Link] in the [Custom Settings] dialog
box, enter the Bluetooth password. For information about entering the pass-
word, see p.40 “Printing in the Security Mode”
For all other security modes and custom settings, no password is required.
For information about each mode, see the manuals provided with the utility.
D Click [OK].
Close the [Security Mode] dialog box.
Reference
For details about the security mode, see 3Com Bluetooth Connection Man-
ager Help. For details about the password entry which is required to trans-
mit print jobs, see p.40 “Printing in the Security Mode”.
Printing in the Security Mode
A Send the print job to the printer in use.

Depending on the computer configuration, the [Connect] dialog box may ap-
pear. If it does, use it to establish the network connection.
B The [Authentication] dialog box appears.

C Enter the Bluetooth password, and then click [OK].
As the Bluetooth password, enter the last four digits of the machine's serial
number. You can find the serial number on the label on the back of the ma-
chine. For example, if the serial number is 00A0-001234, the Bluetooth pass-
word is 1234.
D The print job is sent.

Note
❒ The Bluetooth password differs for each machine and cannot be changed.
40
If a Message Appears during Installation
If a Message Appears during Installation

Message number 58 or 34 indicates the printer driver cannot be installed using
Auto Run. Install the printer driver using [Add Printer] or [Install Printer].
1
For Windows 95 / 98 / Me, Windows 2000 and Windows NT 4.0:

B Double-click the Add Printer icon.
C Follow the instructions in Add Printer Wizard.
Note
❒ If the printer driver is on a CD-ROM, the location of the PostScript 3 printer
driver is either D:\DRIVERS\PS\WIN9X_ME\(Language)\DISK1 or
D:\DRIVERS\PS\WIN2K_XP\(Language)\DISK1. If the installer starts,
click [Cancel] to quit.
For Windows XP Professional and Windows Server 2003:

B Click [Add a printer].
C Follow the instructions in Add Printer Wizard.
Note
driver is D:\DRIVERS\PS\WIN2K_XP\(Language)\DISK1. If the install-
er starts, click [Cancel] to quit.
For Windows XP Home Editions:
A On the [Start] menu, click [Control Panel].

B Click [Printers and Other Hardware].
C Click [Printers and Faxes].
D Click [Install Printer].
E Follow the instructions in Add Printer Wizard.
Note
driver is D:\DRIVERS\PS\WIN2K_XP\(Language)\DISK1. If the install-
er starts, click [Cancel] to quit.
41

Make option settings for the machine using the printer driver when bidirectional
communication is disabled.
1 Set up option settings when bidirectional communications are disabled.
Important
❒ Under Windows 2000 / XP and Windows Server 2003, Manage Printers per-
mission is required to change the printer properties in the [Printers] folder.
Log on as an Administrators or Power Users group member.
❒ Under Windows NT 4.0, Full Control permission is required to change the
printer properties in the [Printers] folder. Log on as an Administrators or Pow-
er Users group member.


D Click the [Accessories] tab.
Under Windows 2000 / XP, Windows Server 2003 and Windows NT 4.0, click
the [Device Settings] tab.
E Select options installed from the [Options] area, and then make the neces-
sary settings.
Under Windows 2000 / XP, Windows Server 2003 and Windows NT 4.0, click
the [Installable Options] area.
F Click [Apply], and then click [OK] to close the printer properties dialog box.
Reference
For details about making option settings for the printer, see p.61 “Setting
Up Options”.
42
Windows 95 / 98 / Me - Accessing the Printer Properties 1

There are two methods to open the printer properties dialog box.
Making printer default settings

Important



E Click [OK].
Note
Reference
Making printer settings from an application

for the WordPad application provided with Windows 95/98/Me.

ties].
43

Note
1 ❒ The procedure to open the printer properties dialog box may vary depend-
plication you use.
application only.
Reference
Making printer default settings - the printer properties
Important
❒ To change the printer default settings including option configuration settings, log
on using an account that has Manage Printers permission. Members of the Admin-
istrators and Power Users groups have Manage Printers permission by default.



Note
❒ Do not make a setting for [Form to Tray Assignment].
Reference
44
Making printer default settings - Printing Preferences
Important
the printer properties dialog box are applied to all users. 1


Note
Reference


C On the [Preferences] tab, make the necessary settings, and then click [Print]
to start printing.
Note
application only.
45
Reference
1 Windows XP, Windows Server 2003 - Accessing the Printer

Properties
Important
by default.



Note
Reference
Making printer default settings - Printing Preferences
Important


46 The [Printing Preferences] dialog box appears.

Note
Reference 1


C On the [Preference] tab, make the necessary settings, and then click [Print] to
start printing.
Note
application only.
Reference
47

1
Important



Note
Reference
Making printer default settings - Default
Important


C On the [File] menu, click [Document Defaults...].
48

Note
Reference 1


ties].

Note
plication you use.
application only.
Reference
49
50
2. MacOS Configuration
MacOS
This section explains how to configure a Mac OS to use EtherTalk and USB.
The following explains how to configure Mac OS 9.1. If you are not using Mac
OS 9.1, see the manual of the Mac OS you are using for details
Important
❒ For Mac OS 8.6 and higher. (Mac OS X Classic environment is supported.)
Note
❒ The PostScript 3 printer driver is stored in the following folder on the CD-
ROM.
Mac OS 8 and 9: PS Driver:(language):Disk1
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver and PPD File

It is necessary to install a printer driver and PostScript Printer Description (PPD)
files to print from a Mac OS.
Follow the procedure below to install a printer driver and a PPD file into a Mac
OS using Mac OS 8.6 and higher.
PostScript 3 Printer Driver

B Double-click the CD-ROM drive icon.
C Double-click the [Mac OS 8 and 9] folder.
D Double-click the [PS Driver] folder.
E Double-click the folder of the language you use.
F Open [Disk1], and then double-click the installer icon.
G Follow the instructions on the screen.
51
MacOS Configuration
PPD Files
A Double-click the CD-ROM drive icon.

B Double-click the [Mac OS 8 and 9] folder.
C Double-click the [Printer Descriptions] folder.
2 D Double-click the folder of the language you are using.
E Open the [DISK1] folder.
F Drag the PPD file and the plugin file into [Printer Descriptions] in [Extensions]
under [System Folder].
G Restart the Mac OS.
Setting Up PPD Files

Important
❒ Make sure that the printers are connected to an AppleTalk network before
performing the following procedure.
A On the [Apple] menu, click [Chooser].

B Click the Adobe PS icon.
C In the [Select a PostScript Printer:] list, click the name of the printer you want
to use.
D Click [Create].
E Click the printer you want to use, and then click [Setup].
A PPD file is set up and the Adobe PS icon appears at the left of the printer
name in the list. Follow the procedure on p.53 “Setting Up Options” to make
option settings; otherwise close the [Chooser] dialog box.
52
MacOS
Setting Up Options
A On the [Apple] menu, click [Chooser].
B Click the Adobe PS icon.
C In the [Select a PostScript Printer:] list, click the name of the printer you want
to use, and then click [Setup]. 2
D Click [Configure].
A list of options appears.
E Select the option you want to set up, and then select an appropriate setting
for it.
F Click [OK].
The list of options closes.
G Click [OK].
The [Chooser] dialog box appears.
H Close the [Chooser] dialog box.

Note
❒ If the option you want to select is not displayed, PPD files may not be set
up correctly. To complete the setup, check the name of the PPD file dis-
played in the dialog box.
Installing Adobe Type Manager

Important
❒ Quit all applications currently running before installation. Install ATM after
you restart the computer.
A Start a Mac OS.

C Double-click the CD-ROM drive icon.
D Double-click the [Mac OS 8 and 9] folder.
E Double-click the [ATM] folder.
F Double-click the ATM 4.6.2 installer icon.
53
MacOS Configuration
H When the procedure is complete, restart the computer. ATM will be com-
pletely installed only after restarting.
I On the [Apple] menu, open [Control Panel], and then click [~ATM].
J The ATM control panel opens.
Note
2 ❒ For details about installation, see the operating instructions in the ATM
folder.
Installing Screen fonts

Follow the procedure below to install screen fonts.
The screen fonts described below can be found in the [Fonts] folder on the CD-
ROM.
A Start a Mac OS.

The CD-ROM drive icon appears.
C Double-click the CD-ROM drive icon.

The contents of the CD-ROM appear.
D Double-click the [Mac OS 8 and 9] folder.

E Double-click the [Fonts] folder.
F Double-click the [Screen font] folder.
G Double-click the [TrueType] or [Type1] folder.
Select the font type you want to use.
H Copy the fonts you want to install in [System Folder].

I Click [OK].
The fonts are installed.
J Restart the Mac OS.
54
MacOS
Changing to EtherTalk
Follow the procedure below to configure to a Mac OS to use EtherTalk.
A Open [Control Panel], and then double-click the AppleTalk icon.

B On the [Connect via:] pop-up menu, click [Ethernet].
C If you change zones, select a name on the [Current zone:] pop-up menu. 2
D Close the AppleTalk control panel.
E Restart the computer.
Note
❒ The procedures used to configure Mac OS may vary depending on the Mac
OS version. The following describes how to configure Mac OS 9.1. If you
are using a different version of Mac OS, use the following procedures as a
reference and see the manuals for your Mac OS version.
❒ Confirm the Connection to the Printer with TCP/IP
Reference
For information about installing applications required for EtherTalk, see
the Mac OS manuals.
55
MacOS Configuration
Mac OS X
This section explains how to configure a Mac OS X to use EtherTalk, USB and
TCP/IP.
Follow the procedure below to configure Mac OS X 10.3.8. If you are not using
Mac OS X 10.3.8, see the manual of the Mac OS X you are using for details.
2 Important
❒ For Mac OS X 10.1 or higher.
Note
❒ The PPD files are stored in the following folder on the CD-ROM.
Mac OS X: PPD Installer
Installing the PPD Files

Follow the procedure below to install a PPD file to print from Mac OS X.
Important
❒ You need an administrator name and a password (phrase). For details, con-
sult your network administrator.

B Double-click the CD-ROM drive icon.
C Double-click the [Mac OS X] folder.
D Double-click the [MacOSX PPD Installer] folder.
E Double-click the installer icon.
F Follow the instructions on the screen.
56
Mac OS X
Setting Up the PPD File

A Start Printer Setup Utility.
B Click [Add].
❖ Mac OS X 10.4 or later
Click a printer that has "AppleTalk" indicated in the "Connection" column. 2
If the zone is set, click [More Printers...], and then select the zone from the
second pop-up menu.
❖ Other Mac OS X
Click [AppleTalk] on the first pop-up menu.
If the zone is set, select the zone from the second pop-up menu.
C Select the printer, and then select its manufacturer from the [Printer Model:]
pop-up menu.
Under Mac OS X 10.4 or later, you are using from the [Print Using] popup
menu.
A list of printer types appears.
D Select the PPD file for the model you are using, and then click [Add].
E Quit Printer Setup Utility.
Setting Up Options
A Start System Preferences.
B Click [Print & Fax].
C In the [Printer] list, click the name of the printer you want to use, and then
click [Printer Setup...].
D Select the option you want to set up, and then select an appropriate setting
for it.
E Click [Apply Changes].

Note
❒ If the option you want to select is not displayed, PPD files may not be set
up correctly. To complete the setup, check the name of the PPD file dis-
played in the dialog box.
57
MacOS Configuration
Using USB Interface

Follow the procedure below to set up USB connection.

B Click [Add].
2 ❖ Mac OS X 10.4 or later
Click a printer that has "USB" indicated in the "Connection" column.
❖ Other Mac OS X
Click [USB] on the pop-up menu.
The connected printer appears.
C Select the printer, and then select its manufacturer from the [Printer Model:]
pop-up menu.
Under Mac OS X 10.4 or later, you are using from the [Print Using] pop-up menu.
A list of printer types appears.
D Select the connected printer from the list of printer models, and then click
[Add].
E Quit Printer Setup Utility.

Note
❒ When printing with a USB connection to a Macintosh computer, printer
language does not change automatically. Use the control panel on this
printer to change printer language to [Auto Detect] or [PS] before printing.
❒ USB2.0 can be used only with Mac OS X 10.3.3 or higher.
Using Bonjour (Rendezvous)

Follow the procedure below to print using Bonjour (Rendezvous) under Mac OS
X 10.2.3 or higher. Ethernet, wireless LAN and IEEE 1394 (IP over 1394) connec-
tions can also be used.

B Click [Add].
❖ Mac OS X 10.4 or later
Click a printer that has "Bonjour" indicated in the "Connection" column.
If the zone is set, click [More Printers...], and then select the zone from the
second pop-up menu.
❖ Other Mac OS X
Click [Rendezvous] on the pop-up menu.
If the zone is set, select the zone from the second pop-up menu.
58
Mac OS X
C Select the name of the connected printer from the list of printer models, and
then click [Add].
Under Mac OS X 10.4 or later, Installable Options window appears. Select the
option you want to set up, and then select an appropriate setting for it, and
then [Continue].
D Quit Printer Setup Utility.

Note 2
❒ When printing with a Rendezvous connection to a Macintosh computer,
printer language does not change automatically. Use the control panel on
this printer to change printer language to [Auto Detect] or [PS] before print-
ing.
Changing to EtherTalk
Follow the procedure below to configure a Mac OS X to use EtherTalk.
Important
❒ You need an administrator name and a password (phrase). For details, con-
sult your network administrator
A Open [System Preference], and then click the Network icon.

B Click [Built-in Ethernet] in the [Show:] list box.
C Click the [AppleTalk] tab.
D Select the [Make AppleTalk Active] check box.
E To change AppleTalk zones, select a name from the [AppleTalk Zone:] pop-up
menu.
F When the settings are made, click [Apple Now].

Reference
For information about installing applications required for EtherTalk, see
the Mac OS manuals.
59
MacOS Configuration
Configuring the Printer

Use the control panel to enable AppleTalk. (The default is active.)
60
3. Using PostScript 3
Setting Up Options
To use installed options correctly, first set up the printer driver. If the options are
not recognized, you cannot use them, even though they are physically installed.
The procedure to set up a printer driver varies depending on the operating sys-
tem.
❖ Windows
Important
❒ If your system is Windows 2000, Windows XP Professional, or Windows
Server 2003, changing printer driver settings requires Manage Printers
permission. Members of Administrators and Power Users groups have
Manage Printers permission by default. When you change printer driver
settings, log on with an account that has Manage Printers permission.
❒ If your system is Windows NT 4.0, changing printer driver settings re-
quires Full Control access permission. Members of Administrators, Server
Operators, Print Operators, and Power Users groups have Full Control
permission by default. When you change printer driver settings, log on
with an account that has Full Control permission.
❒ If you are using Adobe Page Maker 6.0, 6.5, or 7.0 with Windows 95 / 98 /
Me / 2000 / XP, Windows Server 2003, or Windows NT 4.0, you have to
set up options in the Adobe PageMaker's print dialog box.
You can set up any of the options using the following tabs:
Windows 95 / 98 / Me [Options] on the [Accessories] tab.
Windows 2000 / XP, Windows Server [Installable Options] on the [Device Settings] tab.
2003
Windows NT 4.0 [Installable Options] on the [Device Settings] tab in the
Properties dialog box.
Mac OS For ethernet, [Chooser] on the Apple Menu. For USB,
[Change Setup] from the [Printing] menu to open the
Desktop printer.
Mac OS X [Printer Setup...] in [Print & Fax] to open the System Pref-
erences.
Note
❒ To set up options, access the printer driver from Windows. You cannot set
up options if you access the printer driver from an application.
61
Using PostScript 3
❖ Mac OS
Important
❒ If you are using Mac OS X, this function cannot be used.
You can set up all options using the [Chooser] dialog box.
Reference
See p.42 “Making Option Settings for the Printer”, p.53 “Setting Up Options”
or p.57 “Setting Up Options” for the installation method appropriate to your
printing environment.
62
Printing a Document
Printing a Document
This documentation describes the specific printer functions and menus that are
added by installing the PPD file. For more information about the functions and
menus of the Windows 95 / 98 / Me PostScript printer driver, see the printer
driver's Help.
Important
❒ On a Macintosh, Mac OS 8.6 or higher (Mac OS X Classic environment is sup-
ported.), or Mac OS X 10.1 or higher is required.
Note 3
❒ If you are using Mac OS X 10.2.x or higher, the Job Type function can be used.
❒ “Mac OS X” in the tables below refers to Mac OS X 10.2.3. Depending on the
version, [Features x] is displayed as [Set x] (x is a number). Make adjustments
according to the version you use.
Job Type
Use this to select the type of print job.
The following table shows the tabs or menus where you can select this function.
Windows 95 / 98 / Me [Job Type:] on the [Setup] tab.
You can select the following items:
❖ Normal Print
Select this for normal printing. The print job starts immediately after the print
command is given.
Note
❒ Under Windows 95 / 98 / Me, if you want to use an User ID, click the [De-
tails...] button.
63
Using PostScript 3
User Code
Use this to set a user code for print logging.
Enter a user code using up to eight digits. A user code identifies a group of users
and allows you to check the number of sheets printed under each code with
SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.
Windows 95 / 98 / Me [User Code] on the [Statistics] tab.
Windows 2000 / XP, Windows Server 2003 [User ID:] on the [Job Log] tab in the Printing Preferences
3 dialog box.
Windows NT 4.0 [User ID:] on the [Job Log] tab in the Document Defaults
dialog box.
Mac OS Select the [Enable User Code] check box, and then enter a
user code in the [User Code] box on [Job Log] in the print
dialog box.
Mac OS X Select the [Enable User Code] check box, and then enter a
user code in the [User Code] box on [Job Log] in the print
dialog box.
Reference
For details about using SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin, see Help.
Paper Selection
Use this to select the media type and input tray.
Important
❒ This function is for Windows 95 / 98 / Me only.
Windows 95 / 98 / Me [Paper Selection:] on the [Paper] tab.
Reference
For details about the Paper Selection. See the printer driver's Help.
64
Printing a Document
Paper Size
Use this to select the size of paper you want to use.
Windows 95 / 98 / Me [Size:] on the [Paper] tab.
Windows 2000 / XP, Windows Server [Paper Size:] on [Paper/Output] on [Document Options] on
2003 [Advanced...] on the [Paper/Quality] tab in the Printing Pref-
erence dialog box.
Windows NT 4.0 [Paper Size:] on the [Page Setup] tab in the Document De-
faults dialog box. 3
Mac OS [Paper:] on the [Page Attributes] tab in the Page Setup dialog box.
Mac OS X [Paper Size:] in the Page Setup dialog box.
Reference
For details about the paper sizes supported by this machine, see General Set-
tings Guide.
Fit to Paper
When the size of the document and paper size differ, set whether or not to print
according to paper size.
Windows 95 / 98 / Me [Fit to Print Size:] on the [Paper] tab.
Windows 2000 / XP, Windows Server [Fit to Paper] on [Printer Features] on [Document Options] on
2003 [Advanced...] on the [Paper/Quality] tab in the Printing Pref-
erences dialog box.
Windows NT 4.0 [Fit to Paper] on [Document Options] on the [Advanced] tab
in the Document Defaults dialog box.
Mac OS [Fit to Paper:] on [Printer Specific Options] in the print dialog box.
Mac OS X [Fit to Paper:] on the [Features x] tab on [Printer Features] in
the print dialog box.
❖ Prompt User
Print is performed with the size of document to be printed unchanged.
❖ Nearest Size and Scale

The printer selects the paper size that is closest to the size specified by the file.
If the paper size is smaller than the selected paper size, the driver reduces the
print size.
If the paper size is larger than the size of document to be printed, print is not
to fit the paper size.
❖ Nearest Size and Crop

The printer selects the paper size that is closest to the size specified by the file,
but the print image is not reduced or enlarged to fit the selected paper size.
65
Using PostScript 3
Input Slot
Use this to select the paper sources.
Windows 95 / 98 / Me [Input Tray:] on the [Paper] tab.
Windows 2000 / XP, Windows Server [Paper Source] on the [Paper/Quality] tab in the Printing
2003 Preferences dialog box.
Windows NT 4.0 [Paper Source] on the [Page Setup] tab in the Document
Defaults dialog box.
3 Mac OS [Paper Source:] on [General] in the print dialog box.
Mac OS X [Paper Feed] in the print dialog box.
Reference
For details about the paper sources, see Printer Reference.
Resolution
Use this to set the resolution types.
Windows 95 / 98 / Me [Resolution] on the [Print Quality] tab.
Reference
For more information about the resolution types, see Printer Reference.
66
Printing a Document
Orientation Override
Use this to set the paper orientation.
Windows 95 / 98 / Me [Orientation Override:] on the [Setup] tab.
Windows 2000 / XP, Windows Server [Orientation Override] on [Printer Features] on [Document Op-
2003 tions] on [Advanced...] on the [Paper/Quality] tab in the
Printing Preferences dialog box.
Windows NT 4.0 [Orientation Override] on [Printer Features] on [Document Op-
tions] on the [Advanced] tab in the Document Defaults di-
alog box.
3
Mac OS [Orientation Override] on [Printer Specific Options] in the
print dialog box.
Mac OS X [Orientation Override] on the [Features x] tab on [Printer Fea-
tures] in the print dialog box.

• Off
• Landscape
• Portrait
Note
❒ Under Windows 95/98/Me, select the [Orientation Override] check box, and
then select [Landscape] or [Portrait] in the [Orientation:] list.
Print Mode
Use this function to reduce the amount of toner used when printing.
Windows 95 / 98 / Me [Toner Saving] on the [Print Quality] tab.
Windows 2000 / XP, Windows Serv- [Print Mode] on [Printer Features] on [Document Options] on
er 2003 [Advanced...] on the [Paper/Quality] tab in the Printing Pref-
erences dialog box.
Windows NT 4.0 [Print Mode] on [Printer Features] on [Document Options] on
the [Advanced] tab in the Document Defaults dialog box.
Mac OS [Print Mode] on [Printer Specific Options] in the print dialog
box.
Mac OS X [Print Mode] on the [Features x] tab on [Printer Features] in
Reference
For details about this function, see Printer Reference.
67
Using PostScript 3
Duplex Printing
Use this function to select duplex printing.
Important
❒ To use this function, the optional duplex unit must be installed on the ma-
chine.
Windows 95 / 98 / Me [Duplex:] on the [Setup] tab.
3 Windows 2000 / XP, Windows Server

2003
[Print on Both Sides] on the [Layout] tab in the Printing
Preferences dialog box.
Windows NT 4.0 [Print on Both Sides (Duplex Printing)] on the [Page Setup] tab
in the Document Defaults dialog box.
Mac OS [Print on Both Sides] on [Layout] in the print dialog box.
Mac OS X • 10.3 or higher
The [Two Sided] check box on [Layout] in the print dia-
log box.
• Other Mac OS X
The [Print on both Sides] check box on [Duplex] in the
print dialog box.
The following items may vary depending on the operating system you are using.
Windows 95 / 98 / Me
❖ Off
Disables Duplex Printing.
❖ Open to Left
Prints output so that you can open it to the left.
❖ Open to Top
Prints output so that you can open it to the top.
68
Printing a Document
Windows 2000 / XP, Windows Server 2003, Mac OS
❖ None
❖ Flip on Short Edge

Prints output so that you can open it to the short edge when bound along the
short edge.
❖ Flip on Long Edge

Prints output so that you can open it to the long edge when bound along the
long edge. 3
Note
❒ If you are using a Mac OS, click to select the button that means “Flip on Long
Edge” or “Flip on Short Edge”.
Windows NT 4.0
❖ None
❖ Short Side
short edge.
❖ Long Side
long edge.
Mac OS X
The following functions are selectable under Mac OS X 10.3 or higher (for Mac
OS X 10.2 or earlier, see p.69 “Windows 2000 / XP, Windows Server 2003, Mac
OS”):
❖ Off
❖ Long-edged binding
long edge.
❖ Short-edged binding
short edge.
69
Using PostScript 3
Collate
Use this function to enable collation. With this feature, the machine can efficient-
ly print collated sets of multiple-page documents.
Important
❒ If you are using Windows 2000, Windows XP, Mac OS or Mac OS X, make
sure that the following check boxes have not been selected.
• Windows 2000
The [Collate] check box on [Copies] on [Printer Features] on [Advanced...] on
3 the [Paper/ Quality] tab in the Printing Preferences dialog box.
• Windows XP
The [Collate] check box on [Copies] on [Paper/Output] on [Advanced...] on the
[Paper/ Quality] tab in the Printing Preferences dialog box.
• Mac OS
The [Collate] check box in the print dialog box.
• Mac OS X
The [Collate] check box on [Copies & Pages] in the printer dialog box.
Windows 95 / 98 / Me [Collate:]on the [Setup] tab.
Windows 2000, Windows XP [Collate:] on [Printer Features] on [Document Options] on [Ad-
vanced...] on the [Paper/Quality] tab in the Printing Prefer-
ences dialog box.
Windows NT 4.0 [Collate:] on [Printer Features] on [Document Options] on the
[Advanced] tab in the Document Defaults dialog box.
Mac OS [Collate:] on [Printer Specific Options] in the print dialog
box.
Mac OS X [Collate:] on the [Features X] tab on [Printer Features] in the
printer dialog box.
Paper Type
Use this to select the paper type.
Windows 95 / 98 / Me [Type:] on the [Paper] tab.
Windows 2000 / XP, Windows Serv- [Media:] on the [Paper/Quality] tab in the Printing Prefer-
er 2003 ence dialog box.
Windows NT 4.0 [Paper/Output] on the [Advanced] tab in the Document De-
faults dialog box.
Mac OS [Paper Type:] on [Printer Specific Options] in the print dialog
box.
Mac OS X [Paper Type] on the [Features x] tab on [Printer Features] in
70
Printing a Document
Reference
For details about the media type supported by this machine, see General Set-
tings Guide.
Destination
Use this to select the destination tray.
The following table shows where you can select this function.
Windows 95 / 98 / Me [Output Tray:] in the [Paper] tab.
Windows 2000 / XP, Windows Serv- [Destination] in [Printer Features] on [Document Options] on 3
er 2003 [Advanced...] on the [Paper/Quality] or [Layout] tab in the
Windows NT 4.0 [Destination] in [Printer Features] on [Document Options] on
Mac OS [Destination] in [Printer Specific Options] in the print dialog
box.
Mac OS X [Destination]on the [Features x] tab in [Printer Features] in
Reference
For details about the destination tray supported by this machine, see General
Settings Guide.
Watermark
Set the Watermark function.
Windows 2000 / XP, Windows Server [Watermark:] on [Printer Features] on [Document Options] on
2003 [Advanced...] on the [Paper/Quality] or [Layout] tab in the
Windows NT 4.0 [Watermark:] on [Printer Features] on [Document Options] on
Note
❒ When using this function under Windows 95 / 98 / Me, Mac OS, or Mac OS
X, see the printer driver Help. The following explains the procedure for Win-
dows 2000 / XP, Windows Server 2003, and Windows NT 4.0.
71
Using PostScript 3
Watermark Text
Select the Watermark Text type.
Windows 2000 / XP, Windows Server [Watermark Text] on [Printer Features] on [Document Options]
2003 on [Advanced...] on the [Paper/Quality] or [Layout] tab in the
Windows NT 4.0 [Watermark Text] on [Printer Features] on [Document Options]
on the [Advanced] tab in the Document Defaults dialog
box.
3 Note
Watermark Font
Select the Watermark Font type.
Windows 2000 / XP, Windows Server [Watermark Font] on [Printer Features] on [Document Options]
Windows NT 4.0 [Watermark Font] on [Printer Features] on [Document Options]
box.
Note
Watermark Size
Select the Watermark Size size.
Windows 2000 / XP, Windows Server [Watermark Size] on [Printer Features] on [Document Options]
Windows NT 4.0 [Watermark Size] on [Printer Features] on [Document Options]
box.
Note
72
Printing a Document
Watermark Angle
Select the Watermark angle.
Important
❒ This item is only for portrait, not for landscape.
Windows 2000 / XP, Windows Server [Watermark Angle] on [Printer Features] on [Document Op-
2003 tions] on [Advanced...] on the [Paper/Quality] or [Layout] tab
in the Printing Preferences dialog box.
Windows NT 4.0 [Watermark Angle] on [Printer Features] on [Document Op-
tions] on the [Advanced] tab in the Document Defaults di- 3
alog box.
Note
Watermark Style
Select the Watermark style.
Windows 2000 / XP, Windows Server [Watermark Style] on [Printer Features] on [Document Op-
2003 tions] on [Advanced...] on the [Paper/Quality] or [Layout] tab
Windows NT 4.0 [Watermark Style] on [Printer Features] on [Document Op-
alog box.
Note
73
Using PostScript 3
Dithering
Use this to set the Image Rendering mode.
Windows 95 / 98 / Me [Dithering:] on the [Print Quality] tab.
Windows 2000 / XP, Windows Server [Dithering:] on [Printer Features] on [Document Options] on
2003 [Advanced...] on the [Paper/Quality] or [Layout] tab in the
Windows NT 4.0 [Dithering:] on [Printer Features] on [Document Options] on
3 the [Advanced] tab in the Document Defaults dialog box.
Mac OS [Dithering:] on [Printer Specific Options] in the print dialog
box.
Mac OS X [Dithering:] on the [Features x] tab on [Printer Features] in
❖ Auto
Use this setting to configure the best dithering method automatically depend-
ing on the appearance of the document to be printed.
❖ Photographic
Performs dithering using an appropriate pattern for photographs.
❖ Text
Performs dithering using an appropriate pattern for text.
❖ User Setting
Use this setting to print images set in half tone in your application.
74
Printing a Document
Image Smoothing
Use this to select the image smoothing type.
Windows 95 / 98 / Me [Image Smoothing:] on the [Print Quality] tab.
Windows 2000 / XP, Windows Serv- [Image Smoothing:] on [Printer Features] on [Document Op-
er 2003 tions] on [Advanced...] on the [Paper/Quality] or [Layout]tab
Windows NT 4.0 [Image Smoothing:] on [Printer Features] on [Document Op-
alog box.
3
Mac OS [Image Smoothing:] on [Printer Specific Options] in the print
dialog box.
Mac OS X [Image Smoothing:] on the [Features x] tab on [Printer Fea-
tures] in the print dialog box.
❖ Off
Disables image smoothing.
❖ On
Performs image smoothing unconditionally.
❖ Auto
Performs image smoothing automatically for images that have a resolution
less than 25% of supported printer resolution.
❖ Less than 90 ppi - Less than 300 ppi

Performs image smoothing only when the image has an image resolution
(pixels per inch) less than the respective value you have selected in the list.
Note
❒ When [Auto] is selected, data processing may take a long time.
❒ When [Image Smoothing:] is used for a mask image, this function may have an
undesired effect on the print result.
75
Using PostScript 3
76
4. Printer Utility for Mac
By using Printer Utility for Mac, you can download fonts, change the name of
the printer and so on.
Installing Printer Utility for Mac

Follow these steps to install Printer Utility for Mac on the machine.
Important
❒ If a Macintosh and printer are connected by USB, you cannot use Printer Util-
ity for Mac.
A Start the Mac OS.

The CD-ROM icon appears.
C Double-click the CD-ROM icon.

The contents of the CD-ROM appear.
D Double-click the [Mac OS] folder.

Under Mac OS X, double-click the [Mac OS X] folder.
E Double-click the [PS Utility] folder on the CD-ROM, and then drag the [Print-
er Utility for Mac] file, and then drop it into the Macintosh hard disk.
F Drag the CD-ROM icon and drop it into [Trash] to eject the CD-ROM.
Printer Utility for Mac is installed.
Note
❒ Printer Utility for Mac is included on the CD-ROM labeled “Printer Driv-
ers and Utilities”.
❒ Printer Utility for Mac requires Mac OS 8.1 or higher. (Mac OS X Classic
environment is supported.)
❒ Printer Utility for Mac cannot use Mac OS X (native mode).
77
Printer Utility for Mac
Starting Printer Utility for Mac

The following instructions describe how to start Printer Utility for Mac.
Mac OS
Important
❒ Before starting Printer Utility for Mac, make sure the printer is selected in
[Chooser] on the Apple menu.
A Double-click the Printer Utility for Mac icon.

The [Printer Utility for Mac] dialog box appears.
4 B Click [OK].
Printer Utility for Mac will take a few seconds to start.
Mac OS X
A Double-click the Printer Utility for Mac icon.
The [Printer Utility for Mac] dialog box appears.
B Click [OK].
C In the [Available Printers:] box, select the printer you want to use.
If you change zones, select a name from [Available Network Zones:].
Click [Choose Printer...] on the Printer Utility for Mac menu if you want to
change the printer.
D Select the printer you want to use.

Printer Utility for Mac will take a few seconds to start.
E Click [Choose].
78
Printer Utility for Mac Functions

Printer Utility for Mac functions are described below.
❖ File menu
• [Download PS Fonts...]
Download fonts (PostScript Type 1) to the printer. See p.80 “Downloading
PS Fonts”.
• [Display Printer's Fonts...]
Display and delete the fonts in printer memory. See p.81 “Displaying
Printer's Fonts”.
• [Initialize Printer's Disk...]
This function cannot be used.
• [Page Setup...]
4
Set up the paper size to print “Printer Font Catalog” and “Printer Font
Sample”. See p.81 “Page Setup”.
• [Print Fonts Catalog...]
Print the names of available fonts. See p.82 “Printing Fonts Catalog”.
• [Print Fonts Sample...]
Print a sample of fonts. See p.82 “Printing Fonts Sample”.
• [Rename Printer...]
Change the printer's name when viewed via Appletalk. See p.82 “Renam-
ing the Printer”.
• [Restart Printer]
Restart the printer. See p.83 “Restarting the Printer”.
❖ Utility menu
• [Download PostScript File...]
Download a PostScript file. See p.83 “Downloading PostScript Files”Post-
Script.
• [Select Zone...]
Change the zone to which the printer belongs to via Appletalk. See p.84
“Selecting the Zone”.
• [Display Printer Status...]
Display the status of the printer. See p.85 “Displaying the Printer Status”.
• [Launch Dialogue Console...]
Create and edit a PostScript file, and then download it to the printer. See
p.85 “Launching the Dialogue Console”.
79
Downloading PS Fonts
You can download the PS fonts to the printer's memory.
Important
❒ The following procedures to download the fonts assume that you are a sys-
tem administrator. If you are not, be sure to consult your system administra-
tor.
❒ If the printer restarts, all the printer settings return to their defaults.
❒ Confirm that a Mac OS and the printer are connected with Appletalk.
❒ During the download, do not turn off the power switch, operate the panel or
open or close the cover.
4 A Select [Download PS Fonts...] on the [File] menu.

B Click [Add to list].
The dialog box to select fonts appears.
C Click to select the desired font files, and then click [Open].
The list of selectable font names appears.
D After adding all the fonts you want to download, click [OK].
Under Mac OS X, click [choose].
The dialog box of selected fonts to download appears.
E Click [Download].
The fonts begin to download, and the download status is shown.
F When the completion message appears, click [OK].

G Click [Cancel].
Note
❒ Some fonts cannot be downloaded.
❒ Before downloading, read the documentation about the fonts you want to
use.
80
Displaying Printer's Fonts

You can display the available fonts currently downloaded to the printer. Fonts
in the printer's memory can be displayed.
A Select [Display Printer's Fonts...] on the [File] menu.

A dialog box appears.
B Select [Printer's memory].

C Click [OK].
Note
❒ The fonts displayed in italics are the default fonts.
4
Deleting Fonts
You can delete fonts from the printer's memory.
Important
❒ You cannot delete the fonts displayed in italic.
A Select [Display Printer's fonts] on the [File] menu.

A dialog box appears.
B Select [Printer's memory].

C Select the fonts you want to delete.
D Click [Delete].
E Confirm the fonts you want to delete and the printer name from which you
want to delete the fonts.
F Click [Continue], and then click [OK].

G Click [OK].
Page Setup
You can set the paper size on which to print “Print Fonts Catalogue” and “Prints
Fonts Sample”.
A Select [Page Setup...] on the [File] menu.

B Choose the paper size.
81
Printing Fonts Catalog

Print the names of fonts available on the printer.
A Select [Print Fonts Catalogue] on the [File] menu.

B Click [Print].
Note
❒ The paper selected under [Page Setup] is used.
Printing Fonts Sample

You can print samples of fonts downloaded to the memory.
4
A Select [Print Fonts Sample...] on the [File] menu.
B Click [Print].
Note
❒ Print by using the paper selected on [Page Setup].
Renaming the Printer

You can change the printer name displayed under Appletalk. If you connect sev-
eral printers on the network, assign different names so you can identify them. If
several printers have the same name, a digit appears next to the printer name in
[Chooser].
Important
❒ You can enter up to 31 digits and letters.
❒ Do not use symbols, for example “*”, “:”, “=”, “@”, “~”.
Mac OS
A On the [File] menu, click [Rename Printer...].

B In the [New Name:] filed enter a new name.
C Click [Rename].
The printer name is changed.
D Click [OK].
E On the Apple menu, click [Chooser].
F Click the [AdobePS] icon.
82
G Select the printer whose name you changed, and then close the [Chooser] di-
alog box.
If there are several Appletalk zones, select the zone the machine belongs to.
Mac OS X
A On the [File] menu, click [Rename Printer...].

B In the [New name:] filed enter a new name.
C Click [Rename].
The printer name is changed.
D Click [OK]. 4
E On the [Printer Utility for Mac] menu, click [Choose Printer...].
F In the [Available Network Zones:] list, select the zone for the Macintosh in use.
G In the [Available Printers:] list, select the printer whose name you changed,
and then click [Choose].
Restarting the Printer

You can restart the printer.
A Select [Restart Printer] on the [File] menu.

B Confirm the message that appears on the screen, and then click [Restart].
The printer restarts.
The fonts that you downloaded in the printer's memory will be deleted.
If the printer restarts, all the printer settings return to their defaults.
Downloading PostScript Files

You can download a Postscript file to the printer.
A Select [Download PostScript File...] on the [Utility] menu.

B Select the file name to download and click the file name, and then click
[Open].
C Type the log file name, and then click [Save...].

The selected file is downloaded.
Errors are recorded in the log file.
83
Selecting the Zone

You can change the zone to which the printer belongs under Appletalk.
Important
❒ Confirm that a Macintosh and printer are connected with Appletalk.
Mac OS
A On the [Utility] menu, click [Select Zone...].

The zone to which the printer belongs and the available zone list appear.
B Select the zone in which you want to locate the printer, and then click
4 [Change].
C Click [Continue].
D Click [OK].
E On the Apple menu, click [Chooser].
F Click the [AdobePS] icon.
G In the [Appletalk zone:] list, select the zone you changed.
H In the [Select a PostScript Printer:] list, select the printer you want to use.
I Close the [Chooser] dialog box.
Mac OS X
A On the [Utility] menu, click [Select Zone...].

The zone to which the printer belongs and the available zone list appear.
B Select the zone which you want to locate the printer in, and then click
[Change].
C Click [Continue].
D Click [OK].
E On the [Printer Utility for Mac] menu, click [Choose Printer...].
F In the [Available Network Zones:] list, select the zone you changed.
84
G In the [Available Printers:] list, select the model of printer in use, and then
click [Choose].
Displaying the Printer Status

You can display and confirm the current status of the printer.
A Select [Display Printer Status...] on the [Utility] menu.

The current status of the printer appears.
B Confirm the current status of the printer.

You can confirm the memory capacity. You can also confirm the zone to
which the printer belongs to.
C Click [OK]. 4
Launching the Dialogue Console

You can create and edit a PostScript file for printing, and then download it to the
printer.
Important
❒ “Launch Dialogue Console” is recommended for users with an understand-
ing of PostScript.
❒ Do not download any file other than PostScript files to the printer.
❒ “Launch Dialogue Console” must be used at your own responsibility.
A Select [Launch Dialogue Console...] on the [Utility] menu.

Open the editing screen. The Dialogue Console menu bar appears.
B Type the PostScript command in the editor screen.

To edit a PostScript file, select [Open] on the [File] menu to open it.
You can search or replace a character string by using the [Search] menu.
C After editing the PostScript file, select [Download Top Window] on [Console]
menu to start printing.
The PostScript file is sent to the printer.
The [Reply from Printer] or the [Printer Says...] box opens, depending on the Post-
Script file you sent.
D Select [Return To Main Menu] on the [Console] menu to close the PostScript file.
85
INDEX
C O
Changing to EtherTalk, 55, 59 Orientation Override, 67
Collate, 70
P
D
Page Setup, 81
Deleting Fonts, 81 Paper Selection, 64
Destination, 71 Paper Size, 65
Displaying Printer's Fonts, 81 Paper Type, 70
Displaying the Printer Status, 85 printer properties, PostScript 3, 43, 44, 46, 48
Dithering, 74 Printer Utility for Mac, 82, 84
document defaults, PostScript 3, 48 Printer Utility for Mac Functions, 79
Downloading PostScript Files, 83 Printing a Document, 63
Downloading PS Fonts, 80 Printing Fonts Catalog, 82
Duplex Printing, 68 Printing Fonts Sample, 82
Printing with Bluetooth Connection, 38
F Printing with Parallel Connection, 34
Print Mode, 67
Fit to Paper, 65
R
H
Renaming the Printer, 82
How to Read This Manual, 1 Resolution, 66
Restarting the Printer, 83
I
Image Smoothing, 75 S
Input Slot, 66
Selecting the Zone, 84
Installing Adobe Type Manager, 53
Setting Up Options, 53, 57, 61
Installing Printer Utility for Mac, 77
Setting Up PPD Files, 52
Installing Screen fonts, 54 Setting Up the PPD File, 57
Installing the PostScript 3
Printer Driver and PPD File, 51 U
Installing the PPD Files, 56
Installing the Printer Driver Using USB, 29 User Code, 64
Using Bonjour, 58
J Using USB Interface, 58
Job Type, 63 W
L Watermark, 71
Watermark Angle, 73
Launching the Dialogue Console, 85
Watermark Font, 72
Watermark Size, 72
M
Watermark Style, 73
Mac OS, 51, 52, 53, 54 Watermark Text, 72
MacOS, 51 Windows 2000, 34, 44
Mac OS X, 56, 57, 58 Windows 95/98/Me, 43
Windows NT 4.0, 48
Windows Server 2003, 46
Windows XP, 46
86 EN USA GB GB AE AE B843-7901
Trademarks
Adobe® and PostScript® are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
Apple, AppleTalk, EtherTalk, Macintosh, Mac OS and TrueType are trademarks of Apple Computer,
Inc, registered in the U.S. and other countries.
BonjourTM is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc.
respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights in those marks.

Copyright © 2006
PostScript 3 Supplement
EN USA
GB GB
AE AE B843-7901
Printer Enhance Option for
DDST Type 2000
1 Installing the PCL Printer Driver

2 Printer Features
3 Troubleshooting
Introduction
Important
ating the machine.
es.
Notes:
Caution:
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Symbols .....................................................................................................................1
1. Installing the PCL Printer Driver

Installing the PCL 6 Printer Driver........................................................................ 3
Setting Up Options ................................................................................................5
2. Printer Features
Adjusting Printer Features....................................................................................7
Printer Features Parameters.................................................................................8
Paper Input.................................................................................................................8
List/Test Print .............................................................................................................8
Maintenance...............................................................................................................9
System .....................................................................................................................10
Host Interface...........................................................................................................11
PCL Menu .............................................................................................................12
3. Troubleshooting
Printing Problems ................................................................................................15
Form Feed.............................................................................................................16
Printing from a Selected Tray...................................................................................16
Appendix...............................................................................................................17
System Requirements..............................................................................................17
INDEX......................................................................................................... 18
i
ii
Symbols

[]
{}
1
2
1. Installing the PCL Printer
Driver
Installing the PCL 6 Printer Driver
This section describes how to install PCL 6 printer driver.
If you want to use the PCL 5e printer driver, you must download it from the sup-
plier's Web site.
TCP/IP requires the following:
• This machine must be connected to the network through the network inter-
face cable.
• This machine must be turned on.
• The TCP/IP protocol must be configured.
• An IP address must be allocated to this machine and to the computer.
Important
❒ If you install the Printer Enhance Option, the DDST printer driver is disabled.
❒ When the DDST printer driver disabled, it cannot be used even if you remove
the Printer Enhance Option.
❒ If your system is Windows 2000/XP, or Windows Server 2003, installing a
printer driver by Auto Run requires Administrators permission. When you
install a printer driver by Auto Run, log on using an account that has Admin-
istrators permission.
❒ When updating the printer driver by installing the latest version, you should
uninstall that of former version if any.
❒ Some applications may require installation of the PCL 5e printer driver. In
this case, you can install PCL 5e without having to install PCL 6.
Auto Run starts the installer automatically when you load the CD-ROM in the
CD-ROM drive.
If you want to cancel Auto Run, hold down the {Shift} key (when your system is
Windows 2000, hold down the left {Shift} key) while inserting the CD-ROM.
Keep the {Shift} key held down until the computer has finished accessing the
CD-ROM.
A Close all applications that are running.

Auto Run will start the installer.
C Select a language to change the interface language, and then click [OK].
D Select [PCL 6 Printer Driver].
3
Installing the PCL Printer Driver

box.
After reading through all of the contents, click [I accept the agreement.] to agree
with the License Agreement, and then click [Next >].
1
F Select the printer driver you want to install when the [Select Program] dialog
box appears.

Note
❒ Auto Run might not automatically work with certain OS settings. In this
case, launch “Setup.exe” located on the CD-ROM root directory
❒ During installation in Windows 2000, the [Digital Signature Not Found] dialog
box may appear. In this case, click [Yes] to continue the installation.
❒ During installation in Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, the [Hardware In-
stallation] dialog box may appear. In this case, click [Continue Anyway] to
continue the installation.
4
Setting Up Options
Setting Up Options
When setting up options, you should access the printer properties dialog box
from Windows.
1
Important
❒ If the machine is equipped with certain options, you should set up the options
with the printer driver.
❒ In Windows 2000/XP, Windows Server 2003, changing the printer settings re-
quires Manage Printers permission. Members of the Administrators and
Power Users groups have Manage Printers permission by default. When you
set up options, log on using an account that has Manage Printers permission.
A Click [Start] on the taskbar, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
The [Printers] window appears. In Windows XP Professional, Windows Serv-
er 2003, access the [Printers and Faxes] window from [Start] on the taskbar.
In Windows XP Home Edition, access the [Printers and Faxes] window. Click
[Start] on the taskbar, click [Control Panel], [Printers and Other Hardware] and then
[Printers and Faxes].
B Click to select the icon of the printer you want to use.

The Printing Preferences dialog box appear.
D Click the [Device Options Settings] tab.

E Select options you have installed from the [Device Options] group.
F Click [OK].
5
Installing the PCL Printer Driver
6
2. Printer Features
This chapter describes user tools in the Printer Features menu. For details on
how to access Printer Features, see “Accessing User Tools”, General Settings
Guide.
Adjusting Printer Features

Use Printer Features to make basic adjustments when using the machine as a
printer.
Although factory default settings are suitable for most print jobs, Printer Fea-
tures allows you to access settings that control basic printer operations. The
Printer Features settings you make are retained even after you turn off the ma-
chine.

B Select [Printer Features] using the {U} or {T} key, and then press the {OK}
key.
C Select the desired item using the {U} or {T} key, press the {OK} key, and
then change its settings.
{OK}: Press to make new settings and go back to previous menus.

{Escape}: Press to return to a previous menu without changing any setting.
D After changing the Printer Features settings, press the {User Tools/Counter}
key.
Note
❒ Changes made to functions remain in effect even after you turn off the ma-
chine.
Reference
For details about copier features and system settings, see Copy Reference
7
Printer Features
Paper Input
This section describes the user tools in the Paper Input menu under Printer Fea-
tures.
2
❖ Bypass Paper Size
The size of the paper set in the bypass tray.
Default:
• Metric version: A4
• Inch version: 81/2” × 11”
❖ Auto Paper Select

Set this to enable Auto Paper Select. The machine automatically detects the
paper size from the print data, and selects a suitable paper feed tray accord-
ingly.
Default: On
❖ Duplex
You can set this to enable duplex printing. The machine detects duplex print-
ing from the print data, and selects a suitable paper feed tray accordingly.
Default: On
Reference
For more information about paper sizes that can be set in the bypass tray, see
List/Test Print
This section describes the user tools in the Test Print menu under Printer Fea-
tures.
If changes are made to the machine's environment or its print-related settings,
or a new program is registered, we recommend you print the list of settings, so
they can be checked.
❖ Multiple Lists
You can print the configuration page and error log.
❖ Config. Page
You can print the machine's current configuration values.
❖ Error Log
You can print error logs listing all errors that occurred during printing.
The most recent 30 errors are stored in the error log. If a new error is added
when there are 30 errors already stored, the oldest error is deleted.
8
❖ Menu List
You can print a Menu List showing the Print Features.
❖ PCL Font Page

You can print the current configuration and installed PCL font list.
❖ Hex Dump
You can print in the Hex Dump mode.
Note
2
❒ The layout of the list produced by the test print is fixed to A4 (letter size). We
recommend you load A4 or letter size paper (plain or recycled) in one of the
paper trays.
❒ The tray that contains A4 (letter) size paper is automatically selected. If A4
(letter) size paper is not loaded in any of the paper trays, Paper Tray Priority
is selected. If the paper size loaded in the Paper Tray Priority is smaller than
A4 (letter) size, the edges may be lost. If the paper size placed in the Paper
Tray Priority is larger than A4 (letter) size, margins may become too large.
Maintenance
This section describes the user tools in the Maintenance menu under Printer Fea-
tures.
❖ Menu Protect
This procedure allows you to protect menu settings from accidental change.
It makes it impossible to change menu settings with normal procedures un-
less you perform the required key operations.
• Level 1
You can protect “Maintenance”, ”System”, and “Host Interface”.
• Level 2
You can protect ”Paper Input”, “Maintenance”, ”System”, and “Host In-
terface”.
• Off
Default: Off
9
Printer Features
System
This section describes the user tools in the System menu under Printer Features.
❖ Print Error Report

Select this to have an error report printed when a printer or memory error oc-
curs.
2 Default: Off
❖ Auto Continue
You can select this to enable Auto Continue. When it is On, printing continues
even if a system error occurs.
Default: Off
❖ Memory Overflow
Select this to have a memory overflow error report printed.
Select “Do not Print” to not print on pages where errors occur. The cancelled
page and subsequent pages are not printed.
If you select “Error Report”, pages where errors occur are printed up to where
the error occurred. Subsequent pages are printed normally, and an Error Re-
port is printed at the end. However, sort instruction is cancelled.
Default: Do not Print
❖ Duplex
You can select to have print on both sides of each page.
Default: Off
❖ Copies
You can specify the number of print sets. This setting is disabled if the
number of pages to print has been specified with the printer driver or another
command.
• 1 to 999 by 1
Default: 1
❖ Edge Smoothing
Set this to enable Edge Smoothing.
Default: On
If Toner Saving is set to On, Edge Smoothing is ignored even if it is set to On.
❖ Toner Saving
Set this to enable Toner Saving.
Default: Off
❖ Sub Paper Size

You can enable the Auto Substitute Paper Size (A4 and LT) feature.
Default: Off
10
❖ Page Size
You can select the default paper size.
Default:
• Metric version: A4
• Inch version: 81/2” × 11”
For more information about paper sizes that can be set for the default paper
size, see General Settings Guide.
❖ Letterhead Setting
2
You can rotate original images when printing.
When printing, original images are always rotated by 180 degrees. Therefore,
output might not be as expected when printing onto letterhead or preprinted
paper requiring orientation. Using this function, you can specify image rota-
tion.
When set to Off, original images are rotated by 180 degrees.
When set to On (Always), the machine does not rotate them.
This function reduces printing speed.
Default: Off
Host Interface
This section describes the user tools in the Host Interface menu under Printer
Features.
❖ I/O Timeout
You can set how many seconds the machine should wait before ending a print
job. If data from another port usually arrives while an earlier job is printing
out, increase the timeout period.
Default: 15 seconds
11
Printer Features
PCL Menu
This section describes the user tools in the PCL Menu under Printer Features.
❖ Orientation
You can set the page orientation.
Default: Portrait
2 ❖ Form Lines
You can set the number of lines per page.
Default:
• Metric version: 64
• Inch version: 60
• 5 to 128 by 1
❖ Font Number
You can set the ID of the default font you want to use.
Default: 0
• 0 to 50 by 1
❖ Point Size
You can set the point size you want to use for the selected font.
This setting is effective only with variable-space fonts.
Default: 12.00
• 4.00 to 999.75 by 0.25
❖ Font Pitch
You can set the number of characters per inch for the selected font.
This setting is effective only with fixed-space fonts.
Default: 10.00
• 0.44 to 99.99 by 0.01
❖ Symbol Set
Specify the set of print characters for the selected font.
The available options are as follows:
Default: Roman-8
❖ Courier Font
You can select a courier font type.
Default: Regular
❖ Ext. A4 Width
You can extend the printing area width (when printing on A4 sheet with
PCL).
Default: Off
When the setting is On, the width will be 81/2 inches.
12
PCL Menu
❖ Append CR to LF
When set to On, a carriage return will follow each line feed: CR=CR, LF=CR-
LF, FF=CR-FF.
Default: Off
❖ Resolution
You can set the print resolution in dots per inch.
Default: 600 dpi
2
13
Printer Features
14
3. Troubleshooting
Printing Problems
This section describes likely causes of and possible solutions for problems that
can occur when printing from a computer.
Problem Cause Solution
Printed images contain blots Settings for thick paper have Select [Bypass Tray] in the [Pa-
or are patchy. not been made when printing per Source:] list on the [Paper]
on thick paper. tab.
Select [Thick] in the [Media
Type:] list on the [Setup] tab.
There is considerable delay Processing time depends on If the Data In indicator is
between the print start in- data volume. High volume blinking, data has been re-
struction and actual printing. data, such as graphics-heavy ceived by the machine. Wait
documents, takes longer to for a while.
process. Making the following setting
on the printer driver may re-
duce the computer's work-
load.
For how to open the printing
preferences dialog box, see
“Setting Up the Printer Driver
and Canceling a Print Job”,
Printer/Scanner Reference.
Select the lower value for the
[Resolution] list on the [Quality]
tab in the printing preferences
dialog box.
If the problem cannot be solved, contact your sales or service representative.
15
Troubleshooting
Form Feed
This section gives instructions for operating the machine when there is no tray
for the selected paper size or type, or when paper loaded in the machine has run
out.
Important
❒ The tray cannot be changed if the following functions is set:
• Duplex Print to a tray that does not support duplex printing
3 Note
❒ If form feed is selected for a tray with the following setting, you can change
the tray by canceling the setting:
• Duplex Print
❒ If Auto Continue is selected, form fed paper is printed after a set interval. See
“Printer Features Menu”, Printer/Scanner Reference.
Printing from a Selected Tray

If the machine does not have a tray for the selected paper size or paper type, or
if the selected paper loaded in the machine has run out, a caution message ap-
pears. If this message appears, do the following procedure.
A When the caution message appears, press [FormFeed].
B Select the tray for form feed using {T} or {U} from those that appear on the
display panel, and then press the {OK} key.
If you want to print after adding paper to the tray, select the tray after loading
the correct paper.
The machine prints using the selected tray.

Note
❒ If a tray with a smaller paper size is selected, the print job may be cut short,
or other problems may occur.
16
Appendix
Appendix
System Requirements
❖ Operating system
Windows 2000
Windows XP
Windows Server 2003
❖ Hard disk space 3

128 MB or more
17
INDEX
A P
adjusting, 7 Paper Input, 8
Append CR to LF (PCL Menu), 12 parameters, 8
PCL Menu (Printer Features), 12
C Point Size (PCL Menu), 12
Printer Features, 7, 8
Courier Font (PCL Menu), 12 Printer Features (PCL Menu), 12
Printing from a Selected Tray, 16
E
Printing Problems, 15
Ext. A4 Width (PCL Menu), 12
R
F
Resolution (PCL Menu), 12
Font Pitch (PCL Menu), 12
Form Feed, 16 S
Form Lines (PCL Menu), 12
Setting Up Options, 5
Symbol Set (PCL Menu), 12
H
System, 10
Host Interface, 11 System Requirements, 17
How to Read This Manual, 1
I
Installing the PCL 6 Printer Driver, 3
L
List/Test Print, 8
M
Maintenance, 9
O
Orientation (PCL Menu), 12
18 GB GB EN USA AE AE B895-7001
Trademarks
PCL® is a registered trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company.

• The product name of Windows® 2000 are as follows:
• The product name of Windows® XP are as follows:
• The product names of Windows Server® 2003 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 Standard Edition
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 Enterprise Edition
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 Web Edition
Copyright © 2006
Printer Enhance Option for DDST Type 2000 Operating Instructions
AE AE B895-7001
EN USA
GB GB
UNIX Supplement
Introduction
Important
ating the machine.
Notes
This manual covers all models, and therefore contains functions and settings that may not be available
for your model.
Functions and supported operating systems may differ from those of your model.
Trademarks
PostScript and Acrobat are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems, Incorporated.
Sun, SunOS and Solaris are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the
United States and other countries.
HP-UX is a registered trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company.
LINUX is a trademark of Linus Torvalds.
RED HAT is a registered trademark of Red Hat, Inc.
PictBridge is a trademark.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Manuals for This Printer........................................................................................1
Symbols .....................................................................................................................3
1. UNIX Configuration
Before Setup...........................................................................................................5
Using the lp / lpr commands.......................................................................................5
Using the rsh / rcp / ftp commands ............................................................................5
Using the Installation Shell Script........................................................................ 6
Assigning the IP Address ...........................................................................................7
Executing the Installation Shell Script ........................................................................8
After Executing the Installation Shell Script .............................................................10
Printing Method....................................................................................................15
Printing with lpr, lp....................................................................................................15
Printing with rsh, rcp, ftp........................................................................................... 16
Printer Status .......................................................................................................18
Viewing the Print Job Status with lpq and lpstat ......................................................18
Viewing the Printer Status with rsh and ftp ..............................................................18
Copying Information to a File ...................................................................................19
Specifying the Device Option .............................................................................20
Configuring the Device Option .................................................................................20
Printer Language...................................................................................................... 22
Text Printing .............................................................................................................23
Input Tray .................................................................................................................23
Paper Size................................................................................................................24
Paper Type...............................................................................................................25
Output Tray ..............................................................................................................26
Copies ......................................................................................................................26
Duplex Printing......................................................................................................... 27
Binding .....................................................................................................................27
Orientation................................................................................................................28
Resolution ................................................................................................................29
Symbol Set...............................................................................................................29
INDEX......................................................................................................... 31
i
ii
Manuals for This Printer
Important

chine.

❖ Copy Reference
1
❖ Network Guide
❖ Other manuals
• UNIX Supplement (This manual)
Note
dealer.
2
Symbols

chine.


[]
{}
3
4
1. UNIX Configuration
This section explains how to set up a network printer and check print status us-
ing UNIX.
Before Setup
Important
❒ To print from a UNIX workstation, use a file that the printer supports.
Setting up varies depending on the printing commands. Make sure to make set-
tings accordingly.
Using the lp / lpr commands

A Use the installation shell script to register the device option, as well as the
printer host name and the IP address.
See p.6 “Using the Installation Shell Script”.
B Start printing.
See p.15 “Printing Method”.
Using the rsh / rcp / ftp commands

A Edit the host file to register the printer host name and the IP address.
B Start printing.
See p.15 “Printing Method”.
Reference
See p.10 “After Executing the Installation Shell Script” for host file editing.
Note
❒ If you cannot edit the host file, use the install shell script to register the host
name.
5
UNIX Configuration
Using the Installation Shell Script

The installation shell script helps with the setup process. The installation shell
script automates some of the tasks in configuring /etc/hosts, /etc/printcap; cre-
1 ating the spool directory for BSD UNIX; and running the lpadmin command for
System V UNIX.
Important
❒ The installation shell script can be used on the following workstations: (it can-
not be used with other types of workstations.)
• SunOS 4.x.x
• Solaris 2.x(Sun OS 5.x), Solaris 7, Solaris 8,
• HP-UX
• Redhat Linux
• UnixWare
• OpenServer
Note
❒ Depending on security settings when installed, rsh / rcp /telnet may not be
usable with Red Hat 7.1 or later. Change the security level to allows use of rsh
/ rcp /telnet. For details about how to change the setting, see the operating
instructions for Red Hat.
❒ When you use NIS (Network Information Service) or DNS, you should con-
figure the server before running the installation shell script.
❒ Installation shell script does not support CUPS. For details about the settings
of CUPS, see the manual that comes with the UNIX workstation , and the
CUPS' manual.
❒ When you use Solaris and HP-UX, you can set UNIX configuration with ad-
mintools that came with Solaris and HP-UX. For details about setting using
the admintools, see the admintool's manual.
Reference
For details about the configuration utility of your operating system, see the
manual that came with the utility.
6
Assigning the IP Address

Important
❒ Configure the machine to use TCP/IP. 1
• Make sure that TCP/IP on the machine is set to active. (Default setting is
active.)
• Assign an IP address to the machine and configure the other settings re-
quired for TCP/IP.
Reference
For details about how to make the above settings, see the manual that comes
with this machine.
Checking the IP address configuration

Follow the procedure below to make sure that the IP address has been config-
ured correctly.
• The following procedure uses the sample IP address: 192.168.15.16.
A Enter the following:

# ping 192.168.15.16
If the address has been configured correctly, the following message appears:
192.168.15.16 is alive
If the address has been configured incorrectly, the following message ap-
pears:
no answer from 192.168.15.16
Note
❒ When you use NIS, the IP address and host name are written to /etc/hosts
on the master server. When you use DNS, the information is written to a
data file on the name server. After writing the host name and IP address to
the file, make sure that the configuration is correct by pinging the host.
# ping host_name
❒ If the host name is registered with an IP address, the server can access the
printer using its host name instead of its IP address.
7
UNIX Configuration
Executing the Installation Shell Script

Having configured the printer IP address, follow the procedure below to execute
the installation shell script and set up the workstation printing environment.
1
Important
❒ Before executing the installation shell script, the IP address, host name and
printer name are required.
❒ The following procedures use the sample IP address: 192.168.15.16; sample
host name: nphost; and sample printer name: np.
❒ Download the installation shell script from our Web site. Keep the installation
shell script as local folders.
A Move to the directory that has kept the installation shell script.
B Run the installation shell script.
# sh ./install
Insert a period and slash before the current directory.
C Enter a number to select the workstation operating system that you are us-
ing.
Network printer install shell
Select your workstation OS type
1.SunOS 4.x.x
2.Solaris 2.x, Solaris 7-9 (SunOS5.x)
3.HP-UX
4.UnixWare
5.Linux
6.OpenServer
7.Quit
Enter <1-7>:
2
If you select “7”, the installation shell script ends.
D Enter the printer's IP address.

Enter Printer host IP address <xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx> [re-
turn=skip]:
192.168.15.16
If the host name of the printer has already been configured, press the {RE-
TURN} ( {ENTER} ) key. Nothing will be added to the /etc/hosts file.
E Enter the printer's host name.

Enter Printer host name : nphost
If no IP address was entered in step D, nothing is added to the /etc/hosts file.
8
F Configure the printer name.

Enter logical printer name [default nphost_prn]
If you want to use the default name, press the {RETURN} ( {ENTER} ) key. En-
ter a new name, if you want to use a different one.
The host name entered in step E followed by “_prn” appears in “default”.
1
G Set the print option.
Enter remote printer name [default lp]:
• Press the {RETURN} ( {ENTER} ) key, and printing with PCL is enabled.
• If you want to set the device option, enter the option parameter.
Enter remote printer name [default lp]:tray=tray1
• If you enter “text”, text printing is enabled.
If you enter “text”, printing with PCL is disabled.
Enter remote printer name [default lp]:text
You can enter up to 14 characters for HP-UX 11.0, 256 for Solaris 8 and Red
Hat Linux 7.0, and 51 for Red Hat Linux 6.2.
After setup with the installation shell script is complete, and if you entered
the IP address in step D, the following message appears:
hosts file is modified
H Perform a test print to make sure that the settings are correct.
# lpr -Pnp file_name
# lp -d np file_name
Note
❒ SunOS, UnixWare, and OpenServer appear on the screen, but they are not
supported. Use Solaris, HP-UX, or Linux.
❒ The IP address will be added to the /etc/hosts file.
❒ The host name will be added to the /etc/hosts file.
❒ When printing with the lp command, use ( _ ) instead of ( = ) and ( ; ) in-
stead of ( , ) for operating systems that cannot use ( = ) and ( , ) such as So-
laris 2.5 or later.
Reference
For details about how to download the installation shell script, contact
your sales or service representative.
For details about lpr and lp, see p.15 “Printing Method”.
For details about the device option, see p.20 “Specifying the Device Op-
tion”.
9
UNIX Configuration
Deleting the printer

To print using the lp or lpr command, the option specified when the installation
shell script is executed is used. Change the option in accordance with the work-
1 station you are using.
❖ BSD UNIX workstation, Linux

Delete the printer entry from /etc/printcap, and then execute the installation
shell script again. Select options during the setup process.
Alternatively, search the printer entry from /etc/printcap, and change its rp
capability to option setting.
❖ Solaris, HP-UX
Delete the printer entry, and then execute the installation shell script again.
Select options during the setup process. To delete the printer entry, follow the
procedure below:
A Stop the scheduler.
# /usr/sbin/lpshut
B Delete the printer.
# /usr/sbin/lpadmin -x printer_name
C Restart the scheduler.
# /usr/lib/lpsched
After Executing the Installation Shell Script

The printing environment is set up automatically when the installation shell
script is executed.
This section describes setup contents when the installation shell script is execut-
ed under Red Hat Linux, Solaris, and HP-UX.
Linux
❖ Adding the IP address and host name to the /etc/hosts file

The following line is added to the /etc/hosts file. The IP address and printer
host name which you previously entered in the installation script will be used:
192.168.15.16 nphost # Network Printer
• 192.168.15.16 is the IP address, nphost is the host name, from # to the end
of the line is the comment.
Note
❒ The /etc/hosts file contains a list of the IP addresses and host names of all
hosts communicating on the network. Each entry is delimited with a space
or a tab, and each line is separated with a return.
❒ If you do not use NIS or DNS, you must manually enter the IP address and host
name of each workstation using the network printer in the /etc/hosts file.
10
❖ Adding an entry to the /etc/printcap file

The following entry is added to the /etc/printcap file, which is the configu-
ration for printing with the lpr command. In order to use the lpr command to
print, you need to edit the /etc/hosts file, add an entry for the network print-
er to the /etc/printcap file and create a spool directory:
##PRINTTOOL3## REMOTE 1
np|Network Printer:|np|Network Printer:|np|Network Print-
er:|np|Network Printer:|np|Network Printer:|np|Network
Printer:|np|Network Printer:|np|Network Printer:|np|Net-
work Printer:|np|Network Printer:|np|Network Print-
er:|np|Network Printer:|np|Network Printer:|np|Network
Printer:|np|Network Printer:|np|Network Printer:\
:rm=nphost:\
:rp=option:\
:sd=/var/spool/lpd/npd:\
:lf=/var/log/npd-errs:\
:sh:\
:mx#0:
Note
❒ The /etc/printcap file is used to register the name and attributes of a print-
er. You must make an entry for the network printer in the /etc/printcap
file of all workstations using the network printer.
❒ You must make an entry for each printer option when using the same
printer.
❒ Each entry is separated with colons into several fields. The syntax is to be-
gin each entry with a colon, followed by the entry, and then end with a co-
lon, a back slash, and then a return.
❒ The first line of the field is the name of the printer. You use this name when
logging on to a network printer from a workstation. You can define several
different names by separating each name with the “|” character.
❒ The second and following lines contain the printer's attributes. Attributes
are represented by two-character names referred to as capabilities. For de-
tails about capabilities, see the following table:
Capability Explanation Value required for the network printer.
rm Host name of the printer. The host name that was registered
with the /etc/hosts file.
rp Optional specification. Select options for printing. For de-
“lp” will be assigned, if the option tails about available options, see p.20
is not used. “Specifying the Device Option”.
sd Path name of the spool directory. Path name of the spool directory
that is to be created.
lf Path name of the log file. Path name of the log file.
For example /var/log/lpd-errs.
11
UNIX Configuration
Capability Explanation Value required for the network printer.

mx Maximum file size which the di- None, or something suitable.
rectory can copy. When set to 0, the
size is unlimited. If nothing is en-
1 tered, the size is set to 1024 k.
❖ Making the spool directory

Create a spool directory under /var/spool/lpd. The name of the spool direc-
tory should be the name of the printer followed by a “d”.
Note
❒ The spool directory is used to control data used for print jobs. For example,
when a print job is created, a temporary copy of the data used is created in
the spool directory. All workstations accessing the network printer need to
have a spool directory for the network printer.
❒ A spool directory should be made for every network printer entry listed in
the /etc/printcap file.
❒ The spool directory should normally be made under /var/spool/lpd and
the name should match that listed under the sd capability in /etc/print-
cap. Change the owner and group of the directory to root and lp. The fol-
lowing examples show how to make a /var/spool/lpd/npd spool
directory:
# cd /var/spool/lpd
# mkdir npd
# chown root npd
# chgrp lp npd
❖ Making the log file

Error messages are logged to a file created in the /var/log directory. The log
file name is the printer name followed by “d-errs”.
Note
❒ The log file is used for logging errors or warning messages by the UNIX
workstation.
❒ The log file should be made for every network printer entry listed in the
/etc/printcap file.
❒ The log file should normally be made under /var/log directory and the
name should match that listed under the lf capability in /etc/printcap.
Change the owner and group of the log file to root and lp. The following
examples show how to make a /var/log/npd-errs file:
# cd /var/log
# touch npd-errs
# chown root npd-errs
# chgrp lp npd-errs
12
Solaris

host name previously entered in the installation script will be used. 1
192.168.15.16 nphost # Network Printer
• 192.168.15.16 is the IP address, nphost is the host name, from # to the end
of the line is the comment.
Note
❒ The /etc/hosts file contains a list of IP addresses and host names of all
❒ If you do not use NIS or DNS, you must manually enter the IP address and
host name of each workstation using the network printer in the /etc/hosts
file.
❖ Registering the printer

The installation shell script registers the printer as a remote printer following
the procedure below:
A If your workstation is Solaris 2.5.1, register the print server and print client
to the print service.
# lpsystem -t bsd -R 0 -y Network Printer nphost
B Register the printer as a remote printer.
# lpadmin -p np -s nphost!option -T dump -I any
• np is the printer name, nphost is the host name. For details about “op-
tion”, see p.20 “Specifying the Device Option”.
“lp” will be assigned, if the option is not used.
When printing with the lp command, use ( _ ) instead of ( = ) and ( ; )
instead of ( , ) for operating systems that cannot use ( = ) and ( , ) such as
Solaris 2.5 or later.
C If your workstation is Solaris 2.5.1, set the print job to active so it can be ac-
cepted by the print queue.
/usr/lib/accept np
D If your workstation is Solaris 2.5.1, set the print job to active to print.
/usr/lib/enable np
13
UNIX Configuration
HP-UX

1 host name previously entered in the installation script will be used:
192.168.15.16 np # Network Printer
• 192.168.15.16 is the IP address, np is the host name, from # to the end of
the line is the comment.
Note
❒ The /etc/hosts file contains a list of IP addresses and host names of all
❒ If you do not use NIS or DNS, you must manually enter the IP address and
host name of each workstation using the network printer in the /etc/hosts
file.
❖ Registering the printer

The installation shell script registers the printer as a remote printer following
the procedure below:
A Stop the scheduler.
/usr/lib/lpshut
B Register the printer.
/usr/lib/lpadmin -Pnp -v/dev/null -mrmodel
-ormnphost -orpoption -ob3
• np is the printer name, nphost is the host name.
For details about “option”, see p.20 “Specifying the Device Option”.
“lp” will be assigned, if the option is not used.
C Set the printer so the print job is listed in the print queue.
/usr/lib/accept np
D Set the printer to perform the print job.
/usr/lib/enable np
E Restart the scheduler.
/usr/lib/lpsched
14
Printing Method
Printing Method
Printing with lpr, lp 1

Execute one of the following commands according to type of workstation used:

% lpr -Pprinter_name file_name [file_name...]
For example:
The printer name is np, file names are file1 and file2
% lpr -Pnp file1 file2
❖ Solaris, HP-UX
% lp -d printer_name file_name [file_name...]
For example:
The printer name is np, file names are file1 and file2
% lp -d np file1 file2
Note
❒ “printer_name” is the name entered when executing the installation shell
script.
❒ You can use wild cards ( * or ? ) for the file name.
❒ The message “print session full” appears when the maximum number of
print requests has been reached (max. 5 sessions —Job Spool setting availa-
ble). You should try to print again when the number of requests is less than
five. You can check the number of print requests using telnet. For details
about using telnet, see the manual that comes with this machine.
❒ The number of print sessions does not change, whether you increase or re-
duce the machine's total memory size.
15
UNIX Configuration
Printing with rsh, rcp, ftp

You can also print using the rsh, rcp and ftp commands.
1 Note
❒ Print using a format the printer supports.
❒ You should try to print again when the number of requests is zero.
❒ The message “print session full” appears when the maximum number of
print requests is reached.
❒ The maximum number of print sessions varies depending on the command.
When using the rsh, rcp command, the maximum number of print sessions is
5; when using the ftp command, the number is 3.
rsh
% rsh host_name print < file_name
For example:
host name is nphost, file name is file1
% rsh nphost print < file1
Note
❒ “host_name” is the name entered when executing the installation shell script.
❒ If you are using HP-UX, use the remsh command instead of rsh.
rcp
❖ To specify and print the file

% rcp file_name [file_name...] host_name:
For example:
host name is nphost, file names are file1 and file2
% rcp file1 file2 nphost:
❖ To print all of the files in a directory

% rcp -r directory_name host_name:
For example:
host name is nphost, directory name is directory
% rcp -r directory1 nphost:
Note
❒ “histamine” is the name entered when executing the installation shell script.
❒ You can use wild cards ( * or ? ) for the file name.
16
Printing Method
ftp
Use the put or mput commands depending on the number of files to be printed.
Important
❒ File names cannot contain “=” or “,”.
1
❒ You can use wild cards ( * or ? ) for the file name with the mput command.
❖ To print one file

ftp> put file_name
❖ To print several files

ftp> mput file_name [file_name...]
The following procedure shows an example of how to print a file using ftp.
It is not possible to set options with the mput command:
A Start ftp using the IP address or host name of the printer.

% ftp IP_address
B Enter the user name. Skip the password, and then press the {RETURN} ( {EN-
TER} ) key.
Name:
Password:
C Set the file transfer mode to binary.

ftp> bin
If the file transfer mode is not set to binary, the image may not be printed cor-
rectly.
D Print the file.

For example, to print the file named file1:
ftp> put file1
For example, to print the two files named file1 and file2:
ftp> mput file1 file2
E Exit ftp.
ftp> bye
17
UNIX Configuration
Printer Status
You can use the following commands to have information and printer status dis-
played or copied to a file.
1 Use the lpq or lpstat command to display the status of the printer or information
about print jobs.
Use the rsh, rcp or ftp commands to get more detailed information from the
printer.
Viewing the Print Job Status with lpq and lpstat

% lpq -Pprinter_name
For example: Printer name is np
% lpq -Pnp
❖ System V UNIX, Solaris, HP-UX

% lpstat -o printer_name
For example: Printer name is np
% lpstat -o np
Note
❒ If you are using HP-UX, do not put a space between “-o” and “printer
name”.
Viewing the Printer Status with rsh and ftp

Use the rsh or ftp command to display printer status or information about print
jobs using specified parameters.
You can use these commands for BSD and System V UNIX.
If your workstation is HP-UX, use the remsh command instead of rsh.
• rsh
% rsh host_name parameter
• ftp
% ftp host_name
User user_name
password:
ftp> get parameter -
18
Printer Status
Parameters that can be used with rsh, rcp and ftp :

Parameter Information returned
Status of the printer.
stat
Information about print jobs.
info Information about the paper tray, output tray and printer language.
1
prnlog Record of the last 10 jobs printed.
syslog Record of messages about the network interface board.
Note
❒ Leave the user name and password blank, and then press the {RETURN} ( {EN-
TER} ) key.
❒ “-” indicates standard output. Display will be displayed on screen if standard
output has not been specified.
Copying Information to a File

Use the rcp or ftp command to copy information about specified parameters to
a file.
You can use these commands for BSD and System V UNIX.
Important
❒ The same parameters are used as those above.
• rcp
% rcp host_name:parameter file_name
• ftp
% ftp host_name
User: user_name
password:
ftp> get parameter file_name
Note
❒ Leave the user name and password blank, and then press the {RETURN} ( {EN-
TER} ) key.
19
UNIX Configuration
Specifying the Device Option

With the following options, you can print with specific printer functions.
1 This manual covers all models, and therefore contains functions and settings
that may not be available for your model.
Configuring the Device Option

Important
❒ The optional character strings the printer can recognize contain a maximum
of 512 bytes.
❒ The number of available characters used as options is limited, depending on
operating systems.
The configuration of the print option varies, depending on printing commands.
• rsh
% rsh host_name print option1=value1,… < file_name
• rcp
% rcp file_name host_name:option1=value1,…
• ftp
ftp> put file_name option1=value1,…
Host_name is the printer host name. File_name is the file name you want to print.
The device option is specified in the form of “option=value”. For details about
types of device options and values, see the following explanations.
For example, the following settings are for printing with rsh, rcp, and ftp : switch
to PCL, feed paper from paper feed tray 1, set the printing amount to 3 sets, and
print with the resolution set to 600 dpi (host_name :nphost, file_name :file1).
• rsh
% rsh nphost print filetype=pcl,tray=tray1,copies=3,res-
olution=600 < file1
• rcp
% rcp file1 nphost:filetype=pcl,tray=tray1,copies=3,res-
olution=600
• ftp
ftp> put file1 filetype=pcl,tray=tray1,copies=3,resolu-
tion=600
20
Note
❒ Multiple options must be separated by commas (,). Do not use spaces.
❒ When the printing file contains the PCL, PJL commands control of the option,
the command takes priority.
❒ Enter the option using the lp or lpr command, when the shell script is imple-
1
mented. The option settings made here are configured as default. You must
create another printer if you want to change printer option settings. For de-
tails about changing the configured option, see p.10 “Deleting the printer”.
❒ When printing with the lp command, use ( _ ) instead of ( = ) and ( ; ) instead
of ( , ) for operating systems that cannot use ( = ) and ( , ) such as Solaris 2.5 or
later.
Using the cd command with ftp

For printing with ftp, if the option is specified using the cd command, it becomes
available whenever the put or mput command is used.
ftp> cd option
Note
❒ The pwd command shows the current option settings.
ftp> pwd
List of the device options
Device option Value Function summary.

filetype pcl Specifies the printer language
for printing.
filter text Specifies the text printing.
tray tray1~tray4, bypass, all. Specifies the input tray.
paper a3~a6, ledger, letter, halfletter, Specifies the paper size.
legal, executive, fgl, foolscap,
folio, com10, C5, C6, dl, mon-
arch, k8, k16, custom
papertype plain, recycled, special, thick, Specifies the paper type.
transparency, color, letter-
head, preprinted, pre-
punched, labels, bond,
cardstock, plainorrecycled,
auto
outbin upper, inner Specifies the output tray.
copies Number of copies (1–9999) Specifies the number of cop-
ies.
qty Number of collated sets (1–999) Specifies the number to col-
late.
21
UNIX Configuration
Device option Value Function summary.

duplex on, off Specifies whether duplex
printing is on or off.
binding longedge, shortedge, left, Specifies the binding direction
1 right, top for duplex printing.
orientation portrait, landscape Specifies the feed direction of
the paper.
resolution value of resolution (300, 600) Specifies the resolution for
printing.
symbol set desktop, iso4, iso6, iso11, Specify the set of print charac-
iso15, iso17, iso21, iso60, ters.
iso69, isol1, isol2, isol5, legal,
math8, mspubl, pc8, pc850,
pc852, pc8dn, pc8tk, pifont,
psmath, pstext, roman8, vn-
intl, vnmath, vnus, win30,
winl1, winl2, winl5
Printer Language
Select a printer language to print.
filetype=printer language
fil=printer language
Printer language Value
PCL pcl
The following sample shows how to print with PCL (host name: nphost, file
name: file1):
• rsh
% rsh nphost print filetype=pcl < file1
• rcp
% rcp file1 nphost:filetype=pcl
• ftp
ftp> put file1 filetype=pcl
22
Text Printing
Set this function when printing text files directly.
filter=text
1
The following sample shows how to print text files directly.
• rsh
% rsh nphost print filter=text < file1
• rcp
% rcp file1 nphost:filter=text
• ftp
ftp> put file1 filter=text
Input Tray
Select a default input tray.
Important
❒ Only installed input trays are available.
tray=value of input tray
Input tray Value
Tray 1 tray1
Tray 2 tray2
Tray 3 tray3
Tray 4 tray4
Bypass tray bypass
Auto Tray Select all
The following sample shows how to print from tray 2 (host name: nphost, file
name: file1):
• rsh
% rsh nphost print tray=tray2 < file1
• rcp
% rcp file1 nphost:tray=tray2
• ftp
ftp> put file1 tray=tray2
23
UNIX Configuration
Paper Size
Select the paper size.
1 Important
❒ Only the loaded paper sizes are available.
paper=value of paper size
Paper size Value
A3 a3
A4 a4
A5 a5
11 × 17 ledger
81/2 × 11 letter
51/2 × 81/2 halfletter
81/2 × 14 legal
71/4 × 101/2 executive
8 × 13 fgl
81/2 × 13 foolscap
81/4 × 13 folio
4 1/8" × 9 1/2" com10
6.38" × 9.02" C5
4.49" × 6.38" C6
4.33" × 8.66" dl
3 7/8" × 7 1/2" monarch
10 1/2" × 15.35" k8
7.68" × 10 1/2" k16
Custom size custom
The following sample shows how to print using A4 size paper (host name:
nphost, file name: file1):
• rsh
% rsh nphost print paper=a4 < file1
• rcp
% rcp file1 nphost:paper=a4
• ftp
ftp> put file1 paper=a4
24
Paper Type
Select the paper type.
Important 1
❒ Only the loaded paper types are available.
mediatype=value of paper type
Paper type Value
Plain paper/recycled paper plainorrecycled
Plain paper plain
Preprinted paper preprinted
Prepunched paper prepunched
Letterhead letterhead
Recycled paper recycled
Color paper color
usercolor1
usercolor2
Special paper special
Thick paper thick
OHP transparency transparency
Labels labels
Bond paper bond
Cardstock cardstock
Auto Paper Select auto
The following sample shows how to print using recycled paper (host name:
nphost, file name: file1):
• rsh
% rsh nphost print mediatype=recycled < file1
• rcp
% rcp file1 nphost:mediatype=recycled
• ftp
% ftp> put file1 mediatype=recycled
25
UNIX Configuration
Output Tray
Select the output tray.
1 outbin=value of output tray

Important
❒ Only installed output trays are available.
Value
upper, inner
Reference
For details about available output tray, see the manual that comes with this
machine.
The following sample shows how to print to the standard tray (standard tray:
upper, host name: nphost, file name: file1):
• rsh
% rsh nphost print outbin=upper < file1
• rcp
% rcp file1 nphost:outbin=upper
• ftp
ftp> put file1 outbin=upper
Copies
Specify the number of copies.
copies=number of copies (1 to 9999)
Important
❒ Do not specify “copies” and “qty *1 ” commands at the same time.
*1 “qty” specifies the number of collated sets.
The following sample shows how to print 10 copies (host name: nphost, file
name: file1):
• rsh
% rsh nphost print copies=10 < file1
• rcp
% rcp file1 nphost:copies=10
• ftp
ftp> put file1 copies=10
26
Duplex Printing
This option enables duplex printing.
Important 1
❒ The duplex unit is required.
duplex=value of duplex printing
Duplex printing Value
enable on
disable off
The following sample shows how to set duplex printing (host name: nphost, file
name: file1):
• rsh
% rsh nphost print duplex=on,binding=longedge < file1
• rcp
% rcp file1 nphost:duplex=on,binding=longedge
• ftp
ftp> put file1 duplex=on,binding=longedge
Note
❒ Before selecting duplex, the binding option must be set to on.
❒ Data and paper volume affect the completion of the print job.
Reference
For details about available paper size for duplex printing, see the manual that
comes with this machine.
Binding
Select the binding direction for duplex printing.
Important
❒ The duplex unit is required.
binding=value of binding
Binding direction Value
Longedge longedge
Shortedge shortedge
Left left
Right right
Top top
27
UNIX Configuration
The following sample shows how to set duplex printing and long-edge binding
(host name: nphost, file name: file1):
• rsh
% rsh nphost print duplex=on,binding=longedge < file1
1 • rcp
% rcp file1 nphost:duplex=on,binding=longedge
• ftp
ftp> put file1 duplex=on,binding=longedge
Note
❒ Before selecting the binding option, the duplex option must be set to on.
❒ Data and paper volume affect completion of the print job.
Orientation
Select the paper feed orientation.
Important
❒ This function is only for PCL.
orientation=feed direction (portrait or landscape)
Orientation value
Portrait portrait
Landscape landscape
The following sample shows how to print the paper vertically using the orienta-
tion function (host name : nphost, file name : file1):
• rsh
% rsh nphost print orientation=portrait < file1
• rcp
% rcp file1 nphost:orientation=portrait
• ftp
ftp> put file1 orientation=portrait
28
Resolution
Select the printing resolution.
resolution=value of resolution
1
Resolution Value
600 dpi 600
300 dpi 300
The following sample shows how to print with 600 dpi and better quality. (host
name: nphost, file name: file1):
• rsh
% rsh nphost print resolution=600 < file1
• rcp
% rcp file1 nphost:resolution=600
• ftp
ftp> put file1 resolution=600
Symbol Set
Select the set of print characters for the chosen font.
Important
❒ This function is only for PCL.
symset=value of font
Font Value
Desktop desktop
ISO 4 iso4
ISO 6 iso6
ISO 11 iso11
ISO 15 iso15
ISO 17 iso17
ISO 21 iso21
ISO 60 iso60
ISO 69 iso69
ISO L1 isol1
ISO L2 isol2
ISO L5 isol5
Legal legal
Math-8 math8
29
UNIX Configuration
Font Value
MS Publ mspubl
PC-8 pc8
1 PC-850 pc850
PC-852 pc852
PC-8 D/N pc8dn
PC8-TK pc8tk
Pifont pifont
PS Math psmath
PS Text pstext
Roman-8 roman8
VN Intl vnintl
VN Math vnmath
VN US vnus
Win 3.0 win30
Win L1 winl1
Win L2 winl2
Win L5 winl5
The following sample shows how to print the ISO 4 character set (host name :
nphost, file name : file1):
• rsh
% rsh nphost print symset=iso4 < file1
• rcp
% rcp file1 nphost:symset=iso4
• ftp
ftp> put file1 symset=iso4
30
INDEX
B O
Binding Orientation
Option, 27 Option, 28
BSD UNIX workstation Output Tray
Deleting the printer, 10 Option, 26
Printer Status, 18
Printing Method, 15 P
C Paper Size
Option, 24
configuration Paper Type
UNIX, 5 Option, 25
Copies Printer Language
Option, 26 Option, 22
Printer Status, 18
D ftp, 18
rsh, 18
Deleting the printer, 10 Printing Method, 15
Device Option, 20 Printing with rsh, rcp, ftp, 16
Duplex Printing
Option, 27 R
F rcp
Printing, 16
ftp Resolution
Printing, 17 Option, 29
rsh
H Printing, 16
How to Read This Manual, 3
HP-UX S
Deleting the printer, 10 Solaris
Printer Status, 18 Deleting the printer, 10
Printing Method, 15 Printer Status, 18
Printing Method, 15
I Symbol Set
Input Tray Option, 29
Option, 23 System V UNIX
Installation Shell Script, 6, 8, 10 Printer Status, 18
IP Address, 7
T
L Text Printing
Linux Option, 23
Deleting the printer, 10
Printer Status, 18
U
Printing Method, 15 UNIX, 5
lp
Printing, 15
lpr
Printing, 15
31
32 EN USA GB GB AE AE B843
Copyright © 2006
UNIX Supplement
EN USA
GB GB
AE AE

Operation Manuals 2 MP161

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

You might also like

Operation Manuals 2 MP161

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Operation Manuals 2 MP161

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Operating Instructions

❖ About This Machine

❖ General Settings Guide

4. Changing/Confirming Communication Information

❖ WHEN PROGRAMMING EMERGENCY NUMBERS AND/OR MAKING TEST CALLS

❖ Note to users in the United States of America

❖ Note to users in Canada

❖ Remarque concernant les utilisateurs au Canada

IMPORTANTES MESURES DE SÉCURITÉ

Indicates important safety notes.

Indicates important safety notes.

Indicates supplementary explanations of the machine's functions, and instruc-

Name of Major Item

Names of Major Functions

1. Selection keys 2. {Escape} key

1. Machine status and message 4. Switches the destination between

This section explains basic transmission operations such as specifying a trans-

Selecting Type of Transmission

❖ When sending over a fax line

❖ When sending to an e-mail address

❖ When sending by IP-Fax

When using a SIP server, press [ ] to display in the destination dis-

A Make sure that Memory Trans. indicator lights.

Normally Memory Transmission mode is selected.

B Place the original.

E When sending the same original to several destinations (broadcasting),

F Specify the next destination.

G Press the {Start} key.

Sending multiple originals using the exposure glass (Memory Transmission)

1 A Make sure that Memory Trans. indicator lights.

D Make the scan settings you require.

G Repeat steps D to F for all originals.

Parallel Memory Transmission

If memory runs out while storing an original

ECM (Error Correction Mode)

A Make sure that Memory Trans. indicator is not lit.

B Place the original.

E Press the {Start} key.

Sending multiple originals using the exposure glass (Immediate Transmission)

A Make sure that Memory Trans. indicator is not lit. 1

D Make the scan settings you require.

G Repeat steps D to F for all originals.

❖ Gatekeeper (VoIP gatekeeper)

❖ Gateway (VoIP gateway)

Notes on Using IP-Fax

Functions Not Available for IP-Fax Transmission

Internet Fax Functions

Notes on Using Internet Fax

Functions Not Available for E-mail Transmission

Functions Not Available for E-mail Reception

❖ When Stamp Sender Name is set to on:

❖ When Stamp Sender Name is set to off:

T.37 Full Mode

❖ Returning a Return Receipt

❖ Registering the Received Reception Confirmation Contents

❖ Requesting a Reception Notice

❖ How to place A5 and 51/2"×81/2" size originals

Acceptable Original Sizes

Paper Size and Scanned Area